INVERTER

INVERTER
FR-E800

FR-E800
Instruction Manual (Communication)
Compact, high functionality inverters

Instruction Manual (Communication)

FR-E800 Instruction
Model
Manual (Communication)

Model code 1A2-P93

HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN

IB(NA)-0600871ENG-M(2307)MEE Printed in Japan Specifications subject to change without notice.

M
Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

1.1 Product checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

1.2 Related manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Chapter 2 Ethernet Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

CONTENTS
2.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

2.2 Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

2.2.1 System configuration example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

2.2.2 Network configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.2.3 Network components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

2.3 Ethernet cable connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

2.3.1 Wiring method (Ethernet model / safety communication model). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

2.3.2 Wiring method (IP67 model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.3.3 Wiring precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

2.4 Initial setting for Ethernet communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

2.5 CC-Link IE TSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

2.5.1 Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.5.2 CC-Link IE TSN configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.5.3 Initial setting for CC-Link IE TSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.5.4 Parameters related to CC-Link IE TSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

2.6.1 Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
2.6.2 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
2.6.3 Initial setting for CC-Link IE Field Network Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2.6.4 Parameters related to CC-Link IE Field Network Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2.6.5 Group number setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

2.7 MODBUS/TCP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

2.7.1 Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
2.7.2 Initial setting for MODBUS/TCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
2.7.3 Parameters related to MODBUS/TCP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

2.8 BACnet/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

2.8.1 Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

2.8.2 Initial setting for BACnet/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
2.8.3 Parameters related to BACnet/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

2.9 MELSOFT / FA product connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

2.9.1 Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

2.9.2 Initial setting for MELSOFT / FA product connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
2.9.3 Parameters related to MELSOFT / FA product connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

2.10 SLMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

2.10.1 Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

1
 2.10.2 Initial setting for SLMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
2.10.3 Parameters related to SLMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

2.11 EtherNet/IP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

2.11.1 Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

2.11.2 EtherNet/IP configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
2.11.3 Initial setting for EtherNet/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
2.11.4 Parameters related to EtherNet/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
2.11.5 Object map definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
2.11.6 Object map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

2.12 PROFINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

2.12.1 Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

2.12.2 PROFINET configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
2.12.3 Initial setting for PROFINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
2.12.4 Parameters related to PROFINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
2.12.5 Data Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

2.13 EtherCAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

2.13.1 Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

2.13.2 Parameters related to EtherCAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
2.13.3 EtherCAT state machine (ESM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
2.13.4 PDO (Process Data Object) communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
2.13.5 CoE object dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
2.13.6 Operation when a communication error occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
2.13.7 Programming example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

2.14 Backup/restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

2.14.1 Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

2.14.2 Initial setting for the backup/restore function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

2.15 Inverter-to-inverter link function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

2.16 Ethernet communication parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Chapter 3 RS-485 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

3.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

3.2 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

3.2.1 Wiring procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

3.2.2 Connected device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

3.3 Wiring of PU connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

3.4 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

3.5 MODBUS RTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

3.6 BACnet MS/TP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

2
Chapter 4 Other Communication Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

4.1 USB device communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

4.2 Automatic connection with GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Chapter 5 Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

CONTENTS
Chapter 6 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

6.1 How to check specification changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

6.1.1 Details of specification changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

3
4
 CHAPTER 1
CHAPTER 1 Introduction

1.1 Product checking ......................................................................................................................................................8

1.2 Related manuals.....................................................................................................................................................10

5
 1 Introduction
The contents described in this chapter must be read before using this product.
Always read the instructions before use.

 Abbreviations
Item Description
Operation panel, parameter unit (FR-PU07), LCD operation panel (FR-LU08), and enclosure surface
PU
operation panel (FR-PA07)
Parameter unit (FR-PU07), LCD operation panel (FR-LU08), and enclosure surface operation panel
Parameter unit
(FR-PA07)
Inverter Mitsubishi Electric inverter FR-E800 series
E800 Standard model (RS-485 + SIL2/PLd functional safety)
E800-E Ethernet model (Ethernet + SIL2/PLd functional safety)
E800-SCE Safety communication model (Ethernet + SIL3/PLe functional safety)
E806 IP67 model (Ethernet + SIL3/PLe functional safety + IP67)
FM type inverter Standard model with terminal FM (pulse output)
AM type inverter Standard model with terminal AM (voltage output)
Vector control compatible option FR-A8AP E kit
Pr. Parameter number (Number assigned to function)
PU operation Operation using the PU (operation panel / parameter unit)
External operation Operation using the control circuit signals
Combined operation Combined operation using the PU (operation panel / parameter unit) and External operation
Mitsubishi Electric standard
SF-JR
efficiency motor
Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque
SF-HRCA
motor
Mitsubishi Electric high-
SF-PR
performance energy-saving motor
Mitsubishi Electric high-
performance energy-saving motor SF-PR-SC
with encoder
Mitsubishi Electric Vector control
SF-V5RU
dedicated motor
Mitsubishi Electric geared motor GM-[]
Mitsubishi Electric inverter-driven
geared motor for encoder feedback GM-DZ, GM-DP
control
Mitsubishi Electric PM motor MM-GKR, EM-A

 Digital characters and their corresponding printed equivalents

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C

D E F G H I J K L M N O P

Q R S T U V W X Y Z - _

 Trademarks
• MODBUS is a registered trademark of SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC USA, INC.
• BACnet is a registered trademark of the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE).
• DeviceNet and EtherNet/IP are registered trademarks of ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, INC).
• PROFIBUS and PROFINET are either trademarks or registered trademarks of PROFIBUS & PROFINET International.
• CC-Link IE TSN and CC-Link IE Field Network Basic are registered trademarks of CC-Link Partner Association.

6 1. Introduction
 • EtherCAT® is registered trademark and patented technology, licensed by Beckhoff Automation GmbH, Germany.
• Other company and product names herein are the trademarks and registered trademarks of their respective owners.
1
 Notes on descriptions in this Instruction Manual
• Connection diagrams in this Instruction Manual appear with the control logic of the input terminals as sink logic, unless
otherwise specified. (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Connection) for the switching of the control logic of the 2
inverter.)

3
 Precautions
• Some of the communication protocols and the plug-in options cannot be used together as shown in the following table. For 4
the application and protocol settings, refer to page 226.

PROFIBUS-DP (when the FR-A8NP E kit is installed)

5

DeviceNet (when the FR-A8ND E kit is installed)

CC-Link (when the FR-A8NC E kit is installed)
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic

6
CC-Link IE TSN

EtherNet/IP

PROFINET
BACnet/IP

EtherCAT 7

9
CC-Link IE TSN — × × × × ×
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic × — × ×
BACnet/IP — × × 10
EtherNet/IP × — × ×
PROFINET × × × — ×
EtherCAT × × × × × — × × ×
CC-Link (when the FR-A8NC E kit is installed) × × × — × ×
PROFIBUS-DP (when the FR-A8NP E kit is
× × — ×
installed)
DeviceNet (when the FR-A8ND E kit is installed) × × × —

NOTE
• FR Configurator2 can be used for any communication protocol or plug-in option.

1. Introduction
7
 1.1 Product checking

 Inverter model

FR-E8 2 0 - 0008 E PA
A B C D E F G H

Rating plate
Inverter model MODEL :FR-E820-0008EPA
Input rating INPUT :XXXXX

Output rating OUTPUT:XXXXX

SERIAL SERIAL:XXXXXXXXXXX

Country of origin MADE IN XXXXX

• A: The voltage class is shown.

Symbol Voltage class
1 100 V class
2 200 V class
4 400 V class
6 575 V class

• B: The protective structure is shown.

Symbol Protective structure
0 Open type (IP20)
6 Enclosed type (IP66/IP67, UL Type 4X, indoor use only)

• C: The number of phases of the power source is shown.

Symbol Description
None Three-phase input
S Single-phase input
W Single-phase input (double voltage output)

• D: The applicable motor capacity or the inverter rated current is shown.

Symbol Description
0.1K to 22K Applicable motor capacity (ND) (kW)
0008 to 0900 Inverter rated current (ND) (A)

• E: The communication type and the functional safety specification are shown.
Symbol Communication / functional safety
None RS-485 + SIL2/PLd
E Ethernet + SIL2/PLd
SCE Ethernet + SIL3/PLe

8 1. Introduction
1.1 Product checking
 • F: The output specification for monitoring and the rated frequency are shown for the standard model, and the
communication protocol group is shown for the Ethernet model, safety communication model, and IP67 model. The control
logic is fixed to the source logic for the safety communication model and IP67 model.
1
Control logic
Rated frequency
Symbol Monitoring/protocol specification
(initial setting)
Input signal
(initial status)
Safety stop
signal
2
-1 Pulse (terminal FM) 60 Hz Sink logic
-4 Voltage (terminal AM) 50 Hz Source logic
-5 Voltage (terminal AM) 60 Hz Sink logic 3
Protocol group A (CC-Link IE TSN, CC-Link IE Field Network Basic,
PA 60 Hz Sink logic Source logic
MODBUS/TCP, Ethernet/IP, and BACnet/IP)
(fixed)
Protocol group B (CC-Link IE TSN, CC-Link IE Field Network Basic, Sink logic / source
PB
MODBUS/TCP, and PROFINET)
50 Hz
logic*1 4
Sink logic / source
PC*2 Protocol group C (EtherCAT) 50 Hz
logic*1

*1 The initial status of the control logic differs depending on the inverter model. 5
Sink logic for the models indicated with the applicable motor capacity (kW)
Source logic for the models indicated with the rated current (A)
*2 Available for the Ethernet model only.
6
• G: Availability of circuit board coating / plated conductors / power ON/OFF switch is shown.
Symbol Circuit board coating*1 Plated conductor Power ON/OFF switch
None Without coating Without plated conductors Without switch 7
-60 With coating Without plated conductors Without switch
-06*2 With coating With plated conductors Without switch

-S6 *3 With coating Without plated conductors With switch 8

*1 Conforming to IEC 60721-3-3:1994 3C2
*2 Applicable for the FR-E820-0470(11K) or higher, and the FR-E840-0380(18.5K) or higher.
*3 IP67 model only. 9
• H: Availability of an EMC filter is shown.
Symbol EMC filter 10
None Without filter
C2*1 With filter (Class C2)

*1 IP67 model only.

NOTE
• In this Instruction Manual, the inverter model name consists of the applicable motor capacity and the rated current.
(Example) FR-E820-0008(0.1K)

 How to read the SERIAL number

The SERIAL consists of two symbols, three characters indicating the production
Rating plate example
year and month, and six characters indicating the control number.
Symbol Year Month Control number The last two digits of the production year are indicated as the Year, and the Month
SERIAL is indicated by 1 to 9, X (October), Y (November), or Z (December).

1. Introduction
1.1 Product checking
9
 1.2 Related manuals
When using this inverter for the first time, prepare the following manuals as required and use the inverter safely. The latest
version of e-Manual Viewer and the latest PDF manuals can be downloaded from the Mitsubishi Electric FA Global Website.
https://www.mitsubishielectric.com/app/fa/download/search.do?kisyu=/inv&mode=manual

• e-Manual refers to the Mitsubishi FA electronic book manuals that can be browsed using a dedicated tool.
• e-Manual has the following features:
Required information can be cross-searched in multiple manuals.
Pages that users often browse can be bookmarked.

Manuals related to the FR-E800 inverter are shown in the following table.

Inverter Safety Guideline

FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Connection) Manuals describing installation, wiring, specifications, outline
FR-E860 Instruction Manual (Connection) dimensions, standards, and how to connect options.

FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function) Manual describing details of the functions.

FR-E800 Instruction Manual

Manual describing details of the communications.
(Communication)

Manual describing how to identify causes of faults and

FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Maintenance)
warnings.

FR-E800(-E) Instruction Manual Manual describing the functional safety.

(Functional Safety)

FR-E800-SCE Instruction Manual Manual describing details of the safety communication

(Functional Safety) parameters.

Manual describing details of the software used to set inverter

FR Configurator2 Instruction Manual
parameters using a personal computer.

Manual describing details of the PLC function.

PLC Function Programming Manual

Name Manual number

FR-E800 Inverter Safety Guideline IB-0600857ENG
FR-E860 Inverter Safety Guideline IB-0600862ENG
FR-E800-E Inverter Safety Guideline IB-0600860ENG
FR-E860-E Inverter Safety Guideline IB-0600863ENG
FR-E800-SCE Inverter Safety Guideline IB-0600921ENG
FR-E860-SCE Inverter Safety Guideline IB-0600924ENG
FR-E806-SCE Inverter Safety Guideline IB-0600984ENG
FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Connection) IB-0600865ENG
FR-E860 Instruction Manual (Connection) IB-0600906ENG
FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function) IB-0600868ENG
FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Maintenance) IB-0600874ENG
FR-E800(-E) Instruction Manual (Functional Safety) BCN-A23488-000(E)
FR-E800-SCE Instruction Manual (Functional safety) BCN-A23488-004(E)
FR Configurator2 Instruction Manual IB-0600516ENG
PLC Function Programming Manual IB-0600492ENG

10 1. Introduction
1.2 Related manuals
 CHAPTER 2
CHAPTER 2 Ethernet Communication

2.1 Outline ....................................................................................................................................................................12

2.2 Wiring......................................................................................................................................................................13
2.3 Ethernet cable connection ......................................................................................................................................15
2.4 Initial setting for Ethernet communication...............................................................................................................18
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN ......................................................................................................................................................19
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic..............................................................................................................................59
2.7 MODBUS/TCP........................................................................................................................................................88
2.8 BACnet/IP .............................................................................................................................................................107
2.9 MELSOFT / FA product connection......................................................................................................................123
2.10 SLMP ....................................................................................................................................................................126
2.11 EtherNet/IP ...........................................................................................................................................................143
2.12 PROFINET............................................................................................................................................................171
2.13 EtherCAT ..............................................................................................................................................................196
2.14 Backup/restore......................................................................................................................................................220
2.15 Inverter-to-inverter link function ............................................................................................................................222
2.16 Ethernet communication parameters....................................................................................................................225

11
 2 Ethernet Communication

2.1 Outline
Ethernet communication is available for the Ethernet model, the safety communication model, and the IP67 model.

 Precautions for communication

• To maintain the security (confidentiality, integrity, and availability) of the inverter and the system against unauthorized
access, DoS*1 attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks from external devices via network, take appropriate
measures such as firewalls, virtual private networks (VPNs), and antivirus solutions. We shall have no responsibility or
liability for any problems involving inverter trouble and system trouble by DoS attacks, unauthorized access, computer
viruses, and other cyberattacks.
• Depending on the network environment, the inverter may not operate as intended due to delays or disconnection in
communication. Carefully consider what type of environment the inverter will be used in and any safety issues related to
its use.
*1 DoS: A denial-of-service (DoS) attack disrupts services by overloading systems or exploiting vulnerabilities, resulting in a denial-of-service (DoS)
state.

 Ethernet communication specifications

The communication specification varies depending on the specification of the master or the communication protocol.
Item Description
Category 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
Data transmission speed 100 Mbps (100BASE-TX) / 10 Mbps (10BASE-T)
Transmission method Baseband
Maximum segment length 100 m between the hub and the inverter
Number of cascade connection stages Up to 2 (100BASE-TX) / up to 4 (10BASE-T)
Topology Line, star, ring, or a combination of line and star*1
Interface RJ-45*2
Number of interfaces available 2
IP version IPv4

*1 Ring topology is available only for EtherCAT communication.

*2 Available only for the Ethernet model and the safety communication model. For connectors available for the IP67 model, refer to the Instruction
Manual (Connection).

 Operation status LEDs

LED name Description LED status Remarks
OFF Duplicate IP address not detected
NS Communication status
Red Duplicate IP address detected
OFF Power-OFF / during inverter reset
MS Inverter status Green Operating properly
Red Fault detected
OFF Power-OFF/link-down
Connector for communication
LINK1 Blinking green Link-up (Data reception in progress)
(PORT1) status
Solid green Link-up
OFF Power-OFF/link-down
Connector for communication
LINK2 Blinking green Link-up (Data reception in progress)
(PORT2) status
Solid green Link-up
Power-OFF / inverter identification disabled /
OFF
SLMP command request message inverter identification paused
NET
reception status Blinking green Inverter identification in progress*1
Solid green Network operation mode

*1 While "1 (initial value)" is set in Pr.1399 Inverter identification enable/disable selection, this LED blinks when the MAC/IP address of the
inverter match to the MAC/IP address specified by using engineering software such as FR Configurator2.

12 2. Ethernet Communication
2.1 Outline
2.2 Wiring 1

2.2.1 System configuration example 2

1. Select the connection method. (Refer to page 13.)

2. Prepare the equipment required for wiring. (Refer to page 13.)

3
3. Turn OFF the power of the programmable controller and the inverter.

4. Connect the programmable controller (master) and the inverters with Ethernet cables. (Refer to page 15.) 4
Programmable
controller (master) Inverter Inverter 5

Ethernet cable
Power
supply
M Power
supply
M
7

2.2.2 Network configuration

8
 Network topology
The network can be wired into star topology, line topology, and ring topology. A network can consist of a combination of star
and line topologies. 9
Item Description
Units are configured into a star using a switching hub and Ethernet cables. Except for the master, units can be easily
Star topology*1 added in a star topology. Furthermore, data link continues among normally-operating stations in a star topology. 10
Line topology Units are configured into a line using Ethernet cables. A switching hub is not required.
Ring topology*2 Units are configured into a ring using Ethernet cables. Data link continues with the stations that are operating normally.
*1 A general-purpose switching hub cannot be used for EtherCAT communication. Use an EtherCAT branch slave.
*2 Ring topology is available only for EtherCAT communication. Use an EtherCAT branch slave.

 Station number and connection position

Units can be connected in any order regardless of the station number.

 Replacing CC-Link IE TSN devices

For star topology, units (except for the master) can be replaced without powering off the whole system.

NOTE
• Refer to the Master Module User's Manual for detailed network configurations.

2.2.3 Network components

 Connection cable
Use Ethernet cables compliant with the following standards.
Ethernet cable Connector Type
The following conditioning cables:
Category 5 or higher straight cable (double
RJ-45 connector • IEEE 802.3 (100BASE-TX)
shielded / STP)
• ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B (Category 5)

2. Ethernet Communication
2.2 Wiring
13
 • Recommended products (as of October 2020)
Model Manufacturer
SC-E5EW series*1 Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.

*1 SC-E5EW cable is for in-enclosure use and indoor use for fixed parts, SC-E5EW-MV cable for indoor use for moving parts, and SC-E5EW-L cable
for outdoor use.

NOTE
• Depending on the cable connector shape, the cable may not be connected to the inverter.
• For connection cables used for wiring of the IP67 model, refer to the Instruction Manual (Connection).

 Hubs
Use hubs that meet the following conditions. Operation is not guaranteed if the hubs do not meet these conditions.
• Compliance with the IEEE 802.3 (100BASE-TX)
• Support of the auto MDI/MDI-X function
• Support of the auto-negotiation function
• Switching hub (layer 2 switch)*1
*1 A repeater hub is not available.

NOTE
• A general-purpose switching hub cannot be used for EtherCAT communication. For star or ring topology, use an EtherCAT
branch slave.

14 2. Ethernet Communication
2.2 Wiring
2.3 Ethernet cable connection 1

This section explains Ethernet cable connection and the relevant precautions. For the details of the network configuration and
the cables and hubs used for wiring, refer to page 13 onwards. 2

2.3.1 Wiring method (Ethernet model / safety 3

communication model)
4

 Installation 8
1. Turn OFF the power of the programmable controller and the inverter.

2. Remove the inverter front cover.

9
3. Check the orientation of the connectors. Insert the connector part of the Ethernet cable to the communication
connector until it clicks.

 Removal 10
1. Turn OFF the power of the programmable controller and the inverter.

2. Remove the inverter front cover.

3. Hold down the latch on the Ethernet cable connector, and pull out the cable while holding the latch.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.3 Ethernet cable connection
15
 NOTE
• For PROFINET communication, refer to page 171.
• For EtherCAT communication, refer to page 196.
• There is no need to distinguish between PORT1 and PORT2 on the inverter (except for PROFINET and EtherCAT).
• When only one connector is used in star topology, either PORT1 or PORT2 is applicable.
• When using two connectors for line topology, an Ethernet cable can be connected to the connectors in any combination. For
example, the cable can be connected across two of PORT1 or across PORT1 and PORT2.

Connection between Connection between

PORT1 and PORT1, PORT2 and PORT2 PORT1 and PORT2

Connector for Connector for Connector for Connector for Connector for Connector for Connector for Connector for
communication communication communication communication communication communication communication communication
(PORT1) (PORT2) (PORT1) (PORT2) (PORT1) (PORT2) (PORT1) (PORT2)

To the next To the next

connector for connector for
communication communication
(PORT2) (PORT2)

2.3.2 Wiring method (IP67 model)

EP1 EP2
Connector for Connector for
communication communication
(PORT1) (PORT2)

16 2. Ethernet Communication
2.3 Ethernet cable connection
 Installation
1
1. Turn OFF the power of the programmable controller and the inverter.

2. Remove the resin caps of the communication connectors.

3. Check the orientation of the connectors. Insert the connector part of the Ethernet cable to the communication
2
connector.

 Removal 3
1. Turn OFF the power of the programmable controller and the inverter.

2. Pull out the Ethernet cable. 4

3. Reinstall the resin caps of the communication connectors. (Tightening torque: 0.7 N·m)

NOTE
• For PROFINET communication, refer to page 171.
5
• There is no need to distinguish between PORT1 and PORT2 on the inverter (except for PROFINET).
• When only one connector is used in star topology, either PORT 1 or PORT 2 is applicable.
• When using two connectors for line topology, an Ethernet cable can be connected to the connectors in any combination. For 6
example, the cable can be connected across two of PORT1 or across PORT1 and PORT2.

7
2.3.3 Wiring precautions
This section explains Ethernet cable connection and the relevant precautions.

 Handling of the Ethernet cable 8

• Do not touch the conductors of the cable or the connector on the inverter. Keep the conductors free of dust or dirt. If oil
from your hand, dirt or dust is attached to the core, it can increase transmission loss, arising a problem in data link.
• Check the following:
9
Is any Ethernet cable disconnected?
Is any of the Ethernet cables shorted?
Are the connectors securely connected?
10
• Do not use Ethernet cables with broken latches. Doing so may cause the cable to unplug or malfunction.
• The maximum station-to-station distance is 100 m. However, the distance may be shorter depending on the operating
environment of the cable. For details of the cable, contact your cable manufacturer.

 Connecting and disconnecting of the Ethernet cable

Hold the connector part when connecting and disconnecting the Ethernet cable. Pulling a cable connected to the inverter may
damage the inverter or cable, or result in malfunction due to poor contact.

 Network configuration
Check the network configuration before wiring, and perform correct wiring. For example, using ring topology for inverters other
than the FR-E800-EPC may cause system failure.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.3 Ethernet cable connection
17
 2.4 Initial setting for Ethernet communication
Use the following parameters to perform required settings for Ethernet communication between the inverter and other devices.
To make communication between other devices and the inverter, perform the initial settings of the inverter parameters to match
the communication specifications of the devices. Data communication cannot be made if the initial settings are not made or if
there is any setting error.
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
1434
IP address 1 (Ethernet) 192
N600*1*2
1435
IP address 2 (Ethernet) 168
N601*1*2
0 to 255 Enter the IP address of the inverter to be connected to Ethernet.
1436
*1*2 IP address 3 (Ethernet) 50
N602
1437
IP address 4 (Ethernet) 1
N603*1*2
*1 The setting is applied after an inverter reset or next power-ON.
*2 The setting is not available for the FR-E800-EPC.

 IP address (Pr.1434 to Pr.1437)

Enter the IP address of the inverter to be connected to Ethernet in Pr.1434 to Pr.1437. (Enter the IP address assigned by the
network administrator.)
Set the value in the first octet in Pr.1434.
Set the value in the second octet in Pr.1435.
Set the value in the third octet in Pr.1436.
Set the value in the fourth octet in Pr.1437.

* * * . * * * . * * * . * * *

18 2. Ethernet Communication
2.4 Initial setting for Ethernet communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN 1

2.5.1 Outline 2

3
Data can be transmitted to IT systems while performing real-time cyclic communication control.
Some functions are not supported depending on the date of manufacture of the inverter. For details of specification changes,
refer to page 290.
4
 CC-Link IE TSN authentication classes
• Devices (nodes) and switches on the CC-Link IE TSN network are classified into different authentication classes according 5
to their functionality and performance. There are two authentication classes: A and B. For details of the authentication class
of each product, check the information on the web site of the CC-Link Partner Association, or refer to catalogs and manuals
of each product. Different functions and system configurations are available depending on the authentication class of the 6
devices to be used. For example, use authentication class B devices to construct a high-speed motion control system. For
details of system construction such as mixing devices of both class A and class B, check the manuals of the applicable
master device. 7
 Communication specifications
The communication specification varies depending on the specification of the master.
8
Item Description
Communication speed 100 Mbps (10 Mbps is not supported.)
A (Compatible with protocol versions 2.0*1 and 1.0)
Authentication class
9
Cycle time*2 5000 to 6400000 μs

Communication method Protocol version 2.0: Time-managed polling method*1

Protocol version 1.0: Time sharing method

Time synchronization
Protocol version 2.0: Unavailable 10
Protocol version 1.0: Available (conforming to IEEE 1588v2)
Maximum number of connected units 121 units (sum of master and remote stations)
Maximum number of branches No upper limit on the same Ethernet network
Ethernet cable (IEEE 802.3 100BASE-TX compliant cable and ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B (Category 5)
Connection cable
compliant shielded 4-pair branched cable)
Topology Line, star, or a combination of line and star
Node type Remote station
RX 32 bits
Maximum cyclic size (of RY 32 bits
one node) RWr 32 words
RWw 32 words
*1 Supported by the inverter whose firmware version is 9 or later.
*2 Consider the scaling factor in the multiple period setting to change the basic period setting on the engineering software (GX Works3).

NOTE
• To use the CC-Link IE TSN, do not install the FR-A8NC E kit to the inverter. (Installing the FR-A8NC E kit disables CC-Link
IE TSN.)

2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
19
  Operation status LEDs
LED name Description LED status Remarks
OFF Power-OFF
Blinking green Data transmission not performed
NS Communication status Solid green Data transmission in progress
Blinking red Communication interrupted
Solid red Duplicate IP address detected
OFF Power-OFF / during inverter reset
MS Inverter status Green Operating properly
Red Fault detected
OFF Power-OFF/link-down
LINK1 Connector for communication (PORT1) status Blinking green Link-up (Data reception in progress)
Solid green Link-up
OFF Power-OFF/link-down
LINK2 Connector for communication (PORT2) status Blinking green Link-up (Data reception in progress)
Solid green Link-up

 Combination with the master station

 When all remote stations are authentication class A products
Master station
Master station communication Network configuration
speed
• Line topology / star topology / combination of line topology and star
• MELSEC iQ-R series master/local module topology*1
RJ71GN11-T2, RJ71GN11-EIP 1 Gbps • Connection sequence: Master station → Remote station
• MELSEC iQ-F series master/local module (communication speed: 1 Gbps) → General-purpose switching
FX5-CCLGN-MS hub*2 → Remote station (communication speed: 100 Mbps)
• Master station that supports both 1 Gbps and 100 • Line topology / star topology / combination of line topology and star
Mbps communication speeds 100 Mbps topology
• Remote station (communication speed: 100 Mbps)
• Line topology / star topology / combination of line topology and star
topology*1
• MELSEC iQ-R series Motion module 1 Gbps • Connection sequence: Master station → Remote station
RD78G[]/GH[] (communication speed: 1 Gbps) → General-purpose switching
• MELSEC iQ-F series Motion module hub*2 → Remote station (communication speed: 100 Mbps)
FX5-[]SSC-G • Line topology / star topology / combination of line topology and star
100 Mbps topology
• Remote station (communication speed: 100 Mbps)

 When both authentication class B and class A products are used as remote stations
Master station
Master station communication Network configuration
speed
• Line topology / star topology / combination of line topology and star
topology*1
• MELSEC iQ-R series master/local module • Connection sequence: Master station → Remote station
1 Gbps
RJ71GN11-T2, RJ71GN11-EIP (authentication class B, communication speed: 1 Gbps) → General-
• MELSEC iQ-F series master/local module purpose switching hub*2 → Remote station (authentication class A,
FX5-CCLGN-MS communication speed: 100 Mbps)
• Master station that supports both 1 Gbps and 100 • Line topology / star topology / combination of line topology and star
Mbps communication speeds topology
100 Mbps
• Connection sequence: Master station → Remote station
(authentication class B) → Remote station (authentication class A)
• Line topology / star topology / combination of line topology and star
topology*1
• Connection sequence: Master station → Remote station
1 Gbps
• MELSEC iQ-R series Motion module (authentication class B, communication speed: 1 Gbps) → General-
RD78G[]/GH[] purpose switching hub*2 → Remote station (authentication class A,
• MELSEC iQ-F series Motion module communication speed: 100 Mbps)
FX5-[]SSC-G • Line topology / star topology / combination of line topology and star
topology
100 Mbps
• Connection sequence: Master station → Remote station
(authentication class B) → Remote station (authentication class A)

20 2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
*1 Line topology is available for the products whose communication speed settings are the same.
*2 Use the product that supports 1 Gbps / 100 Mbps.

NOTE
1
• When all remote stations are authentication class A products, up to 120 units can be connected.

3
RJ71GN11-T2 FR-E800 (authentication class A)
Communication speed 100 Mbps Communication speed 100 Mbps
120 units maximum
4
• When both authentication class B and class A products are used, the maximum number of connectable remote stations differs
depending on the protocol version. For calculation of the cyclic data size, refer to the Master Module User's Manual. Class A
units should be connected starting from the remotest class B unit. 5
Protocol version Maximum number of connected units
2.0 120 units (total of the authentication class A and class B products)

1.0
10 units when all authentication class A products are FR-E800 inverters (The total size of cyclic 6
data of all class A units must not exceed 2k bytes per port on the master station.)

RJ71GN11-T2
Communication
Remote I/O
(authentication
General-purpose
switching hub
FR-E800 (authentication class A)
Communication speed 100 Mbps
9
speed 1 Gbps class B)
Communication

10
speed 1 Gbps
• When the master station has more than one port, use separate ports for both authentication classes to enable connection of
up to 120 remote station units. For example, use port 1 for authentication class B products only, and port 2 for class A products
only.

Remote I/O Total number of

Port 1
(authentication remote stations:
class B) 120 units maximum
Communication
RJ71GN11-T2 Port 2 speed 1 Gbps
(firmware version
"12" or later)
Communication
speed 1 Gbps

General-purpose FR-E800 (authentication class A)

switching hub Communication speed 100 Mbps

2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
21
  Compatible firmware version of the master station
Compatible with protocol Compatible with protocol
Model
version 2.0 version 1.0
RJ71GN11-T2 15 or later 12 or later
RJ71GN11-EIP 01 or later
FX5-CCLGN-MS 1.010 or later 1.001 or later
RD78G[]/GH[] 20 or later
FX5-[]SSC-G 1.002 or later

 Compatible firmware version of the inverter

SERIAL Version Description
□□ 225 ○○○○○○ or later 9 or later Compatible with protocol version 2.0
Compatible with protocol version 1.0.
□□ 211 ○○○○○○ or later 3 or later Compatible with protocol version 2.0 by updating the firmware to version 9
or later.
Compatible with protocol version 1.0.
□□ 20Z ○○○○○○ or earlier —
Protocol version of the master station is automatically set or set to 1.0.

 Compatible version of the engineering software

Name Version Description
GX Works3 1.080J or later Compatible with protocol version 2.0

 Related manuals
For details of network configurations, refer to the Master Module User's Manual.
Name Manual number
MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN User's Manual (Startup) SH-082127ENG
MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN User's Manual (Application) SH-082129ENG
MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual (CC-Link IE TSN) SH-082215ENG
MELSEC iQ-R Motion Module User's Manual (Startup) IB-0300406ENG
MELSEC iQ-R Motion Module User's Manual (Application) IB-0300411ENG

2.5.2 CC-Link IE TSN configuration

 Procedure
The following shows the procedure to connect the inverter with a Mitsubishi Electric master device.

 Before communication
1. Connect each unit with an Ethernet cable. (Refer to page 15.)

2. Enter the IP address (Pr.1434 to Pr.1437). (Refer to page 18.)

3. Set "45238" (CC-Link IE TSN) in any of Pr.1427 to Pr.1430 Ethernet function selection 1 to 4. (Refer to page 28.)
In the initial status, Pr.1429 = "45238" (CC-Link IE TSN) and setting is not required.

4. Set the protocol version (Pr.1210). (Refer to page 28.)

5. Reset the inverter, or turn OFF and then ON the power.

 Registering a profile
1. Start the engineering software (GX Works3).

2. On the menu bar, select [Tool] > [Profile Management] > [Register...].

3. Select a CSP+ file to be registered on the "Register Profile" screen, and click the [Register] button.

NOTE
• A profile is a compressed file (such as *.zip, *.ipar, and *.cspp). Register a profile without decompressing the file.
• Profile registration is not required for the next time onwards.

22 2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
 Creating a project file
1. For information on creating and opening a project, go to [Help] > [GX Works3 Help]. 1
 Detecting an Inverter
Detection is not possible when the data link is not established with the master module. For details, refer to the Master Module
User's Manual. 2
1. In the "Navigation" window, select [Parameter] > [Module Information] then select the module name.

2. Select [Basic Settings] in the "Setting Item List" window.

7

10
3. In the "Setting Item" window, go to [Network Configuration Settings] then click next to the [Detailed Setting] field.

4. Click [Connected/Disconnected Module Detection] in the "CC-Link IE TSN configuration" window.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
23
 5. Read the cautions in the "Connected/Disconnected Module Detection" window and click [Execute].

6. The inverter model will appear on the screen when it is detected. (FR-E800-E inverters are displayed in the following
example.) Click [Close with Reflecting the Setting] to close the window.

 System setting window (communication speed setting of the master: 1 Gbps)

1. Select [Basic Settings] in the "Setting Item List" window.

2. In the "Setting Item" window, go to [Network Configuration Settings] then click next to the [Detailed Setting] field.

24 2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
 3. In the "CC-Link IE TSN Configuration" window, set "Low-Speed" for [Communication Period Setting].

2
4. Set "1000.00 μs" (initial value) for [Communication Period Interval Setting (Do not Set it in Units of 1us)].
• When RJ71GN11-T2 is the master
Set "20.00 μs" (initial value) for [System Reservation Time]. 3
Consider the scaling factor in [Multiple Period Setting] - [Low-Speed] to change the settings for [Basic Period Setting]. Refer to
the following examples.
[Communication Period Interval Setting] = "5000.00 μs" / "16 (initial value)" (minimum value) 4
[System Reservation Time] = "200.00 μs" / "16 (initial value)" (minimum value)

7
• When FX5-CCLGN-MS is the master
Set "500.00 μs" (initial value) for [Cyclic Transmission Time]. 8
Consider the scaling factor in [Multiple Period Setting] - [Low-Speed] to change the settings for [Basic Period Setting]. Refer to
the following examples.
[Communication Period Interval Setting] = "5000.00 μs" / "16 (fixed)" (minimum value) 9

10

5. Set "Mixture of Authentication Class B/A or Authentication Class A Only" for [Authentication Class Setting].

6. Select [Application Settings] in the "Setting Item List" window.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
25
 7. Set "1 Gbps" for [Communication Speed].

 System setting window (communication speed setting of the master: 100 Mbps)
1. Select [Basic Settings] in the "Setting Item List" window.

2. In the "Setting Item" window, go to [Network Configuration Settings] then click next to the [Detailed Setting] field.

3. In the "CC-Link IE TSN Configuration" window, set "Basic Period" for [Communication Period Setting]. When
[Multiple Period Setting] is used, set "Normal-Speed" or "Low-Speed".

4. Set "5000.00 μs" or larger value for [Communication Period Interval Setting (Do not Set it in Units of 1us)]. Set
"200.00 μs" for [System Reservation Time]. Set "1000.00 μs" for [Cyclic Transmission Time].
Consider the scaling factor in [Multiple Period Setting] - [Normal-Speed] or [Low-Speed] to change the settings for [Basic Period
Setting]. Refer to the following examples.
[Communication Period Interval Setting] = "5000.00 μs" / "16 (initial value for [Low-Speed])" (minimum value)
[System Reservation Time] = "200.00 μs" / "16 (initial value for [Low-Speed])" (minimum value)

5. Set "Mixture of Authentication Class B/A or Authentication Class A Only" for [Authentication Class Setting].

26 2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
 6. Select [Application Settings] in the "Setting Item List" window.

4
7. Set "100 Mbps" for [Communication Speed].

 Checking communication 6
The following table shows the status of the LEDs when communication is established between the programmable controller
and the inverter. Check the "CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Diagnostics" window to confirm that the communication is
established between them.
7
NS MS LINK1 LINK2
Solid green Solid green Blinking green*1

*1 The LED on either LINK1 or LINK2 will blink depending on the port (port 1 or 2) the Ethernet cable is connected to. 8
NOTE
• If the inverter cannot be detected, on the menu bar select [Diagnostics (D)] → [CC Link IE TSN / CC Link IE Field Diagnostics].
The "CC Link IE TSN / CC Link IE Field Diagnostics" window will be displayed. Broken or disconnected wires can be detected. 9
• The network configuration diagram is displayed in star topology even if the devices are connected in line topology.

10

XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
27
 2.5.3 Initial setting for CC-Link IE TSN
Use the following parameters to perform required settings for Ethernet communication between the inverter and other devices.
To make communication between other devices and the inverter, perform the initial settings of the inverter parameters to match
the communication specifications of the devices. Data communication cannot be made if the initial settings are not made or if
there is any setting error.
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
1210 CC-Link IE TSN protocol
0 0, 9999 Set the CC-Link IE TSN protocol version.
N120*1 version selection
1427 Ethernet function
5001
N630*1 selection 1
1428 502, 5000 to 5002, 5006
Ethernet function
*1 45237 to 5008, 5010 to 5013,
N631 selection 2
9999, 34962*3, 44818*2, Set the application, protocol, etc.
1429 Ethernet function
45238 45237, 45238, 47808*2,
N632*1 selection 3
61450
1430 Ethernet function
9999
N633*1 selection 4
*1 The setting is applied after an inverter reset or next power-ON.
*2 The setting is available for the FR-E800-(SC)EPA and FR-E806-SCEPA.
*3 The setting is available for the FR-E800-(SC)EPB and FR-E806-SCEPB.

 Ethernet function selection (Pr.1427 to Pr.1430)

To select CC-Link IE TSN for the application, set "45238" (CC-Link IE TSN) in any of Pr.1427 to Pr.1430 Ethernet function
selection 1 to 4. In the initial status, Pr.1429 = "45238" (CC-Link IE TSN) and setting is not required.

NOTE
• Change the setting if selected communication protocols cannot be used together. (Refer to page 7 and page 226.)

 CC-Link IE TSN protocol version selection (Pr.1210)

• Set the CC-Link IE TSN protocol version.
Pr.1210 setting Description
0 (initial value) Protocol version 2.0
9999 Protocol version 1.0

NOTE
• When the setting is changed after the communication is established, also reset the master station.
• When the protocol version 2.0 is used, the master station also must be compatible with the protocol version 2.0.

2.5.4 Parameters related to CC-Link IE TSN

The following parameters are used for CC-Link IE TSN communication. Set the parameters as required.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
541 Frequency command sign 0 Signed frequency command value
0
N100 selection 1 Unsigned frequency command value

544 0, 1, 12, 14, 18, 38,

Use this parameter to extend the function of the remote
CC-Link extended setting 0 100, 112, 114, 118,
N103*1 138
registers for the CC-Link IE TSN.

1426 Link speed and duplex mode Set the communication speed and the communication
0 0 to 4
N641*1 selection mode (full-duplex/half-duplex).

28 2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
 Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
1442
N660*1
IP filter address 1 (Ethernet) 0 1
1443
IP filter address 2 (Ethernet) 0
N661*1
1444
IP filter address 3 (Ethernet) 0
0 to 255
2
N662*1
1445 Set the range of connectable IP addresses for the
IP filter address 4 (Ethernet) 0 network devices. (When Pr.1442 to Pr.1445 = "0 (initial
N663*1
1446 IP filter address 2 range
value)", the function is invalid.) 3
9999
N664*1 specification (Ethernet)
1447 IP filter address 3 range
N665*1 specification (Ethernet)
9999 0 to 255, 9999
4
1448 IP filter address 4 range
9999
N666*1 specification (Ethernet)
5*2, 100*2, 12288 to
13787, 20488,
5
20489, 24672, Set the index number for inverter parameters, inverter
1320 to
User Defined Cyclic 24689, 24698, control parameters, and CiA402 drive profile. Functions
1329
Communication Input 1 to 10 9999 24703, 24705, can be assigned to remote registers RWwn+4 to
N810 to
Mapping 24707, 24708, RWwn+17 when Pr.544 = "38". 6
N819*1
24719, 24721,
24728 to 24730
9999 Function disabled
6*2, 101*2, 12288 to
7
13787, 16384 to
16483, 20488,

1330 to
20489, 20981 to
20990, 20992*3,
Set the index number for inverter parameters, monitor 8
User Defined Cyclic data, inverter control parameters, and CiA402 drive
1343 24639, 24643,
Communication Output 1 to 14 9999 profile. Functions can be assigned to remote registers
N850 to 24644, 24673 to
Mapping RWrn+4 to RWrn+1F when Pr.544 = "38".
N863*1 24676, 24692,
24695, 24820, 9
24826, 24828,
25858
9999 Function disabled
Pr.1389 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the index
10
User Defined Cyclic
0 to 2, 256 to 258, number is specified using Pr.1320
1389*1 Communication Input Sub 1 0
512 to 514 Pr.1389 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the index
and 2 Mapping
number is specified using Pr.1321
Pr.1390 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the index
User Defined Cyclic
0 to 2, 256 to 258, number is specified using Pr.1322
1390*1 Communication Input Sub 3 0
512 to 514 Pr.1390 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the index
and 4 Mapping
number is specified using Pr.1323
Pr.1391 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the index
User Defined Cyclic
0 to 2, 256 to 258, number is specified using Pr.1324
1391*1 Communication Input Sub 5 0
512 to 514 Pr.1391 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the index
and 6 Mapping
number is specified using Pr.1325
Pr.1392 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the index
User Defined Cyclic
0 to 2, 256 to 258, number is specified using Pr.1326
1392*1 Communication Input Sub 7 0
512 to 514 Pr.1392 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the index
and 8 Mapping
number is specified using Pr.1327
Pr.1393 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the index
User Defined Cyclic
0 to 2, 256 to 258, number is specified using Pr.1328
1393*1 Communication Input Sub 9 0
512 to 514 Pr.1393 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the index
and 10 Mapping
number is specified using Pr.1329
N830 to User Defined Cyclic
Subindices to which the index numbers are specified
*1 Communication Input Sub 1 to 0 0 to 2
N839 using Pr.1320 to Pr.1329
10 Mapping
Pr.1394 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the index
User Defined Cyclic
0 to 2, 256 to 258, number is specified using Pr.1330
1394*1 Communication Output Sub 1 0
512 to 514 Pr.1394 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the index
and 2 Mapping
number is specified using Pr.1331

2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
29
 Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
Pr.1395 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the index
User Defined Cyclic
0 to 2, 256 to 258, number is specified using Pr.1332
1395*1 Communication Output Sub 3 0
512 to 514 Pr.1395 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the index
and 4 Mapping
number is specified using Pr.1333
Pr.1396 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the index
User Defined Cyclic
*1 0 to 2, 256 to 258, number is specified using Pr.1334
1396 Communication Output Sub 5 0
512 to 514 Pr.1396 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the index
and 6 Mapping
number is specified using Pr.1335
Pr.1397 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the index
User Defined Cyclic
0 to 2, 256 to 258, number is specified using Pr.1336
1397*1 Communication Output Sub 7 0
512 to 514 Pr.1397 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the index
and 8 Mapping
number is specified using Pr.1337
Pr.1398 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the index
User Defined Cyclic
*1 0 to 2, 256 to 258, number is specified using Pr.1338
1398 Communication Output Sub 9 0
512 to 514 Pr.1398 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the index
and 10 Mapping
number is specified using Pr.1339
N870 to User Defined Cyclic
Subindices to which the index numbers are specified
Communication Output Sub 1 0 0 to 2
N879*1 to 10 Mapping
using Pr.1330 to Pr.1339

804 Torque command source In the torque control mode, the torque command source
0 0, 1, 3 to 6
D400 selection can be selected.
810 Torque limit input method
0 0 to 2 The torque limit input method can be selected.
H700 selection
*1 The setting is applied after an inverter reset or next power-ON.
*2 The setting is available for the FR-E800-(SC)EPB and FR-E806-SCEPB, but the function is disabled.
*3 Available for the Ethernet model only.

 Precautions for CC-Link IE TSN communication

• For CC-Link IE TSN, do not change initial values of Pr.1449 to Pr.1454 used to specify the Ethernet IP address range for
command source selection as the IP address is not used. Setting a value other than the initial value in any of the above
parameters may cause an Ethernet communication fault (E.EHR). If the fault occurs, reset the setting of the relevant
parameter to the initial value, or set "9999" in Pr.1432 Ethernet communication check time interval.

 CC-Link extended setting (Pr.544)

• Use this parameter to select the function of the remote registers for the CC-Link IE TSN.
Pr.544 setting Description
0 (initial value), 1, 12, 14, 18 Compatible with the octuple setting of CC-Link Ver.2
Compatible with the octuple setting of CC-Link Ver.2, user defined cyclic
38
communication data selected
100, 112, 114, 118 Compatible with the octuple setting of CC-Link Ver.2
Compatible with the octuple setting of CC-Link Ver.2, PLC function*1
138
user defined cyclic communication data selected

*1 Refer to the PLC Function Programming Manual.

 Frequency command with sign (Pr.541)

• The start command (forward/reverse rotation) can be inverted by adding a plus or minus sign to the value of the frequency
command sent through the CC-Link IE TSN.
• The Pr.541 Frequency command sign selection setting is applied to the frequency command from RWw1. (Refer to
page 37.)
Rotations per minute
Pr.541
(machine speed) setting Sign Setting range Actual frequency command
setting
using Pr.37 and Pr.53
0 Without 0 to 59000 0 to 590.00 Hz
Disabled
1 With -32768 to 32767 (two's complement) -327.68 to 327.67 Hz
0 Without 0 to 65535 The rotation speed command or the machine
Enabled speed command is selected depending on the
1 With -32768 to 32767 (two's complement) Pr.37 and Pr.53 settings. (1 increments)

30 2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
 • Relationship between the start command and sign (Pr.541 = "1")
Start
command
Sign of the frequency
command
Actual operation
command
1
Forward + Forward rotation
rotation - Reverse rotation
Reverse + Reverse rotation 2
rotation - Forward rotation

NOTE 3
• When Pr.541 = "1" (with sign)
• When EEPROM write is specified by turning ON of RYE, write mode error (error code H01) will occur.
• When both RYD and RYE are turned ON, RYD has precedence.
• When power is turned ON (inverter reset), the initial setting status of the sign bit is "positive" and the set frequency is 0 Hz.
4
(The motor does not operate at the frequency set before turning OFF the power (inverter reset).)
• When set frequency is written with the instruction code of HED or HEE, the sign of the frequency command is not changed.
5
 I/O signal list
 When Pr.544 = "0, 1, 12, 14, or 18" 6
• Remote I/O signals
Refer to Refer to
Device No.*7 Signal Device No.*7 Signal
page page
7
RYn0 Forward rotation command*2 35 RXn0 Forward running 36
RYn1 Reverse rotation command*2 35 RXn1 Reverse running 36
High-speed operation command
RYn2
(terminal RH function)*1
35 RXn2 Running (terminal RUN function)*3 36 8
Middle-speed operation command
RYn3 35 RXn3 Up to frequency*2 36
(terminal RM function)*1

RYn4
Low-speed operation command
35 RXn4 Overload warning*2 36
9
(terminal RL function)*1
RYn5 JOG operation selection 2*2 35 RXn5 Pr.193 assignment function (NET Y1)*6 36

RYn6 Second function selection*2 35 RXn6

Frequency detection (terminal FU
function)*3
36 10
RYn7 Current input selection*2 35 RXn7 Fault (terminal ABC function)*3 36
RYn8 Pr.185 assignment function (NET X1)*5 35 RXn8 Pr.194 assignment function (NET Y2)*6 36
RYn9 *1 35 RXn9 *4 36
Output stop (terminal MRS function) Pr.313 assignment function (DO0)
RYnA Pr.186 assignment function (NET X2)*5 35 RXnA Pr.314 assignment function (DO1)*4 36
RYnB Pr.184 assignment function (RES)*5 35 RXnB Pr.315 assignment function (DO2)*4 36
RYnC Monitor command 35 RXnC Monitoring 37
RYnD Frequency setting command (RAM) 36 RXnD Frequency setting completion (RAM) 37
Frequency setting command (RAM, Frequency setting completion (RAM,
RYnE 36 RXnE 37
EEPROM) EEPROM)
RYnF Instruction code execution request 36 RXnF Instruction code execution completed 37
RX(n+1)0 to
Reserved —
RX(n+1)5
RY(n+1)0 to
Reserved —
RY(n+1)7 RX(n+1)6 Pr.195 assignment function (NET Y3)*6 37
RX(n+1)7 Pr.196 assignment function (NET Y4)*6 37
Not used (initial data process Not used (initial data process request
RY(n+1)8 — RX(n+1)8 —
completion flag) flag)
Not used (initial data process request Not used (initial data process
RY(n+1)9 — RX(n+1)9 —
flag) completion flag)
RY(n+1)A Error reset request flag 36 RX(n+1)A Error status flag 37
RY(n+1)B Pr.187 assignment function (NET X3)*5 36 RX(n+1)B Remote station ready 37
RY(n+1)C Pr.188 assignment function (NET X4)*5 36 RX(n+1)C In-position*2 37
RY(n+1)D *5 36 RX(n+1)D *2 37
Pr.189 assignment function (NET X5) During position command operation
RY(n+1)E RX(n+1)E Home position return completed*2 37
Reserved —
RY(n+1)F RX(n+1)F Home position return failure*2 37

2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
31
 *1 These signals are set in the initial setting. Using Pr.180 to Pr.183, input signals assigned to the device numbers can be changed.
For details of Pr.180 to Pr.183, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*2 The signals are fixed. They cannot be changed using parameters.
*3 These signals are set in the initial setting. Using Pr.190 to Pr.192, output signals assigned to the device numbers can be changed.
For details of Pr.190 to Pr.192, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*4 Output signals can be assigned using Pr.313 to Pr.315.
For details, refer to the description of Pr.313 to Pr.315 (Output terminal function selection) in the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*5 Input signals can be assigned using Pr.184 to Pr.189.
For details, refer to the description of Pr.184 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) in the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*6 Output signals can be assigned using Pr.193 to Pr.196.
For details, refer to the description of Pr.193 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) in the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*7 "n" indicates a value determined by the station number.

• Remote registers
Description Refer to Description Refer to
Address*5 Address*5
Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits page Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits page
RWwn Monitor code 2 Monitor code 1 37 RWrn First monitor value*3 39
RWwn+1 Set frequency (0.01 Hz increments)*2 37 RWrn+1 Second monitor value*3 39
Link parameter
RWwn+2 Instruction code 37 RWrn+2 Reply code 2 Reply code 1 39
extended setting
RWwn+3 Data to be written 37 RWrn+3 Data to be read 39
RWwn+4 Monitor code 3 37 RWrn+4 *3 39
Third monitor value
RWwn+5 Monitor code 4 37 RWrn+5 Fourth monitor value*3 39
RWwn+6 Monitor code 5 37 RWrn+6 *3 39
Fifth monitor value
RWwn+7 Monitor code 6 37 RWrn+7 Sixth monitor value*3 39
Fault record (fault
RWwn+8 Fault history No. H00 38 RWrn+8 Fault history No. 39
data)
RWwn+9 PID set point (0.01% increments)*1 38 RWrn+9 Fault record (output frequency)*4 39
PID measured value (0.01%
RWwn+A 38 RWrn+A Fault record (output current) 39
increments)*1
RWwn+B PID deviation (0.01% increments)*1 38 RWrn+B Fault record (output voltage) 39
RWwn+C Torque command or torque limit 38, 49 RWrn+C Fault record (energization time) 39
RWwn+D RWrn+D
RWwn+E H00 (Free) — RWrn+E H00 (Free) —
RWwn+F RWrn+F
Link parameter
RWwn+10 Instruction code 38 RWrn+10 Reply code 39
extended setting
RWwn+11 Data to be written 38 RWrn+11 Data to be read 39
Link parameter
RWwn+12 Instruction code 38 RWrn+12 Reply code 39
extended setting
RWwn+13 Data to be written 38 RWrn+13 Data to be read 39
Link parameter
RWwn+14 Instruction code 38 RWrn+14 Reply code 39
extended setting
RWwn+15 Data to be written 38 RWrn+15 Data to be read 39
Link parameter
RWwn+16 Instruction code 38 RWrn+16 Reply code 39
extended setting
RWwn+17 Data to be written 38 RWrn+17 Data to be read 39
Link parameter
RWwn+18 Instruction code 38 RWrn+18 Reply code 39
extended setting
RWwn+19 Data to be written 38 RWrn+19 Data to be read 39
RWwn+1A RWrn+1A
RWwn+1B RWrn+1B
RWwn+1C RWrn+1C
H00 (Free) — H00 (Free) —
RWwn+1D RWrn+1D
RWwn+1E RWrn+1E
RWwn+1F RWrn+1F
*1 Validity depends on the Pr.128, Pr.609, and Pr.610 settings. For details, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function). If the data outside
the range is set, the previous setting is retained.
*2 The display can be changed to rotations per minute (machine speed) using Pr.37 and Pr.53.
*3 When the item displayed in frequency is selected, the Pr.37 and Pr.53 settings are invalid.
*4 The frequency is always displayed regardless of the settings in Pr.37 and Pr.53.
*5 "n" indicates a value determined by the station number.

32 2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
 When Pr.544 = "38" (user defined cyclic communication data selection)
• Remote I/O signals
1
Refer to Refer to
Device No.*7 Signal Device No.*7 Signal
page page
RYn0 Forward rotation command*2 35 RXn0 Forward running 36
RYn1 Reverse rotation command*2 35 RXn1 Reverse running 36
2
High-speed operation command
RYn2 35 RXn2 Running (terminal RUN function)*3 36
(terminal RH function)*1
Middle-speed operation command 3
RYn3 35 RXn3 Up to frequency*2 36
(terminal RM function)*1
Low-speed operation command
RYn4 35 RXn4 Overload warning*2 36
(terminal RL function)*1
4
RYn5 JOG operation selection 2*2 35 RXn5 Pr.193 assignment function (NET Y1)*6 36
Frequency detection (terminal FU
RYn6 Second function selection*2 35 RXn6 36
function)*3
RYn7 Current input selection*2 35 RXn7 Fault (terminal ABC function)*3 36
5
RYn8 Pr.185 assignment function (NET X1)*5 35 RXn8 Pr.194 assignment function (NET Y2)*6 36
RYn9 Output stop (terminal MRS function)*1 35 RXn9 Pr.313 assignment function (DO0)*4 36
RYnA Pr.186 assignment function (NET X2)*5 35 RXnA Pr.314 assignment function (DO1)*4 36 6
RYnB Pr.184 assignment function (RES)*5 35 RXnB Pr.315 assignment function (DO2)*4 36
RYnC Monitor command 35 RXnC Monitoring 37
RYnD Frequency setting command (RAM) 36 RXnD Frequency setting completion (RAM) 37 7
Frequency setting command (RAM, Frequency setting completion (RAM,
RYnE 36 RXnE 37
EEPROM) EEPROM)
RYnF Instruction code execution request 36 RXnF Instruction code execution completed 37
RX(n+1)0 to
8
Reserved —
RX(n+1)5
RY(n+1)0 to
Reserved —
RY(n+1)7 RX(n+1)6 Pr.195 assignment function (NET Y3)*6 37
RX(n+1)7 Pr.196 assignment function (NET Y4)*6 37 9
Not used (initial data process Not used (initial data process request
RY(n+1)8 — RX(n+1)8 —
completion flag) flag)
Not used (initial data process request Not used (initial data process
RY(n+1)9
flag)
— RX(n+1)9
completion flag)
— 10
RY(n+1)A Error reset request flag 36 RX(n+1)A Error status flag 37
RY(n+1)B Pr.187 assignment function (NET X3)*5 36 RX(n+1)B Remote station ready 37
RY(n+1)C Pr.188 assignment function (NET X4)*5 36 RX(n+1)C In-position*2 37
RY(n+1)D Pr.189 assignment function (NET X5)*5 36 RX(n+1)D During position command operation*2 37
User defined cyclic communication
RY(n+1)E
input writing request
36 RX(n+1)E Home position return completed*2 37

RY(n+1)F Reserved — RX(n+1)F Home position return failure*2 37

*1 The signal initially assigned to the terminal. Using Pr.180 to Pr.183, input signals assigned to the device numbers can be changed.
For details of Pr.180 to Pr.183, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*2 The signals are fixed. They cannot be changed using parameters.
*3 These signals are set in the initial setting. Using Pr.190 to Pr.192, output signals assigned to the device numbers can be changed.
For details of Pr.190 to Pr.192, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*4 Output signals can be assigned using Pr.313 to Pr.315.
For details, refer to the description of Pr.313 to Pr.315 (Output terminal function selection) in the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*5 Input signals can be assigned using Pr.184 to Pr.189.
For details, refer to the description of Pr.184 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) in the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*6 Output signals can be assigned using Pr.193 to Pr.196.
For details, refer to the description of Pr.193 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) in the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*7 "n" indicates a value determined by the station number.

• Remote registers
Description Refer to Description Refer to
Address*3 Address*3
Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits page Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits page
RWwn Monitor code 2 Monitor code 1 38 RWrn First monitor value*2 39
RWwn+1 Set frequency (0.01 Hz increments)*1 38 RWrn+1 Second monitor value*2 39

2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
33
 Description Refer to Description Refer to
Address*3 Address*3
Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits page Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits page
Link parameter
RWwn+2 Instruction code 38 RWrn+2 Reply code 2 Reply code 1 39
extended setting
RWwn+3 Data to be written 38 RWrn+3 Data to be read 40
User Defined Cyclic Communication
User Defined Cyclic Communication
RWwn+4 39 RWrn+4 Output 1 Mapping (Pr.1330), lower 16 40
Input 1 Mapping (Pr.1320), lower 16 bits
bits
User Defined Cyclic Communication User Defined Cyclic Communication
RWwn+5 Input 1 Mapping (Pr.1320), upper 16 39 RWrn+5 Output 1 Mapping (Pr.1330), upper 16 40
bits bits
User Defined Cyclic Communication
User Defined Cyclic Communication
RWwn+6 39 RWrn+6 Output 2 Mapping (Pr.1331), lower 16 40
Input 2 Mapping (Pr.1321), lower 16 bits
bits
User Defined Cyclic Communication User Defined Cyclic Communication
RWwn+7 Input 2 Mapping (Pr.1321), upper 16 39 RWrn+7 Output 2 Mapping (Pr.1331), upper 16 40
bits bits
User Defined Cyclic Communication
User Defined Cyclic Communication
RWwn+8 39 RWrn+8 Output 3 Mapping (Pr.1332), lower 16 40
Input 3 Mapping (Pr.1322), lower 16 bits
bits
User Defined Cyclic Communication User Defined Cyclic Communication
RWwn+9 Input 3 Mapping (Pr.1322), upper 16 39 RWrn+9 Output 3 Mapping (Pr.1332), upper 16 40
bits bits
User Defined Cyclic Communication
User Defined Cyclic Communication
RWwn+A 39 RWrn+A Output 4 Mapping (Pr.1333), lower 16 40
Input 4 Mapping (Pr.1323), lower 16 bits
bits
User Defined Cyclic Communication User Defined Cyclic Communication
RWwn+B Input 4 Mapping (Pr.1323), upper 16 39 RWrn+B Output 4 Mapping (Pr.1333), upper 16 40
bits bits
User Defined Cyclic Communication
User Defined Cyclic Communication
RWwn+C 39 RWrn+C Output 5 Mapping (Pr.1334), lower 16 40
Input 5 Mapping (Pr.1324), lower 16 bits
bits
User Defined Cyclic Communication User Defined Cyclic Communication
RWwn+D Input 5 Mapping (Pr.1324), upper 16 39 RWrn+D Output 5 Mapping (Pr.1334), upper 16 40
bits bits
User Defined Cyclic Communication
User Defined Cyclic Communication
RWwn+E 39 RWrn+E Output 6 Mapping (Pr.1335), lower 16 40
Input 6 Mapping (Pr.1325), lower 16 bits
bits
User Defined Cyclic Communication User Defined Cyclic Communication
RWwn+F Input 6 Mapping (Pr.1325), upper 16 39 RWrn+F Output 6 Mapping (Pr.1335), upper 16 40
bits bits
User Defined Cyclic Communication
User Defined Cyclic Communication
RWwn+10 39 RWrn+10 Output 7 Mapping (Pr.1336), lower 16 40
Input 7 Mapping (Pr.1326), lower 16 bits
bits
User Defined Cyclic Communication User Defined Cyclic Communication
RWwn+11 Input 7 Mapping (Pr.1326), upper 16 39 RWrn+11 Output 7 Mapping (Pr.1336), upper 16 40
bits bits
User Defined Cyclic Communication
User Defined Cyclic Communication
RWwn+12 39 RWrn+12 Output 8 Mapping (Pr.1337), lower 16 40
Input 8 Mapping (Pr.1327), lower 16 bits
bits
User Defined Cyclic Communication User Defined Cyclic Communication
RWwn+13 Input 8 Mapping (Pr.1327), upper 16 39 RWrn+13 Output 8 Mapping (Pr.1337), upper 16 40
bits bits
User Defined Cyclic Communication
User Defined Cyclic Communication
RWwn+14 39 RWrn+14 Output 9 Mapping (Pr.1338), lower 16 40
Input 9 Mapping (Pr.1328), lower 16 bits
bits
User Defined Cyclic Communication User Defined Cyclic Communication
RWwn+15 Input 9 Mapping (Pr.1328), upper 16 39 RWrn+15 Output 9 Mapping (Pr.1338), upper 16 40
bits bits
User Defined Cyclic Communication User Defined Cyclic Communication
RWwn+16 Input 10 Mapping (Pr.1329), lower 16 39 RWrn+16 Output 10 Mapping (Pr.1339), lower 16 40
bits bits
User Defined Cyclic Communication User Defined Cyclic Communication
RWwn+17 Input 10 Mapping (Pr.1329), upper 16 39 RWrn+17 Output 10 Mapping (Pr.1339), upper 16 40
bits bits

34 2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
 Description Refer to Description Refer to
Address*3 Address*3
Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits page Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits
User Defined Cyclic Communication
page
1
RWwn+18 RWrn+18 Output 11 Mapping (Pr.1340), lower 16 40
bits

RWwn+19 RWrn+19
User Defined Cyclic Communication
Output 11 Mapping (Pr.1340), upper 16 40
2
bits
User Defined Cyclic Communication
RWwn+1A RWrn+1A Output 12 Mapping (Pr.1341), lower 16
bits
40
3
User Defined Cyclic Communication
RWwn+1B RWrn+1B Output 12 Mapping (Pr.1341), upper 16 40

H00 (Free) —
bits
User Defined Cyclic Communication
4
RWwn+1C RWrn+1C Output 13 Mapping (Pr.1342), lower 16 40
bits

RWwn+1D RWrn+1D
User Defined Cyclic Communication
Output 13 Mapping (Pr.1342), upper 16 40
5
bits
User Defined Cyclic Communication
RWwn+1E RWrn+1E Output 14 Mapping (Pr.1343), lower 16
bits
40
6
User Defined Cyclic Communication
RWwn+1F RWrn+1F Output 14 Mapping (Pr.1343), upper 16 40
bits
7
*1 The display can be changed to rotations per minute (machine speed) using Pr.37 and Pr.53.
*2 When the item displayed in frequency is selected, the Pr.37 and Pr.53 settings are invalid.
*3 "n" indicates a value determined by the station number.

 Details of the I/O signals 8

The device numbers described in this section are for the station number 1. For the station number 2 and later, the device
numbers are different. (Refer to the manual for the CC-Link master module for the correspondence between device numbers
and station numbers.)
9
 Output signals (from the master module to the inverter)
Output signals from the master module are as follows. (Input signals to the inverter) 10
Device No. Signal Description
0: Stop
command
RY0 Forward rotation command*2 1: Forward
rotation start When "1" is set, a start command is input to the inverter.
0: Stop When "1" is set in RY0 and RY1, a stop command is input.
command
RY1 Reverse rotation command*2 1: Reverse
rotation start
High-speed operation command (terminal
RY2
RH function)*1
Middle-speed operation command
RY3 Functions assigned to Pr.180 to Pr.182 are activated.
(terminal RM function)*1
Low-speed operation command (terminal
RY4
RL function)*1
RY5 JOG operation selection 2*2 JOG2 signal
RY6 *2 RT signal
Second function selection
RY7 Current input selection*2 AU signal
RY8 — (terminal NET X1 function)*3 The function assigned to Pr.185 is activated.
RY9 Output stop (terminal MRS function)*1 The function assigned to Pr.183 is activated.
RYA — (terminal NET X2 function)*3 The function assigned to Pr.186 is activated.
RYB — (Function of terminal RES)*3 The function assigned to Pr.184 is activated.
When "1" is set in RYC, the monitored value is set in the remote register
RYC Monitor command RWr0, 1, 4 to 7, and "1" is set in RXC (device for the Monitoring signal). While
"1" is set in RYC, the monitored data is always updated.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
35
 Device No. Signal Description
When "1" is set in RYD, the set frequency / torque command (RWw1) is
written to the RAM of the inverter.*4
After the writing completes, "1" is set in the frequency setting / torque
Frequency setting command / torque command completion (RXD). Under Real sensorless vector control, Vector
RYD
command (RAM) control, and PM sensorless vector control, the following value is also written
to RAM at the same time.
• During torque control*6: Torque command value
• During speed control / position control: Torque limit value
When "1" is set in RYE, the set frequency / torque command (RWw1) is
written to the RAM and EEPROM of the inverter. After the writing completes,
"1" is set in the frequency setting / torque command completion (RXE).
Under Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, and PM sensorless
Frequency setting command / torque vector control, the following value is also written to RAM and EEPROM at the
RYE same time.
command (RAM, EEPROM)
• During torque control*6: Torque command value
• During speed control / position control: Torque limit value
To change the frequency consecutively, be sure to write data to the inverter
RAM.
At the ON edge of RYF, processing corresponding to the instruction codes set
to RWw2, 10, 12, 14, 16, and 18 are executed. "1" is set in the instruction
RYF Instruction code execution request code execution completed (RXF) after completion of instruction codes. When
an instruction code execution error occurs, a value other than "0" is set in the
reply code (RWr2, 10, 12, 14, 16, or 18).
When "1" is set in RY1A at an inverter fault, the inverter is reset, and then "0"
RY1A Error reset request flag
is set in the error status flag (RX1A).*5
RY1B — (terminal NET X3 function)*3
RY1C — (terminal NET X4 function)*3 Functions assigned to Pr.187 to Pr.189 are activated.
RY1D — (terminal NET X5 function)*3
When "1" is set in RY1E, data set in RWw4 to RWw17 are written to the
User defined cyclic communication input corresponding parameters that have the index numbers specified using
RY1E
writing request Pr.1320 to Pr.1329. While "1" is set in RY1E, the data is always updated. The
response time to write data is 100 ms at the most.
*1 These signals are set in the initial setting. Using Pr.180 to Pr.183, input signals assigned to the device numbers can be changed. Some signals
are not controllable via network depending on the settings of Pr.338 and Pr.339. For details of Pr.180 to Pr.183, Pr.338, and Pr.339, refer to the
FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*2 The signals are fixed. They cannot be changed using parameters.
*3 No signal is assigned in the initial setting. Use Pr.184 to Pr.189 to assign signals to RY8, RYA, RYB, and RY1B to RY1D.
For details, refer to the description of Pr.184 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) in the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*4 While "1" is set in the frequency setting command (RYD), the set frequency (RWw1) is always applied.
*5 Refer to page 287 for operation conditions of inverter reset.
*6 Torque control cannot be performed with a PM motor.

 Input signals (from the inverter to the master module)

Input signals to the master module are as follows. (Output signals from the inverter)
Device No. Signal Description
0: Other than forward running (during stop or reverse rotation)
RX0 Forward running
1: Forward running
0: Other than reverse running (during stop or forward rotation)
RX1 Reverse running
1: Reverse running
RX2 Running (terminal RUN function)*1 The function assigned to Pr.190 is activated.
RX3 Up to frequency*2 SU signal
RX4 *2 OL signal
Overload warning
RX5 — (terminal NET Y1 function)*4 The function assigned to Pr.193 is activated.
Frequency detection (terminal FU
RX6 The function assigned to Pr.191 is activated.
function)*1
RX7 Fault (terminal ABC function)*1 The function assigned to Pr.192 is activated.
RX8 *4 The function assigned to Pr.194 is activated.
— (terminal NET Y2 function)
RX9 — (DO0 function)*3
RXA — (DO1 function)*3 Functions assigned to Pr.313 to Pr.315 are activated.
RXB — (DO2 function)*3

36 2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
 Device No. Signal Description

RXC Monitoring
After "1" is set in the monitor command (RYC), and the monitored value is set
in the remote register Rwr0, 1, 4 to 7, "1" is set for this signal. When "0" is set
1
in the monitor command (RYC), "0" is set for this signal.
After "1" is set in the frequency setting command / torque command (RYD),
RXD
Frequency setting / torque command
completed (RAM)
and the frequency setting / torque command is written to the RAM of the
inverter, "1" is set for this signal. When "0" is set in the frequency setting 2
command / torque command (RYD), "0" is set for this signal.
After "1" is set in the frequency setting command / torque command (RYE),

RXE
Frequency setting / torque command
and the frequency setting / torque command is written to the RAM and
EEPROM of the inverter, "1" is set for this signal. When "0" is set in the 3
completed (RAM, EEPROM)
frequency setting command / torque command (RYE), "0" is set for this
signal.
After "1" is set in the instruction code execution request (RYF) and the
RXF Instruction code execution completed
processes corresponding to the instruction codes (RWw2, 10, 12, 14, 16 and 4
18) are executed, "1" is set for this signal. When "0" is set in the instruction
code execution request (RYF), "0" is set for this signal.
— (terminal NET Y3 function)*4
RX16
Functions assigned to Pr.195 and Pr.196 are activated. 5
RX17 — (terminal NET Y4 function)*4
When an inverter error occurs (protective function is activated), "1" is set for
RX1A Error status flag
this signal.
When the inverter is ready for communication upon completion of initial 6
setting after power-ON or a hardware reset, "1" is set for this signal.
RX1B Remote station ready
When an inverter error occurs (protective function is activated), "0" is set in
this signal.
RX1C In-position*2 Y36 signal 7
RX1D During position command operation*2 PBSY signal
RX1E Home position return completed*2 ZP signal
RX1F Home position return failure*2 ZA signal 8
*1 These signals are set in the initial setting. Using Pr.190 to Pr.192, output signals assigned to the device numbers can be changed.
For details of Pr.190 to Pr.192, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*2
*3
The signals are fixed. They cannot be changed using parameters.
No signal is assigned in the initial setting. Use Pr.313 to Pr.315 to assign signals to RX9 to RXB. 9
For details, refer to the description of Pr.313 to Pr.315 (Output terminal function selection) in the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*4 No signal is assigned in the initial setting. Use Pr.193 to Pr.196 to assign signals to RX5, RX8, RX16, and RX17.
For details, refer to the description of Pr.193 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) in the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
10
 Details of the remote register
 Remote register (from the master module to the inverter)
• Remote register description (when Pr.544 = "0, 1, 12, 14, or 18")
Device No. Signal Description
Set the monitor code to be monitored (refer to page 42). When "1" is set in RYC, data of the
RWw0 Monitor code 1, 2
specified monitor item will be stored in RWr0 and RWr1.
Specify the set frequency or rotations per minute (machine speed). At this time, whether to
write to the RAM or EEPROM is decided with the RYD and RYE settings. After setting the set
frequency in this register, set "1" in RYD or RYE to write the frequency. After writing of
RWw1 Set frequency*1*2 frequency is completed, "1" is set in RXD or RXE in response to the input command.
The setting range is 0 to 590.00 Hz (0.01 Hz increments). Write "59000" when setting 590.00
Hz.
Set an instruction code (refer to page 40) for an operation such as operation mode switching,
parameter read/write, error reference, and error clear. Set "1" in RYF to execute the
Link parameter extended corresponding instruction after completing the register setting. "1" is set in RXF after
RWw2
setting / instruction code completing the execution of the instruction. The upper 8 bits are used for the link parameter
extended setting.
Example) When reading Pr.160, instruction code is H0200.
Set data for the instruction code set in RWw2 (when required).
RWw3 Data to be written Set "1" in RYF after setting RWw2 and this register. Set "0" when the write code is not
required.
RWw4 Monitor code 3
RWw5 Monitor code 4 Set the monitor code to be monitored. By setting "1" in RYC after setting, the specified monitor
RWw6 Monitor code 5 data is stored in RWr4 to RWr7.
RWw7 Monitor code 6

2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
37
 Device No. Signal Description
Set the individual fault number of the fault history that you want to read. Fault records can be
read back to the tenth latest fault. (The value in the lower 8 bits is fixed to H00.)
RWw8 Fault history No.
Upper 8 bits: H00 (latest fault) to H09 (tenth latest fault)
When H0A to HFF is set to the lower 8 bits, "0" is returned.
Set the PID action set point.
RWw9 PID set point*3 Setting range: 0 to 100.00%
• Input a value 100 times greater than the value to be set.
Set the PID measured value.
RWwA PID measured value*3 Setting range: 0 to 100.00%
For example, enter "10000" when setting 100.00%.
• For details of PID control, refer to the FR-E800
Set the PID deviation. Instruction Manual (Function).
RWwB PID deviation*3 Setting range: -100.00% to
100.00%
When Pr.804 = "3 or 5" during torque control under Real sensorless vector control or Vector
control, torque command values can be specified. The value is written to the inverter either
Torque command value by RYD or RYE. The values in Pr.805 and Pr.806 are updated at the same time. The setting
range and the setting increment depend on the Pr.804 setting. If the data outside the range
is set, the previous setting is retained.
RWwC Set Pr.804 = "3 or 5" and Pr.810 Torque limit input method selection = "2" to specify the
torque limit value during speed control or position control under Real sensorless vector
control, Vector control, or PM sensorless vector control. The value is written to the inverter
Torque limit value
either by RYD or RYE. The values in Pr.805 and Pr.806 are updated at the same time. The
setting range and the setting increment depend on the Pr.804 setting (absolute value). If the
data outside the range is set, the previous setting is retained.
Set an instruction code (refer to page 40) for an operation such as operation mode switching,
RWw10, parameter read/write, error reference, and error clear. The instructions are executed in the
RWw12, following order by setting "1" in RYF after completing the register setting: RWw2, 10, 12, 14,
Link parameter extended
RWw14, 16, then 18. After completing the execution up to RWw18, "1" is set in RXF. Set HFFFF to
setting / instruction code
RWw16, disable an instruction by RWw10 to 18. (The instruction code of RWw2 is always executed.)
RWw18 The upper 8 bits are used for the link parameter extended setting.
Example) When reading Pr.160, instruction code is H0200.
RWw11, Set the data specified by the instruction code of RWw10, 12, 14, 16, and 18 (when required).
RWw13, RWw10 and 11, 12 and 13, 14 and 15, 16 and 17, and 18 and 19 correspond each other. Set
RWw15, Data to be written "1" in RYF after setting the instruction codes (RWw10, 12, 14, 16, and 18) and the
RWw17, corresponding register.
RWw19 Set "0" when the write data is not required.
*1 The display can be changed to rotations per minute (machine speed) using Pr.37 and Pr.53. For details, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual
(Function).
*2 When Pr.541 Frequency command sign selection = "1", the set frequency is a signed value. When the setting value is negative, the command
is the inverse from the start command.
Setting range: -327.68 to 327.67 Hz (-32768 to 32767), 0.01 Hz increments.
For the details, refer to page 30.
*3 Validity depends on the Pr.128, Pr.609, and Pr.610 settings. For details, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function). If the data outside
the range is set, the previous setting is retained.

• Remote register description (when Pr.544 = "38")

Device No. Signal Description
Set the monitor code to be monitored (refer to page 42). When "1" is set in RYC, data of the
RWw0 Monitor code 1, 2
specified monitor item will be stored in RWr0 and RWr1.
Specify the set frequency or rotations per minute (machine speed). At this time, whether to
write to the RAM or EEPROM is decided with the RYD and RYE settings. After setting the set
frequency in this register, set "1" in RYD or RYE to write the frequency. After writing of
RWw1 Set frequency*1*2 frequency is completed, "1" is set in RXD or RXE in response to the input command.
The setting range is 0 to 590.00 Hz (0.01 Hz increments). Write "59000" when setting 590.00
Hz.
Set an instruction code (refer to page 40) for an operation such as operation mode switching,
parameter read/write, error reference, and error clear. Set "1" in RYF to execute the
Link parameter extended corresponding instruction after completing the register setting. "1" is set in RXF after
RWw2
setting / instruction code completing the execution of the instruction. The upper 8 bits are used for the link parameter
extended setting.
Example) When reading Pr.160, instruction code is H0200.
Set data for the instruction code set in RWw2 (when required).
RWw3 Data to be written Set "1" in RYF after setting RWw2 and this register. Set "0" when the write code is not
required.

38 2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
 Device No. Signal Description
Data set in RWw4 to RWw17 are written to the corresponding parameters that have the index
numbers specified using Pr.1320 to Pr.1329. When "20488 or 20489" is set in any of Pr.1320
1
to Pr.1329, the input value set in the corresponding register is invalid. While "1" is set in
RY1E, the data is always updated.
User defined cyclic
RWw4 to If the same index number is specified in two or more of Pr.1320 to Pr.1329, the number set
RWw17
communication input data
selection
in the parameter with the smallest parameter number is valid. The same number set in the 2
other parameters is regarded as "9999".
When a nonexistent index number or "9999" is set in Pr.1320 to Pr.1329, the data will be
ignored. When the referenced index number is set for 16-bit data, the upper 16-bit data will
be ignored. 3
*1 The display can be changed to rotations per minute (machine speed) using Pr.37 and Pr.53. For details, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual
(Function).
*2 When Pr.541 Frequency command sign selection = "1", the set frequency is a signed value. When the setting value is negative, the command
is the inverse from the start command. 4
Setting range: -327.68 to 327.67 Hz (-32768 to 32767), 0.01 Hz increments.
For the details, refer to page 30.

 Remote register (from the inverter to the master module) 5

• Remote register description (when Pr.544 = "0, 1, 12, 14, or 18")
Device No. Signal Description
RWr0 First monitor value*1*2 When "1" is set in RYC, the monitor value is set to the lower 8 bits of the monitor code (RWw0). 6
Second monitor value When "0" is set to the upper 8 bits of the monitor code (RWw0), the current output frequency
RWr1 is set. When "1" is set in RYC while a value other than "0" is set to the upper 8 bits of the
(output frequency*1*2) monitor code (RWw0), the monitor value is set to the upper 8 bits of the monitor code (RWw0).
Lower 8 bits of RWr2. 7
Reply code 1 When "1" is set in RYD or RYE, the reply code for the frequency setting command (torque
command / torque limit) is set. (Refer to page 40.)
RWr2
Upper 8 bits of RWr2.
Reply code 2 When "1" is set in RYF, the reply code corresponding to the instruction code RWw2 is set. 8
(Refer to page 40.)
RWr3 Data to be read In a normal reply, a replay code for the instruction code is set.
RWr4 *1*2
Third monitor value
RWr5 Fourth monitor value*1*2 When "1" is set in RYC, the monitor value specified to the corresponding monitor code (RWw4
9
RWr6 Fifth monitor value*1*2 to RWw7) is stored.

RWr7 Sixth monitor value*1*2

The data of the fault record No. specified in RWw8 is stored in the lower 8 bits. The specified
10
RWr8 Fault record (fault data)
fault record No. will be echoed back to the upper 8 bits.
Fault record (output
RWr9 The output frequency of the fault history No. specified in RWw8 is stored.
frequency)*3
RWrA Fault record (output current) The output current of the fault history No. specified in RWw8 is always stored.
RWrB Fault record (output voltage) The output voltage of the fault history No. specified in RWw8 is always stored.
Fault record (energization
RWrC The energization time at the fault is always stored for the fault record No. specified in RWw8.
time)
When "1" is set in RYF, the reply codes corresponding to the instruction code RWw10, 12, 14,
RWr10 to Reply code 16, and 18 are set. The value "0" is set for a normal reply, and a value other than "0" is set for
RWr19 faults with data, mode, and others. (Refer to page 40.)
Data to be read In a normal reply, a replay code for the instruction code is set.
*1 When the item displayed in frequency is selected, the Pr.37 and Pr.53 settings are invalid.
*2 Use Pr.290 to enable display of negative numbers during monitoring. For details, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*3 The frequency is always displayed regardless of the settings in Pr.37 and Pr.53.

• Remote register description (when Pr.544 = "38")

Device No. Signal Description
RWr0 First monitor value*1*2 When "1" is set in RYC, the monitor value is set to the lower 8 bits of the monitor code (RWw0).

Second monitor value When "0" is set to the upper 8 bits of the monitor code (RWw0), the current output frequency
RWr1 is set. When "1" is set in RYC while a value other than "0" is set to the upper 8 bits of the
(output frequency*1*2) monitor code (RWw0), the monitor value is set to the upper 8 bits of the monitor code (RWw0).
Lower 8 bits of RWr2.
Reply code 1 When "1" is set in RYD or RYE, the reply code for the frequency setting command (torque
command / torque limit) is set. (Refer to page 40.)
RWr2
Upper 8 bits of RWr2.
Reply code 2 When "1" is set in RYF, the reply code corresponding to the instruction code RWw2 is set.
(Refer to page 40.)

2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
39
 Device No. Signal Description
RWr3 Data to be read In a normal reply, a replay code for the instruction code is set.
Data to which the index numbers are specified using Pr.1330 to Pr.1343 are always stored in
User defined cyclic the corresponding registers.
RWr4 to
communication output data When a nonexistent index number or "9999" is set in Pr.1330 to Pr.1343, "0" is always stored.
RWr1F
selection When the referenced index number is set for 16-bit data, "0" is always stored in the upper 16-
bit data.
*1 When the item displayed in frequency is selected, the Pr.37 and Pr.53 settings are invalid.
*2 Use Pr.290 to enable display of negative numbers during monitoring. For details, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).

• Reply code description

The reply to the instruction execution command is set in RWr2, 10, 12, 14, 16, and 18. After the frequency setting (RYD
or RYE) or execution of instruction code (RYF), check the reply code (RWr2) in the remote register.
Item Data Item Fault description Remarks
No fault (Instruction codes are executed
H0000 Normal
without any fault.)
Parameter write is attempted when the
Reply code H0001 Write mode fault inverter is not in the stop status in the Reply code to RWw10, 12, 14, 16, 18
Network operation mode.
H0002 Parameter selection fault Unregistered code is set.
H0003 Setting range fault Set data exceeds the permissible range.
No fault (Instruction codes are executed
H00 Normal
without any fault.)
Parameter write is attempted when the
H01 Write mode fault inverter is not in the stop status in the
Reply code 1*1 Network operation mode.
Frequency command
H03 (torque command / torque The value outside the range is set.
limit) setting range error Reply code to RWr2
No fault (Instruction codes are executed
H00 Normal
without any fault.)
Parameter write is attempted when the
Reply code 2 H01 Write mode fault inverter is not in the stop status in the
Network operation mode.
H02 Parameter selection fault Unregistered code is set.
H03 Setting range fault Set data exceeds the permissible range.
*1 The contents of the reply code 1 are changed when torque commands are given or the torque is limited. The upper 4 bits of the reply code 1 are
used as the reply code to the torque command / torque limit, and the lower 4 bits are used as the reply code to the frequency command.
Bit15 Bit0

Reply code2 Reply code to Reply code to

the torque command / the frequency
torque limit command
Reply code1
Example) When the torque command is out of the setting range, the data is H0030.
Bit15 Bit0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

Reply code to
the torque command

 Instruction code
Set instruction codes using the remote register (RWw). (Refer to page 37.)
The definition read by the instruction code is stored in the remote register (RWr). (Refer to page 39.)
Read/ Instruction
Item Data description
write code
H0000: Network operation
Read H7B H0001: External operation, External JOG operation
H0002: PU operation, External/PU combined operation 1 or 2, PUJOG operation
Operation mode
H0000: Network operation
Write HFB H0001: External operation
H0002: PU operation (when Pr.79 = "6")

40 2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
 Read/ Instruction
Item Data description
write code
H0000 to HFFFF
1
Output frequency /
rotations per minute Output frequency in 0.01 Hz increments
Read H6F
(The display can be changed to the rotations per minute (machine speed) using
(machine speed)*1*2 Pr.37 and Pr.53. Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
H0000 to HFFFF 2
Output current Read H70
Output current (hexadecimal) in 0.01 A increments
H0000 to HFFFF
Output voltage Read H71

Special monitor*2 Read H72

Output voltage (hexadecimal) in 0.1 V increments
H0000 to HFFFF: Monitor data selected in the instruction code HF3
3
Special monitor Read H73 H01 to HFF: Monitor selection data
selection No. Write HF3*3 Refer to the monitor code description on page 42.

Monitor
H0000 to HFFFF: Two fault records per code 4
For data codes and details of fault records, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual
(Maintenance).

b15 b8 b7 b0
For instruction code H74,
read data H30A0 5
H74 Second latest fault Latest fault
b15 b8 b7 b0
Fault record Read H74 to H78 H75 Fourth latest fault Third latest fault 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

H76 Sixth latest fault Fifth latest fault Second latest fault Latest fault
6
(H30) (HA0)
H77 Eighth latest fault Seventh latest fault

H78 Tenth latest fault Ninth latest fault

Second latest fault ...... THT
Latest fault ...... OPT 7
Set frequency (RAM) H6D Read the set frequency or rotations per minute (machine speed) from the RAM or
EEPROM. H0000 to HE678: Set frequency in 0.01 Hz increments
Set frequency (EEPROM)
Read
H6E
(The display can be changed to the rotations per minute (machine speed) using 8
Pr.37 and Pr.53. Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
Write the set frequency or rotations per minute (machine speed) into the RAM or
Set frequency (RAM)*4 HED EEPROM. H0000 to HE678 (0 to 590.00 Hz): Frequency in 0.01 Hz increments.
Write
(The display can be changed to the rotations per minute (machine speed) using 9
Set frequency (RAM and Pr.37 and Pr.53. Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
HEE To change the set frequency consecutively, write data to the RAM of the inverter.
EEPROM)*4
(Instruction code: HED)
10
Read H00 to H63 • Refer to the instruction codes in the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function) and
write and/or read parameter values as required. Writing to Pr.77 and Pr.79 is
disabled. When setting Pr.100 and later, set the link parameter extended setting.
Parameter
• Set 65520 (HFFF0) as a parameter value "8888" and 65535 (HFFFF) as "9999".
• When changing the parameter values frequently, set "1" in Pr.342 to write them
Write H80 to HE3 to the RAM. (For the details, refer to page 282.)

Fault history clear Write HF4 H9696: Fault history is cleared.

All parameters return to initial values. Whether to clear communication parameters
or not can be selected according to the data.
• Parameter clear
H9696: Communication parameters are cleared.
H5A5A*5: Communication parameters are not cleared.
• All parameter clear
Parameter clear / All parameter
Write HFC H9966: Communication parameters are cleared.
clear
H55AA*5: Communication parameters are not cleared.
For the details of whether or not to clear parameters, refer to the FR-E800
Instruction Manual (Function). When clear is performed with H9696 or H9966,
communication related parameter settings also return to the initial values. When
resuming the operation, set the parameters again. Performing a clear will clear the
instruction code HEC, HF3, and HFF settings.
Inverter reset Write HFD H9696: Resets the inverter.
Read or write of bias and gain parameters (instruction codes H5E to H61 and HDE
Read H6C to HE1 with the link parameter extended setting = "1", H11 to H23 and H91 to HA3
with the link parameter extended setting = "9").
Second parameter changing*6
H00: Frequency*7
Write HEC H01: Parameter-set analog value
H02: Analog value input from terminal

2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
41
 *1 When "100" is set in Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selection, the frequency setting value is monitored during a stop, and the output
frequency is monitored during running.
*2 Use Pr.290 to enable display of negative numbers during monitoring. For details, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*3 Write data is in hexadecimal, and only two digits are valid. (The upper two digits are ignored.)
*4 Setting from the remote register (RWw1) is also available.
*5 Turning OFF the power supply while clearing parameters with H5A5A or H55AA returns the communication parameter settings to the initial
settings.
*6 Reading or writing is available when the link parameter extended setting = "1 or 9".
*7 The gain frequency can be also written using Pr.125 (instruction code: H99) or Pr.126 (instruction code: H9A).

NOTE
• When a 32-bit parameter setting or monitor item is read and the value to be read exceeds HFFFF, HFFFF is returned.

 Monitor code
Various data of the inverter can be monitored by setting the special monitor selection No. of the instruction code and setting
the monitor code in the remote registers, RWw0 and RWw4 to 7.
• Use the monitor code (RWw0) to set the first monitor value (RWr0) in the lower 8 bits, and the second monitor value (RWr1)
in the upper 8 bits.
(Example) The monitor code (RWw0) will be H0602 to set the output current as the first monitor value (RWr0) and set the
running speed as the second monitor value (RWr1).
• The values for the monitor code 3 (RWw4) to the monitor code 6 (RWw7) can be selected.
First monitor and third–sixth monitor
Monitor code Second monitor (upper 8 bits) Unit
(lower 8 bits)
H00 Output frequency None (monitor value fixed to "0") 0.01 Hz
H01 Output frequency 0.01 Hz
H02 Output current 0.01 A
H03 Output voltage 0.1 V
. . .
. . .
. . .

NOTE
• The monitor codes from H01 onwards and their contents are the same as those of the RS-485 communication dedicated
monitor. For details of the monitor codes or monitor items, refer to the monitor display section in the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).
• When the item displayed in frequency is selected in the remote registers, RWw0 and RWw4 to RWw7, the Pr.37 and Pr.53
settings are invalid.

 Communication speed and full-duplex/half-duplex selection (Pr.1426)

Use Pr.1426 Link speed and duplex mode selection to set the communication speed and the full-duplex or half-duplex
system. If the operation is not performed properly in the initial setting (Pr.1426 = "0"), set Pr.1426 according to the
specifications of the connected device.
Communication Full-duplex/half-
Pr.1426 setting Remarks
speed duplex system
The communication speed and the communication mode (half-duplex/full-
Automatic Automatic duplex) are automatically negotiated to ensure the optimum setting. To set
0 (initial value)
negotiation negotiation automatic negotiation, auto negotiation setting is required also in the master
station.
1 100 Mbps Full duplex —
2 100 Mbps Half duplex —
3 10 Mbps Full duplex
The communication speed is fixed at 100 Mbps. Do not set 10 Mbps.
4 10 Mbps Half duplex

42 2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
 IP filtering function (Ethernet) (Pr.1442 to Pr.1448)
• Set the IP address range for connectable network devices (Pr.1442 to Pr.1448) to limit the connectable devices. The 1
setting range for IP address of connectable network devices depends on the settings in Pr.1443 and Pr.1446, Pr.1444 and
Pr.1447, and Pr.1445 and Pr.1448. (Either of the settings can be larger than the other in Pr.1443 and Pr.1446, Pr.1444
and Pr.1447, and Pr.1445 and Pr.1448.) 2
[Setting example 1] Pr.1442 Pr.1443 Pr.1444 Pr.1445
IP filter address (Ethernet) 192 168 1 100
The range is between The range is between 3
the values set in both the values set in both
parameters. parameters.

IP filter address range specification

―
Pr.1446
9999
Pr.1447
3
Pr.1448
150
4
(Ethernet)
In this case, the IP address range in which Ethernet communication is permitted is "192.168.x (1 to 3).xxx (100 to 150)".

[Setting example 2]
Pr.1442 Pr.1443 Pr.1444 Pr.1445
5
IP filter address (Ethernet) 192 168 2 100
The range is between
the values set in both 6
parameters.
Pr.1446 Pr.1447 Pr.1448
IP filter address range specification
(Ethernet) ― 9999 9999 50 7
In this case, the IP address range in which Ethernet communication is permitted is "192.168.2.xxx (50 to 100)".

• When Pr.1442 to Pr.1445 = "0 (initial value)", the function is invalid.

• When "9999 (initial value)" is set in Pr.1446 to Pr.1448, the range is invalid. 8
CAUTION
• The IP filtering function (Ethernet) (Pr.1442 to Pr.1448) is provided as a means to prevent unauthorized access, DoS 9
attacks, computer viruses, or other cyberattacks from external devices, but the function does not prevent such access
completely. In order to protect the inverter and the system against unauthorized access by external systems, take
additional security measures. We shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving inverter trouble and 10
system trouble by DoS attacks, unauthorized access, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks. The following are
examples of measures to prevent them.
- Install a firewall.
- Install a personal computer as a relay station, and control the relaying of transmission data using an application
program.
- Install an external device as a relay station to control access rights. (For the details of external devices used to control
access rights, contact the distributors of the external devices.)

 User defined cyclic communication data selection (Pr.1320 to Pr.1343,

Pr.1389 to Pr.1398)
• To enable the user defined cyclic communication data selection, set Pr.544 = "38".
• Users can select communication data using Pr.1320 to Pr.1329 User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 1 to 10
Mapping and Pr.1330 to Pr.1343 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 1 to 14 Mapping.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
43
 • In Pr.1389 to Pr.1398, specify the subindices to which the index numbers are specified using Pr.1320 to Pr.1339.
Input data selection (from the master module to the Output data selection (from the inverter to the master
Data No. inverter) module)
Index specification Sub index specification Index specification Sub index specification
1 Pr.1320 Pr.1389 (lower 8 bits) Pr.1330 Pr.1394 (lower 8 bits)
2 Pr.1321 Pr.1389 (upper 8 bits) Pr.1331 Pr.1394 (upper 8 bits)
3 Pr.1322 Pr.1390 (lower 8 bits) Pr.1332 Pr.1395 (lower 8 bits)
4 Pr.1323 Pr.1390 (upper 8 bits) Pr.1333 Pr.1395 (upper 8 bits)
5 Pr.1324 Pr.1391 (lower 8 bits) Pr.1334 Pr.1396 (lower 8 bits)
6 Pr.1325 Pr.1391 (upper 8 bits) Pr.1335 Pr.1396 (upper 8 bits)
7 Pr.1326 Pr.1392 (lower 8 bits) Pr.1336 Pr.1397 (lower 8 bits)
8 Pr.1327 Pr.1392 (upper 8 bits) Pr.1337 Pr.1397 (upper 8 bits)
9 Pr.1328 Pr.1393 (lower 8 bits) Pr.1338 Pr.1398 (lower 8 bits)
10 Pr.1329 Pr.1393 (upper 8 bits) Pr.1339 Pr.1398 (upper 8 bits)
11 — — Pr.1340
12 — — Pr.1341
Fixed to "0"
13 — — Pr.1342
14 — — Pr.1343

• The following tables describe the index numbers of inverter parameters (read/write), monitor data (read), inverter control
parameters (read), and CiA402 drive profile (read/write).
• Inverter parameters
Index Sub index Read/write Remarks
12288 to 13787
0, 1 Read/write The inverter parameter number + 12288 (H3000) is the index number.
(H3000 to H35DB)

• Calibration parameters
Index Sub index Name Description
0 Data C0 (Pr.900)
13188 (H3384)
1 Sub Data —
0 Data C1 (Pr.901)
13189 (H3385)
1 Sub Data —
0 Data C2 (Pr.902)
13190 (H3386)
1 Sub Data C3 (Pr.902)
0 Data 125 (Pr.903)
13191 (H3387)
1 Sub Data C4 (Pr.903)
0 Data C5 (Pr.904)
13192 (H3388)
1 Sub Data C6 (Pr.904)
0 Data 126 (Pr.905)
13193 (H3389)
1 Sub Data C7 (Pr.905)
0 Data C12 (Pr.917)
13205 (H3395)*1
1 Sub Data C13 (Pr.917)
0 Data C14 (Pr.918)
13206 (H3396)*1
1 Sub Data C15 (Pr.918)
0 Data C16 (Pr.919)
13207 (H3397)*1
1 Sub Data C17 (Pr.919)
0 Data C18 (Pr.920)
13208 (H3398)*1
1 Sub Data C19 (Pr.920)
0 Data C38 (Pr.932)
13220 (H33A4)
1 Sub Data C39 (Pr.932)
0 Data C40 (Pr.933)
13221 (H33A5)
1 Sub Data C41 (Pr.933)
0 Data C42 (Pr.934)
13222 (H33A6)
1 Sub Data C43 (Pr.934)
0 Data C44 (Pr.935)
13223 (H33A7)
1 Sub Data C45 (Pr.935)

*1 Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.

44 2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
For the numbers and names of inverter parameters, refer to the parameter list of the Instruction Manual (Function).

NOTE 1
• Set 65520 (HFFF0) as a parameter value "8888" and 65535 (HFFFF) as "9999".
• When parameter write is performed, data are written to RAM.

2
• Monitor data
Index Sub index Read/write Remarks 3
16384 to 16483
0 Read The monitor code + 16384 (H4000) is the index number.
(H4000 to H4063)

For details of the monitor codes and monitor items, refer to the description of Pr.52 in the Instruction Manual (Function). 4
NOTE
• Display of negative numbers during monitoring set in Pr.290 Monitor negative output selection is disabled.
• The display can be changed from the frequency to rotations per minute (machine speed) using Pr.53. When the machine
5
speed is displayed, the value is incremented by one.

6
• Inverter control parameter
Index
20488 (H5008) 0
Sub index Name
Inverter status (extended)*1
Read/write
Read Refer to page 46.
Remarks
7
20489 (H5009) 0 Inverter status*1 Read Refer to page 46.
20981 (H51F5) 0 Fault record 1 Read
20982 (H51F6) 0 Fault record 2 Read 8
20983 (H51F7) 0 Fault record 3 Read
Being 2 bytes in length, the data is
20984 (H51F8) 0 Fault record 4 Read stored as H00○○.
20985 (H51F9) 0 Fault record 5 Read Refer to the lowest 1 byte for the error
code. (For details on error codes, refer
9
20986 (H51FA) 0 Fault record 6 Read
20987 (H51FB) 0 Fault record 7 Read to the list of fault displays in the
Instruction Manual (Maintenance).)
20988 (H51FC) 0 Fault record 8 Read
20989 (H51FD) 0 Fault record 9 Read 10
20990 (H51FE) 0 Fault record 10 Read
20992 (H5200)*2 0 Safety input status Read Refer to page 46.

*1 When "20488 or 20489" is set in any of Pr.1320 to Pr.1329, the input value set in the corresponding register is invalid.
*2 Available for the Ethernet model only.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
45
 • Inverter status, inverter status (extended)
Inverter status Inverter status (extended)
Bit Definition Bit Definition
0 RUN (Inverter running)*1 0 NET Y1 (0)*1
1 During forward rotation 1 NET Y2 (0)*1
2 During reverse rotation 2 NET Y3 (0)*1
3 Up to frequency 3 NET Y4 (0)*1
4 Overload warning 4 0
5 0 5 0
6 *1 6 0
FU (Output frequency detection)
7 ABC (Fault)*1 7 0
8 *1 8 0
ABC2 (0)
9 Safety monitor output 2 9 0
10 0 10 0
11 0 11 0
12 0 12 0
13 0 13 0
14 0 14 0
15 Fault occurrence 15 0

*1 The signal within parentheses ( ) is assigned in the initial status. The function changes depending on the setting of Pr.190 to Pr.197 (Output
terminal function selection).
For details, refer to the description of Pr.190 to Pr.197 (Output terminal function selection) in the Instruction Manual (Function).

• Safety input status

Bit Definition
0: Terminal S1 ON
0
1: Terminal S1 OFF (output shutoff)
0: Terminal S2 ON
1
1: Terminal S2 OFF (output shutoff)
2 to 15 0

• CiA402 drive profile

Sub
Index Name Description Read/write Data type
index
Error number
The error code of the latest fault that occurred after power-ON or an
inverter reset is returned.
When no fault occurs, no error is returned.
24639 When the fault history is cleared during occurrence of a fault, no
0 Error code Read Unsigned16
(H603F) error is returned.
The upper eight bits are fixed to FF, and the lower eight bits
represent the error code. (HFFXX: "XX" represents the error code.)
(For details on error codes, refer to the list of fault displays in the
Instruction Manual (Maintenance).)
Output frequency (r/min)*1
24643 The output frequency is read in r/min.
0 vl velocity demand Read Integer16
(H6043) Monitoring range: -32768 (H8000) to 32767 (H7FFF)
When Pr.81 = "9999", the number of motor poles is regarded as 4.
Operation speed (r/min)*1
24644 vl velocity actual The operation speed is read in r/min.
0 Read Integer16
(H6044) value Monitoring range: -32768 (H8000) to 32767 (H7FFF)
When Pr.81 = "9999", the number of motor poles is regarded as 4.
24672
0 Modes of operation Control mode: -1 (vendor specific operation mode) (fixed) Read/write Integer8
(H6060)
24673 Modes of operation
0 Current control mode: -1 (vendor specific operation mode) (fixed) Read Integer8
(H6061) display
24674 Position demand Position command (pulse)
0 Read Integer32
(H6062) value The position command before the electronic gear operation is read.
24675 Position actual Current position (pulse)
0 Read Integer32
(H6063) internal value The current position after the electronic gear operation is read.

46 2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
 Sub
Index Name Description Read/write Data type
index
24676 Position actual Current position (pulse)
1
0 Read Integer32
(H6064) value The current position before the electronic gear operation is read.
Target torque (%)
Set Pr.805 Torque command value (RAM).
Setting range: 600% to 1400% 2
24689
0 Target torque When the value is set in 0.1 increments, the first decimal place is Read/write Integer16
(H6071)
rounded off. However, when Pr.804 Torque command source
selection = "5 or 6", the data can be read/written in increments of
0.1. 3
24692 Torque demand value (%)
0 Torque demand Read Integer16
(H6074) The torque command is read.
24695 Torque actual value (%)
(H6077)
0 Torque actual value
The motor torque is read.
Read Integer16 4
Target position (pulse)
Set the target position in the direct command mode.
24698 Initial value: 0
(H607A)
0 Target position
Setting range: -2147483647 to 2147483647
Read/write Integer32 5
(For the direct command mode, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).)
Maximum profile speed (r/min)
24703
(H607F)
0 Max profile velocity Set Pr.18 High speed maximum frequency in r/min. Read/write Unsigned32 6
Setting range: 0 to 590 Hz
Profile speed (r/min)
Set the maximum speed in the direct command mode.
24705
0 Profile velocity
Initial value: 0
Read/write Unsigned32
7
(H6081) Setting range: 0 to (120 × 590 Hz / Pr.81)
(For the direct command mode, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).)
Acceleration time constant (ms) 8
<Position control>
Set the acceleration time in the direct command mode.
Initial value: 5000
Setting range: 10 to 360000
The last digit is rounded off. (For example, 1358 ms becomes 1350
9
ms.)
24707
0 Profile acceleration (For the direct command mode, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Read/write Unsigned32
(H6083)
Manual (Function).)
<Other than position control>
10
Set Pr.7 Acceleration time in ms.
Setting range: 0 to 3600 s
The last two digits are rounded off when Pr.21 Acceleration/
deceleration time increments = "0", and the last digit is rounded
off when Pr.21 = "1".
Deceleration time constant (ms)
<Position control>
Set the deceleration time in the direct command mode.
Initial value: 5000
Setting range: 10 to 360000
The last digit is rounded off. (For example, 1358 ms becomes 1350
ms.)
24708
0 Profile deceleration (For the direct command mode, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Read/write Unsigned32
(H6084)
Manual (Function).)
<Other than position control>
Set Pr.8 Deceleration time in ms.
Setting range: 0 to 3600 s
The last two digits are rounded off when Pr.21 Acceleration/
deceleration time increments = "0", and the last digit is rounded
off when Pr.21 = "1".
Position encoder
— Encoder resolution (machine side / motor side) — —
resolution
Highest sub-index
0 Maximum value of subindex: H02 (fixed) Read Unsigned8
24719 supported
(H608F) Encoder resolution
Encoder
1 Set Pr.369 Number of encoder pulses. Read/write Unsigned32
increments
Setting range: 2 to 4096
2 Motor revolutions Motor speed (rev): H00000001 (fixed) Read/write Unsigned32

2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
47
 Sub
Index Name Description Read/write Data type
index
— Gear ratio Gear ratio — —
Highest sub-index
0 Maximum value of subindex: H02 (fixed) Read Unsigned8
supported
Motor shaft revolutions*2
1 Motor revolutions Set Pr.420 Command pulse scaling factor numerator Read/write Unsigned32
24721
(electronic gear numerator).
(H6091)
Setting range: 1 to 32767
Drive shaft revolutions*2
2 Shaft revolutions Set Pr.421 Command pulse multiplication denominator Read/write Unsigned32
(electronic gear denominator).
Setting range: 1 to 32767
Home position return method
Set the home position return method in the direct command
24728
(H6098)
0 Homing method mode.*3 Read/write Integer8
(For the direct command mode and the home position return
method, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
— Homing speeds Home position return speed — —
Highest sub-index
0 Maximum value of subindex: H01 (fixed) Read Unsigned8
supported
24729 Motor speed during home position returning (r/min)
(H6099) Set the home position return speed in the direct command mode.
Speed during Initial value: 120 × 2 Hz / Pr.81
1 Read/write Unsigned32
search for switch Setting range: 0 to (120 × 400 Hz / Pr.81)
(For the direct command mode, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).)
Home position return acceleration/deceleration time (ms)
Set the home position return acceleration/deceleration time in the
direct command mode.
Initial value: 5000
24730 Homing
0 Setting range: 10 to 360000 Read/write Unsigned32
(H609A) acceleration
The last digit is rounded off. (For example, 1358 ms becomes 1350
ms.)
(For the direct command mode, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).)
24820 Following error Droop pulse (pulse)
0 Read Integer32
(H60F4) actual value The droop pulse before the electronic gear operation is read.
24826
0 Control effort Speed command after position loop*1 Read Integer32
(H60FA) The ideal speed command is read.
24828 Position demand Position command (pulse)
0 Read Integer32
(H60FC) internal value The position command after the electronic gear operation is read.
25858 Supported drive Supported control mode: H00010000 (vendor specific operation
0 Read Unsigned32
(H6502) modes mode)
*1 The value is displayed and set in r/min regardless of the settings in Pr.53.
The frequency is converted to the rotation speed for reading, and the setting value is converted to the frequency for writing.
*2 When parameter write is performed, data are written to RAM.
*3 The following table shows home position return methods corresponding to the Index H6098 setting values.

H6098 setting Home position return method

-3 Data set type
-4 Stopper type (home position return direction: position pulse increasing direction)
-5 (initial value) Ignoring the home position (servo ON position as the home position)
-7 Count type with front end reference (home position return direction: position pulse increasing direction)
-36 Stopper type (home position return direction: position pulse decreasing direction)
-39 Count type with front end reference (home position return direction: position pulse decreasing direction)
-65 Stopper type (home position return direction: start command direction)
-66 Count type with front end reference (home position return direction: start command direction)

NOTE
• The command interface in the Network operation mode is determined by the Pr.550 NET mode operation command source
selection setting. (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
• When the data is read, the value is displayed with a sign regardless of the Pr.290 Monitor negative output selection setting.

48 2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
 Setting example
• The following table shows example settings when user defined cyclic communication data are selected (when Pr.544 =
1
"38"). When "1" is set in RY(n+1)E (writing request for user defined cyclic communication input data), data in RWwn+4 and
RWwn+6 are written to the specified inverter parameters in the RAM. (The response time to write the data is 100 ms at the
most.)
2
Applicable device
Pr. Name Setting example Description
No.
User Defined Cyclic
1320 Communication Input 1 12295 (H3007)
P.7 Acceleration time
7 (H0007) + 12288 (H3000)
RWwn+4 3
Mapping
User Defined Cyclic
Pr.8 Deceleration time
1321 Communication Input 2 12296 (H3008) RWwn+6
Mapping
8 (H0008) + 12288 (H3000)
4
User Defined Cyclic
P.7 Acceleration time
1330 Communication Output 1 12295 (H3007) RWrn+4
7 (H0007) + 12288 (H3000)
Mapping
User Defined Cyclic
Pr.8 Deceleration time
5
1331 Communication Output 2 12296 (H3008) RWrn+6
8 (H0008) + 12288 (H3000)
Mapping
User Defined Cyclic
1332 Communication Output 3 16386 (H4002)
Monitored output current
2 (H0002) + 16384 (H4000)
RWrn+8 6
Mapping
User Defined Cyclic
Pr.255 Life alarm status display
1333 Communication Output 4 12543 (H30FF) RWrn+A
Mapping
255 (H00FF) + 12288 (H3000) 7
User Defined Cyclic
1334 Communication Output 5 20981 (H51F5) Fault record 1 RWrn+C
Mapping
8
 Torque command / torque limit by CC-Link IE TSN
Torque commands can be given or the torque can be limited by CC-Link IE TSN communication under Real sensorless vector
control, Vector control, or PM sensorless vector control. The value is used to limit the torque during speed control or position 9
control, and to give a torque command during torque control. To limit the torque, set Pr.810 Torque limit input method
selection = "2". The torque command / torque limit setting method can be selected using Pr.804 Torque command source
selection. (Torque control cannot be performed with a PM motor.) 10
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
0 Torque command given by analog input via terminal 4
Torque command / torque limit by CC-Link IE TSN
1 • Torque command / torque limit (-400% to 400%) by the parameter setting
(Pr.805 or Pr.806)*1*2
Torque command / torque limit by CC-Link IE TSN
• Torque command / torque limit (-400% to 400%) by the parameter setting
3 (Pr.805 or Pr.806)*1*2
• Setting is available using the remote register RWw1 or RWwC (-400% to
Torque command source 400%).*2
804 0
selection 4 Torque command given by 16-bit digital input (FR-A8AX)
Torque command / torque limit by CC-Link IE TSN
• Torque command / torque limit (-327.68% to 327.67%) by the parameter
5 setting (Pr.805 or Pr.806)*1*2
• Setting is available using the remote register RWw1 or RWwC (-327.68% to
327.67%).*2
Torque command / torque limit by CC-Link IE TSN
6 • Torque command / torque limit (-327.68% to 327.67%) by the parameter
setting (Pr.805 or Pr.806)*1*2
0 Internal torque limit (torque limited by parameter settings)
Torque limit input method
810 0 1 External torque limit (torque limited by terminal 4)
selection
2 Internal torque limit 2 (torque limited by CC-Link IE TSN)
*1 The value can also be set using the operation panel.
*2 When a negative value is set as the torque limit, the torque is limited by the absolute value.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
49
  List of I/O devices whose function is changed according to the control method
Real sensorless vector control / Vector control / PM sensorless vector
V/F control / Advanced magnetic flux
I/O device control
vector control
Speed control / position control Torque control*3
Frequency setting / torque limit
RYD Frequency setting command (RAM) Torque command (RAM)
command (RAM)
Frequency setting command (RAM, Frequency setting / torque limit
RYE Torque command (RAM, EEPROM)
EEPROM) command (RAM, EEPROM)
Frequency setting / torque limit
RXD Frequency setting completion (RAM) Torque command completion (RAM)
completion (RAM)
Frequency setting completion (RAM, Frequency setting / torque limit Torque command completion (RAM,
RXE
EEPROM) completion (RAM, EEPROM) EEPROM)
RWw1 Set frequency Set frequency —
RWwC — Torque limit*1*2 Torque command*1
*1 Set Pr.804 = "3 or 5".
*2 Set Pr.810 = "2".
*3 Torque control cannot be performed with a PM motor.

 Torque command setting method and the parameter for speed limit
Parameter for speed
Pr.804 setting Torque command setting method (any one of the following)
limit
• Set the torque command value in RWwn+C, and "1" in RYD or RYE.
3, 5 • Set H08 in the link parameter extended setting, the instruction code H85 and H86 in RWwn+2,
the torque command value in RWwn+3, and "1" in RYF. (Writing in Pr.805 or Pr.806)
Pr.807
Set H08 in the link parameter extended setting, the instruction code H85 and H86 in RWwn+2, the
1, 6
torque command value in RWwn+3, and "1" in RYF. (Writing in Pr.805 or Pr.806)
0, 4 Torque command cannot be given by CC-Link IE TSN.

 Torque limit setting method

Pr.804 setting Pr.810 setting Torque limit setting method (any one of the following)
• Set the torque limit value in RWwn+C, and "1" in RYD or RYE.
3, 5 • Set H08 in the link parameter extended setting, the instruction code H85 and H86 in RWwn+2, the torque
2 limit value in RWwn+3, and "1" in RYF. (Writing in Pr.805 or Pr.806)
Set H08 in the link parameter extended setting, the instruction code H85 and H86 in RWwn+2, the torque
1, 6
limit value in RWwn+3, and "1" in RYF. (Writing in Pr.805 or Pr.806)

 Relationship between the Pr.804 setting, the setting range, and the actual torque command /
torque limit (when setting is made from CC-Link IE TSN communication)
Pr.804 setting Setting range Actual torque command Actual torque limit
1, 3 600 to 1400 (1% increments)*1 -400 to 400% 0 to 400%
-32768 to 32767 (two's
5, 6 -327.68 to 327.67% 0 to 327.67%
complement)*1

*1 The torque limit setting is defined as an absolute value.

 Programming examples
The following explains the programming examples for controlling the inverter with sequence programs.
Refer to
Item Sample program
page
Reading the inverter status Reading the inverter status from the buffer memory of the master station 53
Setting the operation mode Selecting the Network operation mode 53
Setting the operation commands Commanding the forward rotation and middle speed signals 54
Setting the monitoring function Monitoring the output frequency 54
Reading a parameter value Reading the value of Pr.7 Acceleration time 54
Writing a parameter value Setting 3.0 seconds in Pr.7 Acceleration time 55
Frequency setting (speed setting) Setting to 50.00 Hz 55
Reading the fault records Reading the inverter faults 56
Inverter reset Resetting the inverter when an inverter error occurs 57

50 2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
 • System configuration for programming example

PLC 1
Power Master station Input unit Output unit
CPU
supply RJ71GN11-T2 RX10 RY10R2
R04CPU
2
R61P (X/Y00 to 1F) (X20 to X2F) (Y30 to Y3F)

X20 Y30

Station 1
Inverter
Station 2
Inverter 3

• Setting network parameters of the master station 4

In the programming example, network parameters are set as follows.
Item Setting condition
Station type CC-Link IE TSN (master station) 5
Start I/O 0000
Network number setting 1
Quantity
Network configuration
2
Refer to the following.
6
Refresh setting Refer to the following.

• Network configuration (assignment method: start/end) 7

Setting condition
Item
Module 1 Module 2
Station number
Station type
1
Remote station
2
Remote station
8
Start 0000 0020
RX/RY setting
End 001F 003F

RWw/RWr setting
Start 0000 0020 9
End 001F 003F
Reserved station / error invalid
No setting No setting
station
10
• Refresh settings (assignment method: start/end)
Link side Master side
Device name Start End Device name Start End
SB 0000 013F SB 0000 013F
SW 0000 013F SW 0000 013F
RX 0000 003F X 1000 103F
RY 0000 003F Y 1000 103F
RWr 0000 003F W 000000 00003F
RWw 0000 003F W 000100 00013F

2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
51
  Schematic diagrams of remote I/O and remote register devices
• Remote I/O (RX and RY) transmitted between the programmable controller CPU and remote stations

Remote station
Programmable controller CPU (Station 1)

X101F to X1000 RX1F to RX00

X103F to X1020

RY1F to RY00

Remote station
Y101F to Y1000 (Station 2)
Y103F to Y1020
RX1F to RX00

RY1F to RY00

• Remote register areas (RWw and RWr) transmitted between the programmable controller CPU and the remote stations

Programmable controller CPU Remote station

(Station 1)
For writing
W100 RWw0
W101 RWw1

W11E RWw1E
W11F RWw1F
W120 RWr0
W121 RWr1
W13E RWr1E
W13F RWr1F

Remote station
For reading (Station 2)
W000
W001 RWw0
RWw1
W01E
W01F RWw1E
W020 RWw1F
W021 RWr0
RWr1
W03E
W03F RWr1E
RWr1F

52 2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
 Programming example for reading the inverter status
The following program turns ON the signal Y00 of the output unit when the station 1 inverter starts running.
1
SB49 SW0B0.0
0 M0 Check the data link status of the station 1
M0 X1002
Turn on the output unit (Y00)
2
3 Y30
Inverter running (RX02)
6 END

3
X101F X1000
Remote input
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
One
station
RX1F to RX00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4
[Inverter status]
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24 b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16

5
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

[Inverter status]
Inverter status
b0 : Forward running b7 : Fault (ABC)*1
b1 : Reverse running
b2 : Running (RUN)*1
b8 : (NET Y2)*1
b9 : (DO0)*1
6
b3 : Up to frequency b10 : (DO1)*1
b4 : Overload warning b11 : (DO2)*1
b5 : (NET Y1)*1 b22 : (NET Y3)*1
b6 : Frequency detection (FU)*1 b23 : (NET Y4)*1 7
*1 These signals are assigned in the initial status. Use Pr.190 to Pr.196 and Pr.313 to Pr.315 (Output terminal function selection) to change the
output signals.

 Programming example for setting the operation mode 8

The following explains a program to write various data to the inverter.
The following program changes the operation mode of the station 1 inverter to network operation.
• Operation mode write code: HFB (hexadecimal) 9
• Network operation set data: H0000 (hexadecimal) (Refer to page 40.)
• The reply code to the instruction code execution is set in D2. (Refer to page 40 for the reply code (RWr10).)
10
SB49 SW0B0.0
0 M0 Check the data link status of the station 1
M0 X20
3 PLS M300
M300
7 SET M301
M301 X100F
9 MOV H0FB W110
Write operation mode write code (HFB)
to RWw10 and set data (H0000) to RWw11.
MOV H0 W111

SET Y100F Turn on the instruction code execution

request (RY0F)
RST M301

SET M302
M302 X100F Read reply code (RWr10) to D2 when the instruction
18 MOV W10 D2 code execution completion (RX0F) turns on.

RST Y100F Turn off the instruction code execution

request (RY0F)
RST M302

24 END

2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
53
  Programming example for setting the operation commands
The following program gives a forward rotation command and middle-speed operation command to the station 1 inverter.

SB49 SW0B0.0
0 M0 Check the data link status of the station 1
M0 X20
3 Y1000 Forward rotation command (RY00)

Y1003 Middle speed operation command (RY03)

7 END

Y101F Y1000
b15 b7 b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 RY1F to RY00 One station

[Run command] 1: ON
Middle speed Forward rotation 0: OFF
b31 b23 b16
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

[Run command]

Run command
b0 : Forward rotation command b8 : (NET X1)*1
b1 : Reverse rotation command b9 : Output stop (MRS)*1
b2 : High-speed operation command (RH)*1 b10 : (NET X2)*1
b3 : Middle-speed operation command (RM)*1 b11 : (RES)*1
b4 : Low-speed operation command (RL)*1 b27 : (NET X3)*1
b5 : JOG operation selection 2 b28 : (NET X4)*1
b6 : Second function selection b29 : (NET X5)*1
b7 : Current input selection

*1 These signals are assigned in the initial status. Use Pr.180 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to change the input signals. Some
signals are not controllable by a command from the programmable controller depending on the setting. (For details, refer to the Instruction Manual
(Function).)

 Programming example for monitoring the output frequency

The following explains a program to read monitor functions of the inverter.

The following program reads the output frequency of the station 1 inverter to output to D1.
Output frequency read code: H0001 (hexadecimal)
For the monitor codes, refer to page 42.
Example) The output frequency of 60 Hz is indicated as "H1770 (6000)".

SB49 SW0B0.0
0 M0 Check the data link status of the station 1
M0 X20
3 Set monitor code (H01) of output frequency
MOV H1 W100
to RWw0.

Y100C Turn on the monitor command (RY0C)

X100C Read output frequency (RWr0) to D1
MOV W0 D1 when the monitoring (RX0C) turns on.

11 END

 Programming example for the parameter reading

The following program reads Pr.7 Acceleration time of the station 1 inverter to output to D1.
• Pr.7 Acceleration time reading instruction code: H07 (hexadecimal)
• For the instruction codes of parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Function).

54 2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
 • The reply code to the instruction code execution is set in D2. (Refer to page 40 for the reply code (RWr10).)

1
SB49 SW0B0.0
0 M0 Check the data link status of the station 1
M0 X20
3
2
PLS M300
M300
7 SET M301
M301 X100F
9 MOV H7 W110 Write Pr.7 read code (H07) to RWw10.

SET Y100F Turn on the instruction code execution request (RY0F) 3

RST M301

SET M302

16
M302 X100F
MOV W11 D1 Read acceleration time (RWr11) and reply code
4
(RWr10) to D1 and D2 when the instruction code
MOV W10 D2 execution completion (RX0F) turns on.

RST Y100F Turn off the instruction code execution request (RY0F)
5
RST M302

24 END

6
NOTE
• For the parameter assigned the number of 100 or higher, change the link parameter extended setting (set it to the one other
than H00). For the setting values, refer to the instruction code list of the Instruction Manual (Function).
7
 Programming example for the parameter writing
The following program changes the setting value in Pr.7 Acceleration time of the station 1 inverter to 3.0 seconds. 8
• Acceleration time writing instruction code: H87 (hexadecimal)
• Acceleration time setting data: K30 (decimal)
For the instruction codes of parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Function). 9
The reply code to the instruction code execution is set in D2. (Refer to page 40 for the reply code (RWr10).)

0
SB49 SW0B0.0
M0 Check the data link status of the station 1
10
M0 X20
3 PLS M300
M300
7 SET M301
M301 X100F
9 MOV H87 W110
Write Pr.7 write code (H87) to RWw10 and
acceleration time setting data (K30) to RWw11.
MOV K30 W111

SET Y100F Turn on the instruction code execution request (RY0F)

RST M301

SET M302
M302 X100F Read reply code (RWr10) to D2 when the instruction
18 MOV W10 D2 code execution completion (RX0F) turns on.
RST Y100F Turn off the instruction code execution request (RY0F)

RST M302

24 END

NOTE
• For the parameter assigned the number of 100 or higher, change the link parameter extended setting (set it to the one other
than H00). For the setting values, refer to the instruction code list of the Instruction Manual (Function).
• For other functions, refer to the instruction codes (refer to page 40).

 Programming example for frequency setting

The following program changes the frequency setting of the station 1 inverter to 50.00 Hz.
• Set frequency: K5000 (decimal)

2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
55
 • The reply code to the instruction code execution is set in D2. (Refer to page 40 for the reply code (RWr2).)

SB49 SW0B0.0
0 M0 Check the data link status of the station 1
M0 X20
3 PLS M300
M300
7 SET M301
M301 X100D
9 MOV K5000 W101 Write set frequency to RWw1.

SET Y100D Turn off the frequency setting

command RAM (RY0D)
RST M301

SET M302
M302 X100D Read reply code (RWr2) to D2 when the
16 MOV W2 D2 frequency setting completion (RX0D) turns on.

RST Y100D Turn off the frequency setting command RAM

(RY0D)
RST M302

22 END

NOTE
• To change the set frequency continuously from a programmable controller, check that the frequency setting complete (for
example, X100D) turns ON, and the reply code from the remote register is H0000. Then change the setting data (for example,
W101) continuously.
• To write the set frequency to the EEPROM, change the following points in the program shown above.
- Frequency setting command (from Y100D to Y100E)
- Frequency setting completion (from X100D to X100E)

<Timing chart when writing to RAM> <Timing chart when writing to EEPROM>

Y100D Y100E
*2
W101 W101
*1
Inverter Inverter
running running
frequency frequency Reflect to the inverter when Y100E turns on

*1 To the EEPROM, a writing is performed only once after the command Y100E turns ON.
*2 If the set data is changed at the command Y100E ON, the change is not applied to the inverter.

 Programming example for the fault record reading

The following program reads the fault records of the station 1 inverter to output to D1.
• Fault history No. 1 and 2 reading instruction code: H74 (hexadecimal)
For the error codes, refer to the Instruction Manual (Maintenance).

56 2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
The reply code to the instruction code execution is set in D2. (Refer to page 40 for the reply code (RWr10).)

1
SB49 SW0B0.0
0 M0 Check the data link status of the station 1
M0 X20
3
M300
PLS M300
2
7 SET M301
M301 X100F
9 MOV H74 W110 Write fault history No.1 and No.2 read
code (H74) to RWw10.
3
SET Y100F Turn on the instruction code execution request
(RY0F)
RST M301

SET M302 4
M302 X100F
16 MOV W11 D1 Read fault record (RWr11) and reply code
(RWr10) to D1 and D2 when the instruction
MOV W10 D2 code execution completion (RX0F) turns on. 5
RST Y100F Turn off the instruction code execution request
(RY0F)
RST M302
6
24 END

 Programming example for resetting the inverter at an inverter fault 7

The following program resets the station 1 inverter at an inverter fault.

0
SB49 SW0B0.0
M0 Check the data link status of the station 1
8
M0 X101A X20
3 Y101A Turn on the error reset request flag (RY1A)
Turn off the error reset request flag (RY1A)
7
Error status flag
END
when the error status flag (RX1A) is off. 9

NOTE
• The inverter reset with the flag RY1A shown above is enabled at an inverter fault only.
10
• When Pr.349 Communication reset selection = "0", inverter reset is available independently of the operation mode.
• When using the instruction code execution request (RY0F) with the instruction code (HFD) and data (H9696) to reset the
inverter, set a value other than "0" in Pr.340 Communication startup mode selection or change the operation mode to the
Network operation mode. (For the program example, refer to page 53.)
• Refer to page 287 for operation conditions of inverter reset.

 Instructions
 Programming instructions
• Since the buffer memory data of the master station is kept transferred (refreshed) to/from the inverters, the TO instruction
need not be executed every scan in response to data write or read requests. The execution of the TO instruction every
scan does not pose any problem.
• If the FROM/TO instruction is executed frequently, data may not be written reliably. When transferring data between the
inverter and sequence program via the buffer memory, perform the handshake to confirm that data has been written
without error.

TO instruction TO instruction
Correct Incorrect
Write completion Write completion

 Operating and handling instructions

• The commands only from the programmable controller can be accepted during CC-Link IE TSN communication. Operation
commands input from external devices are ignored.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
57
 • If multiple inverters have the same station number, the communication cannot be performed properly.
• If the programmable controller (master station) is reset during operation through the CC-Link IE TSN or if the
programmable controller is powered off, data communication stops and the inverter protective function (E.EHR) is
activated. To reset the programmable controller (master station), switch the operation mode to the External operation once,
then reset the programmable controller.
• When Pr.340 = "0", any inverter whose main power is restored is reset to return to the External operation mode. To resume
the Network operation, therefore, set the operation mode to the Network operation using the sequence program. Set a
value other than "0" in Pr.340 to start in the Network operation mode after inverter reset. (For details of Pr.340, refer to the
FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)

 Troubleshooting
Description Point to be checked
Communication is not established. Check that the communication speed is not set to 10 Mbps.
Check that the Ethernet cable is installed correctly. (Check for contact fault, break in the cable, etc.)
Operation mode does not switch to the Check that the inverter is in the External operation mode.
Network operation mode. Check that the operation mode switching program is running.
Check that the operation mode switching program has been written correctly.
Check that the inverter starting program is running.
Inverter does not start in the Network
Check that the inverter starting program has been written correctly.
operation mode.
Check that Pr.338 Communication operation command source is not set to External.

NOTE
• When the power supply of one of the inverters connected in line topology is turned OFF then ON during communication, E.EHR
may be activated in the preceding inverter on the same communication. In such a case, stop the communication and turn OFF
then ON the power supply of the inverter in which E.EHR is activated.

58 2. Ethernet Communication
2.5 CC-Link IE TSN
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic 1

2.6.1 Outline 2

The CC-Link IE Field Network Basic enables CC-Link IE communication using the general-purpose Ethernet-based
4
technology. The CC-Link IE Field Network Basic is suited to small-scale equipment for which high-speed control is not
necessary, and can coexist with the standard Ethernet TCP/IP (HTTP, FTP, etc.).

 Communication specifications 5
The communication specification varies depending on the specification of the master.
Item Description
Communication speed 100 Mbps (10 Mbps is not supported.) 6
Communication method UDP
Master: 1
Number of connectable units
Remote: up to 64 stations (16 stations × 4 groups)*2 7
Ethernet cable (IEEE 802.3 100BASE-TX compliant cable and ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B (Category
Connection cable
5) compliant shielded 4-pair branched cable)
Topology Line, star, or a combination of line and star
Number of occupied stations One station occupied 8
RX 64 (8 bytes)
Maximum number of links per RY 64 (8 bytes)
station RWr
RWw
32 (64 bytes)
32 (64 bytes)
9
Reference response time*1 Within 15 ms

10
*1 The reference response time is the period from when the inverter receives a command from the master until the inverter returns the response to
the master.
*2 The specification differs depending on the date of manufacture of the inverter. Refer to page 290 and check the SERIAL number.

NOTE
• To use the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic, do not install the FR-A8NC E kit to the inverter. (Doing so disables communication
through the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic.)

2.6.2 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic configuration

 Procedure
The following shows the procedure to connect the inverter with a Mitsubishi Electric master device.

 Before communication
1. Connect each unit with an Ethernet cable. (Refer to page 15.)

2. Enter the IP address (Pr.1434 to Pr.1437). (Refer to page 18.)

3. Set "61450" (CC-Link IE Field Network Basic) in any of Pr.1427 to Pr.1430 Ethernet function selection 1 to 4.
(Refer to page 62.)
(Example: Pr.1429 = "45238" (CC-Link IE TSN) (initial value) → "61450" (CC-Link IE Field Network Basic))
When Pr.1429 = "45238 (initial value)" (CC-Link IE TSN), change the value to "61450" (CC-Link IE Filed Network
Basic). When "45238" is set in any of Pr.1427 to Pr.1430, the priority is given to CC-Link IE TSN, disabling CC-Link
IE Field Network Basic.

4. Reset the inverter, or turn OFF and then ON the power.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
59
  Registering a profile
1. Start the engineering software (GX Works3).

2. On the menu bar, select [Tool] > [Profile Management] > [Register...].

3. Select a CSP+ file to be registered on the "Register Profile" screen, and click the [Register] button.

NOTE
• A profile is a compressed file (such as *.zip, *.ipar, and *.cspp). Register a profile without decompressing the file.
• Profile registration is not required for the next time onwards.
• To use GX Works2, refer to "6.1.4 Setting the station information in the CC-Link IEF Basic configuration window" in GX Works2
Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) (SH-080779ENG).

 Creating a project file

1. For information on creating and opening a project, go to [Help] > [GX Works3 Help].

 Detecting an Inverter
Detection is not possible when the data link is not established with the master module. For details, refer to the Master Module
User's Manual.

1. In the "Navigation" window, select [Parameter] > [Module Parameter].

2. Select [Basic Settings] in the "Setting Item List" window.

3. In the "CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration" window, go to [Network Configuration Settings] then click next to the
[Detailed Setting] field.

60 2. Ethernet Communication
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
 4. In the "CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration" window, click [Detect Now].

3
5. Check the "MELSOFT GX Works3" dialog, and click [Yes].

7
6. The inverter model will appear on the screen when it is detected. (FR-E800-E inverters are displayed in the following
example.) Click [Close with Reflecting the Setting] to close the window. 8

10

 Checking communication
The following table shows the status of the LEDs when communication is established between the programmable controller
and the inverter. Check the "CC-Link IEF Basic Diagnostics" window to confirm that the communication is established between
them.
NS MS LINK1 LINK2
OFF Solid green Blinking green*1

2. Ethernet Communication
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
61
 *1 The LED on either LINK1 or LINK2 will blink depending on the port (port 1 or 2) the Ethernet cable is connected to.

NOTE
• If the inverter cannot be detected, on the menu bar select [Diagnostics (D)] > [CC Link IEF Basic Diagnostics]. The "CC Link
IEF Basic Diagnostics" window will be displayed. The network status or fault records can be checked.

2.6.3 Initial setting for CC-Link IE Field Network Basic

Use the following parameters to perform required settings for Ethernet communication between the inverter and other devices.
To make communication between other devices and the inverter, perform the initial settings of the inverter parameters to match
the communication specifications of the devices. Data communication cannot be made if the initial settings are not made or if
there is any setting error.
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
1427 Ethernet function
5001
N630*1 selection 1
502, 5000 to 5002, 5006
1428 Ethernet function
45237 to 5008, 5010 to 5013,
N631*1 selection 2
9999, 34962*3, 44818*2, Set the application, protocol, etc.
1429 Ethernet function
45238 45237, 45238, 47808*2,
N632*1 selection 3
61450
1430 Ethernet function
9999
N633*1 selection 4
Ethernet communication is available, but the inverter output is
0
shut off in the NET operation mode.
Set the interval of the communication check (signal loss
detection) time for all devices with IP addresses in the range
1432 Ethernet communication
1.5 s specified for Ethernet command source selection (Pr.1449 to
N644 check time interval 0.1 to 999.8 s
Pr.1454).
If a no-communication state persists for longer than the
permissible time, the inverter output will be shut off.
9999 No communication check (signal loss detection)

62 2. Ethernet Communication
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
 Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
1449 Ethernet command source
1
*1 0
N670 selection IP address 1
1450 Ethernet command source
0
N671*1 selection IP address 2
0 to 255 2
1451 Ethernet command source To limit the network devices that send the operation or speed
0
N672*1 selection IP address 3 command through the Ethernet network, set the range of IP
1452 addresses of the devices.
Ethernet command source
N673*1 selection IP address 4
0 When Pr.1449 to Pr.1452 = "0 (initial value)", no IP address is 3
specified for command source selection via Ethernet. In this
1453 Ethernet command source case, operation commands cannot be sent via Ethernet.
selection IP address 3 9999
N674*1 range specification
Ethernet command source
0 to 255, 9999 4
1454
selection IP address 4 9999
N675*1 range specification
*1
*2
The setting is applied after an inverter reset or next power-ON.
The setting is available for the FR-E800-(SC)EPA and FR-E806-SCEPA.
5
*3 The setting is available for the FR-E800-(SC)EPB and FR-E806-SCEPB.

NOTE
• The monitor items and parameter settings can be read during communication with the Pr.1432 Ethernet communication
6
check time interval = "0 (initial value)" setting, but such operation will become faulty once the operation mode is changed to
the NET operation mode. When the NET operation mode is selected as the start-up operation mode, communication is
performed once, then an Ethernet communication fault (E.EHR) occurs. 7
To perform operation or parameter writing via communication, set Pr.1432 to "9999" or a value larger than the communication
cycle or retry time setting. (Refer to page 64.)
• When the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic is used, a communication error (E.EHR) occurs regardless of the Pr.1432 Ethernet
communication check time interval setting in the following cases: the data addressed to the own station is not received for 8
the predetermined timeout period or longer, or the status bit of the cyclic transmission addressed to the own station turns OFF
(when the master inverter gives a command to stop the cyclic transmission). (For the details of the timeout period, status bit
of the cyclic transmission, and command to stop the cyclic transmission, refer to the User's Manual of the master device which 9
supports the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic.)

 Ethernet function selection (Pr.1427 to Pr.1430) 10

To select the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic for the application, set "61450" (CC-Link IE Field Network Basic) in any parameter
from Pr.1427 to Pr.1430 Ethernet function selection 1 to 4. When Pr.1429 = "45238 (initial value)" (CC-Link IE TSN), change
the value to "61450" (CC-Link IE Filed Network Basic). When "45238" is set in any of Pr.1427 to Pr.1430, the priority is given
to CC-Link IE TSN, disabling CC-Link IE Field Network Basic.

NOTE
• Change the setting if selected communication protocols cannot be used together. (Refer to page 7 and page 226.)

 Ethernet IP address for command source selection (Pr.1449 to Pr.1454)

• To limit the network devices that send the operation or speed command through the Ethernet network, set the range of IP
addresses of the devices.
• When Pr.1449 to Pr.1452 = "0 (initial value)", no IP address is specified for command source selection via Ethernet. In this
case, operation commands cannot be sent via Ethernet.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
63
 • The setting range for command source selection depends on the settings in Pr.1451 and Pr.1453, and Pr.1452 and
Pr.1454. (Either of the settings can be larger than the other in Pr.1451 and Pr.1453, and Pr.1452 and Pr.1454.)

[Setting example 1]
Configuration

Master station Remote station 1 Remote station 2

iQ-R R08CPU FR-E800 FR-E800
192.168.50.100 192.168.50.1 192.168.50.2
To allow the master station to control the remote stations, set the parameters in remote stations 1 and 2 as follows to specify the IP
address range for Ethernet command source selection.
Set the IP address of the master station in the engineering software (GX Works3) within the range from 192.168.50.100 to
192.168.50.110.
Pr.1449 Pr.1450 Pr.1451 Pr.1452
Ethernet IP address
for command source selection 192 168 50 100

The range is between

the values set in both
parameters.
Pr.1453 Pr.1454
Command source selection range setting
for the Ethernet IP address ― ― 9999 110

In this case, the IP address range in which Ethernet communication is permitted is "192.168.50.xxx (100 to 110)".
[Setting example 2]
Pr.1449 Pr.1450 Pr.1451 Pr.1452
Ethernet IP address
192 168 1 100
for command source selection
The range is between The range is between
the values set in both the values set in both
parameters. parameters.
Pr.1453 Pr.1454
Command source selection range setting
for the Ethernet IP address ― ― 3 150

In this case, the IP address range for command source selection via Ethernet communication is
"192.168.x (1 to 3).xxx (100 to 150)".

• When "9999 (initial value)" is set in Pr.1453 or Pr.1454, the range is invalid.

 Ethernet communication check time interval (Pr.1432)

• If a signal loss (communication stop) is detected between the inverter and all the devices with IP addresses in the range
for Ethernet command source selection (Pr.1449 to Pr.1454) as a result of a signal loss detection, a communication error
(E.EHR) occurs and the inverter output will be shut off.
• When "9999" is set in Pr.1432, the communication check (signal loss detection) will not be performed.
• The monitor items and parameter settings can be read via Ethernet when "0" is set in Pr.1432, but a communication error
(E.EHR) occurs instantly when the operation mode is switched to the Network operation.
• A signal loss detection is made when any of 0.1 s to 999.8 s is set in Pr.1432. In order to enable the signal loss detection,
data must be sent by connected devices at an interval equal to or less than the time set for the communication check. (The
inverter makes a communication check (clearing of communication check counter) regardless of the station number setting
of the data sent from the master).

64 2. Ethernet Communication
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
 • Communication check is started at the first communication when the inverter operates in the Network operation mode and
the command source is specified as communication via the Ethernet connector.
Example) When Pr.1432 = 0.1 to 999.8 s
1
Operation mode External Network

Connected device 2
Inverter
Inverter
Connected device
Check starts Fault (E.EHR) 3
Pr.1432
Communication
check counter Time 4
E.EHR OFF ON

LF OFF ON 5

2.6.4 Parameters related to CC-Link IE Field Network

6
Basic
The following parameters are used for CC-Link IE Field Network Basic communication. Set the parameters as required.
Initial
7
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
541 Frequency command sign 0 Signed frequency command value
0
N100 selection 1 Unsigned frequency command value 8
544 0, 1, 12, 14, 18,
The function of the remote registers can be extended when the CC-
CC-Link extended setting 0 38, 100, 112,
N103*1 114, 118, 138
Link IE Field Network Basic is used.

1426 Link speed and duplex

0 0 to 4
Set the communication speed and the communication mode (full- 9
N641*1 mode selection duplex/half-duplex).
1442 IP filter address 1
0
N660*1 (Ethernet)
1443 IP filter address 2
10
0
N661*1 (Ethernet)
0 to 255
1444 IP filter address 3
0
N662*1 (Ethernet)
1445 Set the range of connectable IP addresses for the network devices.
IP filter address 4
0 (When Pr.1442 to Pr.1445 = "0 (initial value)", the function is
N663*1 (Ethernet)
invalid.)
1446 IP filter address 2 range
9999
N664*1 specification (Ethernet)
1447 IP filter address 3 range
9999 0 to 255, 9999
N665*1 specification (Ethernet)
1448 IP filter address 4 range
9999
N666*1 specification (Ethernet)
804 Torque command source In the torque control mode, the torque command source can be
0 0, 1, 3 to 6
D400 selection selected.
810 Torque limit input method
0 0 to 2 The torque limit input method can be selected.
H700 selection
*1 The setting is applied after an inverter reset or next power-ON.

 CC-Link extended setting (Pr.544)

• Use this parameter to select the function of the remote registers for the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic.
Pr.544 setting Description Refer to page
0 (initial value) Compatible with CC-Link Ver.1 66
1 Compatible with CC-Link Ver.1 67
12 Compatible with the double setting of CC-Link Ver.2 68
14 Compatible with the quadruple setting of CC-Link Ver.2 68
18, 38 Compatible with the octuple setting of CC-Link Ver.2 69

2. Ethernet Communication
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
65
 Pr.544 setting Description Refer to page
100 Compatible with CC-Link Ver.1
112 Compatible with the double setting of CC-Link Ver.2
PLC function —*1
114 Compatible with the quadruple setting of CC-Link Ver.2
118, 138 Compatible with the octuple setting of CC-Link Ver.2
*1 Refer to the PLC Function Programming Manual.

 Frequency command with sign (Pr.541)

• The start command (forward/reverse rotation) can be inverted by adding a plus or minus sign to the value of the frequency
command sent through the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic.
• The Pr.541 Frequency command sign selection setting is applied to the frequency command from RWw1. (Refer to
page 72.)
Rotations per minute
Pr.541
(machine speed) setting Sign Setting range Actual frequency command
setting
using Pr.37 and Pr.53
0 Without 0 to 59000 0 to 590.00 Hz
Disabled
1 With -32768 to 32767 (two's complement) -327.68 to 327.67 Hz
0 Without 0 to 65535 The rotation speed command or the machine
Enabled speed command is selected depending on the
1 With -32768 to 32767 (two's complement)
Pr.37 and Pr.53 settings. (1 increments)

• Relationship between the start command and sign (Pr.541 = "1")

Start Sign of the frequency Actual operation
command command command
Forward + Forward rotation
rotation - Reverse rotation
Reverse + Reverse rotation
rotation - Forward rotation

NOTE
• When Pr.541 = "1" (with sign)
• When EEPROM write is specified by turning ON of RYE, write mode error (error code H01) will occur.
• When both RYD and RYE are turned ON while both of them are enabled (Pr.544 ≠ "0"), RYD has precedence.
• When power is turned ON (inverter reset), the initial setting status of the sign bit is "positive" and the set frequency is 0 Hz.
(The motor does not operate at the frequency set before turning OFF the power (inverter reset).)
• When set frequency is written with the instruction code of HED or HEE, the sign of the frequency command is not changed.

 I/O signal list

 When Pr.544 = "0" (compatible with CC-Link Ver.1)
• Remote I/O signals
Refer to Refer to
Device No.*7 Signal Device No.*7 Signal
page page
RYn0 Forward rotation command*2 70 RXn0 Forward running 71
RYn1 *2 70 RXn1 Reverse running 71
Reverse rotation command
High-speed operation command
RYn2 70 RXn2 Running (terminal RUN function)*3 71
(terminal RH function)*1
Middle-speed operation command
RYn3 70 RXn3 Up to frequency*2 71
(terminal RM function)*1
Low-speed operation command
RYn4 70 RXn4 Overload warning*2 71
(terminal RL function)*1
RYn5 JOG operation selection 2*2 70 RXn5 Pr.193 assignment function (NET Y1)*6 71
Frequency detection (terminal FU
RYn6 Second function selection*2 70 RXn6 71
function)*3
RYn7 Current input selection*2 70 RXn7 Fault (terminal ABC function)*3 71
RYn8 Pr.185 assignment function (NET X1)*5 70 RXn8 Pr.194 assignment function (NET Y2)*6 71
RYn9 Output stop (terminal MRS function)*1 70 RXn9 Pr.313 assignment function (DO0)*4 71

66 2. Ethernet Communication
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
 Refer to Refer to
Device No.*7 Signal Device No.*7 Signal
page page
RYnA Pr.186 assignment function (NET X2)*5 70 RXnA Pr.314 assignment function (DO1)*4 71
1
RYnB Pr.184 assignment function (RES)*5 70 RXnB Pr.315 assignment function (DO2)*4 71
RYnC Monitor command 70 RXnC Monitoring 71
RYnD Frequency setting command (RAM) 70 RXnD Frequency setting completion (RAM) 71 2
Frequency setting command (RAM, Frequency setting completion (RAM,
RYnE 70 RXnE 71
EEPROM) EEPROM)
RYnF Instruction code execution request 70 RXnF
RX(n+1)0 to
Instruction code execution completed 71
3
Reserved —
RX(n+1)5
RY(n+1)0 to
Reserved —
RY(n+1)7 RX(n+1)6 Pr.195 assignment function (NET Y3)*6 71
RX(n+1)7 Pr.196 assignment function (NET Y4)*6 71 4
Not used Not used
RY(n+1)8 — RX(n+1)8 —
(initial data process completion flag) (initial data process request flag)
Not used Not used
RY(n+1)9
(initial data process request flag)
— RX(n+1)9
(initial data process completion flag)
— 5
RY(n+1)A Error reset request flag 70 RX(n+1)A Error status flag 71
RY(n+1)B Pr.187 assignment function (NET X3)*5 70 RX(n+1)B Remote station ready 71
RY(n+1)C Pr.188 assignment function (NET X4) *5 70 RX(n+1)C In-position *2 71 6
RY(n+1)D Pr.189 assignment function (NET X5)*5 70 RX(n+1)D During position command operation*2 71
RY(n+1)E RX(n+1)E Home position return completed*2 71
Reserved —
RY(n+1)F RX(n+1)F Home position return failure*2 71 7
*1 These signals are set in the initial setting. Using Pr.180 to Pr.183, input signals assigned to the device numbers can be changed.
For details of Pr.180 to Pr.183, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*2
*3
The signals are fixed. They cannot be changed using parameters.
These signals are set in the initial setting. Using Pr.190 to Pr.192, output signals assigned to the device numbers can be changed. 8
For details of Pr.190 to Pr.192, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*4 Output signal can be assigned using Pr.313 to Pr.315.
For details, refer to the description of Pr.313 to Pr.315 (Output terminal function selection) in the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*5 Input signals can be assigned using Pr.184 to Pr.189. 9
For details, refer to the description of Pr.184 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) in the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*6 Output signals can be assigned using Pr.193 to Pr.196.
For details, refer to the description of Pr.193 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) in the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*7 "n" indicates a value determined by the station number. 10
• Remote registers
Description Refer to Refer to
Address*5 Address*5 Description
Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits page page
RWwn Monitor code 2 Monitor code 1 71 RWrn First monitor value*4 73
Set frequency (0.01 Hz increments) /
RWwn+1 72 RWrn+1 Second monitor value*4 73
torque command*2*3
RWwn+2 H00 (arbitrary)*1 Instruction code 72 RWrn+2 Reply code 73
RWwn+3 Data to be written 72 RWrn+3 Data to be read 73
*1 The upper 8 bits always contains H00 even a different value is set.
*2 When Pr.804 = "3 or 5" during torque control under Real sensorless vector control or Vector control, a torque command value is set in RWwn+1.
*3 The display can be changed to rotations per minute (machine speed) using Pr.37 and Pr.53.
*4 When the item displayed in frequency is selected, the Pr.37 and Pr.53 settings are invalid.
*5 "n" indicates a value determined by the station number.

 When Pr.544 = "1" (compatible with CC-Link Ver.1)

• Remote I/O signals
Settings are the same as those when Pr.544 = "0". (Refer to page 66.)
• Remote registers
Description Refer to Description Refer to
Address*4 Address*4
Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits page Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits page
RWwn Monitor code 2 Monitor code 1 71 RWrn First monitor value*3 73
Set frequency (0.01 Hz increments) /
RWwn+1 72 RWrn+1 Second monitor value*3 73
torque command*1*2

2. Ethernet Communication
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
67
 Description Refer to Description Refer to
Address*4 Address*4
Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits page Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits page
Link parameter
RWwn+2 Instruction code 72 RWrn+2 Reply code 2 Reply code 1 73
extended setting
RWwn+3 Data to be written 72 RWrn+3 Data to be read 73
*1 When Pr.804 = "3 or 5" during torque control under Real sensorless vector control or Vector control, a torque command value is set in RWwn+1.
*2 The display can be changed to rotations per minute (machine speed) using Pr.37 and Pr.53.
*3 When the item displayed in frequency is selected, the Pr.37 and Pr.53 settings are invalid.
*4 "n" indicates a value determined by the station number.

 When Pr.544 = "12" (Compatible with the double setting of CC-Link Ver.2)
• Remote I/O signals
Settings are the same as those when Pr.544 = "0". (Refer to page 66.)
• Remote registers
Description Refer to Description Refer to
Address*4 Address*4
Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits page Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits page
RWwn Monitor code 2 Monitor code 1 71 RWrn First monitor value*3 73
Set frequency (0.01 Hz increments) /
RWwn+1 72 RWrn+1 Second monitor value*3 73
torque command*1*2
Link parameter
RWwn+2 Instruction code 72 RWrn+2 Reply code 2 Reply code 1 73
extended setting
RWwn+3 Data to be written 72 RWrn+3 Data to be read 73
RWwn+4 Monitor code 3 72 RWrn+4 Third monitor value*3 73
RWwn+5 Monitor code 4 72 RWrn+5 Fourth monitor value*3 73
RWwn+6 Monitor code 5 72 RWrn+6 *3 73
Fifth monitor value
RWwn+7 Monitor code 6 72 RWrn+7 Sixth monitor value*3 73
*1 When Pr.804 = "3 or 5" during torque control under Real sensorless vector control or Vector control, a torque command value is set in RWwn+1.
*2 The display can be changed to rotations per minute (machine speed) using Pr.37 and Pr.53.
*3 When the item displayed in frequency is selected, the Pr.37 and Pr.53 settings are invalid.
*4 "n" indicates a value determined by the station number.

 When Pr.544 = "14" (Compatible with the quadruple setting of CC-Link Ver.2)
• Remote I/O signals
Settings are the same as those when Pr.544 = "0". (Refer to page 66.)
• Remote registers
Description Refer to Description Refer to
Address*5 Address*5
Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits page Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits page
RWwn Monitor code 2 Monitor code 1 71 RWrn First monitor value*3 73
RWwn+1 *2 72 RWrn+1 *3 73
Set frequency (0.01 Hz increments) Second monitor value
Link parameter
RWwn+2 Instruction code 72 RWrn+2 Reply code 2 Reply code 1 73
extended setting
RWwn+3 Data to be written 72 RWrn+3 Data to be read 73
RWwn+4 Monitor code 3 72 RWrn+4 Third monitor value*3 73
RWwn+5 Monitor code 4 72 RWrn+5 Fourth monitor value*3 73
RWwn+6 Monitor code 5 72 RWrn+6 Fifth monitor value*3 73
RWwn+7 Monitor code 6 72 RWrn+7 Sixth monitor value*3 73
Fault record (fault
RWwn+8 Fault record No. H00 72 RWrn+8 Fault record No. 73
data)
RWwn+9 PID set point (0.01% increments)*1 72 RWrn+9 Fault record (output frequency)*4 73
RWwn+A PID measured value (0.01% increments)*1 72 RWrn+A Fault record (output current) 73
RWwn+B *1 72 RWrn+B Fault record (output voltage) 73
PID deviation (0.01% increments)
RWwn+C Torque command or torque limit 72, 78 RWrn+C Fault record (energization time) 73
RWwn+D RWrn+D
RWwn+E H00 (Free) — RWrn+E H00 (Free) —
RWwn+F RWrn+F
*1 Validity depends on the Pr.128, Pr.609, and Pr.610 settings. For details, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function). If the data outside
the range is set, the previous setting is retained.
*2 The display can be changed to rotations per minute (machine speed) using Pr.37 and Pr.53.
*3 When the item displayed in frequency is selected, the Pr.37 and Pr.53 settings are invalid.

68 2. Ethernet Communication
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
 *4 The frequency is always displayed regardless of the settings in Pr.37 and Pr.53.
*5 "n" indicates a value determined by the station number.

 When Pr.544 = "18 or 38" (Compatible with the octuple setting of CC-Link Ver.2) 1
• Remote I/O signals
Settings are the same as those when Pr.544 = "0". (Refer to page 66.)
• Remote registers 2
Description Refer to Description Refer to
Address*5 Address*5
Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits page Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits page
RWwn Monitor code 2 Monitor code 1 71 RWrn First monitor value*3 73
3
RWwn+1 Set frequency (0.01 Hz increments)*2 72 RWrn+1 Second monitor value*3 73
Link parameter
RWwn+2
extended setting
Instruction code 72 RWrn+2 Reply code 2 Reply code 1 73
4
RWwn+3 Data to be written 72 RWrn+3 Data to be read 73
RWwn+4 Monitor code 3 72 RWrn+4 Third monitor value*3 73
RWwn+5 Monitor code 4 72 RWrn+5 Fourth monitor value*3 73
5
RWwn+6 Monitor code 5 72 RWrn+6 Fifth monitor value*3 73
RWwn+7 Monitor code 6 72 RWrn+7 Sixth monitor value*3 73

RWwn+8 Fault record No. H00 72 RWrn+8 Fault record No.

Fault record (fault
data)
73 6
RWwn+9 PID set point (0.01% increments)*1 72 RWrn+9 Fault record (output frequency)*4 73
RWwn+A PID measured value (0.01% increments)*1 72 RWrn+A Fault record (output current) 73
RWwn+B PID deviation (0.01% increments)*1 72 RWrn+B Fault record (output voltage) 73 7
RWwn+C Torque command or torque limit 72, 78 RWrn+C Fault record (energization time) 73
RWwn+D H00 (Free) RWrn+D
RWwn+E H00 (Free) — RWrn+E H00 (Free) — 8
RWwn+F H00 (Free) RWrn+F
Link parameter
RWwn+10 Instruction code 72 RWrn+10 Reply code 73
extended setting
RWwn+11 Data to be written 72 RWrn+11 Data to be read 73 9
Link parameter
RWwn+12 Instruction code 72 RWrn+12 Reply code 73
extended setting
RWwn+13 Data to be written 72 RWrn+13 Data to be read 73
Link parameter
10
RWwn+14 Instruction code 72 RWrn+14 Reply code 73
extended setting
RWwn+15 Data to be written 72 RWrn+15 Data to be read 73
Link parameter
RWwn+16 Instruction code 72 RWrn+16 Reply code 73
extended setting
RWwn+17 Data to be written 72 RWrn+17 Data to be read 73
Link parameter
RWwn+18 Instruction code 72 RWrn+18 Reply code 73
extended setting
RWwn+19 Data to be written 72 RWrn+19 Data to be read 73
RWwn+1A RWrn+1A
RWwn+1B RWrn+1B
RWwn+1C RWrn+1C
H00 (Free) — H00 (Free) —
RWwn+1D RWrn+1D
RWwn+1E RWrn+1E
RWwn+1F RWrn+1F
*1 Validity depends on the Pr.128, Pr.609, and Pr.610 settings. For details, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function). If the data outside
the range is set, the previous setting is retained.
*2 The display can be changed to rotations per minute (machine speed) using Pr.37 and Pr.53.
*3 When the item displayed in frequency is selected, the Pr.37 and Pr.53 settings are invalid.
*4 The frequency is always displayed regardless of the settings in Pr.37 and Pr.53.
*5 "n" indicates a value determined by the station number.

 Details of the I/O signals

The device numbers described in this section are for the station number 1. For the station number 2 and later, the device
numbers are different. (Refer to the manual for the CC-Link master module for the correspondence between device numbers
and station numbers.)

2. Ethernet Communication
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
69
  Output signals (from the master module to the inverter)
Output signals from the master module are as follows. (Input signals to the inverter)
Device No. Signal Description
0: Stop
command
RY0 Forward rotation command*2 1: Forward
rotation start When "1" is set, a start command is input to the inverter.
0: Stop When "1" is set in RY0 and RY1, a stop command is input.
command
RY1 Reverse rotation command*2 1: Reverse
rotation start
High-speed operation command (terminal
RY2
RH function)*1
Middle-speed operation command
RY3 Functions assigned to Pr.180 to Pr.182 are activated.
(terminal RM function)*1
Low-speed operation command (terminal
RY4
RL function)*1
RY5 JOG operation selection 2*2 JOG2 signal
RY6 *2 RT signal
Second function selection
RY7 Current input selection*2 AU signal
RY8 *3 The function assigned to Pr.185 is activated.
— (terminal NET X1 function)
RY9 Output stop (terminal MRS function)*1 The function assigned to Pr.183 is activated.
RYA — (terminal NET X2 function)*3 The function assigned to Pr.186 is activated.
RYB *3 The function assigned to Pr.184 is activated.
— (Function of terminal RES)
When "1" is set in RYC, the monitored value is set in the remote register RWr0,
RYC Monitor command 1, 4 to 7, and "1" is set in RXC (device for the Monitoring signal). While "1" is
set in RYC, the monitored data is always updated.
When "1" is set in RYD, the set frequency / torque command (RWw1) is written
to the RAM of the inverter.*4
After the writing completes, "1" is set in the frequency setting / torque command
Frequency setting command / torque completion (RXD). Under Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, and
RYD*5 command (RAM) PM sensorless vector control, the following value is also written to RAM at the
same time.
• During torque control*7: Torque command value
• During speed control / position control: Torque limit value
When "1" is set in RYE, the set frequency / torque command (RWw1) is written
to the RAM and EEPROM of the inverter. After the writing completes, "1" is set
in the frequency setting / torque command completion (RXE).
Under Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, and PM sensorless
Frequency setting command / torque vector control, the following value is also written to RAM and EEPROM at the
RYE*5 command (RAM, EEPROM) same time.
• During torque control*7: Torque command value
• During speed control / position control: Torque limit value
To change the frequency consecutively, be sure to write data to the RAM of the
inverter.
At the ON edge of RYF, processing corresponding to the instruction codes set
to RWw2, 10, 12, 14, 16, and 18 are executed. "1" is set in the instruction code
RYF*5 Instruction code execution request execution completed (RXF) after completion of instruction codes. When an
instruction code execution error occurs, a value other than "0" is set in the reply
code (RWr2, 10, 12, 14, 16, or 18).
When "1" is set in RY1A at an inverter fault, the inverter is reset, and then "0"
RY1A Error reset request flag
is set in the error status flag (RX1A).*6
RY1B *3
— (terminal NET X3 function)
RY1C — (terminal NET X4 function)*3 Functions assigned to Pr.187 to Pr.189 are activated.
RY1D — (terminal NET X5 function)*3
*1 These signals are set in the initial setting. Using Pr.180 to Pr.183, input signals assigned to the device numbers can be changed. Some signals
are not controllable via network depending on the settings of Pr.338 and Pr.339. For details of Pr.180 to Pr.183, Pr.338, and Pr.339, refer to the
FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*2 The signals are fixed. They cannot be changed using parameters.
*3 No signal is assigned in the initial setting. Use Pr.184 to Pr.189 to assign signals to RY8, RYA, RYB, and RY1B to RY1D.
For details, refer to the description of Pr.184 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) in the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*4 While "1" is set in the frequency setting command (RYD), the set frequency (RWw1) is always applied.
*5 If "1" is set in these registers at the same time while Pr.544 = "0", only one of these is executed.

70 2. Ethernet Communication
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
 *6 Refer to page 287 for operation conditions of inverter reset.
*7 Torque control cannot be performed with a PM motor.

 Input signals (from the inverter to the master module) 1

Input signals to the master module are as follows. (Output signals from the inverter)
Device No. Signal Description
0: Other than forward running (during stop or reverse rotation)
2
RX0 Forward running
1: Forward running
0: Other than reverse running (during stop or forward rotation)
RX1 Reverse running
1: Reverse running
3
RX2 Running (terminal RUN function)*1 The function assigned to Pr.190 is activated.
RX3 Up to frequency*2 SU signal
RX4 Overload warning*2 OL signal
4
RX5 — (terminal NET Y1 function)*4 The function assigned to Pr.193 is activated.
Frequency detection (terminal FU
RX6 The function assigned to Pr.191 is activated.
function)*1
RX7 Fault (terminal ABC function)*1 The function assigned to Pr.192 is activated. 5
RX8 — (terminal NET Y2 function)*4 The function assigned to Pr.194 is activated.
RX9 — (DO0 function)*3
RXA — (DO1 function)*3 Functions assigned to Pr.313 to Pr.315 are activated. 6
RXB — (DO2 function)*3
After "1" is set in the monitor command (RYC), and the monitored value is set
RXC Monitoring in the remote register Rwr0, 1, 4 to 7, "1" is set for this signal. When "0" is set 7
in the monitor command (RYC), "0" is set for this signal.
After "1" is set in the frequency setting command / torque command (RYD),
Frequency setting / torque command and the frequency setting / torque command is written to the RAM of the
RXD
completed (RAM) inverter, "1" is set for this signal. When "0" is set in the frequency setting
command / torque command (RYD), "0" is set for this signal.
8
After "1" is set in the frequency setting command / torque command (RYE),
Frequency setting / torque command and the frequency setting / torque command is written to the RAM and
RXE
completed (RAM, EEPROM) EEPROM of the inverter, "1" is set for this signal. When "0" is set in the
frequency setting command / torque command (RYE), "0" is set for this signal.
9
After "1" is set in the instruction code execution request (RYF) and the
processes corresponding to the instruction codes (RWw2, 10, 12, 14, 16 and
RXF Instruction code execution completed
18) are executed, "1" is set for this signal. When "0" is set in the instruction
code execution request (RYF), "0" is set for this signal.
10
RX16 — (terminal NET Y3 function)*4
Functions assigned to Pr.195 and Pr.196 are activated.
RX17 — (terminal NET Y4 function)*4
When an inverter error occurs (protective function is activated), "1" is set for
RX1A Error status flag
this signal.
When the inverter is ready for communication upon completion of initial setting
RX1B Remote station ready after power-ON or a hardware reset, "1" is set for this signal. When an inverter
error occurs (protective function is activated), "0" is set for this signal.
RX1C In-position*2 Y36 signal
RX1D During position command operation*2 PBSY signal
RX1E Home position return completed*2 ZP signal
RX1F Home position return failure*2 ZA signal
*1 These signals are set in the initial setting. Using Pr.190 to Pr.192, output signals assigned to the device numbers can be changed.
For details of Pr.190 to Pr.192, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*2 The signals are fixed. They cannot be changed using parameters.
*3 No signal is assigned in the initial setting. Use Pr.313 to Pr.315 to assign signals to RX9 to RXB.
For details, refer to the description of Pr.313 to Pr.315 (Output terminal function selection) in the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*4 No signal is assigned in the initial setting. Use Pr.193 to Pr.196 to assign signals to RX5, RX8, RX16, and RX17.
For details, refer to the description of Pr.193 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) in the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).

 Details of the remote register

 Remote register (from the master module to the inverter)
• Remote register description
Device No. Signal Description
Set the monitor code to be monitored (refer to page 76). When "1" is set in RYC, data of the
RWw0 Monitor code 1, 2
specified monitor item will be stored in RWr0 and RWr1.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
71
 Device No. Signal Description
Specify the set frequency or rotations per minute (machine speed). At this time, whether to
write to the RAM or EEPROM is decided with the RYD and RYE settings. After setting the set
Set frequency*1*2 frequency in this register, set "1" in RYD or RYE to write the frequency. After writing of
frequency is completed, "1" is set in RXD or RXE in response to the input command. The
setting range is 0 to 590.00 Hz (0.01 Hz increments). Write "59000" when setting 590.00 Hz.
RWw1 When Pr.544 CC-Link extended setting = "0, 1, or 12" and Pr.804 Torque command
source selection = "3 or 5" during torque control under Real sensorless vector control or
Vector control, torque command values are specified. The value is written to the inverter
Torque command value
either by RYD or RYE. Pr.805 Torque command value (RAM) and Pr.806 Torque
command value (RAM, EEPROM) are updated as well. The setting range and the setting
increment depend on the Pr.804 setting. (Refer to page 78.)
Set an instruction code (refer to page 74) for an operation such as operation mode switching,
parameter read/write, error reference, and error clear. Set "1" in RYF to execute the
Link parameter extended corresponding instruction after completing the register setting. "1" is set in RXF after
RWw2
setting / instruction code completing the execution of the instruction. When a value other than "0" is set to Pr.544,
upper 8 bits are used for the link parameter extended setting.
Example) When reading Pr.160, instruction code is H0200.
Set the data specified by the instruction code of RWw2 (when required).
RWw3 Data to be written Set "1" in RYF after setting RWw2 and this register.
Set "0" when the write code is not required.
RWw4 Monitor code 3
RWw5 Monitor code 4 Set the monitor code to be monitored. By setting "1" in RYC after setting, the specified monitor
RWw6 Monitor code 5 data is stored in RWr4 to RWr7.
RWw7 Monitor code 6
Set the individual fault number of the fault history that you want to read. Fault records can be
read back to the tenth latest fault. (The value in the lower 8 bits is fixed to H00.)
RWw8 Fault record No.
Upper 8 bits: H00 (latest fault) to H09 (tenth latest fault)
When H0A to HFF is set to the lower 8 bits, "0" is returned.
Set the PID action set point.
RWw9 PID set point*3 Setting range: 0 to 100.00% • Input a value 100 times greater than the value to be
set. For example, enter "10000" when setting
Set the PID measured value.
RWwA PID measured value*3 Setting range: 0 to 100.00%
100.00%.
• For details of PID control, refer to the FR-E800
Set the PID deviation. Instruction Manual (Function).
RWwB PID deviation*3 Setting range: -100.00% to 100.00%
Set Pr.544 = "14, 18, or 38" and Pr.804 = "3 or 5" to specify the torque command value during
torque control under Real sensorless vector control or Vector control. The value is written to
Torque command value the inverter either by RYD or RYE. The values in Pr.805 and Pr.806 are updated at the same
time. The setting range and the setting increment depend on the Pr.804 setting. If the data
outside the range is set, the previous setting is retained.
RWwC Set Pr.544 = "14, 18, or 38", Pr.804 = "3 or 5", and Pr.810 Torque limit input method
selection = "2" to specify the torque limit value during speed control or position control under
Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, or PM sensorless vector control. The value is
Torque limit value
written to the inverter either by RYD or RYE. The values in Pr.805 and Pr.806 are updated
at the same time. The setting range and the setting increment depend on the Pr.804 setting
(absolute value). If the data outside the range is set, the previous setting is retained.
Set an instruction code (refer to page 74) for an operation such as operation mode switching,
RWw10, parameter read/write, error reference, and error clear. The instructions are executed in the
RWw12, following order by setting "1" in RYF after completing the register setting: RWw2, 10, 12, 14,
Link parameter extended
RWw14, 16, then 18. After completing the execution up to RWw18, "1" is set in RXF. Set HFFFF to
setting / instruction code
RWw16, disable an instruction by RWw10 to 18. (The instruction code of RWw2 is always executed.)
RWw18 The upper 8 bits are used for the link parameter extended setting.
Example) When reading Pr.160, instruction code is H0200.
RWw11, Set the data specified by the instruction code of RWw10, 12, 14, 16, and 18 (when required).
RWw13, RWw10 and 11, 12 and 13, 14 and 15, 16 and 17, and 18 and 19 correspond each other. Set
RWw15, Data to be written "1" in RYF after setting the instruction codes (RWw10, 12, 14, 16, and 18) and the
RWw17, corresponding register.
RWw19 Set "0" when the write data is not required.
*1 The display can be changed to rotations per minute (machine speed) using Pr.37 and Pr.53. For details, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual
(Function).
*2 When Pr.541 Frequency command sign selection = "1", the set frequency is a signed value. When the setting value is negative, the command
is the inverse from the start command.
Setting range: -327.68 to 327.67 Hz (-32768 to 32767), 0.01 Hz increments.
For the details, refer to page 66.
*3 Validity depends on the Pr.128, Pr.609, and Pr.610 settings. For details, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function). If the data outside
the range is set, the previous setting is retained.

72 2. Ethernet Communication
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
 Remote register (from the inverter to the master module)
• Remote register description
1
Device No. Signal Description
RWr0 First monitor value*1*2 When "1" is set in RYC, the monitor value is set to the lower 8 bits of the monitor code (RWw0).

RWr1
Second monitor value When "0" is set to the upper 8 bits of the monitor code (RWw0), the current output frequency is
set. When "1" is set in RYC while a value other than "0" is set to the upper 8 bits of the monitor
2
(output frequency*1*2) code (RWw0), the monitor value is set to the upper 8 bits of the monitor code (RWw0).
When "1" is set in RYD or RYE, the reply code for the frequency setting command is set. When
Reply code
(Pr.544 ≠ 0)
"1" is set in RYF, the reply code corresponding to the instruction code RWw2 is set. The value
"0" is set for a normal reply, and a value other than "0" is set for errors with data, mode, and
3
other. (Refer to page 73.)
Lower 8 bits of RWr2.
RWr2 Reply code 1
(Pr.544 ≠ 0)
When "1" is set in RYD or RYE, the reply code for the frequency setting command (torque
command / torque limit) is set. (Refer to page 73.)
4
Upper 8 bits of RWr2.
Reply code 2
When "1" is set in RYF, the reply code corresponding to the instruction code RWw2 is set. (Refer
(Pr.544 ≠ 0)

RWr3 Data to be read

to page 73.)
In a normal reply, a replay code for the instruction code is set.
5
RWr4 Third monitor value*1*2
RWr5 Fourth monitor value*1*2
RWr6 Fifth monitor value*1*2
When "1" is set in RYC, the monitor value specified to the corresponding monitor code (RWw4
to RWw7) is stored. 6
RWr7 Sixth monitor value*1*2
The data of the fault record No. specified in RWw8 is stored in the lower 8 bits. The specified
RWr8 Fault record (fault data)
fault record No. will be echoed back to the upper 8 bits. 7
Fault record (output
RWr9 The output frequency of the fault history No. specified in RWw8 is stored.
frequency)*3

RWrA
Fault record (output
current)
The output current of the fault history No. specified in RWw8 is always stored. 8
Fault record (output
RWrB The output voltage of the fault history No. specified in RWw8 is always stored.
voltage)

RWrC
Fault record
(energization time)
The energization time at the fault is always stored for the fault record No. specified in RWw8. 9
When "1" is set in RYF, the reply codes corresponding to the instruction code RWw10, 12, 14,
RWr10 to Reply code 16, and 18 are set. The value "0" is set for a normal reply, and a value other than "0" is set for
RWr19
Data to be read
faults with data, mode, and others. (Refer to page 73.)
In a normal reply, a replay code for the instruction code is set.
10
*1 When the item displayed in frequency is selected, the Pr.37 and Pr.53 settings are invalid.
*2 Use Pr.290 to enable display of negative numbers during monitoring. For details, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*3 The frequency is always displayed regardless of the settings in Pr.37 and Pr.53.

• Reply code description

The reply to the instruction execution command is set in RWr2, 10, 12, 14, 16, and 18. After the frequency setting (RYD
or RYE) or execution of instruction code (RYF), check the reply code (RWr2) in the remote register.
Item Data Item Fault record Remarks
No fault (Instruction codes are executed
H0000 Normal
without any fault.) • Reply code to RWr2 when
Parameter write is attempted when the Pr.544 = "0".
Reply code H0001 Write mode fault inverter is not in the stop status in the • Reply code to RWw10, 12, 14,
Network operation mode. 16, and 18 when Pr.544 = "18
H0002 Parameter selection fault Unregistered code is set. or 38".
H0003 Setting range fault Set data exceeds the permissible range.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
73
 Item Data Item Fault record Remarks
No fault (Instruction codes are executed
H00 Normal
without any fault.)
Parameter write is attempted when the
*1 H01 Write mode fault inverter is not in the stop status in the
Reply code 1 Network operation mode.
Frequency command (torque
H03 command / torque limit) The value outside the range is set.
setting range error Reply code to RWr2 when
Pr.544 ≠ "0".
No fault (Instruction codes are executed
H00 Normal
without any fault.)
Parameter write is attempted when the
Reply code 2 H01 Write mode fault inverter is not in the stop status in the
Network operation mode.
H02 Parameter selection fault Unregistered code is set.
H03 Setting range fault Set data exceeds the permissible range.
*1 The contents of the reply code 1 are changed when torque commands are given or the torque is limited (when Pr.544 = "14, 18, or 38").
The upper 4 bits of the reply code 1 are used as the reply code to the torque command / torque limit, and the lower 4 bits are used as the reply
code to the frequency command.
Bit15 Bit0

Reply code2 Reply code to Reply code to

the torque command / the frequency
torque limit command
Reply code1
Example) When the torque command is out of the setting range, the data is H0030.
Bit15 Bit0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

Reply code to
the torque command

 Instruction code
Set instruction codes using the remote register (RWw). (Refer to page 71.)
The definition read by the instruction code is stored in the remote register (RWr). (Refer to page 73.)
Read/ Instruction
Item Data description
write code
H0000: Network operation
Read H7B H0001: External operation, External JOG operation
H0002: PU operation, External/PU combined operation 1 or 2, PUJOG operation
Operation mode
H0000: Network operation
Write HFB H0001: External operation
H0002: PU operation (when Pr.79 = "6")

74 2. Ethernet Communication
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
 Read/ Instruction
Item Data description
write code
H0000 to HFFFF:
1
Output frequency /
rotations per minute Output frequency in 0.01 Hz increments (The display can be changed to the
Read H6F
rotations per minute (machine speed) using Pr.37 and Pr.53. Refer to the FR-E800
(machine speed)*1*2 Instruction Manual (Function).)
Output current Read H70 H0000 to HFFFF: Output current (hexadecimal) in 0.01 A increments 2
H0000 to HFFFF:
Output voltage Read H71
Output voltage (hexadecimal) in 0.1 V increments
Special monitor*2 Read H72 H0000 to HFFFF: Monitor data selected in the instruction code HF3 3
Special monitor Read H73 H01 to HFF: Monitor selection data
selection No. Write HF3*3 Refer to the monitor code description on page 76.

Monitor
H0000 to HFFFF: Two fault records per code
For data codes and details of fault records, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual 4
(Maintenance).
For instruction code H74,
b15 b8 b7 b0
read data H30A0
H74 Second latest fault Latest fault
b15 b8 b7 b0
5
Fault record Read H74 to H78 H75 Fourth latest fault Third latest fault 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

H76 Sixth latest fault Fifth latest fault Second latest fault
(H30)
Latest fault
(HA0)
6
H77 Eighth latest fault Seventh latest fault
Second latest fault ...... THT
H78 Tenth latest fault Ninth latest fault Latest fault ...... OPT
7
Read the set frequency or rotations per minute (machine speed) from the RAM or
Set frequency (RAM) H6D EEPROM.
H0000 to HE678: Set frequency in 0.01 Hz increments
Read
(The display can be changed to the rotations per minute (machine speed) using 8
Pr.37 and Pr.53. Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
Set frequency (EEPROM) H6E • When Pr.544 = "0, 1, or 12" and Pr.804 = "3 or 5" during torque control under Real
sensorless vector control or Vector control, torque command values are read.
The setting range depends on the Pr.804 setting. 9
Write the set frequency or rotations per minute (machine speed) into the RAM or
EEPROM.
Set frequency (RAM)*4 HED H0000 to HE678 (0 to 590.00 Hz): frequency in 0.01 Hz increments
(The display can be changed to the rotations per minute (machine speed) using
Pr.37 and Pr.53. Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
10
Write
• To change the set frequency consecutively, write data to the inverter RAM.
Set frequency (RAM and (Instruction code: HED)
HEE • When Pr.544 = "0, 1, or 12" and Pr.804 = "3 or 5" during torque control under Real
EEPROM)*4
sensorless vector control or Vector control, torque commands are given. The
setting range depends on the Pr.804 setting.

• Refer to the instruction codes in the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function) and
Read H00 to H6B write and/or read parameter values as required.
Writing to Pr.77 and Pr.79 is disabled.
Parameter When setting Pr.100 and later, set the link parameter extended setting.
• Set 65520 (HFFF0) as a parameter value "8888" and 65535 (HFFFF) as "9999".
Write H80 to HEB • When changing the parameter values frequently, set "1" in Pr.342 to write them
to the RAM. (For details, refer to page 282.)

Fault history clear Write HF4 H9696: Fault history is cleared.

All parameters return to initial values. Whether to clear communication parameters
or not can be selected according to the data.
• Parameter clear
H9696: Communication parameters are cleared.
H5A5A*5: Communication parameters are not cleared.
• All parameter clear
Parameter clear / All parameter
Write HFC H9966: Communication parameters are cleared.
clear
H55AA*5: Communication parameters are not cleared.
For the details of whether or not to clear parameters, refer to the FR-E800
Instruction Manual (Function). When clear is performed with H9696 or H9966,
communication related parameter settings also return to the initial values. When
resuming the operation, set the parameters again. Performing a clear will clear the
instruction code HEC, HF3, and HFF settings.
Inverter reset Write HFD H9696: Resets the inverter.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
75
 Read/ Instruction
Item Data description
write code

Link parameter extended Read H7F Parameter settings are changed according to the instruction code settings. For
*6 details of the settings, refer to the instruction code list in the FR-E800 Instruction
setting Write HFF Manual (Function).
Read or write of bias and gain parameters (instruction codes H5E to H61 and HDE
Read H6C to HE1 with the link parameter extended setting = "1", H11 to H23 and H91 to HA3
with the link parameter extended setting = "9").
Second parameter changing*7
H00: Frequency*8
Write HEC H01: Parameter-set analog value
H02: Analog value input from terminal
*1 When "100" is set in Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selection, the frequency setting value is monitored during a stop, and the output
frequency is monitored during running.
*2 Use Pr.290 to enable display of negative numbers during monitoring. For details, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*3 Write data is in hexadecimal, and only two digits are valid. (The upper two digits are ignored.)
*4 Setting from the remote register (RWw1) is also available.
*5 Turning OFF the power supply while clearing parameters with H5A5A or H55AA returns the communication parameter settings to the initial
settings.
*6 Setting is available only when Pr.544 = "0". Use RWw2 or RWw10, 12, 14, 16, and 18 for setting when Pr.544 ≠ "0". (Refer to page 72.)
*7 Reading or writing is available when the link parameter extended setting = "1 or 9".
*8 The gain frequency can be also written using Pr.125 (instruction code: H99) or Pr.126 (instruction code: H9A).

NOTE
• When a 32-bit parameter setting or monitor item is read and the value to be read exceeds HFFFF, HFFFF is returned.

 Monitor code
Various data of the inverter can be monitored by setting the special monitor selection No. of the instruction code and setting
the monitor code in the remote registers, RWw0 and RWw4 to 7.
• Use the monitor code (RWw0) to set the first monitor value (RWr0) in the lower 8 bits, and the second monitor value (RWr1)
in the upper 8 bits.
(Example) The monitor code (RWw0) will be H0602 to set the output current as the first monitor value (RWr0) and set the
running speed as the second monitor value (RWr1).
• When Pr.544 = "12, 14, 18, or 38", the values for the monitor code 3 (RWw4) to the monitor code 6 (RWw7) can be
selected.
First monitor and third–sixth monitor
Monitor code Second monitor (upper 8 bits) Unit
(lower 8 bits)
H00 Output frequency None (monitor value fixed to "0") 0.01 Hz
H01 Output frequency 0.01 Hz
H02 Output current 0.01 A
H03 Output voltage 0.1 V
. . .
. . .
. . .

NOTE
• The monitor codes from H01 onwards and their contents are the same as those of the RS-485 communication dedicated
monitor. For details of the monitor codes or monitor items, refer to the monitor display section in the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).
• When the item displayed in frequency is selected in the remote registers, RWw0 and RWw4 to RWw7, the Pr.37 and Pr.53
settings are invalid.

76 2. Ethernet Communication
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
 Communication speed and full-duplex/half-duplex selection (Pr.1426)
Use Pr.1426 Link speed and duplex mode selection to set the communication speed and the full-duplex or half-duplex 1
system. If the operation is not performed properly in the initial setting (Pr.1426 = "0"), set Pr.1426 according to the
specifications of the connected device.

Pr.1426 setting
Communication Full-duplex/half-
Remarks
2
speed duplex system
The communication speed and the communication mode (half-duplex/full-
Automatic Automatic duplex) are automatically negotiated to ensure the optimum setting. To set
0 (initial value)
negotiation negotiation automatic negotiation, auto negotiation setting is required also in the master 3
station.
1 100 Mbps Full duplex —
2 100 Mbps Half duplex —
3 10 Mbps Full duplex
4
The communication speed is fixed at 100 Mbps. Do not set 10 Mbps.
4 10 Mbps Half duplex

 IP filtering function (Ethernet) (Pr.1442 to Pr.1448) 5

• Set the IP address range for connectable network devices (Pr.1442 to Pr.1448) to limit the connectable devices. The
setting range for IP address of connectable network devices depends on the settings in Pr.1443 and Pr.1446, Pr.1444 and
Pr.1447, and Pr.1445 and Pr.1448. (Either of the settings can be larger than the other in Pr.1443 and Pr.1446, Pr.1444 6
and Pr.1447, and Pr.1445 and Pr.1448.)
[Setting example 1] Pr.1442 Pr.1443 Pr.1444 Pr.1445
IP filter address (Ethernet) 192 168 1 100 7
The range is between The range is between
the values set in both the values set in both
parameters.
Pr.1446 Pr.1447 Pr.1448
parameters.
8
IP filter address range specification
(Ethernet) ― 9999 3 150
In this case, the IP address range in which Ethernet communication is permitted is "192.168.x (1 to 3).xxx (100 to 150)".
9
[Setting example 2]
Pr.1442 Pr.1443 Pr.1444 Pr.1445

10
IP filter address (Ethernet) 192 168 2 100
The range is between
the values set in both
parameters.
Pr.1446 Pr.1447 Pr.1448
IP filter address range specification
(Ethernet) ― 9999 9999 50
In this case, the IP address range in which Ethernet communication is permitted is "192.168.2.xxx (50 to 100)".

• When Pr.1442 to Pr.1445 = "0 (initial value)", the function is invalid.

• When "9999 (initial value)" is set in Pr.1446 to Pr.1448, the range is invalid.

CAUTION
• The IP filtering function (Ethernet) (Pr.1442 to Pr.1448) is provided as a means to prevent unauthorized access, DoS
attacks, computer viruses, or other cyberattacks from external devices, but the function does not prevent such access
completely. In order to protect the inverter and the system against unauthorized access by external systems, take
additional security measures. We shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving inverter trouble and
system trouble by DoS attacks, unauthorized access, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks. The following are
examples of measures to prevent them.
- Install a firewall.
- Install a personal computer as a relay station, and control the relaying of transmission data using an application
program.
- Install an external device as a relay station to control access rights. (For the details of external devices used to control
access rights, contact the distributors of the external devices.)

2. Ethernet Communication
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
77
  Torque command / torque limit using the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Torque commands can be given or the torque can be limited on the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic under Real sensorless
vector control, Vector control, or PM sensorless vector control. The value is used to limit the torque during speed control or
position control, and to give a torque command during torque control. To limit the torque, set Pr.810 Torque limit input method
selection = "2". The torque command / torque limit setting method can be selected using Pr.804 Torque command source
selection. (Torque control cannot be performed with a PM motor.)
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
0 Torque command given by analog input via terminal 4
Torque command / torque limit using the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
1 • Torque command / torque limit (-400% to 400%) by the parameter setting
(Pr.805 or Pr.806)*1*2
Torque command / torque limit using the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
• Torque command / torque limit (-400% to 400%) by the parameter setting
3 (Pr.805 or Pr.806)*1*2
• Setting is available using the remote register RWw1 or RWwC (-400% to
400%).*2
Torque command source
804 0 4 Torque command given by 16-bit digital input (FR-A8AX)
selection
Torque command / torque limit using the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
• Torque command / torque limit (-327.68% to 327.67%) by the parameter
setting (Pr.805 or Pr.806)
5
(-327.68% to 327.67%)*1*2
• Setting is available using the remote register RWw1 or RWwC (-327.68% to
327.67%).*2
Torque command / torque limit using the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
6 • Torque command / torque limit (-327.68% to 327.67%) by the parameter
setting (Pr.805 or Pr.806)*1*2
0 Internal torque limit (torque limited by parameter settings)
Torque limit input method
810 0 1 External torque limit (torque limited by terminal 4)
selection
2 Internal torque limit 2 (torque limited by CC-Link IE Field Network Basic)
*1 The value can also be set using the operation panel.
*2 When a negative value is set as the torque limit, the torque is limited by the absolute value.

 List of I/O devices whose function is changed according to the parameter settings and the
control method
Real sensorless vector control / Vector control / PM
V/F control / Advanced magnetic sensorless vector control
Pr.544 setting I/O device
flux vector control Speed control / position
Torque control*3
control
Frequency setting / torque limit
— RYD Frequency setting command (RAM) Torque command (RAM)
command (RAM)
Frequency setting command (RAM, Frequency setting / torque limit Torque command (RAM,
— RYE
EEPROM) command (RAM, EEPROM) EEPROM)
Frequency setting / torque limit Torque command completion
— RXD Frequency setting completion (RAM)
completion (RAM) (RAM)
Frequency setting completion (RAM, Frequency setting / torque limit Torque command completion
— RXE
EEPROM) completion (RAM, EEPROM) (RAM, EEPROM)
0, 1, 12 Torque command*1
RWw1 Set frequency Set frequency
14, 18, 38 —
0, 1, 12 — —
RWwC —
14, 18, 38 Torque limit*1*2 Torque command*1
*1 Set Pr.804 = "3 or 5".
*2 Set Pr.810 = "2".
*3 Torque control cannot be performed with a PM motor.

78 2. Ethernet Communication
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
 Torque command setting method and the parameter for speed limit
Parameter 1
Pr.804 setting Pr.544 setting Torque command setting method (any one of the following) for speed
limit
• Set the torque command value in RWwn+1, and "1" in RYD or RYE.
• Set the instruction code HED or HEE in RWwn+2, the torque command value in 2
RWwn+3, and "1" in RYF. (The torque command value can be read using the
Pr.808,
0, 1, 12 instruction code H6D or H6E.)
Pr.809
• Set H08 in the link parameter extended setting, the instruction code H85 and H86 in
3, 5 RWwn+2, the torque command value in RWwn+3, and "1" in RYF. (Writing in Pr.805 or
Pr.806)
3
• Set the torque command value in RWwn+C, and "1" in RYD or RYE.
• Set H08 in the link parameter extended setting, the instruction code H85 and H86 in
14, 18, 38
RWwn+2, the torque command value in RWwn+3, and "1" in RYF. (Writing in Pr.805 or
Pr.806)
4
Pr.807
Set H08 in the link parameter extended setting, the instruction code H85 and H86 in
0, 1, 12, 14, 18,
1, 6 RWwn+2, the torque command value in RWwn+3, and "1" in RYF. (Writing in Pr.805 or
38

0, 4 —
Pr.806)
Torque command using the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic is not available.
5
 Torque limit setting method
Pr.804 Pr.810 Pr.544
Torque limit setting method (any one of the following)
6
setting setting setting
• Set the torque limit value in RWwn+C, and "1" in RYD or RYE.
3, 5 14, 18, 38 • Set H08 in the link parameter extended setting, the instruction code H85 and H86 in
2 RWwn+2, the torque limit value in RWwn+3, and "1" in RYF. (Writing in Pr.805 or Pr.806) 7
0, 1, 12, 14, Set H08 in the link parameter extended setting, the instruction code H85 and H86 in
1, 6
18, 38 RWwn+2, the torque limit value in RWwn+3, and "1" in RYF. (Writing in Pr.805 or Pr.806)

 Relationship between the Pr.804 setting, the setting range, and the actual torque command / 8
torque limit (when setting is made from CC-Link IE Field Network Basic communication)
Pr.804 setting Setting range Actual torque command Actual torque limit
1, 3 600 to 1400 (1% increments)*1 -400 to 400% 0 to 400% 9
-32768 to 32767 (two's
5, 6 -327.68 to 327.67% 0 to 327.67%
complement)*1

*1 The torque limit setting is defined as an absolute value.

10
 Programming examples
The following explains the programming examples for controlling the inverter with sequence programs.
Refer to
Item Program example
page
Reading the inverter status Reading the inverter status from the buffer memory of the master station 81
Setting the operation mode Selecting the Network operation mode 81
Setting the operation commands Commanding the forward rotation and middle speed signals 82
Setting the monitoring function Monitoring the output frequency 82
Reading a parameter value Reading the value of Pr.7 Acceleration time 83
Writing a parameter value Setting 3.0 seconds in Pr.7 Acceleration time 83
Frequency setting (speed setting) Setting to 50.00 Hz 84
Reading the fault records Reading the inverter faults 85
Inverter reset Resetting the inverter when an inverter error occurs 85

2. Ethernet Communication
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
79
 • System configuration example (when the MELSEC iQ-R series programmable controller is used)

Power Input module Output module

Programmable CPU
supply RX40C7 RY40PT5P
controller R04CPU
R61P (X20 to X2F) (Y30 to Y3F)

Hub

Inverter Inverter
(station Pr.544=0 (station Pr.544=0
No.1) No.2)

• Setting network parameters of the master station

In the programming example, network parameters are set as follows.
Item Setting condition
Station type CC-Link IE Field Network Basic (master station)
Start I/O 0000
Quantity 2
Remote input (RX) X1000
Remote output (RY) Y1000
Remote register (RWr) W0
Remote register (RWw) W100
Retry count 3

 Schematic diagrams of remote I/O and remote register devices

• The following diagram shows the remote I/O (RX and RY) transmitted between the programmable controller CPU and
remote stations. Shaded areas show the devices actually used.

Remote station
Programmable controller CPU (station 1)

X100F to X1000 RX0F to RX00

X101F to X1010 RX1F to RX10
X102F to X1020
X103F to X1030
RY0F to RY00
X104F to X1040
RY1F to RY10
X105F to X1050

Remote station
Y100F to Y1000 (station 2)
Y101F to Y1010
Y102F to Y1020 RX0F to RX00
Y103F to Y1030 RX1F to RX10
Y104F to Y1040
Y105F to Y1050
RY0F to RY00
RY1F to RY10

80 2. Ethernet Communication
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
 • The following diagram shows the remote register areas (RWw and RWr) transmitted between the programmable controller
CPU and remote stations. Shaded areas show the devices actually used.
1
Remote station
Programmable controller CPU (station 1)
For writing
W100 RWw0 2
W101 RWw1
W102 RWw2
W103 RWw3

W11F
:
RWr0 3
W120 RWr1
W121 RWr2
W122 RWr3
W123
: 4
W13F
Remote station
For reading (station 2)
W000
W001
W002 RWw0 5
W003 RWw1
: RWw2
W01F RWw3
W020
W021 RWr0 6
W022 RWr1
W023 RWr2
: RWr3
W03F
7
 Programming example for reading the inverter status
The following program turns ON the signal Y00 of the output unit when the station 1 inverter starts running.
8
SM1536 SD1536.0 SD1540.0 M0
(0) Check the data link status of the station 1

M0 X1002 Y30
9
(4) Turn on the output unit (Y00)

10
(7) END

X101F X1000
Remote input
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
One RXF to RX0
station RX1F to RX10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

[Inverter status]
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24 b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

[Inverter status]

Inverter status
b0 : Forward running b7 : Fault (ABC)*1
b1 : Reverse running b8 : (NET Y2)*1
b2 : Running (RUN)*1 b9 : (DO0)*1
b3 : Up to frequency b10 : (DO1)*1
b4 : Overload warning b11 : (DO2)*1
b5 : (NET Y1)*1 b22 : (NET Y3)*1
b6 : Frequency detection (FU)*1 b23 : (NET Y4)*1

*1 These signals are assigned in the initial status. Use Pr.190 to Pr.196 and Pr.313 to Pr.315 (Output terminal function selection) to change the
output signals.

 Programming example for setting the operation mode

The following explains a program to write various data to the inverter.
The following program changes the operation mode of the station 1 inverter to network operation.
• Operation mode write code: HFB (hexadecimal)
• Network operation set data: H0000 (hexadecimal) (Refer to page 74.)

2. Ethernet Communication
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
81
 • The reply code to the instruction code execution is set in D2. (Refer to page 73.)

SM1536 SD1536.0 SD1540.0 M0

(0) Check the data link status of the station 1
M0 X20
(4) PLS M300

M300
(8) SET M301

M301 X100F
(10) MOV H0FB W102
Write operation mode write code (HFB)
H0 W103
to RWw2 and set data (H0000) to RWw3.
MOV

SET Y100F Turn on the instruction code execution

request (RY0F)
RST M301

SET M302

M302 X100F Read reply code (RWr2) to D2 when the

(19) MOV W2 D2 instruction code execution completion (RX0F)
turns on.
RST Y100F Turn off the instruction code execution
request (RY0F)
RST M302

(25) END

 Programming example for setting the operation commands

The following program gives a forward rotation command and middle-speed operation command to the station 1 inverter.

SM1536 SD1536.0 SD1540.0 M0

(0) Check the data link status of the station 1
M0 X20 Y1000
(4) Forward rotation command (RY00)
Y1003
Middle speed operation command (RY03)

(8) END

Y101F Y1000
b15 b7 b0
RY0F to RY00
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 One station
RY1F to RY10

[Run command] 1: ON
Middle speed Forward rotation 0: OFF
b31 b23 b16
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

[Run command]
Run command
b0 : Forward rotation command b8 : (NET X1)*1
b1 : Reverse rotation command b9 : Output stop (MRS)*1
b2 : High-speed operation command (RH)*1 b10 : (NET X2)*1
b3 : Middle-speed operation command (RM)*1 b11 : (RES)*1
b4 : Low-speed operation command (RL)*1 b27 : (NET X3)*1
b5 : JOG operation selection 2 b28 : (NET X4)*1
b6 : Second function selection b29 : (NET X5)*1
b7 : Current input selection

*1 These signals are assigned in the initial status. Use Pr.180 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to change the input signals. Some
signals are not controllable by a command from the programmable controller depending on the setting. (For details, refer to the Instruction Manual
(Function).)

 Programming example for monitoring the output frequency

The following explains a program to read monitor functions of the inverter.

The following program reads the output frequency of the station 1 inverter to output to D1.
Output frequency read code: H0001 (hexadecimal)
For the monitor codes, refer to page 76.

82 2. Ethernet Communication
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Example) The output frequency of 60 Hz is indicated as "H1770 (6000)".

1
SM1536 SD1536.0 SD1540.0 M0
(0) Check the data link status of the station 1
M0 X20
Set monitor code (H01) of output frequency
2
(4) MOV H1 W100
to RWw0.
Y100C
Turn on the monitor command (RY0C)
X100C
Read output frequency (RWr0) to D1
MOV W0 D1
when the monitoring (RX0C) turns on.
(12)
M0 X20 Y1000
3
Y1003

(16) END
4
 Programming example for the parameter reading
The following program reads Pr.7 Acceleration time of the station 1 inverter to output to D1.
• Pr.7 Acceleration time reading instruction code: H07 (hexadecimal)
5
• For the instruction codes of parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Function).
• The reply code to the instruction code execution is set in D2. (Refer to page 73.)
6
SM1536 SD1536.0 SD1540.0 M0
(0) Check the data link status of the station 1

(4)
M0 X20
PLS M300
7
M300
(8) SET M301

8
M301 X100F
(10) MOV H7 W102 Write Pr.7 read code (H07) to RWw2.

SET Y100F Turn on the instruction code execution

request (RY0F)

9
RST M301

SET M302

M302 X100F
(17) MOV W3 D1 Read acceleration time (RWr3) and reply code

MOV W2 D2
(RWr2) to D1 and D2 when the instruction code
execution completion (RX0F) turns on. 10
RST Y100F Turn off the instruction code execution
request (RY0F)
RST M302

(25) END

NOTE
• For the parameter assigned the number of 100 or higher, change the link parameter extended setting (set it to the one other
than H00). For the setting values, refer to the instruction code list of the Instruction Manual (Function).

 Programming example for the parameter writing

The following program changes the setting value in Pr.7 Acceleration time of the station 1 inverter to 3.0 seconds.
• Acceleration time writing instruction code: H87 (hexadecimal)
• Acceleration time setting data: K30 (decimal)
For the instruction codes of parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Function).

2. Ethernet Communication
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
83
 The reply code to the instruction code execution is set in D2. (Refer to page 73.)

SM1536 SD1536.0 SD1540.0 M0

(0) Check the data link status of the station 1
M0 X20
(4) PLS M300

M300
(8) SET M301

M301 X100F
(10) MOV H87 W102
Write Pr.7 write (H87) to RWw2 and
acceleration time setting data (K30) to RWw3.
MOV K30 W103

SET Y100F Turn on the instruction code execution request (RY0F)

RST M301

SET M302

M302 X100F
Read reply code (RWr2) to D2 when the instruction
(19) MOV W2 D2
code execution completion (RX0F) turns on.

RST Y100F Turn off the instruction code execution request (RY0F)

RST M302

(25) END

NOTE
• For the parameter assigned the number of 100 or higher, change the link parameter extended setting (set it to the one other
than H00). For the setting values, refer to the instruction code list of the Instruction Manual (Function).
• For other functions, refer to the instruction codes (refer to page 74).

 Programming example for frequency setting

The following program changes the frequency setting of the station 1 inverter to 50.00 Hz.
• Set frequency: K5000 (decimal)
• The reply code to the instruction code execution is set in D2. (Refer to page 73.)

SM1536 SD1536.0 SD1540.0 M0

(0) Check the data link status of the station 1
M0 X20
(4) PLS M300

M300
(8) SET M301

M301 X100D
(10) MOV K5000 W101 Write set frequency to RWw1.

SET
Turn off the frequency setting
Y100D
command RAM (RY0D)
RST M301

SET M302

M302 X100D
MOV
Read reply code (RWr2) to D2 when the
(17) W2 D2
frequency setting completion (RX0D) turns on.
RST
Turn off the frequency setting command RAM
Y100D
(RY0D)
RST M302

(23) END

NOTE
• To change the set frequency continuously from a programmable controller, check that the frequency setting complete (for
example, X100D) turns ON, and the reply code from the remote register is H0000. Then change the setting data (for example,
W101) continuously.
• To write the set frequency to the EEPROM, change the following points in the program shown above.
- Frequency setting command (from Y100D to Y100E)
- Frequency setting completion (from X100D to X100E)

84 2. Ethernet Communication
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
 <Timing chart when writing to RAM> <Timing chart when writing to EEPROM>

Y100D Y100E
1
*2
W101 W101

Inverter Inverter
*1
2
running running
frequency frequency Reflect to the inverter when Y100E turns on

3
*1 To the EEPROM, a writing is performed only once after the command Y100E turns ON.
*2 If the set data is changed at the command Y100E ON, the change is not applied to the inverter.

 Programming example for the fault record reading

The following program reads the fault records of the station 1 inverter to output to D1.
4
• Fault history No. 1 and 2 reading instruction code: H74 (hexadecimal)
For the error codes, refer to the Instruction Manual (Maintenance).
The reply code to the instruction code execution is set in D2. (Refer to page 73.)
5

(0)
SM1536 SD1536.0 SD1540.0 M0
Check the data link status of the station 1 6
M0 X20
(4) PLS M300

M300
(8)

M301 X100F
SET M301

Write error history No.1 and No.2 read

7
(10) MOV H74 W102
code (H74) to RWw2.
SET
Turn on the instruction code execution request
Y100F
(RY0F)
RST M301
8
SET M302

9
M302 X100F
(17) MOV W3 D1 Read alarm data (RWr3) and reply code
(RWr2) to D1 and D2 when the instruction
MOV W2 D2 code execution completion (RX0F) turns on.
Turn off the instruction code execution request
10
RST Y100F
(RY0F)
RST M302

(25) END

 Programming example for resetting the inverter at an inverter fault

The following program resets the station 1 inverter at an inverter fault.

SM1536 SD1536.0 SD1540.0 M0

(0) Check the data link status of the station 1
M0 X101A X20 Y101A Turn on the error reset request flag (RY1A)
(4)
Turn off the error reset request flag (RY1A)
when the error status flag (RX1A) is off.
(8) END

NOTE
• The inverter reset with the flag RY1A shown above is enabled at an inverter fault only.
• When Pr.349 Communication reset selection = "0", inverter reset is available independently of the operation mode.
• When using the instruction code execution request (RY0F) with the instruction code (HFD) and data (H9696) to reset the
inverter, set a value other than "0" in Pr.340 Communication startup mode selection or change the operation mode to the
Network operation mode. (For the program example, refer to page 81.)
• Refer to page 287 for operation conditions of inverter reset.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
85
  Instructions
 Operating and handling instructions
• The inverter only accepts the commands from the programmable controller during operation using the CC-Link IE Field
Network Basic. Operation commands input from external devices are ignored.
• If multiple inverters have the same station number, the communication cannot be performed properly.
• The inverter protective function (E.EHR) is activated if data communication stops for more than the time set in Pr.1432
Ethernet communication check time interval due to a programmable controller fault, an open Ethernet cable etc. during
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic operation.
• If the programmable controller (master station) is reset during operation through the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic or if
the programmable controller is powered off, data communication stops and the inverter protective function (E.EHR) is
activated. To reset the programmable controller (master station), switch the operation mode to the External operation once,
then reset the programmable controller.
• When Pr.340 = "0", any inverter whose main power is restored is reset to return to the External operation mode. To resume
the Network operation, therefore, set the operation mode to the Network operation using the sequence program.
Set a value other than "0" in Pr.340 to start in the Network operation mode after inverter reset. (For details of Pr.340, refer
to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)

 Troubleshooting
Description Point to be checked
Communication is not established. Check that the communication speed is not set to 10 Mbps.
Check that the Ethernet cable is installed correctly. (Check for contact fault, break in the cable, etc.)
Operation mode does not switch to the Check that the inverter is in the External operation mode.
Network operation mode. Check that the operation mode switching program is running.
Check that the operation mode switching program has been written correctly.
Check that the inverter starting program is running.
Inverter does not start in the Network
Check that the inverter starting program has been written correctly.
operation mode.
Check that Pr.338 Communication operation command source is not set to External.

2.6.5 Group number setting

Set a group number to each remote station to divide remote stations into groups and perform cyclic transmission by the group.
By grouping the remote stations by their reference response times, cyclic transmission can be performed smoothly regardless
of the differences of the reference response times. (Refer to the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic Reference Manual (SH-
081684ENG) for the details.)
• Star topology

Group No.1∗1

Group No.2∗2

86 2. Ethernet Communication
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
• Line topology

2
Group No.1∗1 Group No.2∗2
*1
*2
The number of occupied stations for one group is up to 16.
Up to four groups can be organized.
3

10

2. Ethernet Communication
2.6 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
87
 2.7 MODBUS/TCP

2.7.1 Outline
The MODBUS/TCP protocol allows transmission of MODBUS messages via Ethernet communication.
Some functions are not supported depending on the date of manufacture of the inverter. For details of specification changes,
refer to page 290.

 Communication specifications
The communication specifications are shown in the following table.
Item Description
Communication protocol MODBUS/TCP protocol
Conforming standard OPEN MODBUS/TCP SPECIFICATION
Time delay setting Not available
*1 3
Maximum number of connections
Topology Line, star, or a combination of line and star
Number of simultaneously
Server function 1 to 3
acceptable request messages

*1 This indicates the number of connections which can be simultaneously established by the inverter. The maximum number of connected units
depends on the maximum number of connections of the client and the number of connections per inverter. For example, when the maximum
number of connections of the client is 64 and one connection is used per inverter, up to 64 units can be connected. For details, refer to the User's
Manual of the client.

2.7.2 Initial setting for MODBUS/TCP

Use the following parameters to perform required settings for Ethernet communication between the inverter and other devices.
To make communication between other devices and the inverter, perform the initial settings of the inverter parameters to match
the communication specifications of the devices. Data communication cannot be made if the initial settings are not made or if
there is any setting error.
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
1427 Ethernet function selection
5001
N630*1 1 502, 5000 to 5002,
1428 Ethernet function selection 5006 to 5008, 5010 to
45237
N631*1 2 5013, 9999, 34962*3,
Set the application, protocol, etc.
1429 Ethernet function selection 44818*2, 45237,
45238
N632*1 3 45238, 47808*2,
1430 Ethernet function selection 61450
9999
N633*1 4
Ethernet communication is available, but the inverter output
0
is shut off in the NET operation mode.
Set the interval of the communication check (signal loss
detection) time for all devices with IP addresses in the range
1432 Ethernet communication
1.5 s specified for Ethernet command source selection (Pr.1449
N644 check time interval 0.1 to 999.8 s
to Pr.1454).
If a no-communication state persists for longer than the
permissible time, the inverter output will be shut off.
9999 No communication check (signal loss detection)

88 2. Ethernet Communication
2.7 MODBUS/TCP
 Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
1449 Ethernet command source
1
*1 0
N670 selection IP address 1
1450 Ethernet command source
0
N671*1 selection IP address 2
0 to 255 2
1451 Ethernet command source To limit the network devices that send the operation or
0
N672*1 selection IP address 3 speed command through the Ethernet network, set the
1452 range of IP addresses of the devices.
Ethernet command source
N673*1 selection IP address 4
0 When Pr.1449 to Pr.1452 = "0 (initial value)", no IP address 3
is specified for command source selection via Ethernet. In
1453 Ethernet command source this case, operation commands cannot be sent via Ethernet.
selection IP address 3 range 9999
N674*1 specification
Ethernet command source
0 to 255, 9999 4
1454
selection IP address 4 range 9999
N675*1 specification
*1
*2
The setting is applied after an inverter reset or next power-ON.
The setting is available for the FR-E800-(SC)EPA and FR-E806-SCEPA.
5
*3 The setting is available for the FR-E800-(SC)EPB and FR-E806-SCEPB.

NOTE
• The monitor items and parameter settings can be read during communication with the Pr.1432 Ethernet communication
6
check time interval = "0 (initial value)" setting, but such operation will become faulty once the operation mode is changed to
the NET operation mode. When the NET operation mode is selected as the start-up operation mode, communication is
performed once, then an Ethernet communication fault (E.EHR) occurs. 7
To perform operation or parameter writing via communication, set Pr.1432 to "9999" or a value larger than the communication
cycle or retry time setting. (Refer to page 90.)

8
 Ethernet function selection (Pr.1427 to Pr.1430)
To select MODBUS/TCP for the application, set "502" (MODBUS/TCP) in any of Pr.1427 to Pr.1430 Ethernet function
selection 1 to 4. (Refer to page 226.) 9
 Ethernet IP address for command source selection (Pr.1449 to Pr.1454)
• To limit the network devices that send the operation or speed command through the Ethernet network, set the range of IP
10
addresses of the devices.
• When Pr.1449 to Pr.1452 = "0 (initial value)", no IP address is specified for command source selection via Ethernet. In this
case, operation commands cannot be sent via Ethernet.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.7 MODBUS/TCP
89
 • The setting range for command source selection depends on the settings in Pr.1451 and Pr.1453, and Pr.1452 and
Pr.1454. (Either of the settings can be larger than the other in Pr.1451 and Pr.1453, and Pr.1452 and Pr.1454.)

[Setting example 1]
Configuration

Client Server 1 Server 2

iQ-R R08CPU FR-E800 FR-E800
192.168.50.100 192.168.50.1 192.168.50.2
To allow the client to control the servers, set the parameters in servers 1 and 2 as follows to specify the IP address range for
Ethernet command source selection.
Set the IP address of the client in the engineering software (GX Works3) within the range from 192.168.50.100 to 192.168.50.110.

Pr.1449 Pr.1450 Pr.1451 Pr.1452

Ethernet IP address
for command source selection 192 168 50 100

The range is between

the values set in both
parameters.
Pr.1453 Pr.1454
Command source selection range setting
for the Ethernet IP address ― ― 9999 110

In this case, the IP address range in which Ethernet communication is permitted is "192.168.50.xxx (100 to 110)".
[Setting example 2]
Pr.1449 Pr.1450 Pr.1451 Pr.1452
Ethernet IP address
192 168 1 100
for command source selection
The range is between The range is between
the values set in both the values set in both
parameters. parameters.
Pr.1453 Pr.1454
Command source selection range setting
for the Ethernet IP address ― ― 3 150

In this case, the IP address range for command source selection via Ethernet communication is
"192.168.x (1 to 3).xxx (100 to 150)".

• When "9999 (initial value)" is set in Pr.1453 or Pr.1454, the range is invalid.

NOTE
• When four or more clients attempt a connection to the inverter, the connection attempted from outside of the IP address range
set for Ethernet command source selection will be forced to be closed in order from the oldest.

 Ethernet communication check time interval (Pr.1432)

• If a signal loss (communication stop) is detected between the inverter and all the devices with IP addresses in the range
for Ethernet command source selection (Pr.1449 to Pr.1454) as a result of a signal loss detection, a communication error
(E.EHR) occurs and the inverter output will be shut off.
• When "9999" is set in Pr.1432, the communication check (signal loss detection) will not be performed.
• The monitor items and parameter settings can be read via Ethernet when "0" is set in Pr.1432, but a communication error
(E.EHR) occurs instantly when the operation mode is switched to the Network operation.
• A signal loss detection is made when any of 0.1 s to 999.8 s is set in Pr.1432. In order to enable the signal loss detection,
data must be sent by connected devices at an interval equal to or less than the time set for the communication check. (The
inverter makes a communication check (clearing of communication check counter) regardless of the station number setting
of the data sent from the client.)

90 2. Ethernet Communication
2.7 MODBUS/TCP
 • Communication check is started at the first communication when the inverter operates in the Network operation mode and
the command source is specified as communication via the Ethernet connector.
Example) When Pr.1432 = 0.1 to 999.8 s
1
Operation mode External Network

Connected device 2
Inverter
Inverter
Connected device
Check starts Fault (E.EHR) 3
Pr.1432
Communication
check counter Time 4
E.EHR OFF ON

LF OFF ON 5

2.7.3 Parameters related to MODBUS/TCP 6

The following parameters are used for MODBUS/TCP communication. Set the parameters as required.
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Setting range

1426
value
7
Link speed and duplex mode Set the communication speed and the communication
0 0 to 4
N641*1 selection mode (full-duplex/half-duplex).
1442
N660*1
IP filter address 1 (Ethernet) 0
8
1443
IP filter address 2 (Ethernet) 0
N661*1
0 to 255
1444
N662*1
IP filter address 3 (Ethernet) 0 9
Set the range of connectable IP addresses for the network
1445 devices.
IP filter address 4 (Ethernet) 0
N663*1 (When Pr.1442 to Pr.1445 = "0 (initial value)", the function
1446 IP filter address 2 range
9999
is invalid.) 10
*1 specification (Ethernet)
N664
1447 IP filter address 3 range
9999 0 to 255, 9999
N665*1 specification (Ethernet)
1448 IP filter address 4 range
9999
N666*1 specification (Ethernet)
*1 The setting is applied after an inverter reset or next power-ON.

 Communication speed and full-duplex/half-duplex selection (Pr.1426)

Use Pr.1426 Link speed and duplex mode selection to set the communication speed and the full-duplex or half-duplex
system. If the operation is not performed properly in the initial setting (Pr.1426 = "0"), set Pr.1426 according to the
specifications of the connected device.
Communication Full-duplex/half-
Pr.1426 setting Remarks
speed duplex system
The communication speed and the communication mode (half-duplex/full-
Automatic Automatic
0 (initial value) duplex) are automatically negotiated to ensure the optimum setting. To set
negotiation negotiation
automatic negotiation, auto negotiation setting is required also in the client.
1 100 Mbps Full duplex —
2 100 Mbps Half duplex —
3 10 Mbps Full duplex —
4 10 Mbps Half duplex —

2. Ethernet Communication
2.7 MODBUS/TCP
91
  IP filtering function (Ethernet) (Pr.1442 to Pr.1448)
• Set the IP address range for connectable network devices (Pr.1442 to Pr.1448) to limit the connectable devices. The
setting range for IP address of connectable network devices depends on the settings in Pr.1443 and Pr.1446, Pr.1444 and
Pr.1447, and Pr.1445 and Pr.1448. (Either of the settings can be larger than the other in Pr.1443 and Pr.1446, Pr.1444
and Pr.1447, and Pr.1445 and Pr.1448.)
[Setting example 1] Pr.1442 Pr.1443 Pr.1444 Pr.1445
IP filter address (Ethernet) 192 168 1 100
The range is between The range is between
the values set in both the values set in both
parameters. parameters.
Pr.1446 Pr.1447 Pr.1448
IP filter address range specification
(Ethernet) ― 9999 3 150
In this case, the IP address range in which Ethernet communication is permitted is "192.168.x (1 to 3).xxx (100 to 150)".

[Setting example 2]
Pr.1442 Pr.1443 Pr.1444 Pr.1445
IP filter address (Ethernet) 192 168 2 100
The range is between
the values set in both
parameters.
Pr.1446 Pr.1447 Pr.1448
IP filter address range specification
(Ethernet) ― 9999 9999 50
In this case, the IP address range in which Ethernet communication is permitted is "192.168.2.xxx (50 to 100)".

• When Pr.1442 to Pr.1445 = "0 (initial value)", the function is invalid.

• When "9999 (initial value)" is set in Pr.1446 to Pr.1448, the range is invalid.

CAUTION
• The IP filtering function (Ethernet) (Pr.1442 to Pr.1448) is provided as a means to prevent unauthorized access, DoS
attacks, computer viruses, or other cyberattacks from external devices, but the function does not prevent such access
completely. In order to protect the inverter and the system against unauthorized access by external systems, take
additional security measures. We shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving inverter trouble and
system trouble by DoS attacks, unauthorized access, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks. The following are
examples of measures to prevent them.
- Install a firewall.
- Install a personal computer as a relay station, and control the relaying of transmission data using an application
program.
- Install an external device as a relay station to control access rights. (For the details of external devices used to control
access rights, contact the distributors of the external devices.)

 Message format
Request
Response
Within 10 ms∗1

*1 The chart shows the performance when the inverter is connected to a client on a 1:1 basis. (It takes 10 ms or more for Parameter clear, All
parameter clear, or accessing multiple registers.)
• Query
A message is sent to the server (the inverter) having the address specified by the client.
• Normal Response
After the query from the client is received, the server executes the request function, and returns the corresponding normal
response to the client.
• Error Response
When an invalid function code, address or data is received by the server, the error response is returned to the client.
This response is appended with an error code that indicates the reason why the request from the client could not be
executed.

92 2. Ethernet Communication
2.7 MODBUS/TCP
 Message frame (protocol)
• Communication method 1
Basically, the client sends a query message (inquiry), and servers return a response message (response). At normal
communication, the transaction identifier, protocol identifier, unit identifier, and function code are copied as they are, and
at erroneous communication (illegal function code or data code), bit 7 (= H80) of the function code is turned ON, and the 2
error code is set at data bytes.
Query message from client
Transaction Identifier Transaction Identifier
3
Protocol Identifier Protocol Identifier
Length Field Length Field

4
Unit Identifier Unit Identifier
Function Code Function Code

Eight-Bit Eight-Bit
Data Bytes Data Bytes
5
Response message from server

Message frames have the six message fields shown in the figures above.
• Details of protocol 6
The following table explains the six message fields.
Transaction identifier
2 × 8 bits
Protocol identifier
2 × 8 bits
Length field
2 × 8 bits
Unit identifier
8 bits
Function
8 bits
Data
n × 8 bits
7
Message field Description
The client adds the data for the purpose of transaction control.
Transaction identifier
The same data is returned in the response from the server. 8
Fixed to 0. (When the server receives data other than 0, it does not send the response message.)
Protocol identifier
"0" is returned in the response from the server.
Length field
Unit identifier
The data length from the unit identifier to the data is stored in byte.
0, 255
9
"1 to 255" can be set as the function code in the single-byte (8-bit) length filed. The client sets the function to be
sent to the server as the request, and the server performs the requested operation. Refer to the function code
Function code
list for details of the supported function codes. An error response is generated when a function code other than
those in the function code list is set.
10
The normal response from the server contains the function code set by the client. The error response contains
H80 and the function code.
The format changes according the function code. (Refer to page 94.) The data, for example, includes the byte
Data
count, number of bytes, and accessing content of holding registers.

 Function code list

Message
Function name Read/write Code Outline format
reference page
The data of the holding registers is read.
The various data of the inverter can be read from MODBUS
registers.
System environmental variable (Refer to page 100.)
Monitor code (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual
Read holding registers Read H03 page 94
(Function).)
Fault history (Refer to page 102.)
Model information monitor (Refer to page 102.)
Inverter parameters (Refer to page 101.)
CiA402 drive profile (Refer to page 103.)
Data is written to a holding register.
Data can be written to MODBUS registers to output instructions
Write Single Register Write H06 to the inverter or set parameters. page 95
System environmental variable (Refer to page 100.)
Inverter parameters (Refer to page 101.)
Functions are diagnosed. (Communication check only)
A communication check can be made since the query message
Diagnostics Read H08 is sent and the query message is returned as it is as the return page 95
message (subfunction code H00 function).
Subfunction code H00 (Return query data).

2. Ethernet Communication
2.7 MODBUS/TCP
93
 Message
Function name Read/write Code Outline format
reference page
Data is written to multiple consecutive holding registers.
Data can be written to consecutive multiple MODBUS registers to
output instructions to the inverter or set parameters.
Write Multiple Registers Write H10 page 96
System environmental variable (Refer to page 100.)
Inverter parameters (Refer to page 101.)
CiA402 drive profile (Refer to page 103.)
The number of registers that were successfully accessed by the
previous communication is read.
Queries by function codes H03, H06, and H10 are supported.
Read holding register The number and start address of holding registers successfully
Read H46 page 97
access log accessed by the previous communication are returned.
"0" is returned for both the number and start address for queries
other than function codes H03, H06, and H10.
When the connection is closed, the data in the log is cleared.

 Read holding registers (reading data of holding registers) (H03 or 03)

• Query message
a. Transaction b. Protocol d. Unit e. Function f. Starting g. Quantity of
c. Length field
identifier identifier identifier code address registers
H L H L H L H03 H L H L
(8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
• Normal response (Response message)
a. Transaction b. Protocol d. Unit e. Function h. Byte
c. Length field i. Register Value
identifier identifier identifier code Count
H L H L H L H03 H L ...
(8 bits) (8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (n × 16 bits)
• Query message setting
Message Description
The client adds the data for the purpose of transaction control.
a Transaction identifier
The same data is returned in the response from the server.
Fixed to 0. (When the server receives data other than 0, it does not send the response message.)
b Protocol identifier
"0" is returned in the response from the server.
c Length field The data length from the unit identifier to the data is stored in byte.
d Unit identifier 0, 255
e Function code Set H03.
Set the holding register address from which to start reading the data.
f Starting address Starting address = start register address (decimal) - 40001 (Except for the CiA402 drive profile)
For example, when starting address 0001 is set, the data of holding register address 40002 is read.
g Quantity of registers Set the number of holding registers for reading data. Data can be read from up to 125 registers.
• Content of normal response
Message Description
The setting range is H02 to HFA (2 to 250).
h Byte count
Twice the number of reads specified by (g) is set.
The amount of data specified by (g) is set. Read data is output Hi bytes first followed by Lo bytes,
i Register value and is arranged as follows: data of start address, data of start address+1, data of start address+2,
and so forth.

 Example) Read the register values of 41004 (Pr.4) to 41006 (Pr.6) from the inverter.
Query message
Transaction Quantity of
Protocol identifier Length field Unit identifier Function code Starting address
identifier registers
*1 *1 H00 H00 H00 H06 HFF H03 H03 HEB H00 H03
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
*1 A given value is set.
Normal response (Response message)
Transaction Protocol Unit Function Byte
Length field Register value
identifier identifier identifier code count
*1 *1 H00 H00 H00 H09 HFF H03 H06 H17 H70 H0B HB8 H03 HE8
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

94 2. Ethernet Communication
2.7 MODBUS/TCP
 *1 The values are the same as those in the query message.
Read value
Register 41004 (Pr.4): H1770 (60.00 Hz) 1
Register 41005 (Pr.5): H0BB8 (30.00 Hz)
Register 41006 (Pr.6): H03E8 (10.00 Hz)
2
 Write single register (writing data to holding registers) (H06 or 06)
• The content of the system environmental variables and inverter parameters (refer to page 100) assigned to the holding
register area can be written. 3
• Query message
a. Transaction b. Protocol d. Unit e. Function f. Register
c. Length field g. Register Value
identifier identifier identifier code Address 4
H L H L H L H06 H L H L
(8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
• Normal response (Response message)
5
a. Transaction b. Protocol d. Unit e. Function f. Register
c. Length field g. Register Value
identifier identifier identifier code Address
H L H L H L H06 H L H L
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
(8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) 6
• Query message setting
Message Description

a Transaction identifier
The client adds the data for the purpose of transaction control. 7
The same data is returned in the response from the server.
Fixed to 0. (When the server receives data other than 0, it does not send the response message.)
b Protocol identifier
"0" is returned in the response from the server.
c Length field The data length from the unit identifier to the data is stored in byte. 8
d Unit identifier 0, 255
e Function code Set H06.

f Register address
Set the holding register address to write data to.
Register address = holding register address (decimal) - 40001
9
For example, when register address 0001 is set, data is written to holding register address 40002.
g Register value Set the data to write to the holding register. Write data is fixed at 2 bytes.
• Content of normal response 10
With a normal response, the contents in the response are the same as those in (a) to (g) of the query message.

 Example) Write 60 Hz (H1770) to register 40014 (running frequency RAM) in the inverter.
Query message
Transaction Function
Protocol identifier Length field Unit identifier Register address Register value
identifier code
*1 *1 H00 H00 H00 H06 HFF H06 H00 H0D H17 H70
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
*1 A given value is set.
Normal response (Response message)
The same data as those in the query message

 Diagnostics (diagnosis of functions) (H08 or 08)

• A communication check can be made since the query message is sent and the query message is returned as it is as the
return message (subfunction code H00 function).
Subfunction code H00 (Return query data)
• Query message
a. Transaction b. Protocol d. Unit e. Function
c. Length field f. Sub-function g. Data
identifier identifier identifier code
H L H L H L H08 H00 H00 H L
(8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

2. Ethernet Communication
2.7 MODBUS/TCP
95
 • Normal response (Response message)
a. Transaction b. Protocol d. Unit e. Function
c. Length field f. Sub-function g. Data
identifier identifier identifier code
H L H L H L H08 H00 H00 H L
(8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
• Query message setting
Message Description
The client adds the data for the purpose of transaction control.
a Transaction identifier
The same data is returned in the response from the server.
Fixed to 0. (When the server receives data other than 0, it does not send the response message.)
b Protocol identifier
"0" is returned in the response from the server.
c Length field The data length from the unit identifier to the data is stored in byte.
d Unit identifier 0, 255
e Function code Set H08.
f Sub-function Set H0000.
g Data Any 2-byte long data can be set. The setting range is H0000 to HFFFF.
• Content of normal response
With a normal response, the contents in the response are the same as those in (a) to (g) of the query message.

 Write multiple registers (writing data to multiple holding registers) (H10

or 16)
• Data can be written to multiple holding registers.
• Query message
a. Transaction b. Protocol d. Unit e. Function f. Starting g. Quantity of h. Byte
c. Length field
identifier identifier identifier code address registers Count
H L H L H L H10 H L H L
(8 bits) (8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

i. Register Value
H L ...
(8 bits) (8 bits) (n × 2 × 8 bits)

• Normal response (Response message)

a. Transaction b. Protocol d. Unit e. Function f. Starting g. Quantity of
c. Length field
identifier identifier identifier code address registers
H L H L H L H10 H L H L
(8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

• Query message setting

Message Description
The client adds the data for the purpose of transaction control.
a Transaction identifier
The same data is returned in the response from the server.
Fixed to 0. (When the server receives data other than 0, it does not send the response
b Protocol identifier message.)
"0" is returned in the response from the server.
c Length field The data length from the unit identifier to the data is stored in byte.
d Unit identifier 0, 255
e Function code Set H10.
Set the holding register address from which to start writing the data.
Starting address = start register address (decimal) - 40001 (Except for the CiA402 drive
f Starting address
profile)
For example, when starting address 0001 is set, data is written to holding register 40002.
Set the number of holding registers for writing data. Data can be written to up to 125
g Quantity of registers
registers.
The setting range is H02 to HFA (2 to 250).
h Byte count
Set the value set in (g) multiplied by 2.
The amount of data specified by (g) is set. Write data is output Hi bytes first followed by Lo
i Register value bytes, and is arranged as follows: data of start address, data of start address+1, data of start
address+2, and so forth.
• Content of normal response
With a normal response, the contents in the response are the same as those in (a) to (g) of the query message.

96 2. Ethernet Communication
2.7 MODBUS/TCP
 Example) Write 0.5 s (H05) to register 41007 (Pr.7) and 1 s (H0A) to register 41008 (Pr.8) in the
inverter.
Query message
1
Transaction Protocol Unit Function Starting Quantity of Byte
Length field
identifier identifier identifier code address registers count
*1 *1 H00 H00 H00 H0B HFF H10 H03 HEE H00 H02 H04
2
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

Register value
H00 H05 H00 H0A 3
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

*1 A given value is set.

Normal response (Response message) 4
Transaction Protocol Unit Function Starting Quantity of
Length field
identifier identifier identifier code address registers
*1 *1 H00
(8 bits)
H00
(8 bits)
H00
(8 bits)
H06
(8 bits)
HFF
(8 bits)
H10
(8 bits)
H03
(8 bits)
HEE
(8 bits)
H00
(8 bits)
H02
(8 bits)
5
*1 The values are the same as those in the query message.

 Read holding register access log (H46 or 70) 6

• Queries by function codes H03, H06, and H10 are supported.
The number and start address of holding registers successfully accessed by the previous communication are returned.
"0" is returned for both the number and start address for queries other than the function codes above. 7
• Query message
a. Transaction b. Protocol d. Unit e. Function
identifier identifier
c. Length field
identifier code 8
H L H L H L H46
(8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

• Normal response (Response message) 9

a. Transaction b. Protocol d. Unit e. Function f. Starting g. No. of
c. Length field
identifier identifier identifier code address Points
H L H L H L
(8 bits)
H46 H L H L 10
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

• Query message setting

Message Description
The client adds the data for the purpose of transaction control.
a Transaction identifier
The same data is returned in the response from the server.
Fixed to 0. (When the server receives data other than 0, it does not send the response message.)
b Protocol identifier
"0" is returned in the response from the server.
c Length field The data length from the unit identifier to the data is stored in byte.
d Unit identifier 0, 255
e Function code Set H46.
• Content of normal response
Message Description
The start address of the holding register that was successfully accessed is returned.
Starting address = start register address (decimal) - 40001
f Starting address
For example, when starting address 0001 is returned, the holding register address that was
successfully accessed is 40002.
g No. of points The number of holding registers that were successfully accessed is returned.

 Example) Read the successful register start address and the number of successful accesses
from the inverter.
Query message
Transaction Protocol
Length field Unit identifier Function code
identifier identifier
*1 *1 H00 H00 H00 H02 HFF H46
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

2. Ethernet Communication
2.7 MODBUS/TCP
97
 *1 A given value is set.
Normal response (Response message)
Transaction Protocol Starting
Length field Unit identifier Function code No. of points
identifier identifier address
*1 *1 H00 H00 H00 H06 HFF H10 H03 HEE H00 H02
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

*1 The values are the same as those in the query message.

The number of holding registers that were successfully accessed was returned as two with the start address 41007 (Pr.7).

 CiA402 drive profile

• Reading and writing according to the CiA402 drive profile are available.
• Use the function code H03 (page 94) for reading and the function code H10 (page 96) for writing.

 Example) Read the register values of vl velocity acceleration (index 24648, sub index 0 to 2)
Query message
Transaction Protocol Unit Function Starting Quantity of
Length field
identifier identifier identifier code address registers
*1 *1 H00 H00 H00 H06 HFF H03 H60 H48 H00 H04
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

*1 A given value is set.

Normal response (Response message)
Transaction Protocol Unit Function Byte
Length field
identifier identifier identifier code count
*1 *1 H00 H00 H00 H0A HFF H03 H08
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

Register Value
H00 H02 H07 H08 H00 H00 H00 H05
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

*1 The values are the same as those in the query message.

Read value
Sub index 0 (Highest sub-index supported): H0002 (2)
Sub index 1 (Delta speed): H07080000 (1800 r/min)
Sub index 2 (Delta time): H0005 (0.5 s)

 Example) Write the register values to vl velocity acceleration (index 24648, sub index 0 to 2)
Query message
Transaction Protocol Unit Function Starting Quantity of Byte
Length field
identifier identifier identifier code address registers count
*1 *1 H00 H00 H00 H0F HFF H10 H60 H48 H00 H04 H08
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

Register Value
H00 H02 H07 H08 H00 H00 H00 H05
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

*1 A given value is set.

Normal response (Response message)
Transaction Protocol Unit Function Starting Quantity of
Length field
identifier identifier identifier code address registers
*1 *1 H00 H00 H00 H06 HFF H10 H60 H48 H00 H04
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

*1 The values are the same as those in the query message.

 Error response
• An error response is returned if the query message received from the client contains an illegal function, address or data.

98 2. Ethernet Communication
2.7 MODBUS/TCP
 • Error response (Response message)
a. Transaction
identifier
b. Protocol
identifier
c. Length field
d. Unit
identifier
e. Function code f. Exception code 1
H L H L H L H80 + Function
(8 bits) (8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

Message Description
2
The client adds the data for the purpose of transaction control.
a Transaction identifier
The same data is returned in the response from the server.

b Protocol identifier
Fixed to 0. (When the server receives data other than 0, it does not send the response
message.)
3
"0" is returned in the response from the server.
c Length field The data length from the unit identifier to the data is stored in byte.
d Unit identifier 0, 255 4
e Function code The function code requested by the client and H80 is set.
f Exception code The codes in the following table are set.
• Error code list
5
Code Error item Error description
01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION The query message from the client has a function code that cannot be handled by the server.
• The query message from the client has a register address that cannot be handled by the
server. (No parameter, parameter cannot be read, parameter cannot be written) (Except for 6
*1
02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS the CiA402 drive profile)
• A nonexistent holding register is accessed using the CiA402 drive profile. More than one
holding register with more than one subindex is accessed.*2*3
The query message from the client has data that cannot be handled by the server. (Out of
7
03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE
parameter write range, a mode is specified, or other error)*1
The request message cannot be processed because the server is executing another
06 SERVER DEVICE BUSY
operation. 8
*1 An error response is not returned in the following cases.
In other words, when function code H03 or H10 is used and multiple holding registers are accessed, an error response is not returned even if a
nonexistent holding register or holding register that cannot be read or written from/to is accessed.
An error response is returned if none of the accessed holding registers exist. When an accessed holding register does not exist, the read value 9
is 0 and the written data is invalid.
(a) Function code H03 (reading data of holding registers)
When the quantity of registers is specified as one or more and there are one or more holding registers from which data can be read.
(b) Function code H10 (writing data to multiple holding registers)
10
When the quantity of registers is specified as one or more and there are one or more holding registers to which data can be written.

*2 An error response is returned in the following cases.

Function code
Example Index Sub index
H03 H10
Access is attempted to index 24644 (H6044) 0
24644 to index 24646 (index Error code H02 Error code H02
24646 (H6046) 0
24645 does not exist).
0
24648 (H6048) 1
Error code H02
Access is attempted to index 2
Error code H02 The written data will be valid as far
24648 and index 24649. 0 as subindex 2 of index 24648.
24649 (H6049) 1
2
24728 (H6098) 0
Error code H02
Access is attempted to index 0
Error code H02 The written data will be valid as far
24728 and index 24729. 24729 (H6099) 1
as subindex 0 of index 24728.
2
0
Error code H02
Access is attempted to index 24729 (H6099) 1
Error code H02 The written data will be valid as far
24729 and index 24730. 2
as subindex 2 of index 24729.
24730 (H609A) 0

*3 An error response is not returned in the following cases.

Function code H10 (writing data to multiple holding registers)
Access is attempted to a writing-disabled subindex of a holding register with multiple subindices and data writing is enabled for at least one of the
subindices.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.7 MODBUS/TCP
99
  MODBUS register
• The following shows the MODBUS registers for system environment variables (read/write), monitor codes (read),
parameters (read/write), fault history data (read/write), model information monitor items (read), and CiA402 drive profile
data (read/write).
• System environment variables
Register Definition Read/write Remarks
40002 Inverter reset Write Any value
40003 Parameter clear Write Set H965A.
40004 All parameter clear Write Set H99AA.
40006 *1 Write Set H5A96.
Parameter clear
40007 All parameter clear*1 Write Set HAA99.
Inverter status / control input command
40008 Read/write Refer to the following.
(extended)*2
40009 Inverter status / control input command*2 Read/write Refer to the following.
40010 Operation mode / inverter setting*3 Read/write Refer to the following.
40014 Running frequency (RAM value) Read/write (The display can be changed to the rotations per minute
(machine speed) using Pr.37 and Pr.53. Refer to the FR-
40015 Running frequency (EEPROM value) Write E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
*1 Settings in the communication parameters are not cleared.
*2 The data is written as a control input command for writing.
The data is read as the inverter status for reading.
*3 The data is written as an operation mode setting for writing.
The data is read as the operation mode status for reading.

• Inverter status / control input command, and inverter status / control input command (extended)
Definition Definition
Bit Bit
Control input command Inverter status Control input command Inverter status
0 Stop command RUN (Inverter running)*2 0 NET X1 (—)*1 NET Y1 (0)*2
1 Forward rotation command Forward running 1 NET X2 (—)*1 NET Y2 (0)*2
2 Reverse rotation command Reverse running 2 NET X3 (—)*1 NET Y3 (0)*2
RH (High-speed operation
3 Up to frequency 3 NET X4 (—)*1 NET Y4 (0)*2
command)*1
RM (Middle-speed operation
4 Overload warning 4 NET X5 (—)*1 0
command)*1
RL (Low-speed operation
5 0 5 — 0
command)*1
FU (Output frequency
6 JOG operation selection 2 6 — 0
detection)*2
7 Second function selection ABC (Fault)*2 7 — 0
8 Terminal 4 input selection ABC2 (0)*2 8 — 0
9 — Safety monitor output 2 9 — 0
10 MRS (Output stop)*1 0 10 — 0
11 — 0 11 — 0
12 RES (—)*1 0 12 — 0
13 — 0 13 — 0
14 — 0 14 — 0
15 — Fault occurrence 15 — 0
*1 The signal within parentheses ( ) is the initial status. The function changes depending on the setting of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection).
For details, refer to the description of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) in the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
The signals assigned to the input terminals may be valid or invalid in the NET operation mode. (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual
(Function).)
*2 The signal within parentheses ( ) is the initial status. The function changes depending on the setting of Pr.190 to Pr.197 (Output terminal
function selection).
For details, refer to the description of Pr.190 to Pr.197 (Output terminal function selection) in the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).

100 2. Ethernet Communication

2.7 MODBUS/TCP
 • Operation mode / inverter setting
Mode Read value Write value 1
EXT H0000 H0010*1
PU H0001 H0011*1
EXT
JOG
H0002 — 2
PU
H0003 —
JOG
NET H0004 H0014 3
PU + EXT H0005 —

*1 Writing is available depending on the Pr.79 and Pr.340 settings. For details, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
Restrictions in each operation mode conform with the computer link specification.
4
• Monitor code
For details of the register numbers and the monitor items, refer to the description of Pr.52 in the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).
5
• Parameter
Pr. Register Name
For details on parameter names,
Read/write Remarks
6
41000 to refer to the parameter list in the FR-
0 to 999 Read/write The parameter number + 41000 is the register number.
41999 E800 Instruction Manual
(Function).
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
7
C2 (902) 41902 Read/write
frequency
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
42092 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C3 (902)
C3 (902)
(analog value)
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias Analog value (%) of the voltage (current) applied to terminal
8
43902 Read
(terminal analog value) 2
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
125 (903) 41903 Read/write
frequency 9
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
42093 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C4 (903)
(analog value)
C4 (903)
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain Analog value (%) of the voltage (current) applied to terminal
43903
(terminal analog value)
Read
2 10
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
C5 (904) 41904 Read/write
frequency
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
42094 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C6 (904)
(analog value)
C6 (904)
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to terminal
43904 Read
(terminal analog value) 4
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
126 (905) 41905 Read/write
frequency
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
42095 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C7 (905)
(analog value)
C7 (905)
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to terminal
43905 Read
(terminal analog value) 4
C12 (917) 41917 Terminal 1 bias frequency (speed) Read/write Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.
Terminal 1 bias (speed) (analog Analog value (%) set in C13 (917) (Available only when the
42107 Read/write
value) FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C13 (917)
Terminal 1 bias (speed) (terminal Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to terminal 1
43917 Read
analog value) (Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C14 (918) 41918 Terminal 1 gain frequency (speed) Read/write Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.
Terminal 1 gain (speed) (analog Analog value (%) set in C15 (918) (Available only when the
42108 Read/write
value) FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C15 (918)
Terminal 1 gain (speed) (terminal Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to terminal 1
43918 Read
analog value) (Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C16 (919) 41919 Terminal 1 bias command (torque) Read/write Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.
Terminal 1 bias (torque) (analog Analog value (%) set in C17 (919) (Available only when the
42109 Read/write
value) FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C17 (919)
Terminal 1 bias (torque) (terminal Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to terminal 1
43919 Read
analog value) (Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C18 (920) 41920 Terminal 1 gain command (torque) Read/write Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.7 MODBUS/TCP
101
 Pr. Register Name Read/write Remarks
Terminal 1 gain (torque) (analog Analog value (%) set in C19 (920) (Available only when the
42110 Read/write
value) FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C19 (920)
Terminal 1 gain (torque) (terminal Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to terminal 1
43920 Read
analog value) (Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C38 (932) 41932 Terminal 4 bias command (torque) Read/write
Terminal 4 bias (torque) (analog
42122 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C39 (932)
value)
C39 (932)
Terminal 4 bias (torque) (terminal Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to terminal
43932 Read
analog value) 4
C40 (933) 41933 Terminal 4 gain command (torque) Read/write
Terminal 4 gain (torque) (analog
42123 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C41 (933)
value)
C41 (933)
Terminal 4 gain (torque) (terminal Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to terminal
43933 Read
analog value) 4
C42 (934) 41934 PID display bias coefficient Read/write
42124 PID display bias analog value Read/write Analog value (%) set in C43 (934)
C43 (934) PID display bias analog value Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to terminal
43934 Read
(terminal analog value) 4
C44 (935) 41935 PID display gain coefficient Read/write
42125 PID display gain analog value Read/write Analog value (%) set in C45 (935)
C45 (935) PID display gain analog value Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to terminal
43935 Read
(terminal analog value) 4
For details on parameter names,
1000 to 45000 to refer to the parameter list in the FR-
Read/write The parameter number + 44000 is the register number.
1999 45999 E800 Instruction Manual
(Function).
• Fault history
Register Definition Read/write Remarks
40501 Fault record 1 Read/write
40502 Fault record 2 Read
40503 Fault record 3 Read
Being 2 bytes in length, the data is stored as H00○○.
40504 Fault record 4 Read Refer to the lowest 1 byte for the error code. (For details on error codes,
40505 Fault record 5 Read refer to the list of fault displays in the FR-E800 Instruction Manual
40506 Fault record 6 Read (Maintenance).)
40507 Fault record 7 Read The fault history is batch-cleared by writing to register 40501.
Set any value as data.
40508 Fault record 8 Read
40509 Fault record 9 Read
40510 Fault record 10 Read
• Product profile
Register Definition Read/write Remarks
44001 Model (1st and 2nd characters) Read
44002 Model (3rd and 4th characters) Read
44003 Model (5th and 6th characters) Read
44004 Model (7th and 8th characters) Read The model name can be read in ASCII code.
44005 Model (9th and 10th characters) Read "H20" (blank code) is set for blank area.
44006 Model (11th and 12th characters) Read Example) FR-E820-EPA:
44007 Model (13th and 14th characters) Read H46, H52, H2D, H45, H38, H32, H30, H2D, H45, H50, H41, H20...H20
44008 Model (15th and 16th characters) Read
44009 Model (17th and 18th characters) Read
44010 Model (19th and 20th characters) Read
44011 Capacity (1st and 2nd characters) Read The capacity in the inverter model can be read in ASCII code.
Data read is displayed in increments of 0.1 kW (rounded down to one
44012 Capacity (3rd and 4th characters) Read
decimal place).
"H20" (blank code) is set for blank area.
44013 Capacity (5th and 6th characters) Read
Example) 0.75K: " 7" (H20, H20, H20, H20, H20, H37)

102 2. Ethernet Communication

2.7 MODBUS/TCP
 NOTE
• When a 32-bit parameter setting or monitor item is read and the value to be read exceeds HFFFF, HFFFF is returned. 1
• The display can be changed from the frequency to rotations per minute (machine speed) using Pr.53. When the machine
speed is displayed, the value is incremented by one.

2
• CiA402 drive profile
Register

Index
Sub
index
Name Description Read/write Data type 3
Error number
The error code of the latest fault that occurred after power-ON or an
inverter reset is returned.
When no fault occurs, no error is returned.
4
24639 When the fault history is cleared during occurrence of a fault, no error
0 Error code Read Unsigned16
(H603F) is returned.
The upper eight bits are fixed to FF, and the lower eight bits represent
the error code. (HFFXX: "XX" represents the error code.)
5
(For details on error codes, refer to the list of fault displays in the
Instruction Manual (Maintenance).)
Set speed (r/min)*1*3
Set the set frequency in r/min.
6
24642
0 vl target velocity Monitoring range: -32768 (H8000) to 32767 (H7FFF) Read/write Integer16
(H6042) When Pr.81 = "9999", the number of motor poles is regarded as 4.
Do not change the settings of this index and index 24831 (H60FF) at
the same time. 7
Output frequency (r/min)*1
24643 vl velocity The output frequency is read in r/min.
0 Read Integer16
(H6043) demand Monitoring range: -32768 (H8000) to 32767 (H7FFF)
When Pr.81 = "9999", the number of motor poles is regarded as 4.
8
Operation speed (r/min)*1
24644 vl velocity actual The operation speed is read in r/min.
0 Read Integer16
(H6044) value Monitoring range: -32768 (H8000) to 32767 (H7FFF)
When Pr.81 = "9999", the number of motor poles is regarded as 4.
9
vl velocity min
— Minimum/maximum speed (r/min) — —
max amount

0
Highest sub-
Maximum value of subindex: H02 (fixed) Read Unsigned8 10
index supported

vl velocity min Minimum speed (r/min)*1*2

24646 1 Set Pr.2 Minimum frequency in r/min. Read/write Unsigned32
amount
(H6046) Setting range: 0 to 120 Hz
Maximum speed (r/min)*1*2
vl velocity max Set Pr.18 High speed maximum frequency in r/min.
2 Setting range: 0 to 590 Hz Read/write Unsigned32
amount
Do not change the settings of this index and index 24703 (H607F) at
the same time.
vl velocity Acceleration
— — —
acceleration vl velocity acceleration = Delta speed/Delta time
Highest sub-
0 Maximum value of subindex: H02 (fixed) Read Unsigned8
index supported
Reference speed (r/min)*1*2
1 Delta speed Set Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency in r/min. Read/write Unsigned32
24648 Setting range: 1 to 590 Hz
(H6048)
Acceleration time (s)*2
Set Pr.7 Acceleration time.
Setting range: 0 to 3600 s
2 Delta time (Example: To accelerate to 1500 r/min for 3.7 seconds, set sub index Read/write Unsigned16
1 to 15000 r/min and set sub index 2 to 37 seconds.)
Do not change the settings of this index and index 24707 (H6083) at
the same time.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.7 MODBUS/TCP
103
 Register
Sub Name Description Read/write Data type
Index
index
vl velocity Deceleration
— — —
deceleration vl velocity deceleration = Delta speed/Delta time
Highest sub-
0 Maximum value of subindex: H02 (fixed) Read Unsigned8
index supported
Reference speed (r/min)*1*2
1 Delta speed Set Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency in r/min. Read/write Unsigned32
24649 Setting range: 1 to 590 Hz
(H6049)
Deceleration time (s)*2
Set Pr.8 Deceleration time.
Setting range: 0 to 3600 s
2 Delta time (Example: To decelerate from 1500 r/min for 3.7 seconds, set sub Read/write Unsigned16
index 1 to 15000 r/min and set sub index 2 to 37 seconds.)
Do not change the settings of this index and index 24708 (H6084) at
the same time.
24672 Modes of
0 Control mode: -1 (vendor specific operation mode) (fixed) Read/write Integer8
(H6060) operation
Modes of
24673
0 operation Current control mode: -1 (vendor specific operation mode) (fixed) Read Integer8
(H6061)
display
24674 Position demand Position command (pulse)
0 Read Integer32
(H6062) value The position command before the electronic gear operation is read.
24675 Position actual Current position (pulse)
0 Read Integer32
(H6063) internal value The current position after the electronic gear operation is read.
24676 Position actual Current position (pulse)
0 Read Integer32
(H6064) value The current position before the electronic gear operation is read.
Target torque (%)
Set Pr.805 Torque command value (RAM).
24689
0 Target torque Setting range: 600% to 1400% Read/write Integer16
(H6071)
When the value is set in 0.1 increments, the first decimal place is
rounded off.
24692 Torque demand value (%)
0 Torque demand Read Integer16
(H6074) The torque command is read.
24695 Torque actual Torque actual value (%)
0 Read Integer16
(H6077) value The motor torque is read.
Target position (pulse)
Set the target position in the direct command mode.
24698 Initial value: 0
0 Target position Read/write Integer32
(H607A) Setting range: -2147483647 to 2147483647
(For the direct command mode, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).)
Maximum profile speed (r/min)*1*2
24703 Max profile Set Pr.18 High speed maximum frequency in r/min.
0 Setting range: 0 to 590 Hz Read/write Unsigned32
(H607F) velocity
Do not change the settings of this index and index 24646 (H6046), sub
index 2 at the same time.
Profile speed (r/min)
Set the maximum speed in the direct command mode.
24705 Initial value: 0
0 Profile velocity Read/write Unsigned32
(H6081) Setting range: 0 to (120 × 590 Hz / Pr.81)
(For the direct command mode, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).)

104 2. Ethernet Communication

2.7 MODBUS/TCP
 Register

Index
Sub
index
Name Description Read/write Data type
1
Acceleration time constant (ms)
<Position control>
Set the acceleration time in the direct command mode.
Initial value: 5000 2
Setting range: 10 to 360000
The last digit is rounded off. (For example, 1358 ms becomes 1350
ms.)
24707 Profile
(For the direct command mode, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction 3
0 Manual (Function).) Read/write Unsigned32
(H6083) acceleration
<Other than position control>
Set Pr.7 Acceleration time in ms.
Setting range: 0 to 3600 s 4
The last two digits are rounded off when Pr.21 Acceleration/
deceleration time increments = "0", and the last digit is rounded off
when Pr.21 = "1".
Do not change the settings of this index and index 24648 (H6048), sub
index 2 at the same time.
5
Deceleration time constant (ms)
<Position control>
Set the deceleration time in the direct command mode.
Initial value: 5000
6
Setting range: 10 to 360000
The last digit is rounded off. (For example, 1358 ms becomes 1350
ms.)
(For the direct command mode, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction 7
24708 Profile
0 Manual (Function).) Read/write Unsigned32
(H6084) deceleration
<Other than position control>
Set Pr.8 Deceleration time in ms.
Setting range: 0 to 3600 s 8
The last two digits are rounded off when Pr.21 Acceleration/
deceleration time increments = "0", and the last digit is rounded off
when Pr.21 = "1".
Do not change the settings of this index and index 24649 (H6049), sub
index 2 at the same time.
9
Position encoder
— Encoder resolution (machine side / motor side) — —
resolution

0
Highest sub-
Maximum value of subindex: H02 (fixed) Read Unsigned8
10
index supported
24719
Encoder resolution
(H608F) Encoder
1 Set Pr.369 Number of encoder pulses. Read/write Unsigned32
increments
Setting range: 2 to 4096
Motor
2 Motor speed (rev): H00000001 (fixed) Read/write Unsigned32
revolutions
— Gear ratio Gear ratio — —
Highest sub-
0 Maximum value of subindex: H02 (fixed) Read Unsigned8
index supported
Motor shaft revolutions*2
Motor Set Pr.420 Command pulse scaling factor numerator (electronic
24721 1 Read/write Unsigned32
revolutions gear numerator).
(H6091)
Setting range: 1 to 32767
Drive shaft revolutions*2
2 Shaft revolutions Set Pr.421 Command pulse multiplication denominator Read/write Unsigned32
(electronic gear denominator).
Setting range: 1 to 32767
Home position return method
24728
0 Homing method Set the home position return method in the direct command mode.*4 Read/write Integer8
(H6098) (For the direct command mode and the home position return method,
refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)

2. Ethernet Communication
2.7 MODBUS/TCP
105
 Register
Sub Name Description Read/write Data type
Index
index
— Homing speeds Home position return speed — —
Highest sub-
0 Maximum value of subindex: H01 (fixed) Read Unsigned8
index supported
24729 Motor speed during home position returning (r/min)
(H6099) Set the home position return speed in the direct command mode.
Speed during Initial value: 120 × 2 Hz / Pr.81
1 Read/write Unsigned32
search for switch Setting range: 0 to (120 × 400 Hz / Pr.81)
(For the direct command mode, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).)
Home position return acceleration/deceleration time (ms)
Set the home position return acceleration/deceleration time in the
direct command mode.
Initial value: 5000
24730 Homing
0 Setting range: 10 to 360000 Read/write Unsigned32
(H609A) acceleration
The last digit is rounded off. (For example, 1358 ms becomes 1350
ms.)
(For the direct command mode, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).)
24820 Following error Droop pulse (pulse)
0 Read Integer32
(H60F4) actual value The droop pulse before the electronic gear operation is read.
24826
0 Control effort Speed command after position loop*1 Read Integer32
(H60FA) The ideal speed command is read.
24828 Position demand Position command (pulse)
0 Read Integer32
(H60FC) internal value The position command after the electronic gear operation is read.
Set speed (r/min)*1*3
Set the set frequency in r/min.
Monitoring range: -32768 (H8000) to 32767 (H7FFF)
24831 When Pr.81 = "9999", the number of motor poles is regarded as 4.
0 Target velocity Read/write Integer32
(H60FF) For writing the value after the unit switchover using Pr.53, the lower
24 bits of the data are valid and the upper 8 bits are ignored.
Do not change the settings of this index and index 24642 (H6042) at
the same time.
25858 Supported drive Supported control mode: H00010000 (vendor specific operation
0 Read Unsigned32
(H6502) modes mode)
Device type
Bit 0 to 15 Device Profile Number: H0192
26623 Single device (402: Drive Profile)
0 Read Unsigned32
(H67FF) type Bit 16 to 23 Additional Information (Type): H01 (Frequency Converter:
inverter)
Bit 24 to 31 Additional Information (mode bits): H00
*1 The value is displayed and set in r/min regardless of the settings in Pr.53.
The frequency is converted to the rotation speed for reading, and the setting value is converted to the frequency for writing.
*2 Writing to EEPROM or RAM is selected according to the setting in Pr.342 Communication EEPROM write selection.
*3 Writing is not restricted by the Pr.18 and Pr.2 settings.
*4 The following table shows home position return methods corresponding to the Index 24728 (H6098) setting values.

24728 (H6098) setting Home position return method

-3 Data set type
-4 Stopper type (home position return direction: position pulse increasing direction)
-5 (initial value) Ignoring the home position (servo ON position as the home position)
-7 Count type with front end reference (home position return direction: position pulse increasing direction)
-36 Stopper type (home position return direction: position pulse decreasing direction)
-39 Count type with front end reference (home position return direction: position pulse decreasing direction)
-65 Stopper type (home position return direction: start command direction)
-66 Count type with front end reference (home position return direction: start command direction)

NOTE
• The command interface in the Network operation mode is determined by the Pr.550 NET mode operation command source
selection setting. (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
• When the data is read, the value is displayed with a sign regardless of the Pr.290 Monitor negative output selection setting.

106 2. Ethernet Communication

2.7 MODBUS/TCP
2.8 BACnet/IP 1

2.8.1 Outline 2
BACnet/IP is available for the FR-E800-(SC)EPA and FR-E806-SCEPA.
Operation or parameter setting via communication is possible using the BACnet/IP through the Ethernet connector on the 3
inverter.

 Communication specifications
The specifications conform to the BACnet standard of the Ethernet physical medium.
4
Item Description
Physical medium Ethernet (ISO 8802-3)
Supported property of BACnet standard object type Refer to page 112. 5
Supported BIBBs (Annex K) Refer to page 120.
BACnet standardized device profile (Annex L) Refer to page 120.
Segmentation Not supported 6
Device address binding Not supported
Topology Line, star, or a combination of line and star

NOTE 7
• This product is classified as a BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC).

8
2.8.2 Initial setting for BACnet/IP
Use the following parameters to perform required settings for Ethernet communication between the inverter and other devices.
To make communication between other devices and the inverter, perform the initial settings of the inverter parameters to match 9
the communication specifications of the devices. Data communication cannot be made if the initial settings are not made or if
there is any setting error.

Pr. Name
Initial
Setting range Setting range
10
value
1427 Ethernet function selection
5001
N630*1 1
1428 Ethernet function selection 502, 5000 to 5002,
45237 5006 to 5008, 5010 to
N631*1 2
5013, 9999, 44818, Set the application, protocol, etc.
1429 Ethernet function selection
45238 45237, 45238,
N632*1 3 47808, 61450
1430 Ethernet function selection
9999
N633*1 4
Ethernet communication is available, but the inverter output
0
is shut off in the NET operation mode.
Set the interval of the communication check (signal loss
detection) time for all devices with IP addresses in the range
1432 Ethernet communication
1.5 s specified for Ethernet command source selection (Pr.1449
N644 check time interval 0.1 to 999.8 s
to Pr.1454).
If a no-communication state persists for longer than the
permissible time, the inverter output will be shut off.
9999 No communication check (signal loss detection)

2. Ethernet Communication
2.8 BACnet/IP
107
 Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Setting range
value
1449 Ethernet command source
0
N670*1 selection IP address 1
1450 Ethernet command source
0
N671*1 selection IP address 2
0 to 255 To limit the network devices that send the operation or
1451 Ethernet command source
0 speed command through the Ethernet network, set the
N672*1 selection IP address 3
range of IP addresses of the devices.
1452 Ethernet command source When Pr.1449 to Pr.1452 = "0 (initial value)", no IP address
0
N673*1 selection IP address 4 is specified for command source selection via Ethernet. In
Ethernet command source this case, operation commands cannot be sent via Ethernet
1453 with MODBUS/TCP protocol.
selection IP address 3 range 9999
N674*1 specification
0 to 255, 9999
1454 Ethernet command source
selection IP address 4 range 9999
N675*1 specification
*1 The setting is applied after an inverter reset or next power-ON.

NOTE
• The monitor items and parameter settings can be read during communication with the Pr.1432 Ethernet communication
check time interval = "0 (initial value)" setting, but such operation will become faulty once the operation mode is changed to
the NET operation mode. When the NET operation mode is selected as the start-up operation mode, communication is
performed once, then an Ethernet communication fault (E.EHR) occurs.
To perform operation or parameter writing via communication, set Pr.1432 to "9999" or a value larger than the communication
cycle or retry time setting. (Refer to page 109.)

 Ethernet function selection (Pr.1427 to Pr.1430)

To select BACnet/IP for the application, set "47808" (BACnet/IP) in any of Pr.1427 to Pr.1430 Ethernet function selection 1
to 4.

NOTE
• Change the setting if selected communication protocols cannot be used together. (Refer to page 7 and page 226.)

 Ethernet IP address for command source selection (Pr.1449 to Pr.1454)

• To limit the network devices that send the operation or speed command through the Ethernet network, set the range of IP
addresses of the devices.
• When Pr.1449 to Pr.1452 = "0 (initial value)", no IP address is specified for command source selection via Ethernet. In this
case, operation commands cannot be sent via Ethernet.

108 2. Ethernet Communication

2.8 BACnet/IP
 • The setting range for command source selection depends on the settings in Pr.1451 and Pr.1453, and Pr.1452 and
Pr.1454. (Either of the settings can be larger than the other in Pr.1451 and Pr.1453, and Pr.1452 and Pr.1454.)
1
[Setting example 1]
Configuration
2

3
Master Inverter 1 Inverter 2
iQ-R R08CPU FR-E800 FR-E800
192.168.50.100 192.168.50.1 192.168.50.2
To allow the master to control the inverters, set the parameters in inverters 1 and 2 as follows to specify the IP address range for 4
Ethernet command source selection.
Set the IP address of the master in the engineering software (GX Works3) within the range from 192.168.50.100 to
192.168.50.110.

Ethernet IP address
Pr.1449 Pr.1450 Pr.1451 Pr.1452 5
for command source selection 192 168 50 100

The range is between

the values set in both
parameters.
6
Pr.1453 Pr.1454
Command source selection range setting
― ― 9999 110
for the Ethernet IP address
In this case, the IP address range in which Ethernet communication is permitted is "192.168.50.xxx (100 to 110)".
7
[Setting example 2]
Pr.1449 Pr.1450 Pr.1451 Pr.1452

8
Ethernet IP address
192 168 1 100
for command source selection
The range is between The range is between
the values set in both the values set in both
parameters. parameters.
Pr.1453 Pr.1454
9
Command source selection range setting
for the Ethernet IP address ― ― 3 150

In this case, the IP address range for command source selection via Ethernet communication is
"192.168.x (1 to 3).xxx (100 to 150)".
10
• When "9999 (initial value)" is set in Pr.1453 or Pr.1454, the range is invalid.

NOTE
• When BACnet/IP is used, do not include IP addresses of other inverters in the Ethernet IP address range set for command
source selection. If an IP address of any other inverter falls within the range, the protective function (E.EHR) will be activated
after the time period set in Pr.1432 after power is supplied to the inverter.

 Ethernet communication check time interval (Pr.1432)

• If a signal loss (communication stop) is detected between the inverter and all the devices with IP addresses in the range
for Ethernet command source selection (Pr.1449 to Pr.1454) as a result of a signal loss detection, a communication error
(E.EHR) occurs and the inverter output will be shut off.
• When "9999" is set in Pr.1432, the communication check (signal loss detection) will not be performed.
• The monitor items and parameter settings can be read via Ethernet when "0" is set in Pr.1432, but a communication error
(E.EHR) occurs instantly when the operation mode is switched to the Network operation.
• A signal loss detection is made when any of 0.1 s to 999.8 s is set in Pr.1432. In order to enable the signal loss detection,
data must be sent by connected devices at an interval equal to or less than the time set for the communication check. (The
inverter makes a communication check (clearing of communication check counter) regardless of the station number setting
of the data sent from the master).

2. Ethernet Communication
2.8 BACnet/IP
109
 • Communication check is started at the first communication when the inverter operates in the Network operation mode and
the command source is specified as communication via the Ethernet connector.
Example) When Pr.1432 = 0.1 to 999.8 s

Operation mode External Network

Connected device
Inverter
Inverter
Connected device Fault (E.EHR)
Check starts
Pr.1432
Communication
check counter Time

E.EHR OFF ON

LF OFF ON

2.8.3 Parameters related to BACnet/IP

The following parameters are used for BACnet/IP communication. Set the parameters as required.
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
390 % setting reference
60 Hz 1 to 590 Hz Set a reference frequency of the set frequency.
N054 frequency

728 Device instance number 0 to 419 Device identifier

0 When the figure obtained by combining the Pr.728 and Pr.729
N052 (Upper 3 digits) (0 to 418)
settings is not within "0 to 4194302", the setting is out of range.
(The setting range of Pr.729 is "0 to 4302" when Pr.728 = "419".
729 Device instance number 0 to 9999 The setting range of Pr.728 is "0 to 418" when Pr.729 = "4303" or
0
N053 (Lower 4 digits) (0 to 4302) more.)
1426 Link speed and duplex Set the communication speed and the communication mode (full-
0 0 to 4
N641*1 mode selection duplex/half-duplex).
1442
IP filter address 1 (Ethernet) 0
N660*1
1443
IP filter address 2 (Ethernet) 0
N661*1
0 to 255
1444
IP filter address 3 (Ethernet) 0
N662*1
1445 Set the range of connectable IP addresses for the network devices.
*1 IP filter address 4 (Ethernet) 0 (When Pr.1442 to Pr.1445 = "0 (initial value)", the function is
N663 invalid.)
1446 IP filter address 2 range
9999
N664*1 specification (Ethernet)
1447 IP filter address 3 range
9999 0 to 255, 9999
N665*1 specification (Ethernet)
1448 IP filter address 4 range
9999
N666*1 specification (Ethernet)
*1 The setting is applied after an inverter reset or next power-ON.

 Parameters for monitoring (Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, Pr.992, and Pr.1027 to

Pr.1034)
• The following item related to BACnet/IP can be monitored.
Parameter setting for monitor item Description
83 BACnet valid APDU counter (The count of valid APDU detection is displayed.)*1
*1 When the count exceeds "9999", the monitor value is reset to "0".

NOTE
• For the description of other settings, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).

110 2. Ethernet Communication

2.8 BACnet/IP
 % setting reference frequency (Pr.390)
• Set a reference frequency of the set frequency. The setting value of Pr.390 % setting reference frequency is 100% 1
reference. The reference to the frequency command is converted to the set frequency in the following formula.
Set frequency = % setting reference frequency × Speed scale (Refer to page 114.)
2
Pr.390 % setting reference frequency

3
Set frequency written to the inverter

0.00 Hz
0% 100.00%

Set frequency (Speed scale) 4

NOTE
• The % setting reference frequency cannot be set at less than the minimum frequency resolution of the inverter. 5
• The set frequency is written to RAM.
• The set frequency is applied at the writing of Speed scale. (The set frequency is not applied at the setting of Pr.390.)

6
 Communication speed and full-duplex/half-duplex selection (Pr.1426)
Use Pr.1426 Link speed and duplex mode selection to set the communication speed and the full-duplex or half-duplex
system. If the operation is not performed properly in the initial setting (Pr.1426 = "0"), set Pr.1426 according to the 7
specifications of the connected device.
Communication Full-duplex/half-
Pr.1426 setting
speed duplex system
Remarks
8
The communication speed and the communication mode (half-duplex/full-
Automatic Automatic duplex) are automatically negotiated to ensure the optimum setting. To set
0 (initial value)
negotiation negotiation automatic negotiation, auto negotiation setting is required also in the master
station. 9
1 100 Mbps Full duplex —
2 100 Mbps Half duplex —
3 10 Mbps Full duplex —
4 10 Mbps Half duplex — 10
 IP filtering function (Ethernet) (Pr.1442 to Pr.1448)
• Set the IP address range for connectable network devices (Pr.1442 to Pr.1448) to limit the connectable devices. The
setting range for IP address of connectable network devices depends on the settings in Pr.1443 and Pr.1446, Pr.1444 and
Pr.1447, and Pr.1445 and Pr.1448. (Either of the settings can be larger than the other in Pr.1443 and Pr.1446, Pr.1444
and Pr.1447, and Pr.1445 and Pr.1448.)
[Setting example 1] Pr.1442 Pr.1443 Pr.1444 Pr.1445
IP filter address (Ethernet) 192 168 1 100
The range is between The range is between
the values set in both the values set in both
parameters. parameters.
Pr.1446 Pr.1447 Pr.1448
IP filter address range specification
(Ethernet) ― 9999 3 150
In this case, the IP address range in which Ethernet communication is permitted is "192.168.x (1 to 3).xxx (100 to 150)".

[Setting example 2]
Pr.1442 Pr.1443 Pr.1444 Pr.1445
IP filter address (Ethernet) 192 168 2 100
The range is between
the values set in both
parameters.
Pr.1446 Pr.1447 Pr.1448
IP filter address range specification
(Ethernet) ― 9999 9999 50
In this case, the IP address range in which Ethernet communication is permitted is "192.168.2.xxx (50 to 100)".

2. Ethernet Communication
2.8 BACnet/IP
111
 • When Pr.1442 to Pr.1445 = "0 (initial value)", the function is invalid.
• When "9999 (initial value)" is set in Pr.1446 to Pr.1448, the range is invalid.

CAUTION
• The IP filtering function (Ethernet) (Pr.1442 to Pr.1448) is provided as a means to prevent unauthorized access, DoS
attacks, computer viruses, or other cyberattacks from external devices, but the function does not prevent such access
completely. In order to protect the inverter and the system against unauthorized access by external systems, take
additional security measures. We shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving inverter trouble and
system trouble by DoS attacks, unauthorized access, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks. The following are
examples of measures to prevent them.
- Install a firewall.
- Install a personal computer as a relay station, and control the relaying of transmission data using an application
program.
- Install an external device as a relay station to control access rights. (For the details of external devices used to control
access rights, contact the distributors of the external devices.)

 Supported property of BACnet standard object type

R: Read only, W: Read/Write (Commandable values not supported), C: Read/Write (Commandable values supported)
Object support condition
Property Analog Analog Binary Binary Binary Network
Device
Input Value Input Output Value Port
APDU Length R
APDU Timeout R
Application Software Version R
BACnet IP Mode R
BACnet IP UDP Port R
Changes Pending R
Database Revision R
Device Address Binding R
Event State R R R R R
Firmware Revision R
IP Address R
IP Default Gateway R
IP DNS Server R
IP Subnet Mask R
Link Speed R
MAC Address R
Max APDU Length Accepted R
Model Name R
Network Number W
Network Number Quality R
Network Type R
Number of APDU Retries R
Object Identifier R R R R R R R
Object List R
Object Name R R R R R R R
Object Type R R R R R R R
Out Of Service R R R R R R
Polarity R R
Present Value R C*1 R C C*1
Priority Array R*2 R R*2
Protocol Level R
Protocol Object Types Supported R
Protocol Revision R
Protocol Services Supported R
Protocol Version R
Reliability R
Relinquish Default R*2 R R*2

112 2. Ethernet Communication

2.8 BACnet/IP
 Object support condition
Property Analog
Input
Analog
Value
Binary
Input
Binary
Output
Binary
Value
Device
Network
Port
1
Segmentation Supported R
Status Flags R R R R R R
System Status R 2
Unit R R
Vendor Identifier R
Vendor Name R
Property List R R R R R R R 3
Current Command Priority R
*1 This property is commandable for some instances of this object. Otherwise it is read/write.
*2 This property is supported only for instances of this object where the Present Value property is commandable. 4
 Details of the supported properties
• The details of the supported properties are as follows.
Property Details
5
Shows the maximum number of octets.
APDU Length
Fixed to 1024 octets for the FR-E800.

APDU Timeout
Shows the send retry interval (ms) when there is no reception confirmation response to the APDU
request.
6
Application Software Version Shows the inverter firmware version.
Shows the BACnet/IP mode.
BACnet IP Mode
Fixed to NORMAL (0) for the FR-E800. 7
BACnet IP UDP Port Shows the UDP port number of the network port.
If the property value whose change is to be reflected at a reset is changed, TRUE (1) is returned.
Changes Pending
FALSE (0) is returned after the status is initialized by a reset.
Database Revision Always 0. 8
Device Address Binding No data.
Shows the event state of the related object.
Event State

Firmware Revision
Fixed to NORMAL (0) for the FR-E800.
Shows the firmware level.
9
Shows the octet string of the assigned IP address.
IP Address
For example, C0A83200 is displayed when the IP address is 192.168.50.0.

IP Default Gateway
Shows the octet string of the assigned default gateway address.
For example, C0A832FE is displayed when the default gateway address is 192.168.50.254.
10
IP DNS Server Always 00000000.
Shows the octet string of the assigned subnet mask.
IP Subnet Mask
For example, FFFFFF00 is displayed when the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
Shows the communication speed in the unit of bit/s.
Link Speed
It depends on the Pr.1426 setting.
Shows the octet string of the combination of the assigned IP address and UDP port number.
MAC Address For example, C0A83200BAC0 is displayed when the IP address is 192.168.50.0 and the UDP port
number is 47808.
Max APDU Length Accepted Shows the maximum APDU length.
Model Name Shows the model of the BACnet device.
Shows the network number.
Network Number Fixed to 0 for the FR-E800. If a value other than "0" is written, an error code
VALUE_OUT_OF_RANGE (37) will be returned.
Shows the quality of the network port number.
Network Number Quality
Fixed to UNKNOWN (0) for the FR-E800.
Shows the communication method of the network.
Network Type
Fixed to IPV4 (5) for the FR-E800.
Number of APDU Retries Shows the maximum number of APDU send retries.
Object Identifier Shows the unique numeric code to identify the object.
Object List Shows the object identifier list.
Object Name Shows the object name.
Analog input: ANALOG_INPUT (0)
Analog value: ANALOG_VALUE (2)
Binary input: BINARY_INPUT (3)
Object Type Binary output: BINARY_OUTPUT (4)
Binary value: BINARY_VALUE (5)
Device: DEVICE (8)
Network port: NETWORK_PORT (56)

2. Ethernet Communication
2.8 BACnet/IP
113
 Property Details
If the Present Value property is not changed or if the change is not applied, TRUE (1) is returned.
Out Of Service
FALSE (0) is returned in other cases.
REVERSE (1) is returned when the binary output is negative logic. Fixed to NORMAL (0) for the
Polarity
binary input.
Present Value Shows the present value of each object identifier.
Values to be written to the objects supporting the commandable values are stored. Values are
Priority Array
initialized at the power-ON or inverter reset.
Shows the protocol level.
Protocol Level
Fixed to BACNET_APPLICATION (2) for the FR-E800.
Protocol Object Types Supported The bit is 1 for the supported objects or 0 for the other objects.
Protocol Revision Shows the revision of the compliant BACnet standard.
Protocol Services Supported The bit is 1 for the supported services or 0 for the other services.
Protocol Version Shows the version of the compliant BACnet standard.
Shows the reliability of the network port.
Reliability
Fixed to no-fault-detected (0) for the FR-E800.
Relinquish Default Shows the default value to be applied when no data is stored in the Priority Array property.
Shows whether to support segmentation of messages at sending/receiving.
Segmentation Supported
Fixed to NO_SEGMENTATION (3) for the FR-E800.
Status Flags Always 0.
System Status Shows the current physical and logical status of the device.
Unit Uses engineering units as the measurement unit.
Vendor Identifier Shows 16-bit vendor identification code assigned by ASHRAE.
Vendor Name Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
Property List Shows the property identifier list.
Current Command Priority Shows the currently active priority.

 Supported BACnet object

• ANALOG INPUT
Present value
Object identifier Object name Description Unit
access type*1
Represents actual input voltage (or input current) of
terminal 2.
(The range varies depending on the Pr.73 and Pr.267
percent
1 Terminal 2 R settings.
(98)
0 to 10 V (0% to 100%),
0 to 5 V (0% to 100%),
0 to 20 mA (0% to 100%))
Represents actual input voltage of terminal 4.
(The range varies depending on the Pr.73 and Pr.267
settings. percent
2 Terminal 4 R
2 to 10 V (0% to 100%), (98)
1 to 5 V (0% to 100%),
4 to 20 mA (0% to 100%))
*1 R: Read only, W: Read/Write (Commandable values not supported), C: Read/Write (Commandable values supported)

• ANALOG VALUE
Present value
Object identifier Object name Description Unit
access type*1
hertz
1 Output frequency*2 R Represents the output frequency value.
(27)
amperes
2 Output current R Represents the output current value.
(3)
volts
3 Output voltage R Represents the output voltage value.
(5)
revolution-
6 Running speed*2 R Represents the running speed value. per-minute
(104)
Converter output volts
8 R Represents the converter output voltage value.
voltage (5)
kilowatts
14 Output power R Represents the output power value.
(48)
percent
17 Load meter R Represents the load meter value.
(98)

114 2. Ethernet Communication

2.8 BACnet/IP
 Present value
Object identifier Object name Description Unit
access type*1
Cumulative hours
1
20 R Represents the cumulative energization time value.
energization time (71)
hours
23 Actual operation time R Represents the actual operation time value.
(71)
kilowatt-
2
25 Cumulative power R Represents the cumulative power value. hours
(19)

52 PID set point R Represents the PID set point.

no-units
(95)
3
Represents the PID deviation.
no-units
54 PID deviation R (Minus display is available with reference to 0%, in
(95)
0.1% increment.)
no-units
4
67 PID measured value2 R Represents the PID measurement 2.
(95)
no-units
200 Alarm history 1 R Represents the latest fault record (fault record 1).
(95) 5
no-units
201 Alarm history 2 R Represents the second latest fault (fault record 2).
(95)
no-units
202 Alarm history 3 R Represents the third latest fault (fault record 3).
(95) 6
no-units
203 Alarm history 4 R Represents the fourth latest fault (fault record 4).
(95)
Controls the ratio of the frequency command. (Setting percent
300 Speed scale*3 C
range: 0.00 to 100.00) (Refer to page 111.) (98) 7
Set the PID action set point.
• This object is the set point during dancer control if
Pr.128 = "40 to 43" and Pr.609 = "4". (Setting range:
0.00 to 100.00)*5 8
• This object is the set point during PID operation if
Pr.128 = "60 or 61". (Setting range: 0.00 to 100.00)*4
no-units
310 PID set point CMD*3 C • This object is the set point during PID operation if
Pr.128 = "1000 or 1001" and Pr.609 = "4". (Setting
(95)
9
range: 0.00 to 100.00)*4*5
• This object is the set point during PID operation if
Pr.128 = "2000 or 2001" (not applied to the
frequency) and Pr.609 = "4". (Setting range: 0.00 to 10
100.00)*4*5
Set the PID measured value.
• This object is the measured value during dancer
control if Pr.128 = "40 to 43" and Pr.610 = "4".
(Setting range: 0.00 to 100.00)
• This object is the measured value during PID
operation if Pr.128 = "60 or 61". (Setting range: 0.00
PID measured value to 100.00)*4 no-units
311 C • This object is the measured value during PID
CMD*3 (95)
operation if Pr.128 = "1000 or 1001" and Pr.610 = "4".
(Setting range: 0.00 to 100.00)*4
• This object is the measured value during PID
operation if Pr.128 = "2000 or 2001" (not applied to
the frequency) and Pr.610 = "4". (Setting range: 0.00
to 100.00)*4
Set the PID deviation. (0.01 increments)
• This object is the deviation during PID operation if
Pr.128 = "50 or 51". (Setting range: -100.00 to
100.00)
• This object is the deviation during PID operation if
percent
312 PID deviation CMD*3 C Pr.128 = "1010 or 1011" and Pr.609 = "4". (Setting
(98)
range: -100.00 to 100.00)
• This object is the deviation during PID operation if
Pr.128 = "2010 or 2011" (not applied to the
frequency) and Pr.609 = "4". (Setting range: -100.00
to 100.00)

2. Ethernet Communication
2.8 BACnet/IP
115
 Present value
Object identifier Object name Description Unit
access type*1
no-units
398 Mailbox parameter W
Access to the properties which are not defined as (95)
objects are available. (Refer to page 117.) no-units
399 Mailbox value W
(95)
seconds
10007 Acceleration time W Set Pr.7 Acceleration time.
(73)
seconds
10008 Deceleration time W Set Pr.8 Deceleration time.
(73)
*1 R: Read only, W: Read/Write (Commandable values not supported), C: Read/Write (Commandable values supported)
Values written to the objects that support the commandable values are stored in the Priority Array, even when "Write Access Denied" is returned
due to inconsistency of the writing requirements such as the operating mode, on condition that the values are written within the setting range.
*2 The Pr.37 and Pr.53 settings are invalid.
*3 If communication speed command source is other than NET, the setting value can be written, but not to be applied.
*4 When both C42 and C44 ≠ "9999", the setting range is from the smaller coefficient to the larger coefficient of C42 and C44. Depending on the
setting, the writing value and the reading value may not be the same at the minimum digit.
*5 When Pr.133 ≠ "9999", the Pr.133 setting is valid.

• BINARY INPUT
Present value Description
Object identifier Object name
access type*1 (0: inactive, 1: active)
0*2 Terminal DI0 R Represents actual input of terminal DI0.
*2 Terminal DI1 R Represents actual input of terminal DI1.
1
*2*3 Terminal RUN R Represents actual output of terminal RUN.
100
*2*3 Terminal FU R Represents actual output of terminal FU.
104
105 Terminal ABC/RO0 R Represents actual output of terminals A, B, and C.
106*2*3 Terminal RO1 R Represents actual output of terminals A2, B2, and C2.
107*2*4 Terminal SO R Represents actual output of terminal SO.
*1 R: Read only, W: Read/Write (Commandable values not supported), C: Read/Write (Commandable values supported)
*2 For the safety communication model, no function is assigned.
*3 For the Ethernet model, no function is assigned.
*4 For the IP67 model, no function is assigned.

• BINARY OUTPUT
Present value Description
Object identifier Object name
access type*1 (0: inactive, 1: active)
Controls actual output of terminal RUN.
The output can be controlled*3 when the Y82 (BACnet
0*2 Terminal RUN CMD C binary output) signal is assigned by setting "82" (positive
logic) or "182" (negative logic) in Pr.190 RUN terminal
function selection.
Controls actual output of terminal FU.
The output can be controlled*3 when the Y82 (BACnet
4*2 Terminal FU CMD C binary output) signal is assigned by setting "82" (positive
logic) or "182" (negative logic) in Pr.191 FU terminal
function selection.
Controls actual output of terminals A, B, and C.
The output can be controlled*3 when the Y82 (BACnet
5 Terminal ABC/RO0 CMD C binary output) signal is assigned by setting "82" (positive
logic) or "182" (negative logic) in Pr.192 ABC terminal
function selection.
Controls actual output of terminals A2, B2, and C2.
The output can be controlled*3 when the Y82 (BACnet
6*2 Terminal RO1 CMD C binary output) signal is assigned by setting "82" (positive
logic) or "182" (negative logic) in Pr.197 ABC2 terminal
function selection.
*1 R: Read only, W: Read/Write (Commandable values not supported), C: Read/Write (Commandable values supported)
Values written to the objects that support the commandable values are stored in the Priority Array, even when "Write Access Denied" is returned
due to inconsistency of the writing requirements such as the operating mode, on condition that the values are written within the setting range.
*2 For the Ethernet model and the safety communication model, no function is assigned.
*3 Available regardless of the operation mode, operation command source, and speed command source.

116 2. Ethernet Communication

2.8 BACnet/IP
 • BINARY VALUE

Object identifier Object name

Present value
access type*1
Description 1
0 Inverter running R Represents inverter running (RUN signal) status.
11 Inverter operation ready R Represents inverter operation ready (RY signal) status.
98 Alarm output R Represents alarm output (LF signal) status. 2
99 Fault output R Represents fault output (ALM signal) status.
200 Inverter running reverse R Represents inverter reverse running status.

300*2 Control input instruction DI0 C

Always set to the STF signal regardless of the Pr.178
setting.
3
Setting "1" in this object turns ON the STF signal.
Always set to the STR signal regardless of the Pr.179
301*2 Control input instruction DI1 C setting.
Setting "1" in this object turns ON the STR signal. 4
Controls the start/stop command. The start command is

400 Run/Stop C written after the Speed scale is applied.*3

1: Start
0: Stop
5
Controls the forward/reverse rotation.*3
401 Forward/Reverse C 1: Reverse rotation
0: Forward rotation 6
Clears fault output status.
402 Fault reset C (Release of an inverter fault without inverter reset is
available.)
*1 R: Read only, W: Read/Write (Commandable values not supported), C: Read/Write (Commandable values supported) 7
Values written to the objects that support the commandable values are stored in the Priority Array, even when "Write Access Denied" is returned
due to inconsistency of the writing requirements such as the operating mode, on condition that the values are written within the setting range.
*2 For the safety communication model, no function is assigned.
*3 If communication operation command source is other than NET, the setting value can be written, but not to be applied. 8
• DEVICE
Object identifier Object name Description 9
0 to 4194302 Reads the device status or changes the setting.
Model information # device instance number
4194303*1 Device instance number: Pr.728 × 10000 + Pr.729

*1 Available only for Read Property Service.

10
• NETWORK PORT
Object identifier Object name Description
Reads the status of the Ethernet connector (PORT1) or changes
0 BACnetIP on ISO8802-3(PORT1)
the setting.
Reads the status of the Ethernet connector (PORT2) or changes
1 BACnetIP on ISO8802-3(PORT2)
the setting.
4194303*1 Access is attempted as the object identifier of the port which receives the request.
*1 Available only for Read Property Service.

 Mailbox parameter / Mailbox value (BACnet registers)

• Access to the properties which are not defined as objects are available by using "Mailbox parameter" and "Mailbox value".
• To read a property, write the register of the intended property to "Mailbox parameter", and then read "Mailbox value". To
write a property, write the register of the intended property to "Mailbox parameter", and then write a value to "Mailbox
value".
• System environment variables
Register Definition Read/write Remarks
The data is written as an operation mode setting for writing.
40010 Operation mode / inverter setting Read/write
The data is read as the operation mode status for reading.

[Operation mode / inverter setting]

Mode Read value Write value
EXT H0000 H0010 *1

PU H0001 H0011 *1

2. Ethernet Communication
2.8 BACnet/IP
117
 Mode Read value Write value
EXT
H0002 —
JOG
PU
H0003 —
JOG
NET H0004 H0014
PU + EXT H0005 —
*1 Writing is available depending on the Pr.79 and Pr.340 settings. For details, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
Restrictions in each operation mode conform with the computer link specification.
• Monitor code
For details of the register numbers and the monitor items, refer to the description of Pr.52 in the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).
• Parameter
Pr. Register Name Read/write Remarks
For details on parameter names, refer to
41000 to
0 to 999 the parameter list in the FR-E800 Read/write The parameter number + 41000 is the register number.
41999
Instruction Manual (Function).
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
C2 (902) 41902 Read/write
frequency
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
42092 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C3 (902)
(analog value)
C3 (902)
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias Analog value (%) of the voltage (current) applied to
43902 Read
(terminal analog value) terminal 2
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
125 (903) 41903 Read/write
frequency
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
42093 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C4 (903)
(analog value)
C4 (903)
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain Analog value (%) of the voltage (current) applied to
43903 Read
(terminal analog value) terminal 2
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
C5 (904) 41904 Read/write
frequency
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
42094 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C6 (904)
(analog value)
C6 (904)
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to
43904 Read
(terminal analog value) terminal 4
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
126 (905) 41905 Read/write
frequency
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
42095 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C7 (905)
(analog value)
C7 (905)
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to
43905 Read
(terminal analog value) terminal 4
C12 (917) 41917 Terminal 1 bias frequency (speed) Read/write Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.
Analog value (%) set in C13 (917) (Available only when
42107 Terminal 1 bias (speed) (analog value) Read/write
the FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C13 (917)
Terminal 1 bias (speed) (terminal analog Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to terminal 1
43917 Read
value) (Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C14 (918) 41918 Terminal 1 gain frequency (speed) Read/write Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.
Analog value (%) set in C15 (918) (Available only when
42108 Terminal 1 gain (speed) (analog value) Read/write
the FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C15 (918)
Terminal 1 gain (speed) (terminal analog Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to terminal 1
43918 Read
value) (Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C16 (919) 41919 Terminal 1 bias command (torque) Read/write Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.
Analog value (%) set in C17 (919) (Available only when
42109 Terminal 1 bias (torque) (analog value) Read/write
the FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C17 (919)
Terminal 1 bias (torque) (terminal analog Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to terminal 1
43919 Read
value) (Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C18 (920) 41920 Terminal 1 gain command (torque) Read/write Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.
Analog value (%) set in C19 (920) (Available only when
42110 Terminal 1 gain (torque) (analog value) Read/write
the FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C19 (920)
Terminal 1 gain (torque) (terminal analog Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to terminal 1
43920 Read
value) (Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C38 (932) 41932 Terminal 4 bias command (torque) Read/write

118 2. Ethernet Communication

2.8 BACnet/IP
 Pr. Register Name Read/write Remarks

C39 (932)
42122 Terminal 4 bias (torque) (analog value)
Terminal 4 bias (torque) (terminal analog
Read/write Analog value (%) set in C39 (932)
Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to
1
43932 Read
value) terminal 4
C40 (933) 41933 Terminal 4 gain command (torque) Read/write
42123 Terminal 4 gain (torque) (analog value) Read/write Analog value (%) set in C41 (933) 2
C41 (933) Terminal 4 gain (torque) (terminal analog Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to
43933 Read
value) terminal 4
C42 (934) 41934 PID display bias coefficient Read/write
42124 PID display bias analog value Read/write Analog value (%) set in C43 (934) 3
C43 (934) PID display bias analog value (terminal Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to
43934 Read
analog value) terminal 4
C44 (935) 41935 PID display gain coefficient Read/write
42125 PID display gain analog value Read/write Analog value (%) set in C45 (935)
4
C45 (935) PID display gain analog value (terminal Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to
43935 Read
analog value) terminal 4

1000 to 45000 to
For details on parameter names, refer to
the parameter list in the FR-E800 Read/write The parameter number + 44000 is the register number.
5
1999 45999
Instruction Manual (Function).
• Fault history
Register Definition Read/write Remarks
6
40501 Fault record 1 Read/write
40502 Fault record 2 Read
40503 Fault record 3 Read 7
40504 Fault record 4 Read Being 2 bytes in length, the data is stored as H00○○.
Refer to the lowest 1 byte for the error code.
40505 Fault record 5 Read
Performing write using the register 40501 batch-clears the fault
40506
40507
Fault record 6
Fault record 7
Read
Read
history.
Set any value as data.
8
40508 Fault record 8 Read
40509 Fault record 9 Read
40510 Fault record 10 Read 9
• Product profile
Register
44001
Definition
Model (1st and 2nd characters) Read
Read/write Remarks
10
44002 Model (3rd and 4th characters) Read
44003 Model (5th and 6th characters) Read
44004 Model (7th and 8th characters) Read The model name can be read in ASCII code.
44005 Model (9th and 10th characters) Read "H20" (blank code) is set for blank area.
Example) FR-E820-EPA:
44006 Model (11th and 12th characters) Read
H46, H52, H2D, H45, H38, H32, H30, H2D, H45, H50, H41,
44007 Model (13th and 14th characters) Read H20...H20
44008 Model (15th and 16th characters) Read
44009 Model (17th and 18th characters) Read
44010 Model (19th and 20th characters) Read
44011 Capacity (1st and 2nd characters) Read The inverter rated capacity can be read in ASCII code.
44012 Capacity (3rd and 4th characters) Read Data read is displayed in increments of 0.1 kW (rounded down to
one decimal place).
44013 Capacity (5th and 6th characters) Read "H20" (blank code) is set for blank area.
Example) 0.75K: " 7" (H20, H20, H20, H20, H20, H37)

NOTE
• When a 32-bit parameter setting or monitor item is read and the value to be read exceeds HFFFF, HFFFF is returned.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.8 BACnet/IP
119
  ANNEX A - PROTOCOL IMPLEMENTATION CONFORMANCE
STATEMENT (NORMATIVE)
(This annex is part of this Standard and is required for its use.)

BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement

Date: 9th December 2019
Vendor Name: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
Product Name: Inverter
Product Model Number: (FR-E800 series)
Application Software Version: 8650*
Firmware Revision: 1.00
BACnet Protocol Revision: 19

Product Description:

BACnet Standardized Device Profile (Annex L):

BACnet Cross-Domain Advanced Operator Workstation (B-XAWS)
BACnet Advanced Operator Workstation (B-AWS)
BACnet Operator Workstation (B-OWS)
BACnet Operator Display (B-OD)
BACnet Advanced Life Safety Workstation (B-ALSWS)
BACnet Life Safety Workstation (B-LSWS)
BACnet Life Safety Annunciator Panel (B-LSAP)
BACnet Advanced Access Control Workstation (B-AACWS)
BACnet Access Control Workstation (B-ACWS)
BACnet Access Control Security Display (B-ACSD)
BACnet Building Controller (B-BC)
BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC)
BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC)
BACnet Smart Sensor (B-SS)
BACnet Smart Actuator (B-SA)
BACnet Advanced Life Safety Controller (B-ALSC)
BACnet Life Safety Controller (B-LSC)
BACnet Advanced Access Control Controller (B-AACC)
BACnet Access Control Controller (B-ACC)
BACnet Router (B-RTR)
BACnet Gateway (B-GW)
BACnet Broadcast Management Device (B-BBMD)
BACnet Access Control Door Controller (B-ACDC)
BACnet Access Control Credential Reader (B-ACCR)
BACnet General (B-GENERAL)

List all BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks Supported (Annex K):

DS-RP-B, DS-WP-B, DM-DDB-B, DM-DOB-B, DM-DCC-B, DM-RD-B

120 2. Ethernet Communication

2.8 BACnet/IP
Segmentation Capability:

Able to transmit segmented messages Window Size

1
Able to receive segmented messages Window Size

2
Standard Object Types Supported:
An object type is supported if it may be present in the device. For each standard Object Type supported provide the following
data: 3
1. Whether objects of this type are dynamically creatable using the CreateObject service

2. Whether objects of this type are dynamically deletable using the DeleteObject service
4
3. List of the optional properties supported

4. List of all properties that are writable where not otherwise required by this standard
5
5. List of all properties that are conditionally writable where not otherwise required by this standard

6. List of proprietary properties and for each its property identifier, datatype, and meaning
6
7. List of any property range restrictions

Dynamic object creation and deletion is not supported. 7

To check the object types supported by the FR-E800-(SC)EPA and FR-E806-SCEPA, refer to page 114.

Data Link Layer Options:

8
ARCNET (ATA 878.1), 2.5 Mb. (Clause 8)
ARCNET (ATA 878.1), EIA-485 (Clause 8), baud rate(s)
BACnet IP, (Annex J) 9
BACnet IP, (Annex J), BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD)
BACnet IP, (Annex J), Network Address Translation (NAT Traversal)
BACnet IPv6, (Annex U) 10
BACnet IPv6, (Annex U), BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD)
BACnet/ZigBee (Annex O)
ISO 8802-3, Ethernet (Clause 7)
MS/TP master (Clause 9), baud rate(s):
MS/TP slave (Clause 9), baud rate(s):
Point-To-Point, EIA 232 (Clause 10), baud rate(s):
Point-To-Point, modem, (Clause 10), baud rate(s):
Other:

Device Address Binding:

Is static device binding supported? (This is currently necessary for two-way communication with MS/TP slaves and certain
other devices.) Yes No

Networking Options:
Router, Clause 6 - List all routing configurations, e.g., ARCNET-Ethernet, Ethernet-MS/TP, etc.
Annex H, BACnet Tunneling Router over IP

Character Sets Supported:

Indicating support for multiple character sets does not imply that they can all be supported simultaneously.
ISO 10646 (UTF-8) IBMTM/MicrosoftTM DBCS ISO 8859-1
ISO 10646 (UCS-2) ISO 10646 (UCS-4) JIS X 0208

2. Ethernet Communication
2.8 BACnet/IP
121
 Gateway Options:
If this product is a communication gateway, describe the types of non-BACnet equipment/networks(s) that the gateway
supports:

If this product is a communication gateway which presents a network of virtual BACnet devices, a separate PICS shall be
provided that describes the functionality of the virtual BACnet devices. That PICS shall describe a superset of the functionality
of all types of virtual BACnet devices that can be presented by the gateway.

Network Security Options:

Non-secure Device - is capable of operating without BACnet Network Security
Secure Device - is capable of using BACnet Network Security (NS-SD BIBB)
Multiple Application-Specific Keys
Supports encryption (NS-ED BIBB)
Key Server (NS-KS BIBB)

122 2. Ethernet Communication

2.8 BACnet/IP
2.9 MELSOFT / FA product connection 1

2.9.1 Outline 2
A computer (FR Configurator2), GOT, or a relay station (programmable controller) can be connected via Ethernet.

 System configuration 3
• Direct connection with a computer (FR Configurator2)

Ethernet cable
4

Personal computer Inverter

5
(FR Configurator2)

• Direct connection with GOT

Ethernet cable
6

GOT
Inverter
7
• Connection using a relay station (programmable controller)

Ethernet cable
8

Relay station
(programmable controller) Inverter
9

2.9.2 Initial setting for MELSOFT / FA product 10

connection
Use the following parameters to perform required settings for Ethernet communication between the inverter and other devices.
To make communication between other devices and the inverter, perform the initial settings of the inverter parameters to match
the communication specifications of the devices. Data communication cannot be made if the initial settings are not made or if
there is any setting error.
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
1427 Ethernet function selection
5001
N630*1*4 1 502, 5000 to 5002,
1428 Ethernet function selection 5006 to 5008, 5010 to
45237
N631*1*4 2 5013, 9999, 34962*3,
Set the application, protocol, etc.
1429 Ethernet function selection 44818*2, 45237,
45238
N632*1*4 3 45238, 47808*2,
1430 Ethernet function selection 61450
9999
N633*1*4 4
1424 Ethernet communication
1 1 to 239 Enter the network number.
N650*1*4 network number
1425 Ethernet communication
1 1 to 120 Enter the station number.
N651*1*4 station number
*1 The setting is applied after an inverter reset or next power-ON.
*2 The setting is available for the FR-E800-(SC)EPA and FR-E806-SCEPA.
*3 The setting is available for the FR-E800-(SC)EPB and FR-E806-SCEPB.
*4 The setting is not available for the FR-E800-EPC.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.9 MELSOFT / FA product connection
123
 NOTE
• Enable the PLC function (Pr.414 PLC function operation selection ≠ "0 (initial value)") to use FR Configurator2 (Developer).
(For details of Pr.414, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
When the FR-E800-EPC is used, connect the devices with a USB cable. (Refer to page 278.)

 Ethernet function selection (Pr.1427 to Pr.1430)

To select MELSOFT / FA product connection for the application, set any value from "5000 to 5002" or "5006 to 5008"
(MELSOFT / FA product connection) in any of Pr.1427 to Pr.1430 Ethernet function selection 1 to 4. (For how to set the
application value, refer to the Instruction Manual of the device connected via Ethernet.) (Refer to page 226.)

 Ethernet communication network number (Pr.1424), Ethernet

communication station number (Pr.1425)
• When the MELSOFT / FA product connection, SLMP, or iQSS is selected for Ethernet communication, enter the Ethernet
communication network number in Pr.1424 and the Ethernet communication station number in Pr.1425.

2.9.3 Parameters related to MELSOFT / FA product

connection
The following parameters are used for communication via MELSOFT / FA product. Set the parameters as required.
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
1426 Link speed and duplex Set the communication speed and the communication mode (full-
0 0 to 4
N641*1 mode selection duplex/half-duplex).
1442
IP filter address 1 (Ethernet) 0
N660*1
1443
IP filter address 2 (Ethernet) 0
N661*1
0 to 255
1444
IP filter address 3 (Ethernet) 0
N662*1
1445 Set the range of connectable IP addresses for the network devices.
*1 IP filter address 4 (Ethernet) 0 (When Pr.1442 to Pr.1445 = "0 (initial value)", the function is
N663 invalid.)
1446 IP filter address 2 range
9999
N664*1 specification (Ethernet)
1447 IP filter address 3 range
9999 0 to 255, 9999
N665*1 specification (Ethernet)
1448 IP filter address 4 range
9999
N666*1 specification (Ethernet)
*1 The setting is applied after an inverter reset or next power-ON.

 Communication speed and full-duplex/half-duplex selection (Pr.1426)

Use Pr.1426 Link speed and duplex mode selection to set the communication speed and the full-duplex or half-duplex
system. If the operation is not performed properly in the initial setting (Pr.1426 = "0"), set Pr.1426 according to the
specifications of the connected device.
Communication Full-duplex/half-
Pr.1426 setting Remarks
speed duplex system
The communication speed and the communication mode (half-duplex/full-
Automatic Automatic duplex) are automatically negotiated to ensure the optimum setting. To set
0 (initial value)
negotiation negotiation automatic negotiation, auto negotiation setting is required also in the master
station.
1 100 Mbps Full duplex —
2 100 Mbps Half duplex —
3 10 Mbps Full duplex —
4 10 Mbps Half duplex —

124 2. Ethernet Communication

2.9 MELSOFT / FA product connection
 IP filtering function (Ethernet) (Pr.1442 to Pr.1448)
• Set the IP address range for connectable network devices (Pr.1442 to Pr.1448) to limit the connectable devices. The 1
setting range for IP address of connectable network devices depends on the settings in Pr.1443 and Pr.1446, Pr.1444 and
Pr.1447, and Pr.1445 and Pr.1448. (Either of the settings can be larger than the other in Pr.1443 and Pr.1446, Pr.1444
and Pr.1447, and Pr.1445 and Pr.1448.) 2
[Setting example 1] Pr.1442 Pr.1443 Pr.1444 Pr.1445
IP filter address (Ethernet) 192 168 1 100
The range is between The range is between 3
the values set in both the values set in both
parameters. parameters.

4
Pr.1446 Pr.1447 Pr.1448
IP filter address range specification
(Ethernet) ― 9999 3 150
In this case, the IP address range in which Ethernet communication is permitted is "192.168.x (1 to 3).xxx (100 to 150)".

[Setting example 2]
Pr.1442 Pr.1443 Pr.1444 Pr.1445
5
IP filter address (Ethernet) 192 168 2 100

6
The range is between
the values set in both
parameters.
Pr.1446 Pr.1447 Pr.1448
IP filter address range specification
(Ethernet) ― 9999 9999 50 7
In this case, the IP address range in which Ethernet communication is permitted is "192.168.2.xxx (50 to 100)".

• When Pr.1442 to Pr.1445 = "0 (initial value)", the function is invalid.

• When "9999 (initial value)" is set in Pr.1446 to Pr.1448, the range is invalid. 8
CAUTION
• The IP filtering function (Ethernet) (Pr.1442 to Pr.1448) is provided as a means to prevent unauthorized access, DoS
9
attacks, computer viruses, or other cyberattacks from external devices, but the function does not prevent such access
completely. In order to protect the inverter and the system against unauthorized access by external systems, take
additional security measures. We shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving inverter trouble and
10
system trouble by DoS attacks, unauthorized access, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks. The following are
examples of measures to prevent them.
- Install a firewall.
- Install a personal computer as a relay station, and control the relaying of transmission data using an application
program.
- Install an external device as a relay station to control access rights. (For the details of external devices used to control
access rights, contact the distributors of the external devices.)

2. Ethernet Communication
2.9 MELSOFT / FA product connection
125
 2.10 SLMP

2.10.1 Outline
SLMP is a common protocol for seamless communication between applications. Users do not have to be concerned with
network layers or boundaries. SLMP communications are available among devices that can transfer messages by SLMP
(programmable controllers, personal computers, HMIs and others). (For the details of the SLMP compatibility of external
devices, refer to the Instruction Manual of external devices.)

2.10.2 Initial setting for SLMP

Use the following parameters to perform required settings for Ethernet communication between the inverter and other devices.
To make communication between other devices and the inverter, perform the initial settings of the inverter parameters to match
the communication specifications of the devices. Data communication cannot be made if the initial settings are not made or if
there is any setting error.
SLMP can be used only when the PLC function is enabled. Set Pr.414 PLC function operation selection ≠ "0 (initial value)".
(For details of Pr.414, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Setting range
value
1427 Ethernet function selection
5001
N630*1 1 502, 5000 to 5002,
1428 Ethernet function selection 5006 to 5008, 5010 to
45237
N631*1 2 5013, 9999, 34962*3,
Set the application, protocol, etc.
1429 Ethernet function selection 44818*2, 45237,
45238
N632*1 3 45238, 47808*2,
1430 Ethernet function selection 61450
9999
N633*1 4
1424 Ethernet communication
1 1 to 239 Enter the network number.
N650*1 network number
1425 Ethernet communication
1 1 to 120 Enter the station number.
N651*1 station number
*1 The setting is applied after an inverter reset or next power-ON.
*2 The setting is available for the FR-E800-(SC)EPA and FR-E806-SCEPA.
*3 The setting is available for the FR-E800-(SC)EPB and FR-E806-SCEPB.

NOTE
• The Ethernet model, the safety communication model, and the IP67 model only supports binary code. (ASCII code is not
supported.)

 Ethernet function selection (Pr.1427 to Pr.1430)

To select SLMP for the application, set any value from "5010 to 5013" (SLMP) in any of Pr.1427 to Pr.1430 Ethernet function
selection 1 to 4. (Refer to page 226.)

 Ethernet communication network number (Pr.1424), Ethernet

communication station number (Pr.1425)
• When the MELSOFT / FA product connection, SLMP, or iQSS is selected for Ethernet communication, enter the Ethernet
communication network number in Pr.1424 and the Ethernet communication station number in Pr.1425.

126 2. Ethernet Communication

2.10 SLMP
2.10.3 Parameters related to SLMP
The following parameters are used for SLMP communication. Set the parameters as required. 1
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Setting range
value
1426 Link speed and duplex
0 0 to 4
Set the communication speed and the communication mode (full- 2
*1 mode selection duplex/half-duplex).
N641
1442
IP filter address 1 (Ethernet) 0
N660*1
1443
3
IP filter address 2 (Ethernet) 0
N661*1
0 to 255
1444
N662*1
IP filter address 3 (Ethernet) 0
4
1445 Set the range of connectable IP addresses for the network devices.
IP filter address 4 (Ethernet) 0 (When Pr.1442 to Pr.1445 = "0 (initial value)", the function is
N663*1 invalid.)
1446
N664*1
IP filter address 2 range
specification (Ethernet)
9999 5
1447 IP filter address 3 range
9999 0 to 255, 9999
N665*1 specification (Ethernet)
1448 IP filter address 4 range
9999
6
N666*1 specification (Ethernet)
*1 The setting is applied after an inverter reset or next power-ON.

 Communication speed and full-duplex/half-duplex selection (Pr.1426) 7

Use Pr.1426 Link speed and duplex mode selection to set the communication speed and the full-duplex or half-duplex
system. If the operation is not performed properly in the initial setting (Pr.1426 = "0"), set Pr.1426 according to the
specifications of the connected device. 8
Communication Full-duplex/half-
Pr.1426 setting Remarks
speed duplex system
The communication speed and the communication mode (half-duplex/full- 9
Automatic Automatic duplex) are automatically negotiated to ensure the optimum setting. To set
0 (initial value)
negotiation negotiation automatic negotiation, auto negotiation setting is required also in the master
station.
1 100 Mbps Full duplex — 10
2 100 Mbps Half duplex —
3 10 Mbps Full duplex —
4 10 Mbps Half duplex —

2. Ethernet Communication
2.10 SLMP
127
  IP filtering function (Ethernet) (Pr.1442 to Pr.1448)
• Set the IP address range for connectable network devices (Pr.1442 to Pr.1448) to limit the connectable devices. The
setting range for IP address of connectable network devices depends on the settings in Pr.1443 and Pr.1446, Pr.1444 and
Pr.1447, and Pr.1445 and Pr.1448. (Either of the settings can be larger than the other in Pr.1443 and Pr.1446, Pr.1444
and Pr.1447, and Pr.1445 and Pr.1448.)
[Setting example 1] Pr.1442 Pr.1443 Pr.1444 Pr.1445
IP filter address (Ethernet) 192 168 1 100
The range is between The range is between
the values set in both the values set in both
parameters. parameters.
Pr.1446 Pr.1447 Pr.1448
IP filter address range specification
(Ethernet) ― 9999 3 150
In this case, the IP address range in which Ethernet communication is permitted is "192.168.x (1 to 3).xxx (100 to 150)".

[Setting example 2]
Pr.1442 Pr.1443 Pr.1444 Pr.1445
IP filter address (Ethernet) 192 168 2 100
The range is between
the values set in both
parameters.
Pr.1446 Pr.1447 Pr.1448
IP filter address range specification
(Ethernet) ― 9999 9999 50
In this case, the IP address range in which Ethernet communication is permitted is "192.168.2.xxx (50 to 100)".

• When Pr.1442 to Pr.1445 = "0 (initial value)", the function is invalid.

• When "9999 (initial value)" is set in Pr.1446 to Pr.1448, the range is invalid.

CAUTION
• The IP filtering function (Ethernet) (Pr.1442 to Pr.1448) is provided as a means to prevent unauthorized access, DoS
attacks, computer viruses, or other cyberattacks from external devices, but the function does not prevent such access
completely. In order to protect the inverter and the system against unauthorized access by external systems, take
additional security measures. We shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving inverter trouble and
system trouble by DoS attacks, unauthorized access, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks. The following are
examples of measures to prevent them.
- Install a firewall.
- Install a personal computer as a relay station, and control the relaying of transmission data using an application
program.
- Install an external device as a relay station to control access rights. (For the details of external devices used to control
access rights, contact the distributors of the external devices.)

128 2. Ethernet Communication

2.10 SLMP
 Communication procedure
• Using TCP/IP 1
The following is the communication procedure when executing SLMP communication with TCP/IP.
With TCP/IP, connections are established when communication is executed, and whether data is received normally or not
is checked to ensure reliability of data. However, the line load is higher as compared to UDP. 2
Inverter
External device

5
Connection request Connecting operation

The external device issues a connection request

to the inverter. (Active open)
The inverter accepts the connection request from
the external device. (Passive open)
6

Sending a request message Execution of the operation 8

Upon establishment of the connection, the external According to the request message sent from
device sends a request message to the inverter. the external device, the inverter executes
a reading, writing, or other operation.
9
The process is repeated as needed.

Receiving the response message Returning a response message

10
The external device receives the response message Upon completion of the operation, the inverter sends
from the inverter and confirms the operation result. a response message to the external device.

Closing the connection Closing the connection

The external device issues a close request The inverter accepts the close request from
to the inverter and closes the communication. the external device and closes the communication.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.10 SLMP
129
 • Using UDP
The following is the communication procedure when executing SLMP communication with UDP.
With UDP, connections are not established when communication is executed, and whether data is received normally or
not is not checked. Therefore, the line load is low. However, data is less reliable as compared to TCP/IP.
Inverter
External device

Sending a request message Execution of the operation

The external device sends a request message According to the request message sent from
to the inverter. the external device, the inverter executes a reading,
writing, or other operation.

The process is repeated as needed.

Receiving the response message Returning a response message

The external device receives the response message Upon completion of the operation, the inverter sends
from the inverter and confirms the operation result. a response message to the external device.

End of the communication

The external device executes the closing operation

to close the communication.

 Message format
• Request message format
The following is the format of a request message sent from the external device to the inverter. The request message data
length is 2047 bytes at the maximum.
Header Subheader Destination Destination Destination unit Destination Request data Monitoring timer Request data Footer
network station I/O No. multidrop length
station No.
No. No.

130 2. Ethernet Communication

2.10 SLMP
 • Response message format
The following is the format of a response message sent from the inverter to the external device. The response message
data length is 2048 bytes at the maximum.
1
• Normal completion

Header Subheader Destination Destination Destination unit Destination Response data

network station No. I/O No. multidrop length
station No.
End code Response data Footer
2
No.

3
• Failed completion

Header Subheader Destination Destination Destination unit Destination Response data

4
network station I/O No. multidrop length
No. No. station
No.

5
End code Network Station Destination unit Destination Command Subcommand Footer
No. No. I/O No. multidrop
station No.
(responding (responding
station) station)
6

Error information
7
Item Size Endian Description
Header — — Header for TCP/IP or UDP. The header is added by the external device before transmission.
Subheader
(QnA-compatible 2 bytes
Request: H5000 8
Response: HD000
3E frame)
Big
Subheader
Request: H5400 + Serial No.*1 + H0000
(QnA-compatible
4E frame)
6 bytes
Response: HD400 + Serial No.*1 + H0000 9
Specify the network No. of the access
destination. Use a hexadecimal value to specify The own station has a network No. of H00
Destination and a station No. of HFF. The other
network No.
1 byte — the network number.
Own station: H00
stations have other values. 10
Other stations: H01 to HEF (1 to 239) The request data addressed to the own
station is received regardless of the
Specify the station No. of the access destination.
network No. and station No. settings.
Use a hexadecimal value to specify the station
Destination The request data addressed to the other
1 byte — number. stations is received when the Pr.1424 and
station No.
Own station: HFF (when the network No. is H00)
Pr.1425 settings are the same.
Other stations: H01 to H78 (1 to 120)
Destination unit I/
2 bytes Little Fixed to H03FF
O No.
Destination
multidrop station 1 byte — Fixed to H00
No.
Request data Specify the data length from the monitoring timer to the request data in hexadecimal.
2 bytes Little
length Example) 24 bytes: H1800
Set the waiting time until the inverter completes reading/writing after receiving a request
message from the external device.
When the inverter does not return the response message within the waiting time, the
response message will be discarded.
• H0000: Unlimited (until the execution is completed)
• H0001 to HFFFF (1 to 65535): Waiting time (Unit: 0.25 s)
Recommended setting
Monitoring timer 2 bytes Little • When the access destination is the own station:
Monitoring, operation command, frequency setting (RAM): H1 to H40 (0.25 to 10 s)
Parameter read/write, frequency setting (EEPROM): H1 to H40 (0.25 to 10 s)
Parameter clear / All parameter clear: H15 to H40 (5.25 to 10 s)
• When the access destination is any other station:
Monitoring, operation command, frequency setting (RAM): H2 to H40 (0.5 to 60 s)
Parameter read/write, frequency setting (EEPROM): H2 to H40 (0.5 to 60 s)
Parameter clear / All parameter clear: H15 to H40 (5.25 to 60 s)
Specify the command, subcommand, and data that indicate the requested operation. (Refer
Request data Variable Little
to page 132.)

2. Ethernet Communication
2.10 SLMP
131
 Item Size Endian Description
Response data The data length from the end code to the response data (when completed) or error
2 bytes Little
length information (when failed) is stored in hexadecimal. (Unit: byte)
The command processing result is stored. The value "0" is stored for normal completion. The
End code 2 bytes Little
error code of the access destination (refer to page 142) is stored for failed completion.
When the command is completed normally, data such as the read data corresponding to the
Response data Variable Little
command is stored.
The network No. (responding station) (1 byte), station No. (responding station) (1 byte),
destination unit I/O No. (2 bytes), and destination multidrop station No. (1 byte) of the stations
which respond errors are stored for failed completion. Numbers different from those in the
Error information 9 bytes —
request message may be stored because the information on the station with error response
is stored. The command (2 bytes) and the subcommand (2 bytes) being issued when an error
occurred are also stored.
Footer — — Footer for TCP/IP or UDP. The footer is added by the external device before transmission.
*1 The serial No. is given by the external device for message recognition. If a request message with a serial No. is sent, the same serial No. will also
be added on the response message. The serial No. is used when multiple request messages are sent from an external device to the same
inverter.

 Command
• The following table lists the commands and subcommands. (When the inverter receives a command other than listed in
the following table, it returns an error code (HC059).)
Refer
Category Operation Command Subcommand Description
to page
The inverter reads the value in bit devices (with
In bit units H0401 H0001
consecutive device numbers) in 1-bit units.
The inverter reads the value in bit devices (with
Read 139
consecutive device numbers) in 16-bit units.
In word units H0401 H0000
The inverter reads the value in word devices (with
consecutive device numbers) in 1-word units.
The inverter writes the value to bit devices (with
In bit units H1401 H0001
consecutive device numbers) in 1-bit units.
The inverter writes the value to bit devices (with
Write 139
consecutive device numbers) in 16-bit units.
In word units H1401 H0000
The inverter writes the value to word devices (with
consecutive device numbers) in 1-word units.
The inverter reads the value in the devices with the
Device specified numbers. The devices with non-consecutive
Read Random In word units H0403 H0000 139
numbers can be specified. The value is read from the
word devices in 1-word or 2-word units.
The inverter writes the value to the bit devices with the
specified device numbers (each bit has a device
In bit units H1402 H0001
number). The devices with non-consecutive numbers
can be specified.
The inverter writes the value to the bit devices with the
specified device numbers (each set of 16 bits has a
Write Random 140
device number). The devices with non-consecutive
numbers can be specified.
In word units H1402 H0000
The inverter writes the value to the word devices with
the specified device numbers (each word or each set of
two words has a device number). The devices with non-
consecutive numbers can be specified.
Remote Run H1001 H0000 Remote Run is performed to the inverter. 141
Remote Remote Stop H1002 H0000 Remote Stop is performed to the inverter. 141
Control The model name and model code of the inverter are
Read Type name H0101 H0000 141
read.

 Device
• The following table lists the device codes and the range available for each command.
Device Category Device code Range*1
Special relay (SM) Bit H91
Refer to the PLC Function Programming Manual.*2
Special register (SD) Word HA9
Input (X) Bit H9C H0 to H7F (hexadecimal)
Output (Y) Bit H9D H0 to H7F (hexadecimal)
Internal relay (M) Bit H90 0 to 127 (decimal)

132 2. Ethernet Communication

2.10 SLMP
 Device Category Device code Range*1
Data register (D)
Link register (W)
Word
Word
HA8
HB4
0 to 255 (decimal)
8192
1
Contact (TS) HC1
Bit
Timer (T) Coil (TC) HC0 0 to 15 (decimal)
Current value (TN) Word HC2 2
Contact (SS) HC7
Bit 0 (Initial value. Up to 16 retentive timers can be used by PLC
Retentive timer (S) Coil (SC) HC6
parameter assignment.)
Current value (SN) Word
Contact (CS)
HC8
HC4
3
Bit
Counter (C) Coil (CC) HC3 0 to 15 (decimal)
Current value (CN) Word HC5
*1 If write/read is requested from/to any devices outside the range, the error code H4031 is returned. (Refer to page 142.) 4
*2 When setting the word unit of the special relay device, specify the device No. in the list of special relay as the first device No. For details of the
special relay, refer to the PLC function programming manual. Otherwise, the data is not read/written correctly.

 Link register 5
The following shows the link registers for parameters (read/write), inverter status monitor items (read), fault history (read),
preventive maintenance data (read), model information monitor items (read), and serial numbers (read).
• Parameter 6
Pr. Register Name Read/write Remarks
For details on parameter names,
0 to 999
W0 to
W999
refer to the parameter list in the FR-
E800 Instruction Manual
Read/write 7
(Function).
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
C2 (902) W902 Read/write
frequency
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
8
W4802 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C3 (902)
(analog value)
C3 (902)
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias Analog value (%) of the voltage (current) applied to terminal
W4902 Read
(terminal analog value)
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
2
9
125 (903) W903 Read/write
frequency
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
W4803 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C4 (903)
C4 (903)
(analog value) 10
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain Analog value (%) of the voltage (current) applied to terminal
W4903 Read
(terminal analog value) 2
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
C5 (904) W904 Read/write
frequency
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
W4804 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C6 (904)
(analog value)
C6 (904)
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to terminal
W4904 Read
(terminal analog value) 4
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
126 (905) W905 Read/write
frequency
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
W4805 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C7 (905)
(analog value)
C7 (905)
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to terminal
W4905 Read
(terminal analog value) 4
C12 (917) W917 Terminal 1 bias frequency (speed) Read/write Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.
Terminal 1 bias (speed) (analog Analog value (%) set in C13 (917) (Available only when the
W4817 Read/write
value) FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C13 (917)
Terminal 1 bias (speed) (terminal Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to terminal 1
W4917 Read
analog value) (Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C14 (918) W918 Terminal 1 gain frequency (speed) Read/write Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.
Terminal 1 gain (speed) (analog Analog value (%) set in C15 (918) (Available only when the
W4818 Read/write
value) FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C15 (918)
Terminal 1 gain (speed) (terminal Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to terminal 1
W4918 Read
analog value) (Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C16 (919) W919 Terminal 1 bias command (torque) Read/write Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.10 SLMP
133
 Pr. Register Name Read/write Remarks
Terminal 1 bias (torque) (analog Analog value (%) set in C17 (919) (Available only when the
W4819 Read/write
value) FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C17 (919)
Terminal 1 bias (torque) (terminal Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to terminal 1
W4919 Read
analog value) (Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C18 (920) W920 Terminal 1 gain command (torque) Read/write Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.
Terminal 1 gain (torque) (analog Analog value (%) set in C19 (920) (Available only when the
W4820 Read/write
value) FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C19 (920)
Terminal 1 gain (torque) (terminal Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to terminal 1
W4920 Read
analog value) (Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C38 (932) W932 Terminal 4 bias command (torque) Read/write
Terminal 4 bias (torque) (analog
W4832 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C39 (932)
value)
C39 (932)
Terminal 4 bias (torque) (terminal Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to terminal
W4932 Read
analog value) 4
C40 (933) W933 Terminal 4 gain command (torque) Read/write
Terminal 4 gain (torque) (analog
W4833 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C41 (933)
value)
C41 (933)
Terminal 4 gain (torque) (terminal Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to terminal
W4933 Read
analog value) 4
C42 (934) W934 PID display bias coefficient Read/write
W4834 PID display bias analog value Read/write Analog value (%) set in C43 (934)
C43 (934) PID display bias analog value Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to terminal
W4934 Read
(terminal analog value) 4
C44 (935) W935 PID display gain coefficient Read/write
W4835 PID display gain analog value Read/write Analog value (%) set in C45 (935)
C45 (935) PID display gain analog value Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to terminal
W4935 Read
(terminal analog value) 4
For details on parameter names,
1000 to W1000 to refer to the parameter list in the FR-
Read/write
1499 W1499 E800 Instruction Manual
(Function).

134 2. Ethernet Communication

2.10 SLMP
• Inverter status

Register Monitor item

Read/
write
Register Monitor item
Read/
write
1
W5001 Output frequency/speed Read W5035 Feedback pulse Read
W5002 Output current Read W5038 Trace status Read
W5003 Output voltage Read W5040 PLC function user monitor 1 Read 2
W5005 Set frequency / motor speed setting Read W5041 PLC function user monitor 2 Read
W5006 Operation speed Read W5042 PLC function user monitor 3 Read
W5007
W5008
Motor torque
Converter output voltage
Read
Read
W5045
W5050
Station number (CC-Link)
Energy saving effect
Read
Read
3
W5009 Regenerative brake duty Read W5051 Cumulative energy saving Read
W5010 Electronic thermal O/L relay load factor Read W5052 PID set point Read
W5011 Output current peak value Read W5053 PID measured value Read 4
W5012 Converter output voltage peak value Read W5054 PID deviation Read
Option input terminal status 1 (for
W5013 Input power Read W5058 Read
communication)
Option input terminal status 2 (for 5
W5014 Output power Read W5059 Read
communication)
Option output terminal status (for
W5015 Input terminal status Read W5060 Read
communication)
W5016 Output terminal status Read W5061 Motor thermal load factor Read
6
W5017 Load meter Read W5062 Inverter thermal load factor Read
W5018 Motor excitation current Read W5064 PTC thermistor resistance Read
W5019 Position pulse Read W5065 Ideal speed command Read 7
W5020 Cumulative energization time Read W5067 PID measured value 2 Read
W5022 Orientation status Read W5068 Emergency drive status Read
W5023 Actual operation time Read W5071 Cumulative pulse Read
W5024 Motor load factor Read W5072 Cumulative pulse overflow times Read 8
W5025 Cumulative power Read W5077 32-bit cumulative energy (lower 16 bits) Read
W5026 Position command (lower) Read W5078 32-bit cumulative energy (upper 16 bits) Read
W5027 Position command (upper) Read W5079 32-bit cumulative energy (lower 16 bits) Read 9
W5028 Current position (lower) Read W5080 32-bit cumulative energy (upper 16 bits) Read
W5029 Current position (upper) Read W5083 BACnet valid APDU counter Read
W5030 Droop pulse (lower) Read W5091 PID manipulated amount Read
W5031 Droop pulse (upper) Read W5097 Dancer main speed setting Read 10
W5032 Torque command Read W5807 Inverter status 1 Read
W5033 Torque current command Read W5808 Inverter status 2 Read
• Inverter status 1, inverter status 2
Definition
Bit
Inverter status 1 Inverter status 2
0 Inverter running DO0 (0)*2
1 During forward rotation DO1 (0)*2
2 During reverse rotation DO2 (0)*2
3 Up to frequency DO3 (0)*2
4 Overload warning DO4 (0)*2
5 0 DO5 (0)*2
6 Output frequency detection DO6 (0)*2
7 Fault RA1 (Inverter running)*2
8 Alarm RA2 (Up to frequency)*2
RA3 (Output frequency
9 NET Y1 (0)*1
detection)*2
10 NET Y2 (0)*1 0
11 NET Y3 (0)*1 0
12 *1 0
NET Y4 (0)
13 0 0
14 0 0
15 SO 0

2. Ethernet Communication
2.10 SLMP
135
 *1 The signal within parentheses ( ) is assigned in the initial status. The function changes depending on the setting of Pr.193 to Pr.196 (Output
terminal function selection).
For details, refer to the description of Pr.193 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) in the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*2 The signal within parentheses ( ) is assigned in the initial status. The function changes depending on the setting of Pr.313 to Pr.322 (Output
terminal function selection).
For details, refer to the description of Pr.313 to Pr.322 (Output terminal function selection) in the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).

• Fault history
Register Definition Read/write Remarks
W5900 to W5906 Fault record 1 Read
W5907 to W5913 Fault record 2 Read Example) For fault record 1
W5900: Error code
W5914 to W5920 Fault record 3 Read
W5901: Output frequency at error occurrence
W5921 to W5927 Fault record 4 Read W5902: Output current at error occurrence
W5928 to W5934 Fault record 5 Read W5903: Output voltage at error occurrence
W5935 to W5941 Fault record 6 Read W5904: Energization time at error occurrence
W5942 to W5948 Fault record 7 Read W5905: Year and month of occurrence (Bit 0 to 3: Month, Bit 4 to
15: Year)
W5949 to W5955 Fault record 8 Read
W5906: Date and time of occurrence (Bit 0 to 5: Minute, Bit 6 to 10:
W5956 to W5962 Fault record 9 Read Hour, Bit 11 to 15: Day)
W5963 to W5969 Fault record 10 Read

• Preventive maintenance data

Register Definition Read/write Remarks
H02: V/F control
H04: Advanced magnetic flux vector control
W6000 Control method Read H08: Real sensorless vector control
H09: Vector control
H18: PM sensorless vector control

• Model information monitor

Register Definition Read/write Remarks
W8001 Model (1st and 2nd characters) Read
W8002 Model (3rd and 4th characters) Read
W8003 Model (5th and 6th characters) Read
W8004 Model (7th and 8th characters) Read The inverter model can be read in ASCII code.
W8005 Model (9th and 10th characters) Read "H20" (blank code) is set for blank area.
W8006 Model (11th and 12th characters) Read Example) FR-E820-EPA:
W8007 Model (13th and 14th characters) Read H46, H52, H2D, H45, H38, H32, H30, H2D, H45, H50, H41, H20...H20
W8008 Model (15th and 16th characters) Read
W8009 Model (17th and 18th characters) Read
W8010 Model (19th and 20th characters) Read
W8011 Capacity (1st and 2nd characters) Read The capacity in the inverter model can be read in ASCII code.
Data is read in increments of 0.1 kW, and rounds down to 0.01 kW
W8012 Capacity (3rd and 4th characters) Read
increments.
"H20" (blank code) is set for blank area.
W8013 Capacity (5th and 6th characters) Read
Example) 0.75K: " 7" (H20, H20, H20, H20, H20, H37)

• Serial number
Register Definition Read/write Remarks
W8101 Serial number (1st and 2nd characters) Read
W8102 Serial number (3rd and 4th characters) Read
W8103 Serial number (5th and 6th characters) Read
W8104 Serial number (7th and 8th characters) Read
The serial number can be read in ASCII code.
W8105 Serial number (9th and 10th characters) Read
W8106 Serial number (11th and 12th characters) Read
W8107 Serial number (13th and 14th characters) Read
W8108 Serial number (15th and 16th characters) Read

NOTE
• When a 32-bit parameter setting or monitor item is read and the value to be read exceeds HFFFF, HFFFF is returned.

136 2. Ethernet Communication

2.10 SLMP
 Data specified in the command
• Device code 1
A one byte numerical value is sent.

• Device No. (first device No.) specification 2

The device No. is specified for reading/writing data.
When consecutive devices are specified, the first device No. is specified. The device No. is specified in decimal or
hexadecimal depending on the device type. 3
A three byte numerical value is sent from the lower byte to the upper byte. If the device No. is a decimal value, convert it
to a hexadecimal value.
(Example) Device No. of Internal relay M63 / Input X20 4
M63 X20

H3F H00 H00 H20 H00 H00 5

Internal relay M63 has a decimal device No. Convert the decimal value to a hexadecimal value H00003F. The value is sent
in the order 3F, 00, and 00. The device No. of Input X20 is regarded as H000020 and sent in the order 20, 00, and 00.
6
• Specification of the number of devices
The number of devices is specified for reading/writing data.
A two byte numerical value is sent from the lower byte to the upper byte. 7
(Example) Number of devices: 5 / 20
5 devices 20 devices

8
H05 H00 H14 H00

• Specification of the number of devices for bit access 9

The number of devices is specified for reading/writing data in bit units. The number is used in the Write Random command
(refer to page 140).
(Example) Number of devices: 5 / 20 10
5 devices 20 devices

H05 H14

• Read data / write data

The value read from the device is stored for reading. The value to be written to the device is stored for writing.
The data is arranged differently between reading/writing in bit units (subcommand: H0001) and reading/writing in word
units (subcommand: H0000).
• In bit units (subcommand: H0001)
Each device is specified in 4 bits. The data is sent from the upper bit for the device with the first device No. and the
subsequent devices in order. The ON state is denoted as 1 and the OFF state is denoted as 0.
(Example) ON/OFF state of five devices starting from M10

2. Ethernet Communication
2.10 SLMP
137
 Number
Head Device of
device code devices Data

H0A H00 H00 H90 H05 H00 H10 H10 H10

"0" is shown when the number

of points is an odd number.
M14 ON
M13 OFF
M12 ON
M11 OFF
M10 ON
• In word units (subcommand: H0000)
When bit devices are used as word data, each device is specified in one bit. The data is stored from the lower byte (bit
0 to bit 7) to the upper byte (bit 8 to bit 15).
(Example) ON/OFF state of 32 devices starting from M16
"02" is shown for the number of devices because the
word device is specified in 16-bit units.
Number
First Device of
device code devices Data Data

H10 H00 H00 H90 H02 H00 H12 HAB HCD H34

1 2 A B C D 3 4
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 0 OFF
1 ON
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
M23 to M16 M31 to M24 M39 to M32 M47 to M40

When word devices are used, one word is specified in 16 bits as follows. The data is stored from the lower byte (bit 0 to
bit 7) to the upper byte (bit 8 to bit 15).
The user should switch the values in the upper and lower bytes in the response data for reading.
The user should switch the write values in the upper and lower bytes to store them in the request data for writing.
(Example) Data stored in D50/D51

138 2. Ethernet Communication

2.10 SLMP
 Number

1
First Device of
device code devices Data Data

H32 H00 H00 HA8 H02 H00 HAB H56 H0F H17 2

3
Stored values for
4
A B 5 6 0 F 1 7
request or response
data

Values to be read
or written
5 6 A B 1 7 0 F 5
The data in D50 is H56AB The data in D51 is H170F
(22187 in decimal). (5903 in decimal).

6
 Details of commands
• Read 7
The inverter reads the value in the specified devices.
• Request data

First device Number

8
Device
Subcommand of
No. code
H01 H04
devices

Item Description 9
Subcommand Specify the unit (bit/word) for reading.
First device No. Specify the number of the first device. (Refer to page 137.)
Device code
Number of devices
Specify the type of target devices. (Refer to page 132.)
Specify the number of target devices.
10
• Response data
The value read from the device is stored in hexadecimal.
• Write
The inverter writes the value to the specified devices.
• Request data
Number
First device Device
Subcommand of Write data
No. code
H01 H14
devices

Item Description
Subcommand Specify the unit (bit/word) for writing.
First device No. Specify the number of the first device. (Refer to page 137.)
Device code Specify the type of the target devices. (Refer to page 132.)
Number of devices Specify the number of target devices.
Specify the value to be written to all the devices specified by the Number of
Data to be written
devices in the request data.

• Response data
None
• Read Random
The inverter reads the value in the devices with the specified numbers. The devices with non-consecutive numbers can be
specified.
• Request data

2. Ethernet Communication
2.10 SLMP
139
 Specify the devices for the specified number of devices.

Number Number Word access Double-word access

Subcommand of devices of devices
for word for Device No. Device Device No. Device Device No. Device Device No. Device
access double-word code code code code
H03 H04 access

1 1 1 1

Item Description
Subcommand Specify the unit (bit/word) for reading.
Number of devices for word Specify the number of devices for one-word access.
access (bit device: 16 bits, word device: one word)
Number of devices for Specify the number of devices for two-word access.
double-word access (bit device: 32 bits, word device: two words)
Specify the devices according to the number set in the request data for word access. It is not necessary to
Word access
specify the devices when "0" is set.
Specify the devices according to the number set in the request data for double word access. It is not necessary
Double-word access
to specify the devices when "0" is set.
Device No. Specify the device number of target devices. (Refer to page 137.)
Device code Specify the type of target devices. (Refer to page 132.)

• Response data
The value read from the device is stored in hexadecimal.
Data in the devices specified Data in the devices specified
for word access for double-word access

Word access Double-word access

Read data 1 Read data 2 Read data 1 Read data 2

• Write Random
The inverter writes the value in the devices with the specified numbers. The devices with non-consecutive numbers can
be specified.
• Request data

Writing data in bit units

Specify the devices for the specified number of devices.

Number
Subcommand of devices Device No.
Device
Set/reset Device No.
Device
Set/reset
for code code
bit access
H02 H14

1 1

Writing data in word units

Specify the devices for the specified number of devices.

1

Number Word access

Number Double-word access
of devices
Subcommand of devices for
for Device Write Device
Device No. Device No. Write data
word access double-word code data code
H02 H14 access

Specify the devices for the specified number of devices.

140 2. Ethernet Communication

2.10 SLMP
 Item Description
Subcommand
Number of devices for bit access
Specify the unit (bit/word) for writing.
1
Number of devices for word
access Specify the number of target devices.
Number of devices for double-
word access
2
Specify the devices according to the number set in the request data for word access. It is not necessary to
Word access
specify the devices when "0" is set.

Double-word access
Specify the devices according to the number set in the request data for double word access. It is not 3
necessary to specify the devices when "0" is set.
Device No. Specify the device number of target devices. (Refer to page 137.)
Device code Specify the type of the target devices. (Refer to page 132.)
Specify ON/OFF of the bit devices. 4
Set/reset • ON: H01
• OFF: H00

• Response data 5
None
• Remote Run
Remote Run is performed to the inverter. 6
• Request data

Mode
Clear
mode
7
H01 H10 H00 H00 H00

Item Description
Forced execution of the remote RUN is not
H0100
8
Mode allowed.
Forced execution of the remote RUN is allowed. H0300
Devices are not cleared (initialized). H00
Clear mode
Devices are cleared. H01, H02 9
• Response data
None
10
• Remote Stop
Remote Stop is performed to the inverter.
• Request data

H02 H10 H00 H00 H01 H00

• Response data
None
• Read Type Name
The model name and model code of the inverter are read.
• Request data

H01 H01 H00 H00

• Response data

Model
Model code

Item Description
The inverter model is stored. Up to 16 characters can be stored. If the model name is shorter than 16 characters,
Model a space (H20) is stored instead of a character.
(Example) FR-E800-E inverter: FR-E800-E
Model code Fixed to H054F

2. Ethernet Communication
2.10 SLMP
141
  Error code
When the end code is other than "0" (failed completion), one of the error codes shown in the following table will be stored.
Error code Error description
H4031 The device outside of the range is specified.
H4080 Request data fault
The network with the No. set in the routing parameter does not exist.
H4A01
(The destination network No., destination station No., or destination unit I/O No. is different from that of the target inverter.)
HC059 The command or subcommand is specified incorrectly. Or, an unspecified command is received.
HC05B The inverter cannot read/write data from/to the specified device.
HC05C The request message has an error.
The requested operation has an error.
HC060
Example) Data is specified incorrectly for the bit device.
HC061 The request data length is inconsistent with the number of data.
HCEE1 The request message size exceeds the allowable range.
HCEE2 The response message size exceeds the allowable range.

142 2. Ethernet Communication

2.10 SLMP
2.11 EtherNet/IP 1

2.11.1 Outline 2

3
EtherNet/IP is available for the FR-E800-(SC)EPA and FR-E806-SCEPA.
When the EtherNet/IP communication operation is performed through the Ethernet connector on the inverter, data such as
parameters, command values, and feedback values are regarded as objects used for data communication between a master
4
and inverters. Objects consist of the Class ID, object name, data type, access rule, etc. I/O message communication (cyclic)
and explicit message communication (message) are available.
Some functions are not supported depending on the date of manufacture of the inverter. For details of specification changes,
5
refer to page 290.

 Communication specifications 6
Item Description
Maximum number of branches No upper limit on the same Ethernet network

Connection cable
Ethernet cable (IEEE 802.3 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T compliant cable and 7
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B (Category 5e) compliant shielded 4-pair branched cable)
Topology Line, star, or a combination of line and star
Communication method Cyclic communication
Number of connections 4 8
Communication data size For details, refer to description of Assembly Object (page 151).
Connection type (inverter to
Unicast or multicast
master)
Connection type (master to
9
Unicast
Class 1 inverter)
communication (I/O Connection point (inverter to master): Assembly input instance
Message
communication)
Exclusive Owner connection
Connection point (master to inverter): Assembly output instance 10
Connection point (inverter to master): Assembly input instance
Input Only connection
Connection point (master to inverter): Assembly heartbeat instance (C5h)
Connection point (inverter to master): Assembly input instance
Listen Only connection
Connection point (master to inverter): Assembly heartbeat instance (C6h)
RPI (cycle time) 4 to 100 ms
Supported trigger type Cyclic (repeated)
Communication method Message communication
Class 3 Number of connections 2
communication Connection type (inverter to
Unicast
(Explicit Message master)
communication) Connection type (master to
Unicast
inverter)
Communication method Message communication
UCMM Number of connections 2
communication Connection type (inverter to
Unicast
(Explicit Message master)
communication) Connection type (master to
Unicast
inverter)
Conformity test CT16

2. Ethernet Communication
2.11 EtherNet/IP
143
  Operation status LEDs
LED name Description LED status Remarks
OFF Power-OFF / IP address not set
Blinking green Online, no connections established
NS Communication status
Solid green Online, connections established
Blinking red Exclusive Owner connection timeout
OFF Power-OFF / during inverter reset
Not set (status other than those indicated by OFF, solid
Blinking green
green, blinking red, and solid red of the MS LED)
MS Inverter status Operating properly (All I/O communications are in run
Solid green
state and Exclusive Owner connection state.)
Blinking red Warning or alarm output
Solid red Fault detected
OFF Power-OFF/link-down
LINK1 Connector for communication (PORT1) status Blinking green Link-up (Data reception in progress)
Solid green Link-up
OFF Power-OFF/link-down
LINK2 Connector for communication (PORT2) status Blinking green Link-up (Data reception in progress)
Solid green Link-up

 EDS file
An EDS file is available for download.

Mitsubishi Electric FA Global Website:

www.mitsubishielectric.com/fa/products/drv/inv/support/e800/network.html
The download is free at the website above. For details, contact your sales representative.
Use an appropriate EDS file for the inverter as specified in the following table. Errors may occur due to engineering software
operation.

NOTE
• The EDS file is used in engineering software. To install the EDS file properly, refer to the instruction manual of the applicable
engineering software.

2.11.2 EtherNet/IP configuration

 Procedure
The procedure differs depending on the master device and the engineering software used. For details, refer to the Instruction
Manual of the master device and the engineering software.

 Before communication
1. Connect each unit with an Ethernet cable. (Refer to page 15.)

2. Set "44818" (EtherNet/IP) in any of Pr.1427 to Pr.1430 Ethernet function selection 1 to 4. (Refer to page 145.)
(Example: Pr.1429 = "45238" (CC-Link IE TSN) (initial value) → "44818" (EtherNet/IP))
When Pr.1429 = "45238 (initial value)" (CC-Link IE TSN), change the value to "44818" (EtherNet/IP). When "45238"
is set in any of Pr.1427 to Pr.1430, the priority is given to CC-Link IE TSN, disabling EtherNet/IP.

3. Reset the inverter, or turn OFF and then ON the power.

 Network configuration
1. Add the downloaded EDS file to the engineering software.

2. Detect the inverters on the network using the engineering software.

3. Add the detected inverters to the network configuration settings.

4. Configure the module settings for the inverters.

Set the device name for each inverter when two or more inverters are connected.

144 2. Ethernet Communication

2.11 EtherNet/IP
 Checking communication
The following table shows the status of the LEDs when communication is established between the programmable controller
1
and the inverter.
NS MS LINK1 LINK2
Solid green Solid green Blinking green *1
2
*1 The LED on either LINK1 or LINK2 will blink depending on the port (port 1 or 2) the Ethernet cable is connected to.

2.11.3 Initial setting for EtherNet/IP 3

Use the following parameters to perform required settings for Ethernet communication between the inverter and other devices.
To make communication between other devices and the inverter, perform the initial settings of the inverter parameters to match
the communication specifications of the devices. Data communication cannot be made if the initial settings are not made or if
4
there is any setting error.

Pr. Name
Initial
value
Setting range Description 5
1427 Ethernet function selection
5001
N630*1 1

1428 Ethernet function selection 502, 5000 to 5002,

6
45237
N631*1 2 5006 to 5008, 5010 to
5013, 9999, 44818, Set the application, protocol, etc.
1429 Ethernet function selection
N632*1 3
45238
45237, 45238,
47808, 61450 7
1430 Ethernet function selection
9999
N633*1 4
Ethernet communication is available, but the inverter output 8
0
is shut off in the NET operation mode.
Set the interval of the communication check (signal loss
detection) time for all devices with IP addresses in the range
1432
N644
Ethernet communication
check time interval
1.5 s
0.1 to 999.8 s
specified for Ethernet command source selection (Pr.1449 9
to Pr.1454).
If a no-communication state persists for longer than the
permissible time, the inverter output will be shut off.
9999 No communication check (signal loss detection) 10
1449 Ethernet command source
0
N670*1 selection IP address 1
1450 Ethernet command source
0
N671*1 selection IP address 2
0 to 255
1451 Ethernet command source To limit the network devices that send the operation or
0
N672*1 selection IP address 3 speed command through the Ethernet network, set the
1452 range of IP addresses of the devices.
Ethernet command source
0 When Pr.1449 to Pr.1452 = "0 (initial value)", no IP address
N673*1 selection IP address 4
is specified for command source selection via Ethernet. In
1453 Ethernet command source this case, operation commands cannot be sent via Ethernet.
selection IP address 3 range 9999
N674*1 specification
0 to 255, 9999
1454 Ethernet command source
selection IP address 4 range 9999
N675*1 specification
*1 The setting is applied after an inverter reset or next power-ON.

NOTE
• The monitor items and parameter settings can be read during communication with the Pr.1432 Ethernet communication
check time interval = "0 (initial value)" setting, but such operation will become faulty once the operation mode is changed to
the NET operation mode. When the NET operation mode is selected as the start-up operation mode, communication is
performed once, then an Ethernet communication fault (E.EHR) occurs.
• To perform operation or parameter writing via communication, set Pr.1432 to "9999" or a value larger than the communication
cycle or retry time setting. (Refer to page 146.)

2. Ethernet Communication
2.11 EtherNet/IP
145
  Ethernet function selection (Pr.1427 to Pr.1430)
To select EtherNet/IP for the application, set "44818" (EtherNet/IP) in any of Pr.1427 to Pr.1430 Ethernet function selection
1 to 4. When Pr.1429 = "45238 (initial value)" (CC-Link IE TSN), change the value to "44818" (EtherNet/IP). When "45238" is
set in any of Pr.1427 to Pr.1430, the priority is given to CC-Link IE TSN, disabling EtherNet/IP.

NOTE
• Change the setting if selected communication protocols cannot be used together. (Refer to page 7 and page 226.)

 Ethernet IP address for command source selection (Pr.1449 to Pr.1454)

• To limit the network devices that send the operation or speed command through the Ethernet network, set the range of IP
addresses of the devices.
• When Pr.1449 to Pr.1452 = "0 (initial value)", no IP address is specified for command source selection via Ethernet. In this
case, operation commands cannot be sent via Ethernet.
• The setting range for command source selection depends on the settings in Pr.1451 and Pr.1453, and Pr.1452 and
Pr.1454. (Either of the settings can be larger than the other in Pr.1451 and Pr.1453, and Pr.1452 and Pr.1454.)

[Setting example 1]
Configuration

Master Inverter 1 Inverter 2

iQ-R R08CPU FR-E800 FR-E800
192.168.50.100 192.168.50.1 192.168.50.2
To allow the master to control the inverters, set the parameters in inverters 1 and 2 as follows to specify the IP address range for
Ethernet command source selection.
Set the IP address of the master in the engineering software (GX Works3) within the range from 192.168.50.100 to
192.168.50.110.
Pr.1449 Pr.1450 Pr.1451 Pr.1452
Ethernet IP address
for command source selection 192 168 50 100

The range is between

the values set in both
parameters.
Pr.1453 Pr.1454
Command source selection range setting
for the Ethernet IP address ― ― 9999 110

In this case, the IP address range in which Ethernet communication is permitted is "192.168.50.xxx (100 to 110)".
[Setting example 2]
Pr.1449 Pr.1450 Pr.1451 Pr.1452
Ethernet IP address
192 168 1 100
for command source selection
The range is between The range is between
the values set in both the values set in both
parameters. parameters.
Pr.1453 Pr.1454
Command source selection range setting
for the Ethernet IP address ― ― 3 150

In this case, the IP address range for command source selection via Ethernet communication is
"192.168.x (1 to 3).xxx (100 to 150)".

• When "9999 (initial value)" is set in Pr.1453 or Pr.1454, the range is invalid.

 Ethernet communication check time interval (Pr.1432)

• If a signal loss (communication stop) is detected between the inverter and all the devices with IP addresses in the range
for Ethernet command source selection (Pr.1449 to Pr.1454) as a result of a signal loss detection, a communication error
(E.EHR) occurs and the inverter output will be shut off.
• When "9999" is set in Pr.1432, the communication check (signal loss detection) will not be performed.

146 2. Ethernet Communication

2.11 EtherNet/IP
 • The monitor items and parameter settings can be read via Ethernet when "0" is set in Pr.1432, but a communication error
(E.EHR) occurs instantly when the operation mode is switched to the Network operation.
• A signal loss detection is made when any of 0.1 s to 999.8 s is set in Pr.1432. In order to enable the signal loss detection,
1
data must be sent by connected devices at an interval equal to or less than the time set for the communication check. (The
inverter makes a communication check (clearing of communication check counter) regardless of the station number setting
of the data sent from the master).
2
• Communication check is started at the first communication when the inverter operates in the Network operation mode and
the command source is specified as communication via the Ethernet connector.
Example) When Pr.1432 = 0.1 to 999.8 s
3
Operation mode External Network

Connected device 4
Inverter
Inverter
Connected device
Check starts Fault (E.EHR) 5
Pr.1432
Communication
check counter Time 6
E.EHR OFF ON

LF OFF ON 7

2.11.4 Parameters related to EtherNet/IP

8
The following parameters are used for EtherNet/IP communication. Set the parameters as required.
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description

541 Frequency command sign

value
0 Signed frequency command value
9
0
N100 selection 1 Unsigned frequency command value
1426 Link speed and duplex Set the communication speed and the communication mode
N641*1 mode selection
0 0 to 4
(full-duplex/half-duplex). 10
1442
IP filter address 1 (Ethernet) 0
N660*1
1443
IP filter address 2 (Ethernet) 0
N661*1
0 to 255
1444
*1 IP filter address 3 (Ethernet) 0
N662 Set the range of connectable IP addresses for the network
1445 devices.
IP filter address 4 (Ethernet) 0
N663*1 (When Pr.1442 to Pr.1445 = "0 (initial value)", the function
1446 is invalid.)
IP filter address 2 range
9999
N664*1 specification (Ethernet)
1447 IP filter address 3 range
9999 0 to 255, 9999
N665*1 specification (Ethernet)
1448 IP filter address 4 range
9999
N666*1 specification (Ethernet)
Set the output assembly instance number of Assembly
1318 User Defined Cyclic 20 to 23 Object (04h). Users can assign a function to the configurable
Communication Input fixing 9999
N800*1 output instance.
format selection
9999 Function disabled
Set the input assembly instance number of Assembly Object
1319 User Defined Cyclic
70 to 73 (04h). Users can assign a function to the configurable input
*1 Communication Output 9999 instance.
N801 fixing format selection
9999 Function disabled

2. Ethernet Communication
2.11 EtherNet/IP
147
 Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
12288 to 13787,
20488, 20489,
24672, 24689,
1320 to Set the instance number of Inverter Configuration Object
User Defined Cyclic 24698, 24703,
1329 (64h) or the index number of CiA402 drive profile. Users can
Communication Input 1 to 9999 24705, 24707,
N810 to assign a function to the configurable output instance.
*1 10 Mapping 24708, 24719,
N819 24721, 24728 to
24730
9999 Function disabled
12288 to 13787,
16384 to 16483,
20488, 20489, 20981
1330 to to 20990, Set the instance number of Inverter Configuration Object
User Defined Cyclic
1343 20992*2, 24639, (64h) or the index number of CiA402 drive profile. Users can
N850 to Communication Output 1 to 9999
24643, 24644, 24673 assign a function to the configurable input instance.
14 Mapping
N863*1 to 24676, 24692,
24695, 24820,
24826, 24828, 25858
9999 Function disabled
Pr.1389 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the instance/index
User Defined Cyclic
0 to 2, 256 to 258, number is specified using Pr.1320
1389*1 Communication Input Sub 1 0
512 to 514 Pr.1389 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the instance/index
and 2 Mapping
number is specified using Pr.1321
Pr.1390 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the instance/index
User Defined Cyclic
0 to 2, 256 to 258, number is specified using Pr.1322
1390*1 Communication Input Sub 3 0
512 to 514 Pr.1390 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the instance/index
and 4 Mapping
number is specified using Pr.1323
Pr.1391 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the instance/index
User Defined Cyclic
0 to 2, 256 to 258, number is specified using Pr.1324
1391*1 Communication Input Sub 5 0
512 to 514 Pr.1391 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the instance/index
and 6 Mapping
number is specified using Pr.1325
Pr.1392 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the instance/index
User Defined Cyclic
0 to 2, 256 to 258, number is specified using Pr.1326
1392*1 Communication Input Sub 7 0
512 to 514 Pr.1392 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the instance/index
and 8 Mapping
number is specified using Pr.1327
Pr.1393 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the instance/index
User Defined Cyclic
0 to 2, 256 to 258, number is specified using Pr.1328
1393*1 Communication Input Sub 9 0
512 to 514 Pr.1393 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the instance/index
and 10 Mapping
number is specified using Pr.1329

N830 to User Defined Cyclic

Subindices to which the instance/index numbers are
Communication Input Sub 1 0 0 to 2
N839*1 to 10 Mapping
specified using Pr.1320 to Pr.1329

Pr.1394 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the instance/index

User Defined Cyclic
0 to 2, 256 to 258, number is specified using Pr.1330
1394*1 Communication Output Sub 0
512 to 514 Pr.1394 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the instance/index
1 and 2 Mapping
number is specified using Pr.1331
Pr.1395 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the instance/index
User Defined Cyclic
0 to 2, 256 to 258, number is specified using Pr.1332
1395*1 Communication Output Sub 0
512 to 514 Pr.1395 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the instance/index
3 and 4 Mapping
number is specified using Pr.1333
Pr.1396 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the instance/index
User Defined Cyclic
0 to 2, 256 to 258, number is specified using Pr.1334
1396*1 Communication Output Sub 0
512 to 514 Pr.1396 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the instance/index
5 and 6 Mapping
number is specified using Pr.1335
Pr.1397 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the instance/index
User Defined Cyclic
*1 0 to 2, 256 to 258, number is specified using Pr.1336
1397 Communication Output Sub 0
512 to 514 Pr.1397 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the instance/index
7 and 8 Mapping
number is specified using Pr.1337
Pr.1398 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the instance/index
User Defined Cyclic
0 to 2, 256 to 258, number is specified using Pr.1338
1398*1 Communication Output Sub 0
512 to 514 Pr.1398 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the instance/index
9 and 10 Mapping
number is specified using Pr.1339
N870 to User Defined Cyclic
Subindices to which the instance/index numbers are
*1 Communication Output Sub 0 0 to 2
N879 specified using Pr.1330 to Pr.1339
1 to 10 Mapping
*1 The setting is applied after an inverter reset or next power-ON.

148 2. Ethernet Communication

2.11 EtherNet/IP
 *2 Available for the Ethernet model only.

 Frequency command with sign (Pr.541) 1

• The start command (forward/reverse rotation) can be inverted by adding a plus or minus sign to the value of the frequency
command sent through the EtherNet/IP.
• The Pr.541 Frequency command sign selection setting is applied to SpeedRef (attribute 8) of AC/DC Drive Object 2
(2Ah). (Refer to page 157.)
Pr.541 setting Sign
0 Without 3
1 With

• Relationship between the start command and sign (Pr.541 = "1")

Start Sign of the frequency Actual operation
4
command command command
Forward + Forward rotation
rotation - Reverse rotation 5
Reverse + Reverse rotation
rotation - Forward rotation

 Communication speed and full-duplex/half-duplex selection (Pr.1426) 6

Use Pr.1426 Link speed and duplex mode selection to set the communication speed and the full-duplex or half-duplex
system. If the operation is not performed properly in the initial setting (Pr.1426 = "0"), set Pr.1426 according to the
specifications of the connected device.
7
Communication Full-duplex/half-
Pr.1426 setting Remarks
speed duplex system
The communication speed and the communication mode (half-duplex/full- 8
Automatic Automatic duplex) are automatically negotiated to ensure the optimum setting. To set
0 (initial value)
negotiation negotiation automatic negotiation, auto negotiation setting is required also in the master
station.
1 100 Mbps Full duplex — 9
2 100 Mbps Half duplex —
3 10 Mbps Full duplex —
4 10 Mbps Half duplex —
10
 IP filtering function (Ethernet) (Pr.1442 to Pr.1448)
• Set the IP address range for connectable network devices (Pr.1442 to Pr.1448) to limit the connectable devices. The
setting range for IP address of connectable network devices depends on the settings in Pr.1443 and Pr.1446, Pr.1444 and
Pr.1447, and Pr.1445 and Pr.1448. (Either of the settings can be larger than the other in Pr.1443 and Pr.1446, Pr.1444
and Pr.1447, and Pr.1445 and Pr.1448.)
[Setting example 1] Pr.1442 Pr.1443 Pr.1444 Pr.1445
IP filter address (Ethernet) 192 168 1 100
The range is between The range is between
the values set in both the values set in both
parameters. parameters.
Pr.1446 Pr.1447 Pr.1448
IP filter address range specification
(Ethernet) ― 9999 3 150
In this case, the IP address range in which Ethernet communication is permitted is "192.168.x (1 to 3).xxx (100 to 150)".

[Setting example 2]
Pr.1442 Pr.1443 Pr.1444 Pr.1445
IP filter address (Ethernet) 192 168 2 100
The range is between
the values set in both
parameters.
Pr.1446 Pr.1447 Pr.1448
IP filter address range specification
(Ethernet) ― 9999 9999 50
In this case, the IP address range in which Ethernet communication is permitted is "192.168.2.xxx (50 to 100)".

2. Ethernet Communication
2.11 EtherNet/IP
149
 • When Pr.1442 to Pr.1445 = "0 (initial value)", the function is invalid.
• When "9999 (initial value)" is set in Pr.1446 to Pr.1448, the range is invalid.

CAUTION
• The IP filtering function (Ethernet) (Pr.1442 to Pr.1448) is provided as a means to prevent unauthorized access, DoS
attacks, computer viruses, or other cyberattacks from external devices, but the function does not prevent such access
completely. In order to protect the inverter and the system against unauthorized access by external systems, take
additional security measures. We shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving inverter trouble and
system trouble by DoS attacks, unauthorized access, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks. The following are
examples of measures to prevent them.
- Install a firewall.
- Install a personal computer as a relay station, and control the relaying of transmission data using an application
program.
- Install an external device as a relay station to control access rights. (For the details of external devices used to control
access rights, contact the distributors of the external devices.)

2.11.5 Object map definitions

 Object model of EtherNet/IP communication
For EtherNet/IP communication, each node is modeled as collections of objects (abstraction of particular functions of the
products). The following four terms are used to describe object.
Item Description
Class Collections of all objects which have same types of functions. Generalization of object.
Instance Concrete expression of object.
Attribute Expression of object characteristic.
Service Function supported by object or class.

2.11.6 Object map

 Identity-Object (01h)
This object shows general information of the device.

 Service
Class Instance
Get_Attribute_Single
Get_Attribute_Single Set_Attribute_Single
Get_Attributes_All Get_Attributes_All
Reset*1 (inverter reset)

*1 Writing is restricted by the settings of Ethernet IP address for command source selection (Pr.1449 to Pr.1454).

 Class attribute
No. Name Access Type Description
1 Revision Get UINT 0001h (Revision of the object)

 Instance 1 attributes
No. Name Access Type Description
1 Vendor ID Get UINT 00A1h (Mitsubishi Electric)
2 Device Type Get UINT 0002h (AC Drive)
3 Product Code Get UINT 003Eh (Product code)
Revision Structure Major revision and minor revision
4 Major revision Get USINT 0001h (Major revision number)
Minor revision USINT 0001h (Minor revision number)
5 Status Get WORD Refer to "Status (Attribute 5)" on page 151.
6 Serial Number Get UDINT Serial number of the inverter
SHORT_
7 Product Name Get FR-E800-(SC)E (product name)
STRING

150 2. Ethernet Communication

2.11 EtherNet/IP
 No. Name Access Type Description
Structure
USINT
Active language
1
11 Active language Set/Get
USINT e, n, g (English)
USINT
Structure
List of languages supported by the host application
2
array
12 Supported Language List Get USINT
USINT e, n, g (English)
USINT 3
• Status (Attribute 5)

0
Bit
Module Owned
Name
CIP connection established
Description
4
1 — Fixed to 0
2 Configured Fixed to 1 (configured)
3 — Fixed to 0 5
0000b: Unknown
0010b: Faulted I/O Connection (Exclusive Owner connection timed out)
0011b: No I/O connection establish (I/O connection not established)
4 to 7 Extended Device Status
0100b: Non volatile configuration bad 6
0101b: Major fault (Bit 10 = 1)
0110b: Connection in Run mode (I/O connection established, with Run mode
connection)
0111b: Connection in Idle mode (I/O connection established) 7
8 Minor Recoverable Fault Warning or alarm
9 Minor Unrecoverable Fault Fixed to 0
10 Major Recoverable Fault Fault
11 Major Unrecoverable Fault Fixed to 0 8
12 to 15 — Fixed to 0

 Assembly Object (04h)

9
The Assembly object uses static assemblies and holds the Process Data sent/received by the inverter. Instance 20 to 23 and
70 to 73 are predefined for specific drive profile parameters. Users can select communication data using Instance 100 and 150.
10
 Service
Class Instance
Get_Attribute_Single
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single

 Class attribute
No. Name Access Type Description
1 Revision Get UINT 0002h (Revision of the object)
2 Max Instance Get UINT (Highest instance number)

 Instance attribute
No. Name Access Type Description
3*1 Data Set/Get USINT array Inverter I/O data
*1 The number corresponds to the instance number described in the output/input assembly.

 Output assemblies (Consuming instances)

For definitions and mapping of data in this instance, refer to the data definitions of output assemblies on page 153.
Writing is restricted by the settings of Ethernet IP address for command source selection (Pr.1449 to Pr.1454).
• Instance 20 (14h) - Basic Speed Control Output
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 Fault reset 0 Run fwd
1 00h
2 Speed reference (Low byte)
3 Speed reference (High byte)

2. Ethernet Communication
2.11 EtherNet/IP
151
 • Instance 21 (15h) - Extended Speed Control Output
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 0 NetRef NetCtrl 0 0 Fault reset Run rev Run fwd
1 00h
2 Speed reference (Low byte)
3 Speed reference (High byte)

• Instance 22 (16h) - Speed and Torque Control Output

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 Fault reset 0 Run fwd
1 00h
2 Speed reference (Low byte)
3 Speed reference (High byte)
4 Torque reference (Low byte)
5 Torque reference (High byte)

• Instance 23 (17h) - Extended Speed and Torque Control Output

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 0 NetRef NetCtrl 0 0 Fault reset Run rev Run fwd
1 00h
2 Speed reference (Low byte)
3 Speed reference (High byte)
4 Torque reference (Low byte)
5 Torque reference (High byte)

• Instance 100 (64h): Configurable Output

The data length depends on the settings in Pr.1318, Pr.1320 to Pr.1329, and Pr.1389 to Pr.1393. (For user defined cyclic
communication input data, the data size ranges from 1 to 4 bytes depending on the data type specified in Pr.1320 to
Pr.1329 and Pr.1389 to Pr.1393.) When "9999" is set in any of Pr.1318 and Pr.1320 to Pr.1329, the length of the
corresponding data is treated as 0 bytes. (When "9999" is set in all of them, communication cannot be established.)
If the same instance/index number is specified in two or more of Pr.1320 to Pr.1329, the number set in the parameter with
the smallest parameter number is valid. The same number set in the other parameters is regarded as "9999". When a
nonexistent instance/index number is set in Pr.1320 to Pr.1329, data is not written.
The following format is an example when the data size is 2 bytes for all of the user defined cyclic communication input data.
Byte*1 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 to (n-1) User Defined Cyclic Communication Input fixing format selection (Pr.1318)
n User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 1 (lower bytes) (Pr.1320)
n+1 User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 1 (upper bytes) (Pr.1320)
n+2 User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 2 (lower bytes) (Pr.1321)
n+3 User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 2 (upper bytes) (Pr.1321)
n+4 User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 3 (lower bytes) (Pr.1322)
n+5 User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 3 (upper bytes) (Pr.1322)
n+6 User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 4 (lower bytes) (Pr.1323)
n+7 User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 4 (upper bytes) (Pr.1323)
n+8 User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 5 (lower bytes) (Pr.1324)
n+9 User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 5 (upper bytes) (Pr.1324)
n+10 User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 6 (lower bytes) (Pr.1325)
n+11 User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 6 (upper bytes) (Pr.1325)
n+12 User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 7 (lower bytes) (Pr.1326)
n+13 User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 7 (upper bytes) (Pr.1326)
n+14 User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 8 (lower bytes) (Pr.1327)
n+15 User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 8 (upper bytes) (Pr.1327)
n+16 User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 9 (lower bytes) (Pr.1328)
n+17 User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 9 (upper bytes) (Pr.1328)
n+18 User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 10 (lower bytes) (Pr.1329)
n+19 User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 10 (upper bytes) (Pr.1329)

*1 "n" indicates the data length of the instance specified in Pr.1318 (4 or 6 bytes).

152 2. Ethernet Communication

2.11 EtherNet/IP
 In Pr.1389 to Pr.1393, specify the subindices to which the instance/index numbers are specified using Pr.1320 to Pr.1329.
1
Data No. Instance/index specification Sub index specification
1 Pr.1320 Pr.1389 (lower 8 bits)
2 Pr.1321 Pr.1389 (upper 8 bits)
3 Pr.1322 Pr.1390 (lower 8 bits)
2
4 Pr.1323 Pr.1390 (upper 8 bits)
5 Pr.1324 Pr.1391 (lower 8 bits)
6 Pr.1325 Pr.1391 (upper 8 bits) 3
7 Pr.1326 Pr.1392 (lower 8 bits)
8 Pr.1327 Pr.1392 (upper 8 bits)
9 Pr.1328 Pr.1393 (lower 8 bits)
10 Pr.1329 Pr.1393 (upper 8 bits) 4

• Data definitions, output assemblies 5

The following table indicates the mapping of the data in the consuming instances of the Assembly Object. For details, refer
to the Control Supervisor Object (29h) on page 156, and AC/DC Drive Object (2Ah) on page 157.

Name
Object
Instance No.
Attribute 6
Name No. Name No.
Run rev Control Supervisor 29h 1 Run2 4
Run fwd Control Supervisor 29h 1 Run1 3
Fault reset Control Supervisor 29h 1 FaultRst 12
7
NetCtrl Control Supervisor 29h 1 NetCtrl 5
NetRef AC/DC Drive 2Ah 1 NetRef 4
Speed reference AC/DC Drive 2Ah 1 SpeedRef 8 8
Torque reference AC/DC Drive 2Ah 1 TorqueRef 12

 Input assemblies (Producing instances)

For definitions and mapping of data in this instance, refer to the data definitions of input assemblies on page 155. 9
• Instance 70 (46h) - Basic Speed Control Input
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 Running1 0 Faulted 10
1 00h
2 Speed actual (Low byte)
3 Speed actual (High byte)

• Instance 71 (47h) - Extended Speed Control Input

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Running 2 Running1
0 At reference Ref from net Ctrl from net Ready Warning Faulted
(Rev) (Fwd)
1*1 Drive state
2 Speed actual (Low byte)
3 Speed actual (High byte)

*1 For drive states and behavior, refer to the Control Supervisor Object (29h) or the instance attribute on page 156.

• Instance 72 (48h) - Speed and Torque Control Input

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 Running1 0 Faulted
1 00h
2 Speed actual (Low byte)
3 Speed actual (High byte)
4 Torque actual (Low byte)
5 Torque actual (High byte)

2. Ethernet Communication
2.11 EtherNet/IP
153
 • Instance 73 (49h) - Extended Speed and Torque Control Input
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Running 2 Running1
0 At reference Ref from net Ctrl from net Ready Warning Faulted
(Rev) (Fwd)
1*1 Drive state
2 Speed actual (Low byte)
3 Speed actual (High byte)
4 Torque actual (Low byte)
5 Torque actual (High byte)

*1 For drive states and behavior, refer to the Control Supervisor Object (29h) or the instance attribute on page 156.

• Instance 150 (96h): Configurable Input

The data length depends on the settings in Pr.1319, Pr.1330 to Pr.1343, and Pr.1394 to Pr.1398. (For user defined cyclic
communication output data, the data size ranges from 1 to 4 bytes depending on the data type specified in Pr.1330 to
Pr.1343 and Pr.1394 to Pr.1398.) When "9999" is set in any of Pr.1319 and Pr.1330 to Pr.1343, the length of the
corresponding data is treated as 0 bytes.
When a nonexistent instance/index number is set in Pr.1330 to Pr.1343, "0" is read.
The following format is an example when the data size is 2 bytes for all of the user defined cyclic communication output
data.
Byte*1 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 to (n-1) User Defined Cyclic Communication Output fixing format selection (Pr.1319)
n User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 1 (lower bytes) (Pr.1330)
n+1 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 1 (upper bytes) (Pr.1330)
n+2 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 2 (lower bytes) (Pr.1331)
n+3 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 2 (upper bytes) (Pr.1331)
n+4 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 3 (lower bytes) (Pr.1332)
n+5 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 3 (upper bytes) (Pr.1332)
n+6 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 4 (lower bytes) (Pr.1333)
n+7 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 4 (upper bytes) (Pr.1333)
n+8 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 5 (lower bytes) (Pr.1334)
n+9 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 5 (upper bytes) (Pr.1334)
n+10 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 6 (lower bytes) (Pr.1335)
n+11 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 6 (upper bytes) (Pr.1335)
n+12 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 7 (lower bytes) (Pr.1336)
n+13 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 7 (upper bytes) (Pr.1336)
n+14 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 8 (lower bytes) (Pr.1337)
n+15 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 8 (upper bytes) (Pr.1337)
n+16 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 9 (lower bytes) (Pr.1338)
n+17 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 9 (upper bytes) (Pr.1338)
n+18 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 10 (lower bytes) (Pr.1339)
n+19 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 10 (upper bytes) (Pr.1339)
n+20 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 11 (lower bytes) (Pr.1340)
n+21 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 11 (upper bytes) (Pr.1340)
n+22 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 12 (lower bytes) (Pr.1341)
n+23 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 12 (upper bytes) (Pr.1341)
n+24 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 13 (lower bytes) (Pr.1342)
n+25 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 13 (upper bytes) (Pr.1342)
n+26 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 14 (lower bytes) (Pr.1343)
n+27 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 14 (upper bytes) (Pr.1343)

*1 "n" indicates the data length of the instance specified in Pr.1319 (4 or 6 bytes).

154 2. Ethernet Communication

2.11 EtherNet/IP
 In Pr.1394 to Pr.1398, specify the subindices to which the instance/index numbers are specified using Pr.1330 to Pr.1339.
1
Data No. Instance/index specification Sub index specification
1 Pr.1330 Pr.1394 (lower 8 bits)
2 Pr.1331 Pr.1394 (upper 8 bits)
3 Pr.1332 Pr.1395 (lower 8 bits)
2
4 Pr.1333 Pr.1395 (upper 8 bits)
5 Pr.1334 Pr.1396 (lower 8 bits)
6 Pr.1335 Pr.1396 (upper 8 bits) 3
7 Pr.1336 Pr.1397 (lower 8 bits)
8 Pr.1337 Pr.1397 (upper 8 bits)
9 Pr.1338 Pr.1398 (lower 8 bits)
10 Pr.1339 Pr.1398 (upper 8 bits) 4
11 Pr.1340
12 Pr.1341
Fixed to "0"
13 Pr.1342 5
14 Pr.1343

• Data definitions, input assemblies 6

The following table indicates the mapping of the data in the producing instances of the Assembly Object. For details, refer
to the Control Supervisor Object (29h) on page 156, and AC/DC Drive Object (2Ah) on page 157.
Object Attribute
7
Name Instance No.
Name No. Name No.
Faulted Control Supervisor 29h 1 Faulted 10
Warning Control Supervisor 29h 1 Warning 11 8
Running1 (Fwd) Control Supervisor 29h 1 Running1 7
Running2 (Rev) Control Supervisor 29h 1 Running2 8
Ready Control Supervisor 29h 1 Ready 9
Ctrl from net Control Supervisor 29h 1 CtrlFromNet 15 9
Drive state Control Supervisor 29h 1 State 6
Ref from net AC/DC Drive 2Ah 1 RefFromNet 29
At reference AC/DC Drive 2Ah 1 AtReference 3 10
Speed actual AC/DC Drive 2Ah 1 SpeedActual 7
Torque actual AC/DC Drive 2Ah 1 TorqueActual 11

 Connection Management Object (06h)

This object is used to manage the characteristics of a communication connection.

 Service
Class Instance
Forward_Open
—
Forward_Close

 Motor Data Object (28h)

This object serves as a database for motor parameters.

 Service
Class Instance
Get_Attribute_Single
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single

 Class attribute
No. Name Access Type Description
1 Revision Get UINT 0001h (Revision of the object)

2. Ethernet Communication
2.11 EtherNet/IP
155
  Instance attribute
No. Name Access Type Description
*1 3: PM synchronous motor
3 MotorType Set/Get*2 USINT
7: Squirrel cage induction motor
Rated motor current (0.1 A increments)
6*3 Rated Current Set/Get UINT Instance 1: Pr.9
Instance 2: Pr.51
Rated motor voltage (V)
7*3 Rated Voltage Set/Get UINT Instance 1: Pr.83
Instance 2: Pr.456
Rated motor frequency (Hz)
9*3 RatedFreq Set/Get UINT Instance 1: Pr.84
Instance 2: Pr.457
Number of motor poles
12*3 PoleCount Set/Get UINT Instance 1: Pr.81
Instance 2: Pr.454
Nominal speed (rpm) at rated frequency from nameplate*4
15*3 Rated Speed Set/Get UINT Instance 1: Pr.84 × 120/Pr.81
Instance 2: Pr.457 × 120/Pr.454
*1 Instances 1 and 2 are supported.
*2 Writing is enabled only when the setting is the same as that of the inverter.
*3 When Pr.77 Parameter write selection ≠ "2", writing is restricted by the settings of Ethernet IP address for command source selection (Pr.1449
to Pr.1454).
*4 When Pr.81 (Pr.454) = "9999", the formula is calculated with 4 poles.

 Control Supervisor Object (29h)

This object has the management functions for devices "Hierarchy of Motor Control Devices".

 Service
Class Instance
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
Get_Attribute_Single
Reset*1 (operation command clear, output shutoff, protective function
reset)

*1 Disabled during emergency drive operation.

Writing is restricted by the settings of Ethernet IP address for command source selection (Pr.1449 to Pr.1454).
E.16 to E.20, E.PE6, E.PE2, E.CPU, E.SAF, E.CMB, E.1, E.5 to E.7, and E.13 are not reset. In this case, take an appropriate corrective action
first, and reset them by power reset or inverter reset.

 Class attribute
No. Name Access Type Description
1 Revision Get UINT 0001h (Revision of the object)

 Instance 1 attributes
No. Name Access Type Description
3*1 Run1*2 Set/Get BOOL Forward rotation
4*1 Run2*2 Set/Get BOOL Reverse rotation
Operation command source
0: Pr.338 = "1"
5*1 NetCtrl Set/Get BOOL 1: Pr.338 = "0"
The actual status of the operation command source can be
monitored with Attribute 15.
0: Vendor Specific (Pr.502 = "2": communication fault detection
enabled)
1: Startup (During inverter reset)
2: Not_Ready (Communication ready and RY signal-OFF)
3: Ready (Operation ready)
6 State Get USINT
4: Enabled (During acceleration, constant-speed operation, or
reverse rotation deceleration)
5: Stopping (During deceleration)
6: Fault_Stop (Deceleration by setting Pr.502 = "1")
7: Faulted (Fault)

156 2. Ethernet Communication

2.11 EtherNet/IP
 No. Name Access Type Description

7 Running1 Get BOOL

0: During stop or reverse rotation
1: Forward running
1
0: During stop or forward running
8 Running2 Get BOOL
1: Reverse running

9 Ready Get BOOL

0: RY signal is OFF
1: RY signal is ON
2
0: No fault
10 Faulted Get BOOL
1: Fault

11 Warning Get BOOL

0: Without warnings
1: With warnings
3
0: No reset
12*1 FaultRst Set/Get BOOL
0→1: Protective function reset*3
Operation command source monitoring 4
15 CtrlFrom Net Get BOOL 0: Local control
1: Network control
*1
*2
Writing is restricted by the settings of Ethernet IP address for command source selection (Pr.1449 to Pr.1454).
If both Run1 and Run2 are turned ON, the start signal is not changed. (The previous status remains unchanged.) If both Run1 and Run2 are 5
turned ON in the Assembly Object (04h), the direction of rotation is not changed. That is because the start signal is not changed by giving a speed
command to reverse the direction.
*3 E.16 to E.20, E.PE6, E.PE2, E.CPU, E.SAF, E.CMB, E.1, E.5 to E.7, and E.13 are not reset. In this case, take an appropriate corrective action
first, and reset them by power reset or inverter reset. 6

 AC/DC Drive Object (2Ah)

This object models the functions specific to an AC or DC Drive, for example speed, torque, and position control.
7
 Service
Class Instance 8
Get_Attribute_Single
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single

 Class attribute 9
No. Name Access Type Description
1 Revision Get UINT 0001h (Revision of the object)

 Instance 1 attributes 10
No. Name Access Type Description
During speed control
0: SU signal OFF
1: SU signal ON
During torque control
0: The actual torque (monitor code: 07h) is out of the range of
3 At Reference Get BOOL
±10% of the torque command value (monitor code: 20h).
1: The actual torque (monitor code: 07h) is within the range of
±10% of the torque command value (monitor code: 20h).
During position control
Fixed to "0"
Speed/torque command source
0: Pr.339 = "1"
4*2 NetRef Set/Get BOOL 1: Pr.339 = "0 or 2"
The actual status of the speed/torque command source can be
monitored with Attribute 29.
0: Vendor specific mode
1: Speed control without encoder
6 DriveMode Set/Get*1 USINT 2: Speed control with encoder
3: Torque control
5: Position control
Actual drive speed
7*3*4 Speed Actual Get INT
Unit: rpm / 2SpeedScale
Speed setting value
8*2*4*5 SpeedRef Set/Get INT
Unit: rpm / 2SpeedScale
Motor phase current
9 Current Actual Get INT
Unit: 100 mA / 2CurrentScale

2. Ethernet Communication
2.11 EtherNet/IP
157
 No. Name Access Type Description
Actual torque
11*3 Torque Actual Get INT
Unit: N·m / 2TorqueScale
Torque command value (Pr.805)
12*2 TorqueRef Set/Get INT
Unit: N·m / 2TorqueScale
Output power
15 Power Actual Get INT
Unit: W
Output voltage
17 Output Voltage Get INT
Unit: V
Acceleration time = Pr.7 (Pr.44) × Pr.18/Pr.20
18*2 AccelTime Set/Get UINT Time from 0 to HighSpdLimit
Unit: ms
Deceleration time = Pr.8 (Pr.45) × Pr.18/Pr.20
19*2 DecelTime Set/Get UINT Time from HighSpdLimit to 0
Unit: ms
Minimum speed limit (Pr.2)
20*2*4 LowSpd Limit Set/Get UINT
Unit: rpm / 2SpeedScale
Maximum speed limit (Pr.18)
21*2*4 HighSpd Limit Set/Get UINT
Unit: rpm / 2SpeedScale
Speed scaling factor
22*2*6 SpeedScale Set/Get SINT
Applied to attributes 7, 8, 20, and 21.
Current scaling factor
23*2*6 Current Scale Set/Get SINT
Applied to attribute 9.
Torque scaling factor
24*2*6 Torque Scale Set/Get SINT
Applied to attributes 11 and 12.
Speed/torque command source monitoring
29 RefFromNet Get BOOL 0: Local reference
1: Network reference
*1 Writing is enabled only when the setting is the same as that of the inverter.
*2 Writing is restricted by the settings of Ethernet IP address for command source selection (Pr.1449 to Pr.1454). However, the restriction is not
applied to attributes 18, 19, 20, and 21 when Pr.77 Parameter write selection = "2".
*3 Use Pr.290 to enable display of negative numbers during monitoring. For details, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*4 Use the speed scale of Inverter Configuration Object (64h) to set a scaling factor. (Refer to page 160.)
*5 When Pr.541 Frequency command sign selection = "1", the set frequency is a signed value. When the setting value is negative, the command
is the inverse from the start command. (Refer to page 149.)
*6 At power-ON or inverter reset, executing the reset service of the Identity Object (01h) resets the value to "0" (initial value).

NOTE
• When the data in attributes of AC/DC Drive Object (2Ah) is larger than the size of data type, the data is limited to the size of
data size.

 Inverter Configuration Object (64h)

This object is used to read and write inverter parameters, monitor data, and inverter control parameters.

 Service
Class Instance
Get_Attribute_Single
—
Set_Attribute_Single

 Instance
No. Name Access Type Remarks
12288 to 16383 The inverter parameter number*2 + 12288 (3000h)
(3000h to 3FFFh) Inverter Parameters*1 Set/Get UINT
is the instance number.
16384 to 20479 The monitor code*3 + 16384 (4000h) is the index
(4000h to 4FFFh) Monitor Data*4*5 Get UINT
number.
20480 to 24575
Inverter Control Parameters Set/Get UINT Inverter control parameter
(5000h to 5FFFh)

*1 When parameter write is performed, data are written to RAM for I/O message communication. Writing to EEPROM or RAM is selected according
to the setting in Pr.342 Communication EEPROM write selection for explicit message communication.
*2 For the numbers and names of inverter parameters, refer to the parameter list of the Instruction Manual (Function).
*3 For details of the monitor codes and monitor items, refer to the description of Pr.52 in the Instruction Manual (Function).

158 2. Ethernet Communication

2.11 EtherNet/IP
 *4 Display of negative numbers during monitoring set in Pr.290 Monitor negative output selection is disabled.
*5 The display can be changed from the frequency to rotations per minute (machine speed) using Pr.53. When the machine speed is displayed, the
value is incremented by one. 1
• Inverter control parameter
Instance No. Name Access Remarks 2
Set 9966h for the written value.
20482 (5002h)*1 Inverter reset Set/Get
The read value is fixed to 0000h.
Set 965Ah for the written value.
20483 (5003h)*1 Parameter clear Set/Get
The read value is fixed to 0000h. 3
Set 99AAh for the written value.
20484 (5004h)*1 All parameter clear Set/Get
The read value is fixed to 0000h.
Set 5A96h for the written value.
20486 (5006h)*1 Parameter clear*2 Set/Get
The read value is fixed to 0000h. 4
Set AA99h for the written value.
20487 (5007h)*1 All parameter clear*2 Set/Get
The read value is fixed to 0000h.

20488 (5008h)
Inverter status / control input command
(extended)*3
Set/Get Refer to page 160. 5
20489 (5009h) Inverter status / control input command*3 Set/Get Refer to page 160.
20981 (51F5h) Fault record 1 Set/Get
20982 (51F6h) Fault record 2 Get 6
20983 (51F7h) Fault record 3 Get Being 2 bytes in length, the data is stored as "00○○h".
20984 (51F8h) Fault record 4 Get Refer to the lowest 1 byte for the error code. (For
details on error codes, refer to the list of fault displays
20985 (51F9h)
20986 (51FAh)
Fault record 5
Fault record 6
Get
Get
in the Instruction Manual (Maintenance).) 7
The fault history is batch-cleared by writing to 20981
20987 (51FBh) Fault record 7 Get (51F5h).
20988 (51FCh) Fault record 8 Get Set any value as data.
20989 (51FDh) Fault record 9 Get 8
20990 (51FEh) Fault record 10 Get
20992 (5200h)*4 Safety input status Get Refer to page 160.
21216 (52E0h) *1 Speed scale (numerator) Set/Get Refer to page 160. 9
*1 Speed scale (denominator) Set/Get Refer to page 160.
21217 (52E1h)

*1 Not available for I/O message communication.

*2 Settings in the communication parameters are not cleared. 10
*3 The data is written as a control input command for writing.
The data is read as the inverter status for reading.
*4 Parameter setting is available for the Ethernet model only. Access to the parameter using explicit message communication is allowed for the
safety communication model and the IP67 model, but the function is disabled.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.11 EtherNet/IP
159
 • Inverter status / control input command, and inverter status / control input command (extended)
Inverter status / control input command Inverter status / control input command (extended)
Definition Definition
Bit Bit
Control input command Inverter status Control input command Inverter status
0 — RUN (Inverter running)*2 0 NET X1 (—)*1 NET Y1 (0)*2
1 — During forward rotation 1 NET X2 (—)*1 NET Y2 (0)*2
2 — During reverse rotation 2 NET X3 (—)*1 NET Y3 (0)*2
RH (High-speed operation
3 Up to frequency 3 NET X4 (—)*1 NET Y4 (0)*2
command)*1
RM (Middle-speed operation
4 Overload alarm 4 NET X5 (—)*1 0
command)*1
RL (Low-speed operation
5 0 5 — 0
command)*1
FU (Output frequency
6 JOG operation selection 2 6 — 0
detection)*2
7 Second function selection ABC (Fault)*2 7 — 0
8 Terminal 4 input selection *2 8 — 0
ABC2 (0)
9 — Safety monitor output 2 9 — 0
10 MRS (Output stop)*1 0 10 — 0
11 — 0 11 — 0
12 *1 0 12 — 0
RES (—)
13 — 0 13 — 0
14 — 0 14 — 0
15 — Fault occurrence 15 — 0
*1 The signal within parentheses ( ) is assigned in the initial status. The function changes depending on the setting of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (Input
terminal function selection).
For details, refer to the description of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) in the Instruction Manual (Function).
The signals assigned to the input terminals may be valid or invalid in the NET operation mode. (Refer to the Instruction Manual (Function).)
*2 The signal within parentheses ( ) is assigned in the initial status. The function changes depending on the setting of Pr.190 to Pr.197 (Output
terminal function selection).
For details, refer to the description of Pr.190 to Pr.197 (Output terminal function selection) in the Instruction Manual (Function).

• Safety input status

Bit Definition
0: Terminal S1 ON
0
1: Terminal S1 OFF (output shutoff)
0: Terminal S2 ON
1
1: Terminal S2 OFF (output shutoff)
2 to 15 0

• Speed scale
A scaling factor can be set for attributes 7, 8, 20, and 21 of AC/DC Drive Object (2Ah). (Refer to page 157.)
Instance No. Name Access Initial value Setting range
21216 (52E0h)*1 Speed scale (numerator) Set/Get 1 1 to 65535
21217 (52E1h)*1 Speed scale (denominator) Set/Get 1 1 to 65535

*1 The setting value is applied immediately. At power-ON or inverter reset, executing the reset service of the Identity Object (01h) resets the value
to the initial value.

Relationship between the set speeds of the master and the inverter
Set speed (inverter) = Set speed to be scaled (master) × (Speed scale (numerator) / Speed scale (denominator))

 Instance attribute
No. Name Access Type Description
*1 Inverter parameters, monitor data, and inverter control
100 Data Set/Get UINT
parameters.

160 2. Ethernet Communication

2.11 EtherNet/IP
 No. Name Access Type Description
Analog value (%) set in C3 (Pr.902), C4 (Pr.903), C6 (Pr.904),
C7 (Pr.905), C39 (Pr.932), C41 (Pr.933), C43 (Pr.934), and
1
*1 Sub Data Set/Get UINT C45 (Pr.935)
101
Example) C3 (Pr.902): Instance = 902 + 12288 = 13190
(3386h), Attribute = 101
*1 When Pr.77 Parameter write selection ≠ "2", writing is restricted by the settings of Ethernet IP address for command source selection (Pr.1449
2
to Pr.1454).

• Calibration parameter 3
Instance No. Attribute Name Description
100 Data C0 (Pr.900)
13188 (3384h)
101 Sub Data — 4
100 Data C1 (Pr.901)
13189 (3385h)
101 Sub Data —
100 Data C2 (Pr.902)
13190 (3386h)
101 Sub Data C3 (Pr.902) 5
100 Data 125 (Pr.903)
13191 (3387h)
101 Sub Data C4 (Pr.903)

13192 (3388h)
100 Data C5 (Pr.904) 6
101 Sub Data C6 (Pr.904)
100 Data 126 (Pr.905)
13193 (3389h)
101 Sub Data C7 (Pr.905)
100 Data C12 (Pr.917) 7
13205 (3395h)*1
101 Sub Data C13 (Pr.917)
100 Data C14 (Pr.918)
13206 (3396h)*1
101
100
Sub Data
Data
C15 (Pr.918)
C16 (Pr.919)
8
*1
13207 (3397h)
101 Sub Data C17 (Pr.919)
100 Data C18 (Pr.920)
13208 (3398h)*1
101 Sub Data C19 (Pr.920) 9
100 Data C38 (Pr.932)
13220 (33A4h)
101 Sub Data C39 (Pr.932)

13221 (33A5h)
100
101
Data
Sub Data
C40 (Pr.933)
C41 (Pr.933)
10
100 Data C42 (Pr.934)
13222 (33A6h)
101 Sub Data C43 (Pr.934)
100 Data C44 (Pr.935)
13223 (33A7h)
101 Sub Data C45 (Pr.935)

*1 Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.

NOTE
• Set 65520 (FFF0h) as a parameter value "8888" and 65535 (FFFFh) as "9999".
• To specify subindices in Pr.1389 to Pr.1398, set "0" in attribute 100 and set "1" in attribute 101.

 TCP/IP Interface Object (F5h)

The object groups TCP/IP-related settings.

 Service
Class Instance
Get_Attribute_All
Get_Attribute_Single Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single

 Class attribute
No. Name Access Type Description
1 Revision Get UINT 0004h (Revision of the object)

2. Ethernet Communication
2.11 EtherNet/IP
161
  Instance 1 attributes
No. Name Access Type Description
1 Status Get DWORD Refer to "Status (Attribute 1)" on page 162.
80 (0050h):
2 Configuration Capability Get DWORD
Refer to "Configuration Capability (Attribute 2)" on page 162.
3 Configuration Control Set/Get DWORD Refer to "Configuration Control (Attribute 3)" on page 162.
Physical Link Object Structure Path size and Path
Path size UINT 0002h
4 Get
Padded Path to Ethernet Link Object
Path 20 F6 24 03h
EPATH
Interface Configuration Structure TCP/IP interface setting
IP Address UDINT IP address (Pr.1434 to Pr.1437)
Network Mask UDINT Subnet mask (Pr.1438 to Pr.1441)
5 Gateway Address Set/Get UDINT Default gateway (Pr.442 to Pr.445)
Name Server UDINT Fixed to 0
Name Server 2 UDINT Fixed to 0
Domain Name STRING Fixed to 0
6 Host Name Set/Get STRING Host name
0: Inactive
Encapsulation Inactivity 1 to 3600 s: TCP connection timeout after the message is
13 Set/Get UINT
Timeout received
(Initial value: 120 s)

• Status (Attribute 1)
Bit Name Description
How to configure Attribute 5
0: Not configured
0 to 3 Interface Configuration Status
1: Configured by setting parameters, BOOTP, DHCP
2: Configured by hardware setting
4 — Fixed to 0
Attribute 5, setting change during pending.
5 Interface Configuration Pending
"1" is set when inverter reset is required to enable the setting change.
6 to 31 — Fixed to 0
• Configuration Capability (Attribute 2)
Bit Name Description
0: Not supported
0 BOOTP Client
1: Supported
0: Not supported
1 DNS Client
1: Supported
0: Not supported
2 DHCP Client
1: Supported
3 DHCP-DNS Update Fixed to 0
Attribute 5, access condition
4 Configuration Settable 0: Setting not allowed
1: Setting allowed
Attribute 5, hardware configuration condition
5 Hardware Configurable 0: Setting not allowed
1: Setting allowed
Attribute 5, change application condition
Interface Configuration Change
6 0: Immediately
Requires Reset
1: After reset
0: Not supported
7 AcdCapable
1: Supported
8 to 31 — Fixed to 0
• Configuration Control (Attribute 3)
Bit Name Description
Network setting acquisition method after startup of the inverter
0: Parameter setting
0 to 3 Configuration Method
1: BOOTP
2: DHCP
4 to 31 — Fixed to 0

162 2. Ethernet Communication

2.11 EtherNet/IP
 Ethernet Link Object (F6h)
This object groups diagnostic information for the Ethernet interface. 1
 Service
Class Instance
Get_Attribute_All
2
Get_Attribute_All
Get_Attribute_Single
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single

 Class attribute 3
No. Name Access Type Description
1 Revision Get UINT 0004h (Revision of the object)
2 Max Instance Get UINT (Highest instance number) 4
3 Number of instances Get UINT (Number of instances)

 Instance attribute
No. Name Access Type Description
5
10 or 100:
1*1 Interface Speed Get UDINT
Actual Ethernet interface speed (Mbps)
2*1 Interface Flags Get DWORD Refer to "Interface Flags (Attribute 2)" on page 163. 6
Array of 6
3*1 Physical Address Get
USINT
(MAC ID): Assigned MAC address

Interface Control Structure Control Bits and Forced Interface Speed

Control Bits WORD Refer to "Control Bits (Attribute 6)" on page 164. 7
6*1*2 Set/Get 0, 10, or 100:
Forced Interface Speed UINT Speed at which the interface shall be forced to operate.
Returns 'Object state Conflict' if auto-negotiation is enabled.
Instance 1, 2: 2 (Twisted pair cable)
8
7 Interface Type Get USINT
Instance 3: 1 (Embedded interface)
Instance 1: Port 1
SHORT_
10 Interface Label Get
STRING
Instance 2: Port 2
Instance 3: Internal
9
Interface Capability Structure Capability Bits and Speed/Duplex Options
11 (000Bh):
Capability Bits DWORD

Structure
Refer to "Capability Bits (Attribute 11)" on page 164.
—
10
USINT 4: Number of arrays
11*1 Get Structure
—
array
Speed/Duplex Options
10 or 100:
UINT
Ethernet interface speed (Mbps)
0: Half duplex
USINT
1: Full duplex
*1 Instances 1, 2, and 3 are supported.
*2 When Pr.77 Parameter write selection ≠ "2", writing is restricted by the settings of Ethernet IP address for command source selection (Pr.1449
to Pr.1454).

• Interface Flags (Attribute 2)

Bit Name Description
IEEE 802.3 communication interface link status
0 Link status 0: Inactive
1: Active
Current duplex mode
1 Half/full duplex 0: Half duplex
1: Full duplex
Link auto-negotiation status
0 to 2: Disabled.
2 to 4 Negotiation Status
3: Successfully negotiated speed and duplex.
4: Auto-negotiation not attempted. Forced speed and duplex.
0: Immediately
5 Manual Setting requires Reset
1: After reset
6 to 31 — Fixed to 0

2. Ethernet Communication
2.11 EtherNet/IP
163
 • Control Bits (Attribute 6)
Bit Name Description
0: Inactive
0 Auto-negotiate
1: Active
Duplex mode when Auto-negotiate (Bit 0) = 0
1 Forced Duplex Mode 0: Half duplex
1: Full duplex
2 to 15 — Fixed to 0
• Capability Bits (Attribute 11)
Bit Name Description
Attribute 6, change application condition
0 Manual Setting Requires Reset 0: Immediately (Instance 3)
1: After reset (Instance 1, 2)
0: Not supported (Instance 3)
1 Auto-negotiate
1: Not supported (Instance 1, 2)
2 Auto-MDIX Fixed to 0 (not supported)
3 Manual Speed/Duplex Fixed to 1 (supported)
4 to 31 — Fixed to 0

164 2. Ethernet Communication

2.11 EtherNet/IP
 CiA402 drive profile
Index
Sub
Name Description Access Type
1
index
Error number
The error code of the latest fault that occurred after power-ON or an
inverter reset is returned. 2
When no fault occurs, no error is returned.
24639 When the fault history is cleared during occurrence of a fault, no
00h Error code Get Unsigned16
(603Fh) error is returned.
The upper eight bits are fixed to FF, and the lower eight bits 3
represent the error code. (FFXXh: "XX" represents the error code.)
(For details on error codes, refer to the list of fault displays in the
Instruction Manual (Maintenance).)
Output frequency (r/min)*1 4
24643 The output frequency is read in r/min.
00h vl velocity demand Get Integer16
(6043h) Monitoring range: -32768 (8000h) to 32767 (7FFFh)
When Pr.81 = "9999", the number of motor poles is regarded as 4.
Operation speed (r/min)*1 5
24644 vl velocity actual The operation speed is read in r/min.
00h Get Integer16
(6044h) value Monitoring range: -32768 (8000h) to 32767 (7FFFh)
When Pr.81 = "9999", the number of motor poles is regarded as 4.
24672
00h Modes of operation Control mode: -1 (vendor specific operation mode) (fixed) Set/Get Integer8
6
(6060h)
24673 Modes of operation
00h Current control mode: -1 (vendor specific operation mode) (fixed) Get Integer8
(6061h) display
24674 Position demand Position command (pulse) 7
00h Get Integer32
(6062h) value The position command before the electronic gear operation is read.
24675 Position actual Current position (pulse)
00h Get Integer32
(6063h)
24676
internal value
Position actual
The current position after the electronic gear operation is read.
Current position (pulse)
8
00h Get Integer32
(6064h) value The current position before the electronic gear operation is read.
24689
Function disabled
(6071h)
24692 Torque demand value (%)
9
00h Torque demand Get Integer16
(6074h) The torque command is read.
24695 Torque actual value (%)
00h Torque actual value Get Integer16
(6077h) The motor torque is read.
Target position (pulse)
10
Set the target position in the direct command mode.
24698 Initial value: 0
00h Target position Set/Get Integer32
(607Ah) Setting range: -2147483647 to 2147483647
(For the direct command mode, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).)
Maximum profile speed (r/min)
24703
00h Max profile velocity Set Pr.18 High speed maximum frequency in r/min. Set/Get Unsigned32
(607Fh)
Setting range: 0 to 590 Hz
Profile speed (r/min)
Set the maximum speed in the direct command mode.
24705 Initial value: 0
00h Profile velocity Set/Get Unsigned32
(6081h) Setting range: 0 to (120 × 590 Hz / Pr.81)
(For the direct command mode, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).)
Acceleration time constant (ms)
<Position control>
Set the acceleration time in the direct command mode.
Initial value: 5000
Setting range: 10 to 360000
The last digit is rounded off. (For example, 1358 ms becomes 1350
ms.)
24707
00h Profile acceleration (For the direct command mode, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Set/Get Unsigned32
(6083h)
Manual (Function).)
<Other than position control>
Set Pr.7 Acceleration time in ms.
Setting range: 0 to 3600 s
The last two digits are rounded off when Pr.21 Acceleration/
deceleration time increments = "0", and the last digit is rounded
off when Pr.21 = "1".

2. Ethernet Communication
2.11 EtherNet/IP
165
 Sub
Index Name Description Access Type
index
Deceleration time constant (ms)
<Position control>
Set the deceleration time in the direct command mode.
Initial value: 5000
Setting range: 10 to 360000
The last digit is rounded off. (For example, 1358 ms becomes 1350
ms.)
24708
00h Profile deceleration (For the direct command mode, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Set/Get Unsigned32
(6084h)
Manual (Function).)
<Other than position control>
Set Pr.8 Deceleration time in ms.
Setting range: 0 to 3600 s
The last two digits are rounded off when Pr.21 Acceleration/
deceleration time increments = "0", and the last digit is rounded
off when Pr.21 = "1".
Position encoder
— Encoder resolution (machine side / motor side) — —
resolution
Highest sub-index
00h Maximum value of subindex: 02h (fixed) Get Unsigned8
24719 supported
(608Fh) Encoder resolution
Encoder
01h Set Pr.369 Number of encoder pulses. Set/Get Unsigned32
increments
Setting range: 2 to 4096
02h Motor revolutions Motor speed (rev): 00000001h (fixed) Set/Get Unsigned32
— Gear ratio Gear ratio — —
Highest sub-index
00h Maximum value of subindex: 02h (fixed) Get Unsigned8
supported
Motor shaft revolutions*2
24721 01h Motor revolutions Set Pr.420 Command pulse scaling factor numerator Set/Get Unsigned32
(electronic gear numerator).
(6091h)
Setting range: 1 to 32767
Drive shaft revolutions*2
02h Shaft revolutions Set Pr.421 Command pulse multiplication denominator Set/Get Unsigned32
(electronic gear denominator).
Setting range: 1 to 32767
Home position return method
Set the home position return method in the direct command
24728
(6098h)
00h Homing method mode.*3 Set/Get Integer8
(For the direct command mode and the home position return
method, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
— Homing speeds Home position return speed — —
Highest sub-index
00h Maximum value of subindex: 01h (fixed) Get Unsigned8
supported
24729 Motor speed during home position returning (r/min)
(6099h) Set the home position return speed in the direct command mode.
Speed during Initial value: 120 × 2 Hz / Pr.81
01h Set/Get Unsigned32
search for switch Setting range: 0 to (120 × 400 Hz / Pr.81)
(For the direct command mode, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).)
Home position return acceleration/deceleration time (ms)
Set the home position return acceleration/deceleration time in the
direct command mode.
Initial value: 5000
24730 Homing
00h Setting range: 10 to 360000 Set/Get Unsigned32
(609Ah) acceleration
The last digit is rounded off. (For example, 1358 ms becomes 1350
ms.)
(For the direct command mode, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).)
24820 Following error Droop pulse (pulse)
00h Get Integer32
(60F4h) actual value The droop pulse before the electronic gear operation is read.
24826
00h Control effort Speed command after position loop*1 Get Integer32
(60FAh) The ideal speed command is read.
24828 Position demand Position command (pulse)
00h Get Integer32
(60FCh) internal value The position command after the electronic gear operation is read.
25858 Supported drive Supported control mode: 00010000h (vendor specific operation
00h Get Unsigned32
(6502h) modes mode)

166 2. Ethernet Communication

2.11 EtherNet/IP
 *1 The value is displayed and set in r/min regardless of the settings in Pr.53.
The frequency is converted to the rotation speed for reading, and the setting value is converted to the frequency for writing.
*2 When parameter write is performed, data are written to RAM for I/O message communication. Writing to EEPROM or RAM is selected according 1
to the setting in Pr.342 Communication EEPROM write selection for explicit message communication.
*3 The following table shows home position return methods corresponding to the Index 6098h setting values.

6098h setting Home position return method

-3 Data set type
2
-4 Stopper type (home position return direction: position pulse increasing direction)
-5 (initial value) Ignoring the home position (servo ON position as the home position)
-7 Count type with front end reference (home position return direction: position pulse increasing direction) 3
-36 Stopper type (home position return direction: position pulse decreasing direction)
-39 Count type with front end reference (home position return direction: position pulse decreasing direction)
-65 Stopper type (home position return direction: start command direction)
-66 Count type with front end reference (home position return direction: start command direction) 4
NOTE
• The command interface in the Network operation mode is determined by the Pr.550 NET mode operation command source
selection setting. (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
5
• When the data is read, the value is displayed with a sign regardless of the Pr.290 Monitor negative output selection setting.

10

2. Ethernet Communication
2.11 EtherNet/IP
167
  Data format
 Explicit Message communication (request format)
Byte No. Field Remarks
0 Service Service code
1 Request Path Size Data size of Request Path
Common Industrial Protocol
2 to n Request Path Application path
n+1 to m Data Service specific data

 Explicit Message communication (response format)

Byte No. Field Remarks
0 Reply Service Request service code +80h
1 Reserved Fixed to "0"
2 General Status General status code
Size of Additional
Common Industrial Protocol 3 Data size of Additional Status
Status
4
Additional Status Not extended when the value is "0".
5
6 to n Response Data

 I/O Message communication (master to inverter)

Byte No. Field Remarks
0
CIP Sequence Count Sequence No.
1
Common Industrial Protocol
2 to 5 32bit Header Connection mode
6 to n Data

 I/O Message communication (inverter to master)

Byte No. Field Remarks
0
CIP Sequence Count Sequence No.
Common Industrial Protocol 1
2 to n Data

 Error number
The error information for request command is stored in General Status of the response format for the Explicit Message
communication.
Error No. Name Description
00h Success The service was successfully executed by the specified object.
The path is unknown or references an object class, instance, or
05h Path destination unknown
structure element not included in the processing node.
09h Invalid attribute value Invalid attribute data was detected.
The requested service cannot be executed in the current mode/state of
10h Device state conflict
the device.
20h Invalid parameter A parameter assigned to the request was invalid.

 Programming examples
The following explains the programming examples for controlling the inverter with sequence programs.
Check that "44818" (EtherNet/IP) is set in any of Pr.1427 to Pr.1430 (Ethernet function selection).

 Programming example for forward rotation operation at 1500 r/min

• Connection settings in the engineering software
Select "Extended Speed Control" for the "Connections" setting of the inverter.
Names of setting items may differ depending of the engineering software used.
• Network setting and device examples

168 2. Ethernet Communication

2.11 EtherNet/IP
Data in D101 to D102 reflect the data for cyclic communication with inverters, either by data transmission to the buffer memory
or using function blocks, according to the specification of the master module.
1
Device name Description
M0 Forward rotation start
D100.0 Class1_Get_Set_Request
D101 Extended Speed Control Output_0
2
D101.0 Run fwd
D101.1 Run rev
D101.2 Fault reset 3
D101.3 —
D101.4 —
D101.5 NetCtrl
D101.6 NetRef 4
D101.7 to D101.F —
D102 Speed reference
D103 Extended Speed Control Input_0 5
D103.0 Faulted
D103.1 Warning
D103.2 Running 1(Fwd)
D103.3 Running 2(Rev) 6
D103.4 Ready
D103.5 Ctrl from net
D103.6 Ref from net 7
D103.7 At reference
D103.8 to D103.F —
D104 Speed actual
8
Turning ON D100.0 (Class1_Get_Set_Request) turns ON D101.5 (NetCtrl) and D101.6 (NetRef), enabling the control by the
master via network.
• Rotation speed setting: Speed reference = 1500 r/min 9
Turning ON M0 (Forward rotation start) turns ON D101.0 (Run fwd) to start forward rotation operation at 1500 r/min.
Turning OFF M0 stops operation.
10

K1500

 Setting example
• The following tables show example settings when user defined cyclic communication data are selected (Assembly Object
(04h)). Data are written to the inverter when I/O communications are in run state and the data are updated by the master.
(The response time to write the data is 100 ms at the most.)

2. Ethernet Communication
2.11 EtherNet/IP
169
 • Instance 100 (64h): Configurable Output
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 0 NetRef NetCtrl 0 0 Fault reset Run rev Run fwd
1 00h
2 Speed reference (Low byte)
3 Speed reference (High byte)
4 User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 1 (lower bytes) (Pr.1320)
5 User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 1 (upper bytes) (Pr.1320)
6 User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 2 (lower bytes) (Pr.1321)
7 User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 2 (upper bytes) (Pr.1321)

• Instance 150 (96h): Configurable Input

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Running 2 Running1
0 At reference Ref from net Ctrl from net Ready Warning Faulted
(Rev) (Fwd)
1 Drive state
2 Speed actual (Low byte)
3 Speed actual (High byte)
4 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 1 (lower bytes) (Pr.1330)
5 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 1 (upper bytes) (Pr.1330)
6 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 2 (lower bytes) (Pr.1331)
7 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 2 (upper bytes) (Pr.1331)
8 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 3 (lower bytes) (Pr.1332)
9 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 3 (upper bytes) (Pr.1332)
10 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 4 (lower bytes) (Pr.1333)
11 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 4 (upper bytes) (Pr.1333)
12 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 5 (lower bytes) (Pr.1334)
13 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 5 (upper bytes) (Pr.1334)

• Parameters
Pr. Name Setting example Remarks
User Defined Cyclic
1318 Communication Input fixing format 21 (15h) Extended Speed Control Output
selection
User Defined Cyclic P.7 Acceleration time
1320 12295 (3007h)
Communication Input 1 Mapping 7 (0007h) + 12288 (3000h)
User Defined Cyclic Pr.8 Deceleration time
1321 12296 (3008h)
Communication Input 2 Mapping 8 (0008h) + 12288 (3000h)
User Defined Cyclic
1319 Communication Output fixing 71 (47h) Extended Speed Control Input
format selection
User Defined Cyclic P.7 Acceleration time
1330 12295 (3007h)
Communication Output 1 Mapping 7 (0007h) + 12288 (3000h)
User Defined Cyclic Pr.8 Deceleration time
1331 12296 (3008h)
Communication Output 2 Mapping 8 (0008h) + 12288 (3000h)
User Defined Cyclic Monitored output current
1332 16386 (4002h)
Communication Output 3 Mapping 2 (0002h) + 16384 (4000h)
User Defined Cyclic Pr.255 Life alarm status display
1333 12543 (30FFh)
Communication Output 4 Mapping 255 (00FFh) + 12288 (3000h)
User Defined Cyclic
1334 20981 (51F5h) Fault record 1
Communication Output 5 Mapping
• Connection settings in the engineering software
Set "Configurable" for the "Connections" setting of the inverter. Change the setting according to the data length set in instance
100/150. (When the settings are inconsistent, communication is not established.)
Change the "Input Size" setting to "14bytes".
Change the "Output Size" setting to "8bytes".
Names of setting items may differ depending of the engineering software used.

170 2. Ethernet Communication

2.11 EtherNet/IP
2.12 PROFINET 1

2.12.1 Outline 2

4
PROFINET is available for the FR-E800-(SC)EPB and FR-E806-SCEPB.
When the PROFINET communication operation is performed through the Ethernet connector on the inverter, data transmission 5
is enabled for parameters, command data, and feedback data between a master and inverters.
Some functions are not supported depending on the date of manufacture of the inverter. For details of specification changes,
refer to page 290. 6
 Communication specifications
The communication specification varies depending on the specification of the master.
7
Item Description
Category 100BASE-TX
Communication speed 100 Mbps (10 Mbps is not supported.)
Maximum number of
No upper limit on the same Ethernet network
8
branches
Number of cascade
Maximum: 2
connection stages
Ethernet cable (IEEE 802.3 100BASE-TX compliant cable and ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B (Category 9
Connection cable
5e) compliant shielded 4-pair branched cable)
Topology Line, star, or a combination of line and star
PROFINET
communication PROFINET IO Device V2.35
10
specifications

 Wiring method
• When only one connector is used in star topology, use PORT 1.
• When two connectors are used in line topology, use PORT1 for connection with the master, and use PORT2 for connection
with PORT1 of the adjacent inverter.
Connection between IP67 model
PORT2 and PORT1

Connector for Connector for Connector for Connector for

communication communication communication communication
(PORT1) (PORT2) (PORT1) (PORT2)
EP1 EP2
Connector for Connector for
communication communication
(PORT1) (PORT2)

To the next
connector for
communication
To the master station (PORT1)

2. Ethernet Communication
2.12 PROFINET
171
  Operation status LEDs
LED name Description LED status Remarks
OFF Power-OFF / during inverter reset
No connections established with the master /
Blinking green Connections established with the master (The master is in
NS Communication status
the stop state.)
Connections established with the master (The master is in
Solid green
the run state.)
OFF Power-OFF / during inverter reset
MS Inverter status ON (green) Operating properly
Red Fault detected
OFF Power-OFF/link-down
Connector for communication (PORT1)
LINK1 Blinking green Link-up (Data reception in progress)
status
Solid green Link-up
OFF Power-OFF/link-down
Connector for communication (PORT2)
LINK2 Blinking green Link-up (Data reception in progress)
status
Solid green Link-up

NOTE
• Depending on packets sent to the inverter while the master is in the stop state, the NS LED may not turn blinking green. The
run/stop state is determined by IOCS of the packet sent from the master to the inverter (Good (80h): run, Bad (60h): stop).
When the following master is used, the above-mentioned operation is performed in the stop state.

Manufacturer Model Version

CPU: 1511F-1 PN
SIEMENS SIMATIC S7-1500 Product number: 6ES7511-1FK02-0AB0
Firmware version: V 02.05.02

 GSDML file
A GSDML file is available for download.
Model Classification GSDML file
Ethernet model PROFINET GSDML-V2.35-MitsubishiElectric-FR-E800-E-[yyyymmdd].xml
Safety communication
model PROFINET*1 GSDML-V2.35-MitsubishiElectric-FR-E800-SCE-[yyyymmdd].xml
IP67 model PROFINET + PROFIsafe

([yyyymmdd]: revision date)

*1 The file with a revision date of 20221014 or later is compatible.

Mitsubishi Electric FA Global Website:

www.mitsubishielectric.com/fa/products/drv/inv/support/e800/network.html
The download is free at the website above. For details, contact your sales representative.

NOTE
• The GSDML file is used in engineering software. To install the GSDML file properly, refer to the instruction manual of the
applicable engineering software.
• When only PROFINET is used for the safety communication model or the IP67 model, an error occurs if PROFIsafe Telegram
is set. Delete the PROFIsafe Telegram setting, and set Pr.S002 Safety communication function selection to "0 (initial
value)" (safety communication functions disabled).

172 2. Ethernet Communication

2.12 PROFINET
2.12.2 PROFINET configuration 1
 Procedure
The procedure differs depending on the master device and the engineering software used. For details, refer to the Instruction 2
Manual of the master device and the engineering software.

 Before communication
1. Connect each unit with an Ethernet cable. (Refer to page 15.)
3
2. Set "34962" (PROFINET) in any of Pr.1427 to Pr.1430 Ethernet function selection 1 to 4. (Refer to page 173.)
(Example: Pr.1429 = "45238" (CC-Link IE TSN) (initial value) → "34962" (PROFINET)) 4
When Pr.1429 = "45238 (initial value)" (CC-Link IE TSN), change the value to "34962" (PROFINET). When "45238"
is set in any of Pr.1427 to Pr.1430, the priority is given to CC-Link IE TSN, disabling PROFINET.

3. Reset the inverter, or turn OFF and then ON the power. 5

 Network configuration
1. Add the downloaded GSDML file to the engineering software. 6
2. Detect the inverters on the network using the engineering software.

3. Add the detected inverters to the network configuration settings.

7
4. Configure the module settings for the inverters.
Set the device name for each inverter when two or more inverters are connected.

 Checking communication 8
The following table shows the status of the LEDs when communication is established between the programmable controller
and the inverter.
NS MS LINK1 LINK2
9
Solid green Solid green Blinking green*1

*1 The LED on either LINK1 or LINK2 will blink depending on the port (port 1 or 2) the Ethernet cable is connected to. 10
2.12.3 Initial setting for PROFINET
Use the following parameters to perform required settings for Ethernet communication between the inverter and other devices.
To make communication between other devices and the inverter, perform the initial settings of the inverter parameters to match
the communication specifications of the devices. Data communication cannot be made if the initial settings are not made or if
there is any setting error.
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
1427 Ethernet function selection
5001
N630*1 1

1428 Ethernet function selection

45237 502, 5000 to 5002,
N631*1 2
5006 to 5008, 5010 to
Set the application, protocol, etc.
1429 5013, 9999, 34962,
Ethernet function selection
45238 45237, 45238, 61450
N632*1 3

1430 Ethernet function selection

9999
N633*1 4

1426 Link speed and duplex Set the communication speed and the communication mode
0 0 to 4
N641*1 mode selection (full-duplex/half-duplex).

*1 The setting is applied after an inverter reset or next power-ON.

NOTE
• For PROFINET, the IP filtering function (Ethernet) (Pr.1442 to Pr.1448) settings are invalid.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.12 PROFINET
173
  Precautions for PROFINET communication
• For PROFINET, do not change initial values of Pr.1449 to Pr.1454 used to specify the Ethernet IP address range for
command source selection as the IP address is not used. Setting a value other than the initial value in any of the above
parameters may cause an Ethernet communication fault (E.EHR). If the fault occurs, reset the setting of the relevant
parameter to the initial value, or set "9999" in Pr.1432 Ethernet communication check time interval.
• When the device settings (IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway address settings) are inconsistent between the
engineering tool and the connected inverter, "0" is set in Pr.442 to Pr.445, Pr.1434 to Pr.1441 (EEPROM).

 Ethernet function selection (Pr.1427 to Pr.1430)

To select PROFINET for the application, set "34962" (PROFINET) in any of Pr.1427 to Pr.1430 Ethernet function selection
1 to 4. When Pr.1429 = "45238 (initial value)" (CC-Link IE TSN), change the value to "34962" (PROFINET). When "45238" is
set in any of Pr.1427 to Pr.1430, the priority is given to CC-Link IE TSN, disabling PROFINET.

NOTE
• Change the setting if selected communication protocols cannot be used together. (Refer to page 7 and page 226.)

 Communication speed and full-duplex/half-duplex selection (Pr.1426)

Use Pr.1426 Link speed and duplex mode selection to set the communication speed and the full-duplex or half-duplex
system. If the operation is not performed properly in the initial setting (Pr.1426 = "0"), set Pr.1426 according to the
specifications of the connected device.
Communication Full-duplex/half-
Pr.1426 setting Remarks
speed duplex system
The communication speed and the communication mode (half-duplex/full-
Automatic Automatic duplex) are automatically negotiated to ensure the optimum setting. To set
0 (initial value)
negotiation negotiation automatic negotiation, auto negotiation setting is required also in the master
station.
1 100 Mbps Full duplex —
2 100 Mbps Half duplex —
3 10 Mbps Full duplex
The communication speed is fixed at 100 Mbps. Do not set 10 Mbps.
4 10 Mbps Half duplex

2.12.4 Parameters related to PROFINET

The following parameters are used for PROFINET communication. Set the parameters as required.
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
5, 100, 12288 to
13787, 20488,
20489, 24672,
1320 to
User Defined Cyclic 24689, 24698, Users can assign a function to Setpoint Telegram (master to
1329
Communication Input 1 to 9999 24703, 24705, inverter) of Telegram 102.
N810 to
10 Mapping 24707, 24708,
N819*1 24719, 24721, 24728
to 24730
9999 Function disabled
6, 101, 12288 to
13787, 16384 to
16483, 20488,
20489, 20981 to
1330 to
1343 User Defined Cyclic 20990, 20992*2, Users can assign a function to Actual Value Telegram
Communication Output 1 to 9999 24639, 24643, (inverter to master) of Telegram 102.
N850 to
14 Mapping 24644, 24673 to
N863*1
24676, 24692,
24695, 24820,
24826, 24828, 25858
9999 Function disabled
Pr.1389 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the signal number
User Defined Cyclic
0 to 2, 256 to 258, is specified using Pr.1320
1389*1 Communication Input Sub 1 0
512 to 514 Pr.1389 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the signal number
and 2 Mapping
is specified using Pr.1321

174 2. Ethernet Communication

2.12 PROFINET
 Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
Pr.1390 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the signal number
1
User Defined Cyclic
0 to 2, 256 to 258, is specified using Pr.1322
1390*1 Communication Input Sub 3 0
512 to 514 Pr.1390 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the signal number
and 4 Mapping
is specified using Pr.1323
Pr.1391 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the signal number 2
User Defined Cyclic
0 to 2, 256 to 258, is specified using Pr.1324
1391*1 Communication Input Sub 5 0
512 to 514 Pr.1391 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the signal number
and 6 Mapping
is specified using Pr.1325
Pr.1392 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the signal number 3
User Defined Cyclic
0 to 2, 256 to 258, is specified using Pr.1326
1392*1 Communication Input Sub 7 0
512 to 514 Pr.1392 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the signal number
and 8 Mapping
is specified using Pr.1327

User Defined Cyclic

Pr.1393 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the signal number 4
0 to 2, 256 to 258, is specified using Pr.1328
1393*1 Communication Input Sub 9 0
512 to 514 Pr.1393 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the signal number
and 10 Mapping
is specified using Pr.1329
N830 to User Defined Cyclic
Subindices to which the signal numbers are specified using
5
Communication Input Sub 1 0 0 to 2
N839*1 to 10 Mapping
Pr.1320 to Pr.1329

Pr.1394 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the signal number

1394 *1
User Defined Cyclic
Communication Output Sub 0
0 to 2, 256 to 258, is specified using Pr.1330 6
512 to 514 Pr.1394 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the signal number
1 and 2 Mapping
is specified using Pr.1331
Pr.1395 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the signal number

1395*1
User Defined Cyclic
Communication Output Sub 0
0 to 2, 256 to 258, is specified using Pr.1332 7
512 to 514 Pr.1395 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the signal number
3 and 4 Mapping
is specified using Pr.1333
Pr.1396 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the signal number

1396 *1
User Defined Cyclic
Communication Output Sub 0
0 to 2, 256 to 258, is specified using Pr.1334 8
512 to 514 Pr.1396 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the signal number
5 and 6 Mapping
is specified using Pr.1335
Pr.1397 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the signal number

1397*1
User Defined Cyclic
Communication Output Sub 0
0 to 2, 256 to 258, is specified using Pr.1336 9
512 to 514 Pr.1397 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the signal number
7 and 8 Mapping
is specified using Pr.1337
Pr.1398 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the signal number

1398 *1
User Defined Cyclic
Communication Output Sub 0
0 to 2, 256 to 258, is specified using Pr.1338 10
512 to 514 Pr.1398 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the signal number
9 and 10 Mapping
is specified using Pr.1339
N870 to User Defined Cyclic
Subindices to which the signal numbers are specified using
Communication Output Sub 0 0 to 2
N879*1 1 to 10 Mapping
Pr.1330 to Pr.1339

*1 The setting is applied after an inverter reset or next power-ON.

*2 Available for the Ethernet model only.

2.12.5 Data Exchange

 Process Data (Cyclic Data Exchange)
Cyclic data transmission is enabled between the master and the inverter for the command data sent from the master and the
feedback data sent from the inverter.

 Telegram types
Select a telegram type according to the control mode. Users can select communication data using Telegram 102.
Telegram Description Size (words)
1 Standard Telegram 1 (Speed control) 2
100 Telegram 100 (Torque control) 3
Setpoint Telegram: 21
102 Telegram 102 (Custom)
Actual Value Telegram: 29

Which telegram type is used, can be read using PROFIdrive parameter P922

2. Ethernet Communication
2.12 PROFINET
175
 NOTE
• Only one telegram module can be used at a time.

 Data mapping
• Standard Telegram 1
Type IO Data number Name Abbreviation Data length (bit)
Setpoint Telegram 1 Control word 1 STW1 16
(master to inverter) 2 Speed setpoint A NSOLL_A 16
Actual Value Telegram 1 Status word 1 ZSW1 16
(inverter to master) 2 Speed actual value A NIST_A 16

• Telegram 100
Type IO Data number Name Abbreviation Data length (bit)
1 Control word 1 STW1 16
Setpoint Telegram
2 Target torque — 16
(master to inverter)
3 Speed setpoint A NSOLL_A 16
1 Status word 1 ZSW1 16
Actual Value Telegram
2 Actual torque — 16
(inverter to master)
3 Speed actual value A NIST_A 16

• Telegram 102
Data
IO Data Sub index
Type Name length Remarks
number specification
(bit)
Control word 1
1 — 16 Fixed
(STW1)
Pr.1389 (lower 8
2 Pr.1320 32
bits)
Pr.1389 (upper 8
3 Pr.1321 32
bits)
The following signal numbers are selectable.
Pr.1390 (lower 8
4 Pr.1322 32 5: Speed setpoint A (NSOLL_A) (Refer to page
bits)
178.)
Pr.1390 (upper 8 100: Target torque (Refer to page 179.)
5 Pr.1323 32
bits) 12288 to 13787: Inverter Parameters (Refer to
Setpoint Telegram Pr.1391 (lower 8 page 185.)
6 Pr.1324 32
(master to inverter) bits) 20488, 20489: Inverter Control Parameters
Pr.1391 (upper 8 (Refer to page 186.)
7 Pr.1325 32 24639, 24643, 24644, 24673 to 24676, 24692,
bits)
Pr.1392 (lower 8 24695, 24820, 24826, 24828, 25858: CiA402
8 Pr.1326 32 Drive Profile (Refer to page 188.)
bits)
When the data length of the selected signal is
Pr.1392 (upper 8
9 Pr.1327 32 16 bits, only the setting value for the lower 16
bits)
bits is valid.
Pr.1393 (lower 8
10 Pr.1328 32
bits)
Pr.1393 (upper 8
11 Pr.1329 32
bits)

176 2. Ethernet Communication

2.12 PROFINET
 Data
IO Data Sub index
Type Name length Remarks
number specification
(bit) 1
Status word 1
1 — 16 Fixed
(ZSW1)

2 Pr.1330
Pr.1394 (lower 8
bits)
32 2
Pr.1394 (upper 8
3 Pr.1331 32
bits)

4 Pr.1332
Pr.1395 (lower 8
bits)
32 3
Pr.1395 (upper 8 The following signal numbers are selectable.
5 Pr.1333 32 6: Speed actual value A (NIST_A) (Refer to
bits)
page 178.)
6 Pr.1334
Pr.1396 (lower 8
bits)
32 101: Actual torque (Refer to page 179.) 4
12288 to 13787: Inverter Parameters (Refer to
Actual Value Telegram Pr.1396 (upper 8 page 185.)
7 Pr.1335 32
(inverter to master) bits) 16384 to 16483: Monitor Data (Refer to page
8 Pr.1336
Pr.1397 (lower 8
32 186.) 5
bits) 20488, 20489, 20981 to 20990, 20992: Inverter
Pr.1397 (upper 8 Control Parameters (Refer to page 186.)
9 Pr.1337 32
bits) 24672, 24689, 24698, 24703, 24705, 24707,

10 Pr.1338
Pr.1398 (lower 8
32
24708, 24719, 24721, 24728 to 24730: CiA402
Drive Profile (Refer to page 188.)
6
bits)
20992 is available for the Ethernet model only.
Pr.1398 (upper 8
11 Pr.1339 32
bits)
12 Pr.1340 32 7
13 Pr.1341 32
Fixed to "0"
14 Pr.1342 32
15 Pr.1343 32
8
NOTE
• If the same signal number is specified in two or more of Pr.1320 to Pr.1329, the number set in the parameter with the smallest
parameter number is valid. The same number set in the other parameters is regarded as "9999". 9
• When a nonexistent signal number or "9999" is set in Pr.1320 to Pr.1329, the data is not written.
• When a nonexistent signal number or "9999" is set in Pr.1330 to Pr.1343, "0" is read.

10
• Control word 1 (STW1) details
Bit Name Inverter operation
0: OFF
0 ON/OFF
1: ON
0: Output shutoff
1 No Coast Stop/Coast Stop
1: Output shutoff release
0: Emergency stop
2 No Quick Stop/Quick Stop
1: Emergency stop release
0: Disabled
3 Enable/Disable Operation
1: Enabled
4 — Not used (fixed to "0")
0: Acceleration/deceleration stopped
*1 1: Acceleration/deceleration not stopped
5 Acceleration/deceleration interruption Valid during speed control.
Unfreeze/Freeze Ramp Generator Invalid when the start command is OFF or during automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure.
0: NSOLL_A disabled (frequency setting / speed limit value = "0")
6 Enable/Disable Setpoint
1: NSOLL_A enabled
When 20 ms or more elapses after the bit is turned ON, the fault buffer is
7 Fault Acknowledge (0→1) cleared (when the inverter is in a fault status, the protective function is
reset).*2
8 — Not used (fixed to "0")
9 — Not used (fixed to "0")
0: STW1 disabled
10 Control By PLC/No Control By PLC
1: STW1 enabled

2. Ethernet Communication
2.12 PROFINET
177
 Bit Name Inverter operation
Target torque enabled 0: Target torque disabled (torque command = "0")
11
(Device-specific) 1: Target torque enabled (torque command = target torque)
Start command direction selection 0: Forward when NSOLL_A > 0, reverse when NSOLL_A < 0
12
(Device-specific) 1: Reverse when NSOLL_A > 0, forward when NSOLL_A < 0
0: Start command OFF
Home position return/positioning operation start 1: Start command ON
13
(Device-specific) Enabled when both conditions are satisfied: During position control and in
S4 state (page 180)
14, 15 — Not used (fixed to "0")
*1 Specifications differ depending on the date of manufacture of the inverter.

Operation when acceleration/deceleration is interrupted SERIAL

• Interruption by updating the set frequency
• Enabled only during operation with speed commands given □□ 214 ○○○○○○ or earlier
by NSOLL_A
• Set frequency unaffected
• Enabled also during operation with speed commands not □□ 215 ○○○○○○ or later
given by NSOLL_A

*2 E.16 to E.20, E.PE6, E.PE2, E.CPU, E.CMB, E.1, E.5 to E.7, and E.13 are not reset. In this case, take an appropriate corrective action first, and
reset them by power reset or inverter reset.

• Status word 1 (ZSW1) details

Bit Name Inverter operation
0: During stop (Not Ready For Switching On)
0 Ready To Switch On/Not Ready To Switch On
1: During stop (Ready For Switching On)
0: During stop (Not Switched On) (not in standby condition)
1 Ready To Operate/Not Ready To Operate
1: During stop (Switched On) (in standby condition)
Operation Enabled (drive follows setpoint)/ 0: During stop (Operation Disabled)
2
Operation Disabled 1: During operation (Operation Enabled)
0: No fault
3 Fault Present/No Fault
1: Fault state (fault code stored in Fault numbers (P947))
Coast Stop Not Activated/Coast Stop Activated (No
0: During output shutoff
4 OFF2/OFF2)
1: Output shutoff release
(output shutoff)
Quick Stop Not Activated/Quick Stop Activated (No
0: During emergency stop
5 OFF3/OFF3)
1: Emergency stop release
(during emergency stop)
0: During stop (initial state) (Switching On Not Inhibited)
6 Switching On Inhibited/Switching On Not Inhibited
1: During stop (initial state) (Switching On Inhibited)
0: No warning or alarm
7 Warning Present/No Warning
1: Warning or alarm state
8 — Not used (fixed to "0")
0: Operation commands not sent from the controller
9 Control Requested/No Control Requested
1: Operation commands sent from the controller
10 to 15 — Not used (fixed to "0")

• Speed setpoint A (NSOLL_A), Speed actual value A (NIST_A)

Setting the set frequency (speed limit value) and monitoring the output frequency are available. The set frequency and the
output frequency are calculated with the following formula relative to the inverter maximum frequency setting (Pr.1 or
Pr.18). Calculated values are rounded down according to the effective number of digits.
Set frequency (speed limit value) (Hz) = (NSOLL_A / 4000h) × inverter maximum frequency (Pr.1 or Pr.18)
Output frequency (Hz) = (NIST_A / 4000h) × inverter maximum frequency (Pr.1 or Pr.18)
Item Description
Data type N2
-32768 (8000h) to 32767 (7FFFh)
Range*1*2 (-200% to 199.99%)
Reference 16384 (4000h) = inverter maximum frequency (Pr.1 or Pr.18)
Plus: forward rotation
Sign*2 Minus: reverse rotation

*1 When the calculation result is larger than 590 Hz, the value is applied to the set frequency.

178 2. Ethernet Communication

2.12 PROFINET
 *2 Use Pr.290 to enable display of negative numbers during monitoring. For details, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).

NOTE 1
• When the target torque is assigned to Telegram 100 or Telegram 102, use bit 12 of STW1 to select the start command
direction. The input to NSOLL_A is treated as an absolute value.
• When the HMS PROFINET network option A8NPRT is installed in the FR-A800 or FR-F800 inverter, Pr.3 Base frequency is
used as reference. In the network configuration that includes the above, consider the difference of the reference value. 2

• Target torque, Actual torque 3

The rated torque is regarded as 100%. Setting is available in 1% increments and monitoring is available in 0.1%
increments.
Target torque is clamped at -400% and 400%. The value is set in Pr.805 (1000% reference) (RAM). 4
The motor torque (monitor code: 07h) is read for Actual torque.

NOTE 5
• To use the torque command in Telegram 102, select 100 (Target torque) instead of 13093 (Pr.805).

10

2. Ethernet Communication
2.12 PROFINET
179
  State transition diagram of the inverter
Power supply ON
(0)

S1: Switching On Inhibited

(ZSW1 bit 6 = true
bit 0, 1, 2 = false)
Standstill detected or
Coast Stop Disable Operation
(1) (STW1 bit 1 = false) (STW1 bit 3 = false)
OFF and
No Coast Stop and Coast Stop or
No Quick Stop Quick Stop (15)
(STW1 bit 0 = false and (STW1 bit 1 = false or
bit 1 = true and bit 2 = false) S5: Switching Off
bit 2 = true) (6) (ZSW1 bit 0, 1 = true
bit 2, 6 = false) (14)
Coast Stop or S2: Ready For Switching On
Quick Stop ZSW1 S5-2: quick stop
(STW1 bit 1 = false or bit 0 = true Standstill detected or
bit 2 = false) bit 1, 2, 6 = false Disable Operation Quick Stop
(STW1 bit 3 = false) (STW1 bit 2 = false)
(2) OFF
ON OFF
(STW1 bit 0 = true) (STW1 bit 0 = false)
(5) (STW1 bit 0
(11) (12) = false) (20)
S3: Switched On (19)
(7)
ZSW1 S5-1: ramp stop S5-3: fault stop
bit 0, 1 = true
bit 2, 6 = false (18)

(3) Disable Operation ON

Enable Operation (STW1 bit 3 = false) (STW1 bit 0 (9) (17)
(STW1 bit 3 = true) (4) = true)
(13)
Coast Stop OFF
S4: Operation (STW1 bit 0 ON
(STW1 bit 1 = false) (8)
ZSW1 = false) (STW1 bit 0
bit 0, 1, 2 = true = true)
bit 6 = false

(16)
(10) Quick Stop
(STW1 bit 2 = false)

• Definition
Inverter operation
Symbol Name Description
Other than position control Position control*2
*1 Switching On Inhibited During stop (initial status) Output shutoff (RY signal OFF)
S1
S2 Ready For Switching On During stop (ready) Output shutoff (RY signal OFF)
S3 Switched On During stop (standby) Output shutoff canceled (RY signal ON)*3
Start command ON (rotation
S4*4 Operation During operation (enabled) direction depends on STW1 and Servo-ON status
NSOLL_A settings)
S5 Switching Off Deceleration stop —
Servo-OFF status
Start command OFF, normal
S5-1 ramp stop Normal deceleration stop Start command OFF, output
deceleration stop
shutoff
Start command OFF,
deceleration stop according to Servo-OFF status
S5-2 quick stop Emergency stop the Pr.1103 and Pr.815 Start command OFF, output
shutoff
settings*5
Deceleration stop due to a
S5-3 fault stop Deceleration stop due to a communication error (Pr.502 = "1 or 2")
communication error
*1 The inverter state is forcefully changed to S1 when any of the following conditions is met:
When an inverter fault occurs
Mode other than Network operation mode
During commercial power supply operation during emergency drive
Master is in the stop state while the inverter is running.

180 2. Ethernet Communication

2.12 PROFINET
 *2 During position control, the servo ON/OFF status is switched along with state transition. The LX signal input using Inverter Control Parameters
(P20488 and P20489) (page 186) is disabled.
*3 When the output is shut off by the MRS signal or other signal, the RY signal remains OFF. 1
*4 The inverter state is forcefully changed to S4 during emergency drive operation.
*5 For details of Pr.1103 and Pr.815, refer to the Instruction Manual (Function).

• Transition No. 2
Symbol Description Remarks
(0) Power supply ON

(1) OFF command from the master

When the master is not the operation command source, 3
status transition will not occur.
(2) ON command from the master
When the inverter is not in the drive enabled state,
(3) Enable operation command from the master
status transition will not occur. 4
Even when the RY signal turns OFF, status transition
(4) Disable operation command from the master will occur. (Servo-ON status is canceled and the start
command is turned OFF.)
(5) OFF command from the master 5
Coast stop command from the master
(6)
Quick stop command from the master

(7)
Coast stop command from the master
Quick stop command from the master
6
(8) Coast stop command from the master
(9) OFF command from the master
(10) Quick stop command from the master 7
Motor stop
(11)
Disable operation command from the master
(12) Quick stop command from the master
(13) ON command from the master 8
Status transition will occur even while the master is in
(14) Motor stop
the stop state.
(15) Coast stop command from the master
Process data communication interrupted (Pr.502 = "1
9
(16)
or 2")
(17) Process data communication restarted (Pr.502 = "2")

(18)
Process data communication interrupted (Pr.502 = "1
or 2")
10
(19) Process data communication restarted (Pr.502 = "2")
When the process data communication with the master
(20) Quick stop command from the master (Pr.502 = "1")
is not restarted, status transition will not occur.

NOTE
• Depending on packets sent to the inverter while the master is in the stop state, the inverter state may not be changed to S1.
The run/stop state is determined by IOCS of the packet sent from the master to the inverter (Good (80h): run, Bad (60h): stop).
When the following master is used, the above-mentioned operation is performed in the stop state.

Manufacturer Model Version

CPU: 1511F-1 PN
SIEMENS SIMATIC S7-1500 Product number: 6ES7511-1FK02-0AB0
Firmware version: V 02.05.02

2. Ethernet Communication
2.12 PROFINET
181
 • Command and control word 1 (STW1) combinations
STW1
Transition
Command Bit 3 (Enable Bit 2 (No Bit 1 (No Operation
Bit 0 (ON) No.
Operation) Quick Stop) Coast Stop)
OFF — 1 1 0 Transition to S2 (1)
ON — 1 1 1 Transition to S3 (2)
Enable operation 1 1 1 1 Operation (3)
Disable operation 0 1 1 1 Stop (4)
Emergency stop (deceleration
Quick stop — 0 — — (6), (7)
stop)
Output shutoff (coasting to
Coast stop — — 0 — (6), (7)
stop)

Example) 50 Hz forward rotation command from the master to the inverter

STW1 = 1135 (046Fh)
b15 b0
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1

NSOLL_A = (5000 (50 Hz) × 16384 (4000h)) / 12000 (Pr.1 = 120 Hz) = 6827 (1AABh)

 Drive Profile Parameters (Acyclic Data Exchange)

PNU numbers 0 to 65535 are assigned to parameters used for PROFINET: PROFIdrive parameters, PROFINET parameters,
inverter parameters, monitor data, inverter control parameters, and CiA402 drive profile.
Item Name Setting value
API number API_No 3A00h
Slot number Slot_No 1h
Subslot number SubSlot_No 1h
Index Index 2Fh

182 2. Ethernet Communication

2.12 PROFINET
 PROFIdrive Parameters
The following parameters are implemented.
1
Group PNU Name Access Data Type Description
Selection switch Array[n]
P915 R Holds the configuration of the Setpoint Telegram.
Setpoint telegram Unsigned16
Selection switch Actual Array[n] 2
P916 R Holds the configuration of the Actual value Telegram.
value telegram Unsigned16
Initial value: Standard Telegram 1
P922 Telegram Selection R Unsigned16

P944 Fault message counter R Unsigned16

Reflects the latest accepted configuration data from the master.
Incremented by 1 when Fault numbers (P947) is changed.
3
Holds up to eight fault codes which occurred after the power is
Array[8]
P947 Fault numbers R turned ON. When the ninth fault occurs, the eighth fault is
Unsigned16
overwritten by the new data.
Manufacturer ID: 021Ch (Mitsubishi Electric)
4
Drive unit type: 0
Array[5]
P964 Drive Unit identification R Version (software): xxyy (decimal)
Unsigned16
PROFIdrive parameter

Firmware date (year): 0000 (unsupported)

Firmware date (day/month): 0000 (unsupported)
5
Profile identification Byte 0: 3 (PROFIdrive profile)
P965 R Octetstring2
number Byte 1: 42 (Version 4.2)
P967
P968
STW1
ZSW
R
R
V2
V2
Last control word received from the controller.
Current status word received from the inverter.
6
P972 Drive reset R/W Unsigned16 Writing "2" and then "1" resets the inverter.
Manufacturer ID: 021Ch (Mitsubishi Electric)
Drive object type: 0 7
Version (software): xxyy (decimal)
Array[8] Firmware date (year): 0000 (unsupported)
P975 DO identification R
Unsigned16 Firmware date (day/month): 0000 (unsupported)
PROFIdrive DO type class: 1 (Axis)
PROFIdrive DO sub class 1: 1 (Application Class 1 supported)
8
Drive Object ID (DO-ID): 1 (Number of Drive Objects (DO))
All the supported PNU numbers are saved in the subindices. Arrays

P980
Parameter Database
Handling and R
Array[n]
are assigned in the following order: PROFIdrive parameters,
PROFINET parameters, inverter parameters, monitor data, inverter
9
Unsigned16
Identification control parameters, and CiA402 drive profile. The first parameter of
the list of PNU numbers is marked by a subindex with the value "0".

10
CiA402 drive profile Inverter control parameter Monitor data Inverter parameter

P12288
Array[n] The inverter parameter number + 12288 (3000h) is the PNU
to Inverter Parameters R/W
Unsigned16 number.
P16383

P16384
to Monitor Data R Unsigned16 The monitor code + 16384 (4000h) is the PNU number.
P20479

P20480
Inverter Control
to R/W Unsigned16 Inverter control parameter
Parameters
P24575

P24576
to CiA402 Drive Profile R/W — CiA402 drive profile
P28671

2. Ethernet Communication
2.12 PROFINET
183
 Group PNU Name Access Data Type Description
P61000 Name of station R Octetstring240 Station name of device
PROFINET parameter

P61001 IP address R Octetstring4 Current IP address

P61002 MAC address R Octetstring6 MAC address
P61003 Gateway R Octetstring4 Current gateway address

P61004 Subnet mask R Octetstring4 Current subnet mask

• Selection switch Setpoint telegram, Selection switch Actual value telegram (P915/P916)
PNU Sub Access Name Data Type Description Default
Selection switch Array[n] Setpoint data assigned to the cyclic data is
915 0 to n R —
Setpoint telegram Unsigned16 sent back.
Selection switch Array[n] Actual value data assigned to the cyclic data
916 0 to n R —
Actual value telegram Unsigned16 is sent back.
Details of the read values are as follows.
Signal number Description
1 Control word 1 (STW1)
2 Status word 1 (ZSW1)
5 Speed setpoint A (NSOLL_A)
6 Speed actual value A (NIST_A)
100 Target torque
101 Actual torque
12288 to 16383 Inverter Parameters
16384 to 20479 Monitor Data
20480 to 24575 Inverter Control Parameters
24576 to 28671 CiA402 Drive Profile

• Telegram Selection (P922)

PNU Sub Access Name Data Type Description Default
922 0 R Telegram selection Unsigned16 The selected telegram is sent back. 1
Details of the read values are as follows.
Value Description
1 Standard Telegram 1
100 Telegram 100
102 Telegram 102

• Fault message counter (P944)

PNU Sub Access Name Data Type Description Default
The value of Fault message counter is sent
Fault message
944 0 R Unsigned16 back. This value is incremented when an 0
counter
inverter fault occurs.

• Fault numbers (P947)

PNU Sub Access Name Data Type Description Default
Displays up to eight inverter fault codes for
Array[8] the faults which occurred after the power is
947 0 to 7 R Fault numbers 0
Unsigned16 turned ON. While no fault occurs, "0" is read
for P947.0 to 7.

• Drive Unit identification (P964)

184 2. Ethernet Communication

2.12 PROFINET
The inverter identification information is sent back.
PNU Sub Access Name Data Type Description Default 1
Manufacturer ID:
0 540
Manufacturer ID of Mitsubishi Electric
Drive Unit Array[5]
964 1 R Device type 0

2
identification Unsigned16
Firmware version:
—
2
Inverter firmware version

• Profile identification number (P965) 3

PNU Sub Access Name Data Type Description Default
0 Profile identification Profile Number 3 03h
965 R Octetstring2
1 number Profile Version Number 42 2Ah 4
• STW1, ZSW1 (P967/P968)
Refer to details on the control word 1 (STW1) (page 177) and the status word 1 (ZSW1) (page 178). 5
• Drive reset (P972)
PNU Sub Access Name Data Type Description Default 6
0: Initial status (or status after a reset)
1: Power-on Reset (initiation)
972 0 R/W Drive reset Unsigned16 2: Power-on Reset (preparation) 0
The value "0" is read-only. Writing "2" and 7
then "1" resets the inverter.

• DO identification (P975) 8
The drive object identification information is sent back.
PNU Sub Access Name Data Type Description Default

0
Manufacturer ID:
Manufacturer ID of Mitsubishi Electric
540 9
1 Drive Object type 0
Firmware version:
2
Array[8]
Inverter firmware version
—
10
975 R DO identification PROFIdrive DO type class
5 Unsigned16 1
1: Axis
PROFIdrive DO sub class 1
6 1
1: Application Class 1 supported
Drive Object ID (DO-ID)
7 1
Number of Drive Objects(DO)

• Parameter Database Handling and Identification (P980)

PNU Sub Access Name Data Type Description Default
All supported PNU numbers are listed in the
Parameter Database following order: PROFIdrive parameters,
Array[n]
980 0 to n R Handling and PROFINET parameters, inverter —
Unsigned16
Identification parameters, monitor data, inverter control
parameters, and CiA402 drive profile.
Among the PNU numbers specified in the subindices, up to 117 numbers are shown. (Number of elements (234 max.) /
Unsigned16 (2 bytes))
When "1" is set in the subindex and "3" is set for the number of elements, P916, P922, and P944 are displayed.

• Inverter Parameters (P12288 to P16383)

PNU Sub Access Name Data Type Description Default
12288 to Array[n] The inverter parameter number + 12288
0, 1 R/W Inverter Parameters —
16383 Unsigned16 (3000h) is the PNU number.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.12 PROFINET
185
 Calibration parameters
PNU Sub Name Description
0 Data C0 (Pr.900)
13188 (3384h)
1 Sub Data —
0 Data C1 (Pr.901)
13189 (3385h)
1 Sub Data —
0 Data C2 (Pr.902)
13190 (3386h)
1 Sub Data C3 (Pr.902)
0 Data 125 (Pr.903)
13191 (3387h)
1 Sub Data C4 (Pr.903)
0 Data C5 (Pr.904)
13192 (3388h)
1 Sub Data C6 (Pr.904)
0 Data 126 (Pr.905)
13193 (3389h)
1 Sub Data C7 (Pr.905)
0 Data C12 (Pr.917)
13205 (3395h)*1
1 Sub Data C13 (Pr.917)
0 Data C14 (Pr.918)
13206 (3396h)*1
1 Sub Data C15 (Pr.918)
0 Data C16 (Pr.919)
13207 (3397h)*1
1 Sub Data C17 (Pr.919)
0 Data C18 (Pr.920)
13208 (3398h)*1
1 Sub Data C19 (Pr.920)
0 Data C38 (Pr.932)
13220 (33A4h)
1 Sub Data C39 (Pr.932)
0 Data C40 (Pr.933)
13221 (33A5h)
1 Sub Data C41 (Pr.933)
0 Data C42 (Pr.934)
13222 (33A6h)
1 Sub Data C43 (Pr.934)
0 Data C44 (Pr.935)
13223 (33A7h)
1 Sub Data C45 (Pr.935)

*1 Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.

For the numbers and names of inverter parameters, refer to the parameter list of the Instruction Manual (Function).

NOTE
• Set 65520 (FFF0h) as a parameter value "8888" and 65535 (FFFFh) as "9999".
• When parameter write is performed, data are written to RAM for Cyclic Data Exchange. Writing to EEPROM or RAM is selected
according to the setting in Pr.342 Communication EEPROM write selection for Acyclic Data Exchange.

• Monitor Data (P16384 to P20479)

PNU Sub Access Name Data Type Description Default
16384 to The monitor code + 16384 (4000h) is the
0 R Monitor Data Unsigned16 —
20479 PNU number.
For details of the monitor codes and monitor items, refer to the description of Pr.52 in the Instruction Manual (Function).

NOTE
• Display of negative numbers during monitoring set in Pr.290 Monitor negative output selection is disabled.
• The display can be changed from the frequency to rotations per minute (machine speed) using Pr.53. When the machine
speed is displayed, the value is incremented by one.

• Inverter Control Parameters (P20480 to P24575)

PNU Sub Access Name Data Type Description Default
20480 to Inverter Control
0 R/W Unsigned16 Inverter control parameter —
24575 Parameters

186 2. Ethernet Communication

2.12 PROFINET
 PNU Name Access Description

20482 (5002h)*1 Inverter reset R/W

Set 9966h for the written value.
The read value is fixed to 0000h.
1
Set 965Ah for the written value.
20483 (5003h)*1 Parameter clear R/W
The read value is fixed to 0000h.

20484 (5004h)*1 All parameter clear R/W

Set 99AAh for the written value.
The read value is fixed to 0000h.
2
Set 5A96h for the written value.
20486 (5006h)*1 Parameter clear*2 R/W
The read value is fixed to 0000h.

20487 (5007h)*1 All parameter clear*2 R/W

Set AA99h for the written value.
The read value is fixed to 0000h.
3
Inverter status / control input command
20488 (5008h) R/W Refer to page 187.
(extended)*3
20489 (5009h) Inverter status / control input command*3 R/W Refer to page 187. 4
20981 (51F5h) Fault record 1 R/W
20982 (51F6h) Fault record 2 R
20983 (51F7h) Fault record 3 R Being 2 bytes in length, the data is stored as "00○○h".
Refer to the lowest 1 byte for the error code. (For
5
20984 (51F8h) Fault record 4 R
details on error codes, refer to the list of fault displays
20985 (51F9h) Fault record 5 R
in the Instruction Manual (Maintenance).)
20986 (51FAh) Fault record 6 R
20987 (51FBh) Fault record 7 R
The fault history is batch-cleared by writing to 20981
(51F5h). 6
20988 (51FCh) Fault record 8 R Set any value as data.
20989 (51FDh) Fault record 9 R
20990 (51FEh) Fault record 10 R
7
20992 (5200h)*4 Safety input status R Refer to page 188.
*1 Not available for Cyclic Data Exchange.
*2 Settings in the communication parameters are not cleared.
*3 The data is written as a control input command for writing. 8
The data is read as the inverter status for reading.
*4 Parameter setting is available for the Ethernet model only. Access to the parameter using Acyclic Data Exchange is allowed for the safety
communication model and the IP67 model, but the function is disabled.
9
Inverter status / control input command, and inverter status / control input command (extended)
Inverter status / control input command Inverter status / control input command (extended)

Bit
Definition
Bit
Definition 10
Control input command Inverter status Control input command Inverter status
0 — RUN (Inverter running)*2 0 NET X1 (—)*1 NET Y1 (0)*2
1 — During forward rotation 1 NET X2 (—)*1 NET Y2 (0)*2
*1
2 — During reverse rotation 2 NET X3 (—) NET Y3 (0)*2
RH (High-speed operation
3 Up to frequency 3 NET X4 (—)*1 NET Y4 (0)*2
command)*1
RM (Middle-speed operation
4 Overload alarm 4 NET X5 (—)*1 0
command)*1
RL (Low-speed operation
5 0 5 — 0
command)*1
FU (Output frequency
6 JOG operation selection 2 6 — 0
detection)*2
7 Second function selection ABC (Fault)*2 7 — 0
8 Terminal 4 input selection *2 8 — 0
ABC2 (0)
9 — Safety monitor output 2 9 — 0
10 MRS (Output stop)*1 0 10 — 0
11 — 0 11 — 0
12 RES (—)*1 0 12 — 0
13 — 0 13 — 0
14 — 0 14 — 0
15 — Fault occurrence 15 — 0
*1 The signal within parentheses ( ) is assigned in the initial status. The function changes depending on the setting of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (Input
terminal function selection).
For details, refer to the description of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) in the Instruction Manual (Function).
The signals assigned to the input terminals may be valid or invalid in the NET operation mode. (Refer to the Instruction Manual (Function).)

2. Ethernet Communication
2.12 PROFINET
187
 *2 The signal within parentheses ( ) is assigned in the initial status. The function changes depending on the setting of Pr.190 to Pr.197 (Output
terminal function selection).
For details, refer to the description of Pr.190 to Pr.197 (Output terminal function selection) in the Instruction Manual (Function).

Safety input status

Bit Definition
0: Terminal S1 ON
0
1: Terminal S1 OFF (output shutoff)
0: Terminal S2 ON
1
1: Terminal S2 OFF (output shutoff)
2 to 15 0

• CiA402 Drive Profile (P24576 to P28671)

PNU Sub Name Description Access Data type
Error number
The error code of the latest fault that occurred after power-ON or an
inverter reset is returned.
When no fault occurs, no error is returned.
24639 When the fault history is cleared during occurrence of a fault, no
0 Error code R Unsigned16
(603Fh) error is returned.
The upper eight bits are fixed to FF, and the lower eight bits
represent the error code. (FFXXh: "XX" represents the error code.)
(For details on error codes, refer to the list of fault displays in the
Instruction Manual (Maintenance).)
Output frequency (r/min)*1
24643 The output frequency is read in r/min.
0 vl velocity demand R Integer16
(6043h) Monitoring range: -32768 (8000h) to 32767 (7FFFh)
When Pr.81 = "9999", the number of motor poles is regarded as 4.
Operation speed (r/min)*1
24644 vl velocity actual The operation speed is read in r/min.
0 R Integer16
(6044h) value Monitoring range: -32768 (8000h) to 32767 (7FFFh)
When Pr.81 = "9999", the number of motor poles is regarded as 4.
24672
0 Modes of operation Control mode: -1 (vendor specific operation mode) (fixed) R/W Integer8
(6060h)
24673 Modes of operation
0 Current control mode: -1 (vendor specific operation mode) (fixed) R Integer8
(6061h) display
24674 Position demand Position command (pulse)
0 R Integer32
(6062h) value The position command before the electronic gear operation is read.
24675 Position actual Current position (pulse)
0 R Integer32
(6063h) internal value The current position after the electronic gear operation is read.
24676 Position actual Current position (pulse)
0 R Integer32
(6064h) value The current position before the electronic gear operation is read.
24689
Function disabled
(6071h)
24692 Torque demand value (%)
0 Torque demand R Integer16
(6074h) The torque command is read.
24695 Torque actual value (%)
0 Torque actual value R Integer16
(6077h) The motor torque is read.
Target position (pulse)
Set the target position in the direct command mode.
24698 Initial value: 0
0 Target position R/W Integer32
(607Ah) Setting range: -2147483647 to 2147483647
(For the direct command mode, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).)
Maximum profile speed (r/min)
24703
0 Max profile velocity Set Pr.18 High speed maximum frequency in r/min. R/W Unsigned32
(607Fh)
Setting range: 0 to 590 Hz
Profile speed (r/min)
Set the maximum speed in the direct command mode.
24705 Initial value: 0
0 Profile velocity R/W Unsigned32
(6081h) Setting range: 0 to (120 × 590 Hz / Pr.81)
(For the direct command mode, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).)

188 2. Ethernet Communication

2.12 PROFINET
 PNU Sub Name Description Access Data type
Acceleration time constant (ms)
<Position control>
1
Set the acceleration time in the direct command mode.
Initial value: 5000
Setting range: 10 to 360000
The last digit is rounded off. (For example, 1358 ms becomes 1350 2
ms.)
24707
0 Profile acceleration (For the direct command mode, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction R/W Unsigned32
(6083h)
Manual (Function).)
<Other than position control> 3
Set Pr.7 Acceleration time in ms.
Setting range: 0 to 3600 s
The last two digits are rounded off when Pr.21 Acceleration/
deceleration time increments = "0", and the last digit is rounded
off when Pr.21 = "1".
4
Deceleration time constant (ms)
<Position control>
Set the deceleration time in the direct command mode.
Initial value: 5000
5
Setting range: 10 to 360000
The last digit is rounded off. (For example, 1358 ms becomes 1350
24708
0 Profile deceleration
ms.)
(For the direct command mode, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction R/W Unsigned32 6
(6084h)
Manual (Function).)
<Other than position control>
Set Pr.8 Deceleration time in ms.
Setting range: 0 to 3600 s 7
The last two digits are rounded off when Pr.21 Acceleration/
deceleration time increments = "0", and the last digit is rounded
off when Pr.21 = "1".

—
Position encoder
Encoder resolution (machine side / motor side) — —
8
resolution
Highest sub-index
0 Maximum value of subindex: 02h (fixed) R Unsigned8
24719 supported
(608Fh)
Encoder
Encoder resolution 9
1 Set Pr.369 Number of encoder pulses. R/W Unsigned32
increments
Setting range: 2 to 4096
2 Motor revolutions Motor speed (rev): 00000001h (fixed) R/W Unsigned32
— Gear ratio Gear ratio — — 10
Highest sub-index
0 Maximum value of subindex: 02h (fixed) R Unsigned8
supported
Motor shaft revolutions*2
1 Motor revolutions Set Pr.420 Command pulse scaling factor numerator R/W Unsigned32
24721
(electronic gear numerator).
(6091h)
Setting range: 1 to 32767
Drive shaft revolutions*2
2 Shaft revolutions Set Pr.421 Command pulse multiplication denominator R/W Unsigned32
(electronic gear denominator).
Setting range: 1 to 32767
Home position return method
Set the home position return method in the direct command
24728
(6098h)
0 Homing method mode.*3 R/W Integer8
(For the direct command mode and the home position return
method, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
— Homing speeds Home position return speed — —
Highest sub-index
0 Maximum value of subindex: 01h (fixed) R Unsigned8
supported
24729 Motor speed during home position returning (r/min)
(6099h) Set the home position return speed in the direct command mode.
Speed during Initial value: 120 × 2 Hz / Pr.81
1 R/W Unsigned32
search for switch Setting range: 0 to (120 × 400 Hz / Pr.81)
(For the direct command mode, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).)

2. Ethernet Communication
2.12 PROFINET
189
 PNU Sub Name Description Access Data type
Home position return acceleration/deceleration time (ms)
Set the home position return acceleration/deceleration time in the
direct command mode.
Initial value: 5000
24730 Homing
0 Setting range: 10 to 360000 R/W Unsigned32
(609Ah) acceleration
The last digit is rounded off. (For example, 1358 ms becomes 1350
ms.)
(For the direct command mode, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).)
24820 Following error Droop pulse (pulse)
0 R Integer32
(60F4h) actual value The droop pulse before the electronic gear operation is read.
24826
0 Control effort Speed command after position loop*1 R Integer32
(60FAh) The ideal speed command is read.
24828 Position demand Position command (pulse)
0 R Integer32
(60FCh) internal value The position command after the electronic gear operation is read.
25858 Supported drive Supported control mode: 00010000h (vendor specific operation
0 R Unsigned32
(6502h) modes mode)
*1 The value is displayed and set in r/min regardless of the settings in Pr.53.
The frequency is converted to the rotation speed for reading, and the setting value is converted to the frequency for writing.
*2 When parameter write is performed, data are written to RAM for Cyclic Data Exchange. Writing to EEPROM or RAM is selected according to the
setting in Pr.342 Communication EEPROM write selection for Acyclic Data Exchange.
*3 The following table shows home position return methods corresponding to P24728 (6098h) setting values.

P24728 (6098h) setting Home position return method

-3 Data set type
-4 Stopper type (home position return direction: position pulse increasing direction)
-5 (initial value) Ignoring the home position (servo ON position as the home position)
-7 Count type with front end reference (home position return direction: position pulse increasing direction)
-36 Stopper type (home position return direction: position pulse decreasing direction)
-39 Count type with front end reference (home position return direction: position pulse decreasing direction)
-65 Stopper type (home position return direction: start command direction)
-66 Count type with front end reference (home position return direction: start command direction)

NOTE
• The command interface in the Network operation mode is determined by the Pr.550 NET mode operation command source
selection setting. (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
• When the data is read, the value is displayed with a sign regardless of the Pr.290 Monitor negative output selection setting.

• Name of station (P61000)

PNU Sub Access Name Data Type Description Default
FR-E800-
61000 0 to 239 R Name of station Octetstring240 Device name
(SC)E

• IP address (P61001)
PNU Sub Access Name Data Type Description Default
0 IP address first octet —
1 IP address second octet —
61001 R IP address Octetstring4
2 IP address third octet —
3 IP address fourth octet —

• MAC address (P61002)

PNU Sub Access Name Data Type Description Default
0 MAC address (upper) —
1 MAC address —
2 MAC address —
61002 R MAC address Octetstring6
3 MAC address —
4 MAC address —
5 MAC address (lower) —

190 2. Ethernet Communication

2.12 PROFINET
 • Gateway (P61003)
PNU Sub Access Name Data Type Description Default 1
0 Gateway address first octet —
1 Gateway address second octet —
61003 R Gateway Octetstring4
2 Gateway address third octet —
3 Gateway address fourth octet — 2

• Subnet mask (P61004)

PNU Sub Access Name Data Type Description Default
3
0 Subnet mask first octet 255
1 Subnet mask second octet 255
61004
2
R Subnet mask Octetstring4
Subnet mask third octet 255 4
3 Subnet mask fourth octet 0

 PROFIdrive parameter request format (master to inverter) 5

Parameter Parameter
Byte No. Field Description
read change
0 Request reference Determined by the setting in the master ○ ○ 6
Parameter read: 01h
1 Request ID ○ ○
Header Parameter change: 02h
2
3
DO-ID
Number of parameters
01h
01h
○
○
○
○
7
4 Attribute 10h ○ ○
Determined by the number of arrays (234
5 Number of elements (n)
max.)
0 or 1 for data types other than array or
○ ○ 8
Parameter octetstring
address
6 ○ ○
7
PNU number
Refer to page 183.
○ ○ 9
8 ○ ○
Sub-index
9 ○ ○
Data Type
10 Format
Unsigned16: 06h
× ○
10
Octetstring: 0Ah
V2: 73h
11 Number of data Number of arrays × ○
Parameter value 12 × ○
13 × ○
14 to 237 Parameter value Parameter writing value × ○*1
238 × ○*1
239 × ○*1
*1 Availability depends on the format or data size.

 PROFIdrive parameter response format (inverter to master)

Parameter read Parameter change
Byte No. Field Description
Positive Negative Positive Negative
Determined by the setting in the
0 Request reference ○ ○ ○ ○
master
Parameter read (positive): 01h
Parameter change (positive): 02h
1 Request ID Parameter read (negative): 81h ○ ○ ○ ○
Header
Parameter change (negative): 82h
Request ID fault: 80h
2 DO-ID 01h ○ ○ ○ ○
Number of
3 01h ○ ○ ○ ○
parameters

2. Ethernet Communication
2.12 PROFINET
191
 Parameter read Parameter change
Byte No. Field Description
Positive Negative Positive Negative
Data Type
Unsigned16: 06h
4 Format Octetstring: 0Ah ○ ○ × ○
V2: 73h
44h for error response
5 Number of data Number of arrays ○ ○ × ○
6 ○ ○ × ○
Parameter
value 7 ○ ○ × ○
8 ○*1 × × ×
9 Parameter value / Parameter reading value or error ○*1 × × ×
error number number
10 to 237 ○*1 × × ×
238 ○*1 × × ×
239 ○*1 × × ×
*1 Availability depends on the format or data size.

 Error number
Error No. Name Description
00h Impermissible parameter number Access is attempted to a nonexistent PROFIdrive parameter.
01h Parameter value cannot be changed Writing is attempted to a writing-disabled PROFIdrive parameter.
02h Low or high limit exceeded Setting is out of range.
03h Faulty subindex Access is attempted to a nonexistent subindex.
Access is attempted to a PROFIdrive parameter which does not have a
04h No array
subindex.
05h Incorrect data type Data type does not match.
Request cannot be executed because of
11h Access is disabled temporarily due to the operating status.
operating state
16h Parameter address impermissible Value, number of elements, or PNU number is invalid for the subindex.
17h Illegal format PROFIdrive parameter data format is invalid.
19h Axis/DO nonexistent Access is attempted to a nonexistent shaft or object.
21h Service not supported Service is out of range. (Request ID is invalid.)
23h Multi parameter access not supported Access is attempted to multiple parameters at the same time.

 Programming examples
The following explains the programming examples for controlling the inverter with sequence programs when Standard
Telegram 1 is selected.
Check that "34962" (PROFINET) is set in any of Pr.1427 to Pr.1430 (Ethernet function selection).

192 2. Ethernet Communication

2.12 PROFINET
 Programming example for forward rotation operation at 50 Hz
• Network setting and device examples
1
Device name Description
M0 Inverter forward rotation
D0.0
D109
DataExchangeStartRequest
Control word 1 (STW1)
2
D109.0 ON/OFF
D109.1 No Coast Stop/Coast Stop
D109.2 No Quick Stop/Quick Stop 3
D109.3 Enable/Disable Operation
D109.4 —
D109.5 Unfreeze/Freeze Ramp Generator
D109.6 Enable/Disable Setpoint
4
D109.7 Fault Acknowledge
D109.8 —
D109.9 — 5
D109.A Control By PLC/No Control By PLC
D109.B Target torque enabled
D109.C Start command direction selection
D109.D to D109.F — 6
D110 Speed setpoint A (NSOLL_A)
D111 Status word 1 (ZSW1)
D111.0 Ready To Switch On/Not Ready To Switch On 7
D111.1 Ready To Operate/Not Ready To Operate
D111.2 Operation Enabled (drive follows setpoint)/Operation Disabled
D111.3 Fault Present/No Fault
D111.4 Coast Stop Not Activated/Coast Stop Activated 8
D111.5 Quick Stop Not Activated/Quick Stop Activated
D111.6 Switching On Inhibited/Switching On Not Inhibited
D111.7 Warning Present/No Warning
9
D111.8 —
D111.9 Control Requested/No Control Requested
D111.A to D111.F —
D112 Speed actual value A (NIST_A) 10
Programming example for state transition from S1 (Switching On Inhibited) to S3 (Switched On) (For the state transition
diagram, refer to page 180.)
• Set frequency: Speed setpoint A (NSOLL_A)
NSOLL_A = (5000 (50 Hz) × 16384 (4000h)) / 12000 (Pr.1 = 120 Hz) = 6826 (1AAAh)

Turning ON M0 starts operation at 50 Hz.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.12 PROFINET
193
 Turning OFF M0 stops operation.

K6826

 Setting example
• The following tables show example settings when user defined cyclic communication data are selected (Telegram 102).
When bit 10 of Control word 1 (STW1) is turned ON, data are written to the inverter. While bit 10 of Control word 1 (STW1)
is ON, the data is always updated. (The response time to write the data is 100 ms at the most.)
• Telegram 102
Type IO Data number Name
1 Control word 1 (STW1)
Setpoint Telegram 2 Pr.1320
(master to inverter) 3 Pr.1321
4 Pr.1322
1 Status word 1 (ZSW1)
2 Pr.1330
3 Pr.1331
Actual Value Telegram
4 Pr.1332
(inverter to master)
5 Pr.1333
6 Pr.1334
7 Pr.1335

194 2. Ethernet Communication

2.12 PROFINET
 • Parameters
Pr. Name Setting example Remarks 1
User Defined Cyclic
1320 Communication Input 1 5 (5h) Speed setpoint A (NSOLL_A)
Mapping
User Defined Cyclic
P.7 Acceleration time 2
1321 Communication Input 2 12295 (3007h)
7 (0007h) + 12288 (3000h)
Mapping
User Defined Cyclic
1322 Communication Input 3 12296 (3008h)
Pr.8 Deceleration time
8 (0008h) + 12288 (3000h) 3
Mapping
User Defined Cyclic
1330 Communication Output 1 6 (6h) Speed actual value A (NIST_A)
Mapping 4
User Defined Cyclic
P.7 Acceleration time
1331 Communication Output 2 12295 (3007h)
7 (0007h) + 12288 (3000h)
Mapping
User Defined Cyclic
Pr.8 Deceleration time
5
1332 Communication Output 3 12296 (3008h)
8 (0008h) + 12288 (3000h)
Mapping
User Defined Cyclic
1333 Communication Output 4 16386 (4002h)
Monitored output current
2 (0002h) + 16384 (4000h) 6
Mapping
User Defined Cyclic
Pr.255 Life alarm status display
1334 Communication Output 5 12543 (30FFh)
Mapping
255 (00FFh) + 12288 (3000h)
7
User Defined Cyclic
1335 Communication Output 6 20981 (51F5h) Fault record 1
Mapping
• Connection settings in the engineering software 8
Set "Telegram 102" for the "Module Configuration" setting of the inverter.
Names of setting items may differ depending of the engineering software used.
9

10

2. Ethernet Communication
2.12 PROFINET
195
 2.13 EtherCAT

2.13.1 Outline

EtherCAT is available only for the FR-E800-EPC.

Operation or parameter setting via communication is possible using the EtherCAT through the Ethernet connector on the
inverter.
This function is not supported depending on the date of manufacture of the inverter. For details of specification changes, refer
to page 290.

 Communication specifications
Item Description
Communication speed 100 Mbps (Full duplex)
Maximum number of connected units 65535*1
Ethernet cable (IEEE 802.3 100BASE-TX compliant cable and ANSI/TIA/EIA-
Connection cable
568-B (Category 5e) compliant shielded 4-pair branched cable)
Topology Line, star, ring, or a combination of line and star*2
PDO (Process Data Object) Communication method Cyclic communication
communication Cycle time Depends on the master
SDO (Service Data Object)
Communication method Mailbox communication (acyclic communication)
communication
Free-run mode
Synchronization mode
Local cycle time: 4 ms
*1 The number varies depending on the specification of the master.
*2 For star or ring topology, a general-purpose switching hub cannot be used. Use an EtherCAT branch slave.

 Wiring method
• For the FR-E800-EPC, PORT1 is the IN connector and PORT2 is the OUT connector. Use PORT1 for connection with the
master or the upstream station, and use PORT2 for connection with the downstream station.

Connector for Connector for Connector for Connector for

communication communication communication communication
(PORT1) (PORT2) (PORT1) (PORT2)

IN OUT IN OUT

To the master station To the downstream

or the upstream station station

196 2. Ethernet Communication

2.13 EtherCAT
 Operation status LEDs
1

4
LED name Description LED status Remarks
OFF Power-OFF / Init state
Blinking green
Pre-Operational state
5
(200 ms intervals)
Flashing green, 1
EC RN EtherCAT state machine (ESM) status Safe-Operational state
flash
Blinking green
Initialization state
6
(50 ms intervals)
Solid green Operational state
OFF
Blinking red (200
No error.
EtherCAT state change commanded by the
7
ms intervals) master is impossible.
Flashing red, 1
EtherCAT state is changed due to internal fault.
EC ER Error status flash
Flashing red, 2
8
Watchdog fault of sync managers (SM).
flashes
Blinking red (50
An error is detected at a start.
ms intervals) 9
OFF Power-OFF/link-down
Blinking green
L/A 1 Connector for communication (PORT1) status Link-up (Data reception in progress)
(50 ms intervals)
Solid green Link-up 10
OFF Power-OFF/link-down
Blinking green
L/A 2 Connector for communication (PORT2) status Link-up (Data reception in progress)
(50 ms intervals)
Solid green Link-up

 ESI file
An ESI file is available for download.

Mitsubishi Electric FA Global Website:

www.mitsubishielectric.com/fa/products/drv/inv/support/e800/network.html
The download is free at the website above. For details, contact your sales representative.

NOTE
• The ESI file is used in engineering software. To install the ESI file properly, refer to the instruction manual of the applicable
engineering software.

2.13.2 Parameters related to EtherCAT

The following parameters are used for EtherCAT communication. Set the parameters as required.
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
EtherCAT node address
1305*1 setting
0 0 to 65535 Set the node address for the master to identify an inverter.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.13 EtherCAT
197
 Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value

1320 User Defined Cyclic 12288 to 13787,

*1 Communication Input 1 24642 20488, 20489,
N810 Mapping 24642, 24646, 24648
to 24650, 24672, Set the index number for inverter parameters, inverter
24677 to 24680, control parameters, and CiA402 drive profile.
1321 to 24689, 24698, Users can assign a function to the PDO mapping object
1329 User Defined Cyclic
24702, 24703, RxPDO (mater to inverter).
N811 to Communication Input 2 to 9999 24705, 24707 to 9999: Function disabled
10 Mapping
N819*1 24709, 24719,
24721, 24728 to
24730, 24831, 9999

1330 User Defined Cyclic 12288 to 13787,

Communication Output 1 24643 16384 to 16483,
N850*1 Mapping 20488, 20489, 20981
Set the index number for inverter parameters, monitor data,
to 20990, 20992,
inverter control parameters, and CiA402 drive profile.
24639, 24643,
1331 to Users can assign a function to the PDO mapping object
User Defined Cyclic 24644, 24673 to
1343 TxPDO (inverter to mater).
Communication Output 2 to 9999 24676, 24692,
N851 to 9999: Function disabled
*1 14 Mapping 24695, 24820,
N863 24826, 24828,
25858, 9999
Pr.1389 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the index number
User Defined Cyclic
0 to 2, 256 to 258, is specified using Pr.1320
1389*1 Communication Input Sub 1 0
512 to 514 Pr.1389 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the index number
and 2 Mapping
is specified using Pr.1321
Pr.1390 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the index number
User Defined Cyclic
0 to 2, 256 to 258, is specified using Pr.1322
1390*1 Communication Input Sub 3 0
512 to 514 Pr.1390 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the index number
and 4 Mapping
is specified using Pr.1323
Pr.1391 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the index number
User Defined Cyclic
0 to 2, 256 to 258, is specified using Pr.1324
1391*1 Communication Input Sub 5 0
512 to 514 Pr.1391 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the index number
and 6 Mapping
is specified using Pr.1325
Pr.1392 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the index number
User Defined Cyclic
0 to 2, 256 to 258, is specified using Pr.1326
1392*1 Communication Input Sub 7 0
512 to 514 Pr.1392 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the index number
and 8 Mapping
is specified using Pr.1327
Pr.1393 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the index number
User Defined Cyclic
0 to 2, 256 to 258, is specified using Pr.1328
1393*1 Communication Input Sub 9 0
512 to 514 Pr.1393 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the index number
and 10 Mapping
is specified using Pr.1329

N830 to User Defined Cyclic

Subindices to which the index numbers are specified using
Communication Input Sub 1 0 0 to 2
N839*1 to 10 Mapping
Pr.1320 to Pr.1329

Pr.1394 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the index number

User Defined Cyclic
*1 0 to 2, 256 to 258, is specified using Pr.1330
1394 Communication Output Sub 0
512 to 514 Pr.1394 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the index number
1 and 2 Mapping
is specified using Pr.1331
Pr.1395 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the index number
User Defined Cyclic
0 to 2, 256 to 258, is specified using Pr.1332
1395*1 Communication Output Sub 0
512 to 514 Pr.1395 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the index number
3 and 4 Mapping
is specified using Pr.1333
Pr.1396 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the index number
User Defined Cyclic
*1 0 to 2, 256 to 258, is specified using Pr.1334
1396 Communication Output Sub 0
512 to 514 Pr.1396 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the index number
5 and 6 Mapping
is specified using Pr.1335
Pr.1397 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the index number
User Defined Cyclic
0 to 2, 256 to 258, is specified using Pr.1336
1397*1 Communication Output Sub 0
512 to 514 Pr.1397 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the index number
7 and 8 Mapping
is specified using Pr.1337
Pr.1398 (lower 8 bits): Subindex to which the index number
User Defined Cyclic
*1 0 to 2, 256 to 258, is specified using Pr.1338
1398 Communication Output Sub 0
512 to 514 Pr.1398 (upper 8 bits): Subindex to which the index number
9 and 10 Mapping
is specified using Pr.1339
N870 to User Defined Cyclic
Subindices to which the index numbers are specified using
Communication Output Sub 0 0 to 2
N879*1 1 to 10 Mapping
Pr.1330 to Pr.1339

198 2. Ethernet Communication

2.13 EtherCAT
 *1 The setting is applied after an inverter reset or next power-ON.

NOTE 1
• The FR-E800-EPC does not support the following parameters.
• Default gateway address (Pr.442 to Pr.445)
• Inverter-to-inverter link function (Pr.1124 and Pr.1125)
• Ethernet relay operation at reset selection (Pr.1386) 2
• Inverter identification enable/disable selection (Pr.1399)
• Ethernet communication network number (Pr.1424), Ethernet communication station number (Pr.1425)
• Link speed and duplex mode selection (Pr.1426) 3
• Ethernet function selection (Pr.1427 to Pr.1430)
• Ethernet communication check time interval (Pr.1432)
• IP address (Pr.1434 to Pr.1437)
• Subnet mask (Pr.1438 to Pr.1441) 4
• IP filtering function (Ethernet) (Pr.1442 to Pr.1448)
• Ethernet IP address for command source selection (Pr.1449 to Pr.1454)
• Keepalive time (Pr.1455)
• Network diagnosis selection (Pr.1456)
5
• Extended setting for Ethernet signal loss detection function selection (Pr.1457)

6
 Node address setting
The node address is either automatically set by the master using the engineering software or set in the inverter parameter.
• Configured Station Alias (Setting by the master via EtherCAT communication, which is to be set in SII (Slave Information 7
Interface) of the inverter)
Set Configured Station Alias using the engineering software. The setting becomes valid after next power ON of the inverter.
• Requesting ID (ID-Selector set in the inverter parameter) 8
Set Device ID to be used as Requesting ID in Pr.1305 EtherCAT node address setting.
Device ID Setting range
Pr.1305 1 to 65535 ("0" is set when Device ID is not set.) 9
2.13.3 EtherCAT state machine (ESM)
• Definition
10
Power on
(1)

Init

(2) (3)

Pre-Operational (6)

(4) (5)
(9)
(10) Safe-Operational

(7) (8)

Operational

Status Description
Init (INIT) Initialization of communication
Pre-Operational (PREOP) SDO communication enabled
SDO communication enabled
Safe-Operational (SAFEOP)
Only TxPDO (inverter to master) transmission enabled for PDO communication
SDO communication and PDO communication enabled
Operational (OP)
Writing using SDO communication is not available to the object mapped in RxPDO (master to inverter).

2. Ethernet Communication
2.13 EtherCAT
199
 • Transition No.
Transition No. Description
(1) Power-ON, inverter reset
SDO communication configuration set by the master
(2)
Request from the master for transition to the Pre-Operational state
PDO communication configuration set by the master
(4)
Request from the master for transition to the Safe-Operational state
Output of command values from the master started
(7)
Request from the master for transition to the Operational state
(5) (10) Request from the master for transition to the Pre-Operational state
(8) Request from the master for transition to the Safe-Operational state
(3) (6) (9) Request from the master for transition to the Init state

2.13.4 PDO (Process Data Object) communication

PDO communication enables cyclic data transmission between the master and the inverter for the command data sent from
the master (RxPDO) and the status data sent from the inverter (TxPDO). Users can select communication data.

 PDO assign object

• Set the PDO mapping object to be used in the PDO assign object (Index H1C12 or H1C13).
• To change the PDO assign object settings, follow the following procedure in the Pre-Operational state.

1. Write "0" in Sub index H00.

2. Write the index number of the PDO mapping object to be used in Sub index H01.

3. Write "1" in Sub index H00.

 PDO mapping object

• The content of the data to be sent or received is set in a PDO mapping object. Index H1600 and H1620 are used for RxPDO
and Index H1A00 and H1A20 are used for TxPDO.
• The mapping content of Index H1600 and H1A00 can be changed using inverter parameters.
• The mapping content of Index H1620 and H1A20 can be changed using SDO communication. To change the settings,
follow the following procedure in the Pre-Operational state.

1. Write "0" in Sub index H00.

2. Write the setting values in Sub index H01 to H0n (n: number of data).

3. Write the number of data (n) in Sub index H00.

 Index H1600 (1st receive PDO mapping)

Sub index Name Mapping content (fixed) Data length (bit)
H01 Mapped object 001 Index H6040 (controlword) 16
H02 Mapped object 002 Index H5FFE, Sub index H01 (Index: Pr.1320, Sub index: Pr.1389 (low)) 32
H03 Mapped object 003 Index H5FFE, Sub index H02 (Index: Pr.1321, Sub index: Pr.1389 (high)) 32
H04 Mapped object 004 Index H5FFE, Sub index H03 (Index: Pr.1322, Sub index: Pr.1390 (low)) 32
H05 Mapped object 005 Index H5FFE, Sub index H04 (Index: Pr.1323, Sub index: Pr.1390 (high)) 32
H06 Mapped object 006 Index H5FFE, Sub index H05 (Index: Pr.1324, Sub index: Pr.1391 (low)) 32
H07 Mapped object 007 Index H5FFE, Sub index H06 (Index: Pr.1325, Sub index: Pr.1391 (high)) 32
H08 Mapped object 008 Index H5FFE, Sub index H07 (Index: Pr.1326, Sub index: Pr.1392 (low)) 32
H09 Mapped object 009 Index H5FFE, Sub index H08 (Index: Pr.1327, Sub index: Pr.1392 (high)) 32
H0A Mapped object 010 Index H5FFE, Sub index H09 (Index: Pr.1328, Sub index: Pr.1393 (low)) 32
H0B Mapped object 011 Index H5FFE, Sub index H0A (Index: Pr.1329, Sub index: Pr.1393 (high)) 32

200 2. Ethernet Communication

2.13 EtherCAT
 NOTE
• If the same index number is specified in two or more of Pr.1320 to Pr.1329, the number set in the parameter with the smallest 1
parameter number is valid. The same number set in the other parameters is regarded as "9999".
• When a nonexistent index number or "9999" is set in Pr.1320 to Pr.1329, the data is regarded as H0.

2
 Index H1620 (33rd receive PDO mapping)
Mapping content
Sub index Name Data length (bit) Remarks
(initial value) 3
Index H6040
H01 Mapped object 001 (controlword) 16 Unchangeable
(fixed)

H02 Mapped object 002

Index H6042
16
4
(vl target velocity)
H03 Mapped object 003
H04 Mapped object 004
H05 Mapped object 005 5
The number of data sets is changeable.
H06 Mapped object 006
Determined by the (Specify the number in Sub index H00.)
H07 Mapped object 007 No function
mapping content
H08 Mapped object 008 6
H09 Mapped object 009
H0A Mapped object 010
H0B Mapped object 011
7
 Index H1A00 (1st transmit PDO mapping)
Sub index Name Mapping content (fixed) Data length (bit) 8
H01 Mapped object 001 Index H6041 (statusword) 16
H02 Mapped object 002 Index H5FFF, Sub index H01 (Index: Pr.1330, Sub index: Pr.1394 (low)) 32
H03
H04
Mapped object 003
Mapped object 004
Index H5FFF, Sub index H02 (Index: Pr.1331, Sub index: Pr.1394 (high))
Index H5FFF, Sub index H03 (Index: Pr.1332, Sub index: Pr.1395 (low))
32
32
9
H05 Mapped object 005 Index H5FFF, Sub index H04 (Index: Pr.1333, Sub index: Pr.1395 (high)) 32
H06 Mapped object 006 Index H5FFF, Sub index H05 (Index: Pr.1334, Sub index: Pr.1396 (low)) 32
H07 Mapped object 007 Index H5FFF, Sub index H06 (Index: Pr.1335, Sub index: Pr.1396 (high)) 32 10
H08 Mapped object 008 Index H5FFF, Sub index H07 (Index: Pr.1336, Sub index: Pr.1397 (low)) 32
H09 Mapped object 009 Index H5FFF, Sub index H08 (Index: Pr.1337, Sub index: Pr.1397 (high)) 32
H0A Mapped object 010 Index H5FFF, Sub index H09 (Index: Pr.1338, Sub index: Pr.1398 (low)) 32
H0B Mapped object 011 Index H5FFF, Sub index H0A (Index: Pr.1339, Sub index: Pr.1398 (high)) 32
H0C Mapped object 012 Index H5FFF, Sub index H0B (Index: Pr.1340, Sub index: 0x00) 32
H0D Mapped object 013 Index H5FFF, Sub index H0C (Index: Pr.1341, Sub index: 0x00) 32
H0E Mapped object 014 Index H5FFF, Sub index H0D (Index: Pr.1342, Sub index: 0x00) 32
H0F Mapped object 015 Index H5FFF, Sub index H0E (Index: Pr.1343, Sub index: 0x00) 32

NOTE
• When a nonexistent index number or "9999" is set in Pr.1330 to Pr.1343, the data is regarded as H0.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.13 EtherCAT
201
  Index H1A20 (33rd transmit PDO mapping)
Mapping content
Sub index Name Data length (bit) Remarks
(initial value)
Index H6041
H01 Mapped object 001 (statusword) 16 Unchangeable
(fixed)
Index H6043
H02 Mapped object 002 16
(vl velocity demand)
H03 Mapped object 003
H04 Mapped object 004
H05 Mapped object 005
H06 Mapped object 006
H07 Mapped object 007
The number of data sets is changeable.
H08 Mapped object 008
Determined by the (Specify the number in Sub index H00.)
H09 Mapped object 009 No function
mapping content
H0A Mapped object 010
H0B Mapped object 011
H0C Mapped object 012
H0D Mapped object 013
H0E Mapped object 014
H0F Mapped object 015

2.13.5 CoE object dictionary

Index Description Refer to page
H1000 to H1FFF CoE (CAN application protocol over EtherCAT) communication area page 215
H3000 to H5FFF Manufacturer specific area page 211
H6000 to HFFFF Profile area (CiA402 drive profile) page 202

 Profile area (CiA402 drive profile)

Sub
Index Name Description Read/write Data type
index
Error number
The error code of the latest fault that occurred after power-ON or an
inverter reset is returned.
When no fault occurs, no error is returned.
H603F When the fault history is cleared during occurrence of a fault, no error
H00 Error code Read Unsigned16
(24639) is returned.
The upper eight bits are fixed to FF, and the lower eight bits represent
the error code. (HFFXX: "XX" represents the error code.)
(For details on error codes, refer to the list of fault displays in the
Instruction Manual (Maintenance).)
H6040
H00 Controlword Refer to page 209. Read/write Unsigned16
(24640)
H6041
H00 Statusword Refer to page 210. Read Unsigned16
(24641)
Set speed (r/min)*2*4
Set the set frequency in r/min.
H6042
H00 vl target velocity Monitoring range: -32768 (H8000) to 32767 (H7FFF) Read/write Integer16
(24642) When Pr.81 = "9999", the number of motor poles is regarded as 4.
Do not change the settings of this index and index H60FF at the same
time.
Output frequency (r/min)*2
H6043 vl velocity The output frequency is read in r/min.
H00 Read Integer16
(24643) demand Monitoring range: -32768 (H8000) to 32767 (H7FFF)
When Pr.81 = "9999", the number of motor poles is regarded as 4.
Operation speed (r/min)*2
H6044 vl velocity actual The operation speed is read in r/min.
H00 Read Integer16
(24644) value Monitoring range: -32768 (H8000) to 32767 (H7FFF)
When Pr.81 = "9999", the number of motor poles is regarded as 4.

202 2. Ethernet Communication

2.13 EtherCAT
 Sub
Index Name Description Read/write Data type
index
vl velocity min
1
— Minimum/maximum speed (r/min) — —
max amount
Highest sub-
H00 Maximum value of subindex: H02 (fixed) Read Unsigned8
index supported
Minimum speed (r/min)*2*3
2
vl velocity min
H6046 H01 Set Pr.2 Minimum frequency in r/min. Read/write Unsigned32
amount
(24646) Setting range: 0 to 120 Hz
Maximum speed (r/min)*2*3 3
vl velocity max Set Pr.18 High speed maximum frequency in r/min.
H02 Setting range: 0 to 590 Hz Read/write Unsigned32
amount
Do not change the settings of this index and index H607F at the same
time. 4
vl velocity Acceleration
— — —
acceleration vl velocity acceleration = Delta speed/Delta time
Highest sub-
H00
index supported
Maximum value of subindex: H02 (fixed) Read Unsigned8
5
Reference speed (r/min)*2*3
H01 Delta speed Set Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency in r/min. Read/write Unsigned32
H6048 Setting range: 1 to 590 Hz
(24648)
Acceleration time (s)*3
6
Set Pr.7 Acceleration time.
Setting range: 0 to 3600 s
H02 Delta time (Example: To accelerate to 1500 r/min for 3.7 seconds, set sub index Read/write Unsigned16
H01 to 15000 r/min and set sub index H02 to 37 seconds.) 7
Do not change the settings of this index and index H6083 at the same
time.
vl velocity Deceleration
—
deceleration vl velocity deceleration = Delta speed/Delta time
— — 8
Highest sub-
H00 Maximum value of subindex: H02 (fixed) Read Unsigned8
index supported

H01 Delta speed

Reference speed (r/min)*2*3
Set Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency in r/min. Read/write Unsigned32 9
H6049 Setting range: 1 to 590 Hz
(24649)
Deceleration time (s)*3
Set Pr.8 Deceleration time.
Setting range: 0 to 3600 s
10
H02 Delta time (Example: To decelerate from 1500 r/min for 3.7 seconds, set sub Read/write Unsigned16
index H01 to 15000 r/min and set sub index H02 to 37 seconds.)
Do not change the settings of this index and index H6084 at the same
time.
vl velocity quick
— Quick stop — —
stop
Highest sub-
H00 Maximum value of subindex: H02 (fixed) Read Unsigned8
index supported
Reference speed (r/min)*2
H604A H01 Delta speed Set Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency in r/min. Read/write Unsigned32
(24650) Setting range: 1 to 590 Hz
Deceleration time (s)
Set Pr.1103 Deceleration time at emergency stop.
H02 Delta time Setting range: 0 to 3600 s Read/write Unsigned16
(Example: To decelerate from 1500 r/min for 3.7 seconds, set sub
index H01 to 15000 r/min and set sub index H02 to 37 seconds.)
H605A Quick stop
H00 Quick stop option code: H0002 (fixed) Read/write Integer16
(24666)*1 option code
H6060 Modes of
H00 Control mode: -1 (vendor specific operation mode) (fixed) Read/write Integer8
(24672) operation
Modes of
H6061
H00 operation Current control mode: -1 (vendor specific operation mode) (fixed) Read Integer8
(24673)
display
H6062 Position demand Position command (pulse)
H00 Read Integer32
(24674) value The position command before the electronic gear operation is read.
H6063 Position actual Current position (pulse)
H00 Read Integer32
(24675) internal value The current position after the electronic gear operation is read.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.13 EtherCAT
203
 Sub
Index Name Description Read/write Data type
index
H6064 Position actual Current position (pulse)
H00 Read Integer32
(24676) value The current position before the electronic gear operation is read.
Droop pulse error judgment value (pulse)
H6065 Following error
H00 Initial value: 40000 (H9C40) Read/write Unsigned32
(24677) window
Setting range: H00000000 to HFFFFFFFF
H6066 Following error
H00 Droop pulse error judgment time: H0000 (fixed) Read/write Unsigned16
(24678) time out
In-position judgment value (pulse)
H6067 Set the in-position width.
H00 Position window Read/write Unsigned32
(24679) Initial value: 100 (H64)
Setting range: H00000000 to HFFFFFFFF
H6068 Position window
H00 In-position judgment time: H0000 (fixed) Read/write Unsigned16
(24680) time
Target torque (%)
Set Pr.805 Torque command value (RAM).
H6071
H00 Target torque Setting range: 600% to 1400% Read/write Integer16
(24689)
When the value is set in 0.1 increments, the first decimal place is
rounded off.
H6074 Torque demand value (%)
H00 Torque demand Read Integer16
(24692) The torque command is read.
H6077 Torque actual Torque actual value (%)
H00 Read Integer16
(24695) value The motor torque is read.
Target position (pulse)
Set the target position in the direct command mode.
H607A Initial value: 0
H00 Target position Read/write Integer32
(24698) Setting range: -2147483647 to 2147483647
(For the direct command mode, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).)
Direction of rotation: 0 or 128
H607E Bit 0 to 6: 0
H00 Polarity Read/write Unsigned8
(24702) Bit 7: Direction of rotation set by the controlword during position
control (0: Forward, 1: Reverse)
Maximum profile speed (r/min)*2*3
H607F Max profile Set Pr.18 High speed maximum frequency in r/min.
H00 Setting range: 0 to 590 Hz Read/write Unsigned32
(24703) velocity
Do not change the settings of this index and index H6046, sub index
H02 at the same time.
Profile speed (r/min)
Set the maximum speed in the direct command mode.
H6081 Initial value: 0
H00 Profile velocity Read/write Unsigned32
(24705) Setting range: 0 to (120 × 590 Hz / Pr.81)
(For the direct command mode, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).)
Acceleration time constant (ms)
<Position control>
Set the acceleration time in the direct command mode.
Initial value: 5000
Setting range: 10 to 360000
The last digit is rounded off. (For example, 1358 ms becomes 1350
ms.)
(For the direct command mode, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction
H6083 Profile
H00 Manual (Function).) Read/write Unsigned32
(24707) acceleration
<Other than position control>
Set Pr.7 Acceleration time in ms.
Setting range: 0 to 3600 s
The last two digits are rounded off when Pr.21 Acceleration/
deceleration time increments = "0", and the last digit is rounded off
when Pr.21 = "1".
Do not change the settings of this index and index H6048, sub index
H02 at the same time.

204 2. Ethernet Communication

2.13 EtherCAT
 Sub
Index Name Description Read/write Data type
index
Deceleration time constant (ms)
1
<Position control>
Set the deceleration time in the direct command mode.
Initial value: 5000
Setting range: 10 to 360000 2
The last digit is rounded off. (For example, 1358 ms becomes 1350
ms.)
(For the direct command mode, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction
H6084
(24708)
H00
Profile
deceleration
Manual (Function).) Read/write Unsigned32 3
<Other than position control>
Set Pr.8 Deceleration time in ms.
Setting range: 0 to 3600 s
The last two digits are rounded off when Pr.21 Acceleration/
deceleration time increments = "0", and the last digit is rounded off
4
when Pr.21 = "1".
Do not change the settings of this index and index H6049, sub index
H02 at the same time.
5
Deceleration time constant (QuickStop) (ms)*3
<Position control>
Set Pr.464 Digital position control sudden stop deceleration time
in ms.
Setting range: 0.01 to 360 s
6
H6085 Quick stop The last digit is rounded off. (For example, 1358 ms becomes 1350
H00 ms.) Read/write Unsigned32
(24709) deceleration
<Other than position control>
Set Pr.1103 Deceleration time at emergency stop in ms. 7
Setting range: 0 to 3600 s
The last two digits are rounded off when Pr.21 Acceleration/
deceleration time increments = "0", and the last digit is rounded off
when Pr.21 = "1". 8
Position encoder
— Encoder resolution (machine side / motor side) — —
resolution
Highest sub-
H00
index supported
Maximum value of subindex: H02 (fixed) Read Unsigned8 9
H608F
Encoder resolution
(24719) Encoder
H01 Set Pr.369 Number of encoder pulses. Read/write Unsigned32
increments
Setting range: 2 to 4096
Motor 10
H02 Motor speed (rev): H00000001 (fixed) Read/write Unsigned32
revolutions
— Gear ratio Gear ratio — —
Highest sub-
H00 Maximum value of subindex: H02 (fixed) Read Unsigned8
index supported
Motor shaft revolutions*3
Motor Set Pr.420 Command pulse scaling factor numerator (electronic
H6091 H01 Read/write Unsigned32
revolutions gear numerator).
(24721)
Setting range: 1 to 32767
Drive shaft revolutions*3
H02 Shaft revolutions Set Pr.421 Command pulse multiplication denominator Read/write Unsigned32
(electronic gear denominator).
Setting range: 1 to 32767
Home position return method
H6098
H00 Homing method Set the home position return method in the direct command mode.*5 Read/write Integer8
(24728) (For the direct command mode and the home position return method,
refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
— Homing speeds Home position return speed — —
Highest sub-
H00 Maximum value of subindex: H01 (fixed) Read Unsigned8
index supported
H6099 Motor speed during home position returning (r/min)
(24729) Set the home position return speed in the direct command mode.
Speed during Initial value: 120 × 2 Hz / Pr.81
H01 Read/write Unsigned32
search for switch Setting range: 0 to (120 × 400 Hz / Pr.81)
(For the direct command mode, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).)

2. Ethernet Communication
2.13 EtherCAT
205
 Sub
Index Name Description Read/write Data type
index
Home position return acceleration/deceleration time (ms)
Set the home position return acceleration/deceleration time in the
direct command mode.
Initial value: 5000
H609A Homing
H00 Setting range: 10 to 360000 Read/write Unsigned32
(24730) acceleration
The last digit is rounded off. (For example, 1358 ms becomes 1350
ms.)
(For the direct command mode, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).)
H60F4 Following error Droop pulse (pulse)
H00 Read Integer32
(24820) actual value The droop pulse before the electronic gear operation is read.
H60FA
H00 Control effort Speed command after position loop*2 Read Integer32
(24826) The ideal speed command is read.
H60FC Position demand Position command (pulse)
H00 Read Integer32
(24828) internal value The position command after the electronic gear operation is read.
Set speed (r/min)*2*4
Set the set frequency in r/min.
Monitoring range: -32768 (H8000) to 32767 (H7FFF)
H60FF When Pr.81 = "9999", the number of motor poles is regarded as 4.
H00 Target velocity Read/write Integer32
(24831) For writing the value after the unit switchover using Pr.53, the lower
24 bits of the data are valid and the upper 8 bits are ignored.
Do not change the settings of this index and index H6042 at the same
time.
H6502 Supported drive Supported control mode: H00010000 (vendor specific operation
H00 Read Unsigned32
(25858) modes mode)
Device type
Bit 0 to 15 Device Profile Number: H0192
H67FF Single device (402: Drive Profile)
H00 Read Unsigned32
(26623)*1 type Bit 16 to 23 Additional Information (Type): H01 (Frequency Converter:
inverter)
Bit 24 to 31 Additional Information (mode bits): H00
*1 Not available for PDO communication.
*2 The value is displayed and set in r/min regardless of the settings in Pr.53.
The frequency is converted to the rotation speed for reading, and the setting value is converted to the frequency for writing.
*3 When parameter write is performed, data are written to RAM for PDO communication. Writing to EEPROM or RAM is selected according to the
setting in Pr.342 Communication EEPROM write selection for SDO communication.
*4 Writing is not restricted by the Pr.18 and Pr.2 settings.
*5 The following table shows home position return methods corresponding to the Index H6098 setting values.

H6098 setting Home position return method

-3 Data set type
-4 Stopper type (home position return direction: position pulse increasing direction)
-5 (initial value) Ignoring the home position (servo ON position as the home position)
-7 Count type with front end reference (home position return direction: position pulse increasing direction)
-36 Stopper type (home position return direction: position pulse decreasing direction)
-39 Count type with front end reference (home position return direction: position pulse decreasing direction)
-65 Stopper type (home position return direction: start command direction)
-66 Count type with front end reference (home position return direction: start command direction)

NOTE
• The command interface in the Network operation mode is determined by the Pr.550 NET mode operation command source
selection setting. (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
• When the data is read, the value is displayed with a sign regardless of the Pr.290 Monitor negative output selection setting.

206 2. Ethernet Communication

2.13 EtherCAT
 Power drive system (PDS) state transition
After PDO communication is established (ESM: Operational state), the master controls the operating status by sending a 1
command using the controlword. When the "Not ready to switch on" state immediately after a power-ON or inverter reset
transits to the "Operation enabled" state, the inverter is ready for operation. Writing to controlword using SDO communication
will not be reflected. 2
• Definition
Start

0
3

Not ready to
switch on
4
1

Switch on
15
Fault
5
disabled

2 7 14

Ready to 13 Fault reaction

6
10 switch on active

12 3 6 9
7
Switched on 8

4 5 8
Quick stop Operation
active enabled
11
9
Inverter operation*1
Name Status
Position control Other than position control
During stop (initialization in 10
Not ready to switch on Output shutoff (RY signal OFF)
progress)
Switch on disabled During stop (initial status) Output shutoff (RY signal OFF)
Ready to switch on During stop (ready) Output shutoff (RY signal OFF)
Switched on During stop (standby) Output shutoff canceled (RY signal ON)*2
• Enable operation command received
(Same operation as when the start

Operation enabled During operation (enabled)

Same operation as in servo-ON (LX command is turned ON*3)
signal ON) status • Disable operation command
received (Same operation as when
the start command is turned OFF)
Sudden stop function activated (same Emergency stop function activated
Quick stop active During emergency stop operation as when the X87 signal is (same operation as when the X92
turned ON (normally input)) signal is turned ON)
Fault reaction active Fault detection enabled — (State transition to "Fault")
Fault Active fault situation Output shutoff (RY signal OFF)
*1 During EtherCAT communication, the servo ON/OFF status or the start command is controlled by the PDS state transition.
*2 When the output is shut off by the MRS signal or other signal, the RY signal remains OFF.
*3 The start command direction depends on the sign of the value of vl target velocity (H6042) or Target velocity (H60FF).

NOTE
• When all the following conditions are satisfied, the control using the controlword and the state transition is enabled.
• NET operation mode
• The Ethernet connector is the command interface enabled in the NET operation mode (Pr.550).
• Pr.338 Communication operation command source = "0"

• The main circuit capacitor's life cannot be measured when the control using the controlword is enabled. (For the measurement
of the main circuit capacitor's life, refer to the Instruction Manual (Function).)

2. Ethernet Communication
2.13 EtherCAT
207
 • Transition No.
Transition No. Controlword Other than controlword
0 — Power-ON, inverter reset
1 — Automatic transition after initialization
2 Shutdown command —
3 Switch on command —
Enable operation command (transition
4 —
disabled when the RY signal is OFF)
Disable operation command*1
Transition after the inverter is stopped Transition enabled when the RY signal turns
5
(transition disabled during DC injection brake OFF*1
operation or pre-excitation)
6 Shutdown command —
7 Disable voltage or Quick stop command *3

8 *1 —
Shutdown command
9 Disable voltage command*1 *3

10 Disable voltage or Quick stop command *3

11 Quick stop command*2 —

Automatic transition after an emergency stop*3
• Position control
Automatic transition after the PBSY signal
turns OFF
12 Disable voltage command*1
• Other than position control
Automatic transition after the inverter is
stopped (transition disabled during DC
injection brake operation or pre-excitation)
13 — Fault detected
14 — Automatic transition*1
Fault reset command from the master *3
15
The protective function is reset.*4

*1 The servo ON (LX signal ON) state (during position control) or the start command ON state (during control other than position control) that is
activated by inputting the command will be canceled.
*2 When the command is not used and the X87 or X92 signal is assigned for an emergency stop, transition to the "Quick stop active" state is disabled.
*3 When any one of the following conditions is not satisfied, transition to the "Switch on disabled" state will occur.
NET operation mode
The Ethernet connector is the command interface enabled in the NET operation mode (Pr.550).
Pr.338 Communication operation command source = "0"
*4 E.16 to E.20, E.PE6, E.PE2, E.CPU, E.SAF, E.CMB, E.1, E.5 to E.7, and E.13 are not reset. In this case, take an appropriate corrective action
first, and reset them by power reset or inverter reset.

208 2. Ethernet Communication

2.13 EtherCAT
 Controlword (H6040)
• Position control 1
After home position return is completed and bit 4 is changed from 1 to 0, positioning operation starts. However, bit 4 operation
is not required when the home position return method is ignoring the home position (servo ON position as the home position),
or the roll feed mode, current position retention function, or JOG operation is used. 2
Bit Name Home position return Positioning
0 switch on (so)
1 enable voltage (ev)
Refer to page 209.
3
2 quick stop (qs)
3 enable operation (eo)
Home position return starts when the bit is
changed from 0 to 1.*1
4
HOS (oms) —
0: Do not start homing procedure
4
1: Start or continue homing procedure
new set-point (oms)
—
Position data is obtained and positioning starts
when the bit is changed from 0 to 1.
5
5 Not used
0: Absolute position command
6 abs/rel (oms) —
1: Incremental position command 6
7 fault reset (fr) Refer to page 209.
8 to 15 Not used
*1 To perform home position return again, change the "Switched on" state to the "Operation enabled" state once. (Refer to page 211.)
7
• Other than position control
Bit Name Speed control and torque control
0 switch on (so)
8
1 enable voltage (ev)
Refer to page 209.
2 quick stop (qs)
3 enable operation (eo) 9
4 to 6 Not used
7 fault reset (fr) Refer to page 209.
8 to 15 Not used
10
• Transition command
Bit 7 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Command
fr eo qs ev so
Shutdown 0 — 1 1 0
Switch on 0 0 1 1 1
Disable voltage 0 — — 0 —
Quick stop 0 — 0 1 —
Disable operation 0 0 1 1 1
Enable operation 0 1 1 1 1
Fault reset 0 to 1 — — — —

—: Not used

State transition shown in the following table is also available.

Current state Command State after transition
Switch on disabled Switch on Switched on
Switch on disabled Enable operation Operation enabled
Ready to switch on Enable operation Operation enabled

2. Ethernet Communication
2.13 EtherCAT
209
 • Status during emergency drive operation
Emergency drive operating status State after transition
During commercial power supply operation during emergency
Switch on disabled
drive
When a critical fault occurs Fault reaction active to Fault
Others Operation enabled

 Statusword (H6041)
• Position control
After home position return is completed and bit 4 of controlword is changed from 1 to 0, positioning operation starts. However,
bit 4 operation is not required when the home position return method is ignoring the home position (servo ON position as the
home position), or the roll feed mode, current position retention function, or JOG operation is used.
Bit Name Home position return Positioning
0 ready to switch on (rtso)
1 switched on (so)
Refer to page 211.
2 operation enabled (oe)
3 Fault (f)
4 Not used
5 quick stop (qs)
Refer to page 211.
6 switch on disabled (sod)
0: Without warning or alarm
7 warning (w)
1: With warning or alarm
8 Not used
0: Control using the controlword disabled
9 remote (rm)
1: Control using the controlword enabled*1
• Without home position return failure (ZA
signal OFF)
0: PBSY signal ON
1: PBSY signal OFF
hm (tr)*2 • With home position return failure (ZA signal
—
ON)
0: Ideal speed command other than 0
1: Ideal speed command 0
10
0: Target position not reached
1: Target position reached
The bit is changed to 1 when the difference
(absolute value) of the target position (H607A)
target reached (tr) —
and the position actual value (H6064) is equal
to or less than the position window (H6067)
setting for the time set in the position window
time (H6068).
0: Forward or reverse stroke end not reached (LP signal OFF)
11 internal limit active
1: Forward or reverse stroke end reached (LP signal ON)
0: Home position return not completed (ZP
*2 signal OFF)
12 hm (oms) —
1: Home position return completed (ZP signal
ON)
0: Without home position return failure (ZA
signal OFF)
hm (oms)*2 1: With home position return failure (ZA signal
—
ON)
0: No following error
13 1: Following error
The bit is changed to 1 when the difference
(absolute value) of the position demand value
Following error (oms) —
(H6062) and the position actual value (H6064)
exceeds the following error window (H6065)
setting for the time set in the following error
time out (H6066).
14, 15 Not used

210 2. Ethernet Communication

2.13 EtherCAT
 *1 When all the following conditions are satisfied, the control using the controlword and the state transition is enabled.
NET operation mode
The Ethernet connector is the command interface enabled in the NET operation mode (Pr.550). 1
Pr.338 Communication operation command source = "0"
*2 Combination of hm (bit 10, 12, and 13)

Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 10 Description

0 0 0 During home position return operation
2
0 0 1 Before home position return
0 1 1 Home position return completed normally
1 0 1 A home position return failure occurs and the ideal speed command is 0. 3
• Other than position control
Bit Name Speed control and torque control
4
0 ready to switch on (rtso)
1 switched on (so)
2 operation enabled (oe)
Refer to page 211.
5
3 Fault (f)
4 Not used
5 quick stop (qs)
6 switch on disabled (sod)
Refer to page 211. 6
0: Without warning or alarm
7 warning (w)
1: With warning or alarm
8 Not used 7
0: Control using the controlword disabled
9 remote (rm)
1: Control using the controlword enabled*1
10 to 15 Not used
8
*1 When all the following conditions are satisfied, the control using the controlword and the state transition is enabled.
NET operation mode
The Ethernet connector is the command interface enabled in the NET operation mode (Pr.550).
Pr.338 Communication operation command source = "0"
9
• Transition status

Status
Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 10
sod qs f oe so rtso
Not ready to switch on 0 — 0 0 0 0
Switch on disabled 1 — 0 0 0 0
Ready to switch on 0 1 0 0 0 1
Switched on 0 1 0 0 1 1
Operation enabled 0 1 0 1 1 1
Quick stop active 0 0 0 1 1 1
Fault reaction active 0 — 1 1 1 1
Fault 0 — 1 0 0 0

—: Not used

 Manufacturer specific area

 Inverter parameters
Index Sub index Name Remarks Read/write Size
Parameter #nnnn
12288 to 13787 (nnnn: inverter The inverter parameter number (decimal) +
H00 to H02 Read/write 16 bits
(H3000 to H35DB) parameter number 12288 (H3000) is the index number.
(decimal))

2. Ethernet Communication
2.13 EtherCAT
211
 • Calibration parameter
Index Sub index Name Description Read/write Size
H00 Highest sub-index supported — Read 8 bits
13188 (H3384) H01 Data C0 (Pr.900) Read/write 16 bits
H02 Sub Data — Read/write 16 bits
H00 Highest sub-index supported — Read 8 bits
13189 (H3385) H01 Data C1 (Pr.901) Read/write 16 bits
H02 Sub Data — Read/write 16 bits
H00 Highest sub-index supported — Read 8 bits
13190 (H3386) H01 Data C2 (Pr.902) Read/write 16 bits
H02 Sub Data C3 (Pr.902) Read/write 16 bits
H00 Highest sub-index supported — Read 8 bits
13191 (H3387) H01 Data 125 (Pr.903) Read/write 16 bits
H02 Sub Data C4 (Pr.903) Read/write 16 bits
H00 Highest sub-index supported — Read 8 bits
13192 (H3388) H01 Data C5 (Pr.904) Read/write 16 bits
H02 Sub Data C6 (Pr.904) Read/write 16 bits
H00 Highest sub-index supported — Read 8 bits
13193 (H3389) H01 Data 126 (Pr.905) Read/write 16 bits
H02 Sub Data C7 (Pr.905) Read/write 16 bits
H00 Highest sub-index supported — Read 8 bits
13205 (H3395)*1 H01 Data C12 (Pr.917) Read/write 16 bits
H02 Sub Data C13 (Pr.917) Read/write 16 bits
H00 Highest sub-index supported — Read 8 bits
13206 (H3396)*1 H01 Data C14 (Pr.918) Read/write 16 bits
H02 Sub Data C15 (Pr.918) Read/write 16 bits
H00 Highest sub-index supported — Read 8 bits
13207 (H3397)*1 H01 Data C16 (Pr.919) Read/write 16 bits
H02 Sub Data C17 (Pr.919) Read/write 16 bits
H00 Highest sub-index supported — Read 8 bits
13208 (H3398)*1 H01 Data C18 (Pr.920) Read/write 16 bits
H02 Sub Data C19 (Pr.920) Read/write 16 bits
H00 Highest sub-index supported — Read 8 bits
13220 (H33A4) H01 Data C38 (Pr.932) Read/write 16 bits
H02 Sub Data C39 (Pr.932) Read/write 16 bits
H00 Highest sub-index supported — Read 8 bits
13221 (H33A5) H01 Data C40 (Pr.933) Read/write 16 bits
H02 Sub Data C41 (Pr.933) Read/write 16 bits
H00 Highest sub-index supported — Read 8 bits
13222 (H33A6) H01 Data C42 (Pr.934) Read/write 16 bits
H02 Sub Data C43 (Pr.934) Read/write 16 bits
H00 Highest sub-index supported — Read 8 bits
13223 (H33A7) H01 Data C44 (Pr.935) Read/write 16 bits
H02 Sub Data C45 (Pr.935) Read/write 16 bits

*1 Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.

For the numbers and names of inverter parameters, refer to the parameter list of the Instruction Manual (Function).

NOTE
• Set 65520 (HFFF0) as a parameter value "8888" and 65535 (HFFFF) as "9999".
• When parameter write is performed, data are written to RAM for PDO communication. Writing to EEPROM or RAM is selected
according to the setting in Pr.342 Communication EEPROM write selection for SDO communication.

212 2. Ethernet Communication

2.13 EtherCAT
 Monitor data
Index Sub index Name Remarks Read/write Size 1
Monitor data #nnnn
16384 to 16483 The monitor code (decimal) + 16384 (H4000) is
H00 (nnnn: monitor code Read 16 bits
(H4000 to H4063) the index number.
(decimal))

For details of the monitor codes and monitor items, refer to the description of Pr.52 in the Instruction Manual (Function).
2
NOTE
• Display of negative numbers during monitoring set in Pr.290 Monitor negative output selection is disabled. 3
• The display can be changed from the frequency to rotations per minute (machine speed) using Pr.53. When the machine
speed is displayed, the value is incremented by one.

10

2. Ethernet Communication
2.13 EtherCAT
213
  Inverter control parameter
Sub Read/
Index Name Remarks Size
index write
Set H9966 for the written value. Read/
20482 (H5002)*1 H00 Inverter reset
The read value is fixed to H0000. write
16 bits

Set H965A for the written value. Read/

20483 (H5003)*1 H00 Parameter clear
The read value is fixed to H0000. write
16 bits

Set H99AA for the written value. Read/

20484 (H5004)*1 H00 All parameter clear
The read value is fixed to H0000. write
16 bits

Set H5A96 for the written value. Read/

20486 (H5006)*1 H00 Parameter clear*2 The read value is fixed to H0000. write
16 bits

Set HAA99 for the written value. Read/

20487 (H5007)*1 H00 All parameter clear*2 The read value is fixed to H0000. write
16 bits

Inverter status / control input command Read/

20488 (H5008) H00 Refer to page 215. 16 bits
(extended)*3 write
Read/
20489 (H5009) H00 Inverter status / control input command*3 Refer to page 215.
write
16 bits

Read/
20981 (H51F5) H00 Fault record 1 16 bits
write
20982 (H51F6) H00 Fault record 2 Being 2 bytes in length, the data is stored as Read 16 bits
20983 (H51F7) H00 Fault record 3 "H00○○". Refer to the lowest 1 byte for the Read 16 bits
20984 (H51F8) H00 Fault record 4 error code. (For details on error codes, refer to Read 16 bits
the list of fault displays in the Instruction
20985 (H51F9) H00 Fault record 5 Read 16 bits
Manual (Maintenance).)
20986 (H51FA) H00 Fault record 6 Read 16 bits
Performing write using 20981 (H51F5) batch-
20987 (H51FB) H00 Fault record 7 clears the fault history. Read 16 bits
20988 (H51FC) H00 Fault record 8 Set any value as data. Read 16 bits
20989 (H51FD) H00 Fault record 9 Read 16 bits
20990 (H51FE) H00 Fault record 10 Read 16 bits
20992 (H5200) H00 Safety input status Refer to page 215. Read 16 bits
- RxPDO Parameter Mapping PDO mapping object for H1600 — —
H00 Highest sub-index supported For writing using PDO communication, the Read 8 bits
H01 Index: Pr.1320, Sub index: Pr.1389 (low) values corresponding to the objects selected Read 32 bits
using Pr.1320 to Pr.1329 and Pr.1389 to
H02 Index: Pr.1321, Sub index: Pr.1389 (high) Read 32 bits
Pr.1393 are written.
H03 Index: Pr.1322, Sub index: Pr.1390 (low) For reading using SDO communication, the Read 32 bits
H04 Index: Pr.1323, Sub index: Pr.1390 (high) values in the same format as mapping object Read 32 bits
24574 (H5FFE)
H05 Index: Pr.1324, Sub index: Pr.1391 (low) are read. Read 32 bits
H06 Index: Pr.1325, Sub index: Pr.1391 (high) Bit 16 to 31: Index Read 32 bits
Bit 8 to 15: Subindex
H07 Index: Pr.1326, Sub index: Pr.1392 (low) Read 32 bits
Bit 0 to 7: Object size (bit)
H08 Index: Pr.1327, Sub index: Pr.1392 (high) Sub index H01: H60420020 (initial value) Read 32 bits
H09 Index: Pr.1328, Sub index: Pr.1393 (low) Sub index H02 to H0A: H00000020 (initial Read 32 bits
H0A Index: Pr.1329, Sub index: Pr.1393 (high) value) Read 32 bits
- TxPDO Parameter Mapping — —
H00 Highest sub-index supported Read 8 bits
H01 Index: Pr.1330, Sub index: Pr.1394 (low) PDO mapping object for H1A00 Read 32 bits
H02 Index: Pr.1331, Sub index: Pr.1394 (high) For reading using PDO communication, the Read 32 bits
H03 Index: Pr.1332, Sub index: Pr.1395 (low) values corresponding to the objects selected Read 32 bits
using Pr.1330 to Pr.1343 and Pr.1394 to
H04 Index: Pr.1333, Sub index: Pr.1395 (high) Read 32 bits
Pr.1398 are read.
H05 Index: Pr.1334, Sub index: Pr.1396 (low) For reading using SDO communication, the Read 32 bits
H06 Index: Pr.1335, Sub index: Pr.1396 (high) values in the same format as mapping object Read 32 bits
24575 (H5FFF)
H07 Index: Pr.1336, Sub index: Pr.1397 (low) are read. Read 32 bits
H08 Index: Pr.1337, Sub index: Pr.1397 (high) Bit 16 to 31: Index Read 32 bits
Bit 8 to 15: Subindex
H09 Index: Pr.1338, Sub index: Pr.1398 (low) Read 32 bits
Bit 0 to 7: Object size (bit)
H0A Index: Pr.1339, Sub index: Pr.1398 (high) Sub index H01: H60430020 (initial value) Read 32 bits
H0B Index: Pr.1340, Sub index: 0x00 Sub index H02 to H0E: H00000020 (initial Read 32 bits
H0C Index: Pr.1341, Sub index: 0x00 value) Read 32 bits
H0D Index: Pr.1342, Sub index: 0x00 Read 32 bits
H0E Index: Pr.1343, Sub index: 0x00 Read 32 bits

*1 Not available for PDO communication.

*2 Settings in the communication parameters are not cleared.
*3 The data is written as a control input command for writing.
The data is read as the inverter status for reading.

214 2. Ethernet Communication

2.13 EtherCAT
 • Inverter status / control input command, and inverter status / control input command (extended)
1
Inverter status / control input command Inverter status / control input command (extended)
Definition Definition
Bit Bit
Control input command Inverter status Control input command Inverter status
0 — RUN (Inverter running)*2 0 NET X1 (—)*1 NET Y1 (0)*2
2
1 — During forward rotation 1 NET X2 (—)*1 NET Y2 (0)*2
2 — During reverse rotation 2 NET X3 (—)*1 NET Y3 (0)*2
RH (High-speed operation
3
3 *1 Up to frequency 3 NET X4 (—)*1 NET Y4 (0)*2
command)
RM (Middle-speed operation
4 Overload warning 4 NET X5 (—)*1 0
command)*1 4
RL (Low-speed operation
5 0 5 — 0
command)*1
FU (Output frequency
6 JOG operation selection 2
detection)*2
6 — 0 5
7 Second function selection ABC (Fault)*2 7 — 0
8 Terminal 4 input selection ABC2 (0)*2 8 — 0
9 — Safety monitor output 2 9 — 0 6
10 MRS (Output stop)*1 0 10 — 0
11 — 0 11 — 0
12 RES (—)*1 0 12 — 0 7
13 — 0 13 — 0
14 — 0 14 — 0
15 —
*1
Fault occurrence 15 — 0
The signal within parentheses ( ) is the initial status. The function changes depending on the setting of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
8
selection).
For details, refer to the description of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) in the Instruction Manual (Function).

*2
The signals assigned to the input terminals may be valid or invalid in the NET operation mode. (Refer to the Instruction Manual (Function).)
The signal within parentheses ( ) is assigned in the initial status. The function changes depending on the setting of Pr.190 to Pr.197 (Output
9
terminal function selection).
For details, refer to the description of Pr.190 to Pr.197 (Output terminal function selection) in the Instruction Manual (Function).

• Safety input status

10
Bit Definition
0: Terminal S1 ON
0
1: Terminal S1 OFF (output shutoff)
0: Terminal S2 ON
1
1: Terminal S2 OFF (output shutoff)
2 to
0
15

 CoE communication area

Index Sub index Name Description Read/write Size
Applicable profile information
Bit 0 to 15 Device Profile Number: H0192
(402: CiA402)
H1000 H00 Device Type Read 32 bits
Bit 16 to 23 Additional Information (Type): H01
(Frequency Converter: inverter)
Bit 24 to 31: H00
Error occurrence status
Bit 0:
H1001 H00 Error Register Read 8 bits
1: With error, 0: No error
Bit 1 to 7: Fixed to 0
Manufacturer Device
H1008 H00 Inverter model: FR-E800-E Read —
Name
Manufacturer Hardware
H1009 H00 Hardware version Read —
version
Manufacturer Software
H100A H00 Software version Read —
version

2. Ethernet Communication
2.13 EtherCAT
215
 Index Sub index Name Description Read/write Size
— Identity Object — — —
Highest sub-index
H00 Maximum value of subindex: H04 Read 8 bits
supported
H1018 H01 Vendor ID Vendor ID: H00000A1E Read 32 bits
H02 Product Code Product code: H02000301 Read 32 bits
H03 Revision Number Revision number Read 32 bits
H04 Serial Number Serial number Read 32 bits
— 1st receive PDO mapping — — —
Highest sub-index
H00 Maximum value of subindex: H0B (11) (fixed) Read 8 bits
supported
H01 Mapped object 001 Read 32 bits
H02 Mapped object 002 Read 32 bits
H03 Mapped object 003 Read 32 bits
H04 Mapped object 004 Objects mapped using inverter parameters Read 32 bits
H1600 Bit 16 to 31: Index
H05 Mapped object 005 Read 32 bits
Bit 8 to 15: Subindex
H06 Mapped object 006 Read 32 bits
Bit 0 to 7: Object size (bit)
H07 Mapped object 007 Sub index H01: H60400010 (controlword) (fixed) Read 32 bits
H08 Mapped object 008 Sub index H02 to H0B: H5FFE0120 to H5FFE0A20 (fixed) Read 32 bits
H09 Mapped object 009 Read 32 bits
H0A Mapped object 010 Read 32 bits
H0B Mapped object 011 Read 32 bits
33rd receive PDO
— — — —
mapping
Maximum value of subindex
Highest sub-index
H00
supported
Setting range: H00 to H0B Read/write*1 8 bits
Initial value: H02
H01 Mapped object 001 Read/write*1 32 bits
H02 Mapped object 002 Read/write*1 32 bits
H03 Mapped object 003 Objects mapped using SDO communication Read/write*1 32 bits
H1620 H04 Mapped object 004 Bit 16 to 31: Index Read/write *1 32 bits
Bit 8 to 15: Subindex
H05 Mapped object 005
Bit 0 to 7: Object size (bit) Read/write*1 32 bits
H06 Mapped object 006 Sub index H01: H60400010 (controlword) (fixed) *1 32 bits
Read/write
Sub index H02: H60420010 (initial value)
H07 Mapped object 007 Read/write*1 32 bits
Sub index H03 to H0B: H00000000 (initial value)
H08 Mapped object 008 *1 32 bits
Except for SDO Complete Access, to write data in Sub Read/write
H09 Mapped object 009 index H01 to H0B, set "0" in Sub index H00 first. Read/write*1 32 bits
H0A Mapped object 010 Read/write*1 32 bits
H0B Mapped object 011 *1 32 bits
Read/write
— 1st transmit PDO mapping — — —
Highest sub-index
H00 Maximum value of subindex: H0F (15) (fixed) Read 8 bits
supported
H01 Mapped object 001 Read 32 bits
H02 Mapped object 002 Read 32 bits
H03 Mapped object 003 Read 32 bits
H04 Mapped object 004 Read 32 bits
H05 Mapped object 005 Read 32 bits
H06 Mapped object 006 Objects mapped using inverter parameters Read 32 bits
H1A00 Bit 16 to 31: Index
H07 Mapped object 007 Read 32 bits
Bit 8 to 15: Subindex
H08 Mapped object 008 Read 32 bits
Bit 0 to 7: Object size (bit)
H09 Mapped object 009 Sub index H01: H60410010 (statusword) (fixed) Read 32 bits
H0A Mapped object 010 Sub index H02 to H0F: H5FFF0120 to H5FFF0E20 (fixed) Read 32 bits
H0B Mapped object 011 Read 32 bits
H0C Mapped object 012 Read 32 bits
H0D Mapped object 013 Read 32 bits
H0E Mapped object 014 Read 32 bits
H0F Mapped object 015 Read 32 bits

216 2. Ethernet Communication

2.13 EtherCAT
 Index Sub index Name Description Read/write Size

—
33rd transmit PDO
mapping
— — — 1
Maximum value of subindex
Highest sub-index
H00
supported
Setting range: H00 to H0F Read/write*1 8 bits

H01 Mapped object 001

Initial value: H02
Read/write*1 32 bits
2
H02 Mapped object 002 Read/write*1 32 bits
H03 Mapped object 003 Read/write*1 32 bits
H04 Mapped object 004 Read/write*1 32 bits
3
H05 Mapped object 005 Objects mapped using SDO communication Read/write*1 32 bits
H06 Mapped object 006 Bit 16 to 31: Index Read/write*1 32 bits
H1A20
H07 Mapped object 007
Bit 8 to 15: Subindex
Read/write*1 32 bits
4
Bit 0 to 7: Object size (bit)
H08 Mapped object 008 Sub index H01: H60410010 (statusword) (fixed) Read/write*1 32 bits
Sub index H02: H60430010 (initial value)
H09 Mapped object 009 Read/write*1 32 bits
H0A Mapped object 010
Sub index H03 to H0F: H00000000 (initial value)
Read/write*1 32 bits
5
Except for SDO Complete Access, to write data in Sub
H0B Mapped object 011 index H01 to H0F, set "0" in Sub index H00 first. Read/write*1 32 bits
H0C Mapped object 012 *1 32 bits
H0D Mapped object 013
Read/write
Read/write*1 32 bits
6
H0E Mapped object 014 Read/write*1 32 bits
H0F Mapped object 015 Read/write*1 32 bits
Sync Manager
7
— — — —
Communication Type
Highest sub-index
H00 Maximum value of subindex: H04 Read 8 bits
H1C00
H01
supported
Sync Manager 0 Mailbox in (master to inverter) Read 8 bits
8
H02 Sync Manager 1 Mailbox out (inverter to master) Read 8 bits
H03 Sync Manager 2 PDO output (master to inverter) Read 8 bits
H04 Sync Manager 3 PDO input (inverter to master) Read 8 bits 9
Sync Manager RxPDO
— — — —
Assign
Maximum value of subindex
H00
Highest sub-index
supported
Setting range: H00 and H01 Read/write*1 8 bits 10
Initial value: H01
H1C12
PDO mapping object assigned to sync manager 2 (RxPDO)
Setting range: H1600 and H1620
H01 assigned RxPDO Initial value: H1600 Read/write*1 16 bits
Except for SDO Complete Access, to write data in Sub
index H01, set "0" in Sub index H00 first.
Sync Manager TxPDO
— — — —
Assign
Maximum value of subindex
Highest sub-index
H00
supported
Setting range: H00 and H01 Read/write*1 8 bits
Initial value: H01
H1C13
PDO mapping object assigned to sync manager 3 (TxPDO)
Setting range: H1A00 and H1A20
H01 assigned TxPDO Initial value: H1A00 Read/write*1 16 bits
Except for SDO Complete Access, to write data in Sub
index H01, set "0" in Sub index H00 first.
Sync Manager 2
— — — —
Synchronization
Highest sub-index
H00 Maximum value of subindex: H04 Read 8 bits
supported
H1C32
Synchronization mode
H01 Synchronization Type Read 16 bits
H0000: Free-Run
Synchronization Types Supported synchronization mode
H04 Read 16 bits
supported H0001: Free-Run is supported.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.13 EtherCAT
217
 Index Sub index Name Description Read/write Size
Sync Manager 3
— — — —
Synchronization
Highest sub-index
H00 Maximum value of subindex: H04 Read 8 bits
supported
H1C33
Synchronization mode
H01 Synchronization Type Read 16 bits
H0000: Free-Run
Synchronization Types Supported synchronization mode
H04 Read 16 bits
supported H0001: Free-Run is supported.
*1 Writing is enabled only in the Pre-Operational state.

2.13.6 Operation when a communication error occurs

 Signal loss detection function
• Signal loss detection is enabled according to the setting in Pr.1431 Ethernet signal loss detection function selection.
The FR-E800-EPC does not support Pr.1457 Extended setting for Ethernet signal loss detection function selection.
The operation is the same as the one performed when Pr.1457 = "9999". (Refer to page 227.)

 EtherCAT communication fault

• The following table shows operations when a fault is detected during EtherCAT communication.
Fault type Possible cause Inverter operation
The EtherCAT state is not the one requested by the master The inverter sends the error
or the change to the EtherCAT state requested by the information to the master and changes
Status transition fault
master is disabled (for example, after restarting of the the EtherCAT state. When the status is
master). transited from Operational to the state
Sync manager (SM) change fault Incorrect setting of SM (for example, SM is disabled). other than Operational during inverter
operation, the operation is performed
Watchdog timeout (due to signal loss, master output not according to the setting in Pr.502 Stop
PDO communication timeout mode selection at communication
updated, restarting of the master, or other reasons).
error. (Refer to page 282.)

• Watchdog timer
Monitor item Reset trigger Overflow time (timeout period)
Process data Sync Manager 2 100 ms (initial value)

2.13.7 Programming example

The following explains a programming example using engineering software.

 Forward rotation at 1500 r/min using PDO communication

• Network setting and device examples
Local variable name Data type Comment
E001_Output_enable BOOL Inverter 1_Output_enable
E001_Input_enable BOOL Inverter 1_Input_enable
E001_Rotation BOOL Inverter 1_Rotation

Global variable name PDO mapping Remarks

E001_Controlword Controlword
E001_rPDO2 vl target velocity Pr.1320 User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 1 Mapping
E001_Statusword Statusword
E001_tPDO2 vl velocity demand Pr.1330 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 1 Mapping

• Setting the start command and the speed command

When the PDO communication is established, E001_Output_enable and E001_Input_enable turn ON.
The inverter transfers to "Switched on" state by the PDS state transition.

Set the speed command to 1500 r/min (when Pr.81 Number of motor poles is set to 4 poles (initial value)).
Speed command: vl target velocity (H6042) = 1500 r/min

218 2. Ethernet Communication

2.13 EtherCAT
Turning ON E001_Rotation turns ON Enable operation to start forward rotation at 1500 r/min.
Turning OFF E001_Rotation stops operation.
1
Set a negative value for vl target velocity for reverse rotation.

2
Inverter 1
established*1 Inverter 1 error*1 E001_Output_enable
0
Inverter 1_Output_enable 3
Input data invalid*1 E001_Input_enable

Inverter 1_Input_enable 4
Switch on disabled Shutdown
E001_Input_enable E001_Output_enable = MOVE
1 EN EN ENO
Inverter 1_Input_
enable
Inverter 1_Output_
enable
uint#16#240 In1 UINT#16#6 In Out E001_Controlword 5
E001_Statusword In2

Ready to switch on
=
Switch on
MOVE
6
EN EN ENO
uint#16#221 In1 UINT#16#7 In Out E001_Controlword
E001_Statusword In2
MOVE
7
EN ENO
Operation enabled
= E001_Rotation DINT#10#1500 In Out E001_rPDO2
EN 8
uint#16#227 In1 Inverter 1_Forward_rotation

E001_Statusword In2

Switched on Enable operation

9
= E001_Rotation MOVE
EN EN ENO
uint#16#223 In1 Inverter 1_
Forward_rotation
UINT#16#F In Out E001_Controlword 10
E001_Statusword In2

*1 Differs depending on the master used. Refer to the Master Module User's Manual.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.13 EtherCAT
219
 2.14 Backup/restore

2.14.1 Outline
A backup/restore tool is available for backing up inverter parameters and the data used in the PLC function of inverter. The
backup data can be used to restore the data in the inverter. (Not compatible with safety parameters of the safety communication
model and the IP67 model)
This function is not supported depending on the date of manufacture of the inverter. For details of specification changes, refer
to page 290.

 System configuration

Ethernet cable

Personal computer
(Backup/restore tool) Inverter

2.14.2 Initial setting for the backup/restore function

Use the following parameters to perform required settings for Ethernet communication between the inverter and other devices.
To make communication between other devices and the inverter, perform the initial settings of the inverter parameters to match
the communication specifications of the devices. Data communication cannot be made if the initial settings are not made or if
there is any setting error.
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Setting range
value
1427 Ethernet function selection
5001
N630*1 1 502, 5000 to 5002,
1428 Ethernet function selection 5006 to 5008, 5010 to
45237
N631*1 2 5013, 9999, 34962*3,
Set the application, protocol, and so on.
1429 Ethernet function selection 44818*2, 45237,
45238
N632*1 3 45238, 47808*2,
1430 Ethernet function selection 61450
9999
N633*1 4
*1 The setting is applied after an inverter reset or next power-ON.
*2 The setting is available for the FR-E800-(SC)EPA and FR-E806-SCEPA.
*3 The setting is available for the FR-E800-(SC)EPB and FR-E806-SCEPB.

 Ethernet function selection (Pr.1427 to Pr.1430)

To use the backup/restore function, set "45237" (iQSS) in any of Pr.1427 to Pr.1430 Ethernet function selection 1 to 4. In
the initial status, Pr.1428 = "45237" (iQSS) and setting is not required. (Refer to page 226.)

 Data to be backed up and restored

• The following data can be backed up and restored. The data other than those listed in the following table cannot be backed
up or restored.
Item
Inverter parameters
Parameters used for activating the PLC function
Programs (including SFCs) used in the PLC function
Global device comment information used in the PLC function
Function block source information

220 2. Ethernet Communication

2.14 Backup/restore
 NOTE
• When files used in the PLC function are backed up while password protection is enabled for the files (read protection) and then 1
the backed-up files are restored, password protection will be disabled.

 Backup/restore operation 2
• All inverter parameters and all data used in the PLC function of inverter can be backed up and restored.
• After restore operation, check the parameter setting values before starting operation.
• The backup/restore cannot be performed in the following cases. 3
Operation Inverter status
Backup During an inverter reset
A password is registered or password protection is enabled (Pr.297 ≠ "9999"). 4
During restore
While password protection is enabled for files used in the PLC function (read protection)
Restore During an inverter reset
During running 5
During auto tuning
A password is registered or password protection is enabled (Pr.297 ≠ "9999").
While parameter write is disabled (Pr.77 = "1")
During backup operation
During the RUN status of the PLC function
6
While password protection is enabled for files used in the PLC function (write protection)

• "RD" is displayed during backup and "WR" is displayed during restore on the operation panel, and the MS LED blinks in
7
red.

NOTE
• Restore operation is not available between different models (such as between the FR-E800 series and the FR-A800 series, 8
the FR-E800-EPA inverter and the FR-E800-EPB inverter, and the Ethernet model and the safety communication model). An
error occurs in the backup/restore tool.

10

2. Ethernet Communication
2.14 Backup/restore
221
 2.15 Inverter-to-inverter link function
The inverter-to-inverter link function enables communication between multiple inverters connected by Ethernet in a small-scale
system by using the I/O devices and special registers of the PLC function.
The inverter-to-inverter link function is enabled by simply setting Pr.1124 Station number in inverter-to-inverter link and
Pr.1125 Number of inverters in inverter-to-inverter link system.
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
1124 Station number in inverter- 0 to 5 Set the station number for the inverter-to-inverter link function.
9999
N681*1*2 to-inverter link 9999 Inverter-to-inverter link function disabled

1125 Number of inverters in

Set the total number of inverters used for the inverter-to-inverter
inverter-to-inverter link 2 2 to 6
N682*1*2 system
link function.

*1 The setting is applied after an inverter reset or next power-ON.

*2 The setting is not available for the FR-E800-EPC.

 Communication specifications
The communication specification varies depending on the specification of the master.
Item Description
Communication speed 100 Mbps
Master: 1
Number of connectable units
Slave: up to 5
Topology Line, star, or a combination of line and star
Maximum number of links per Output device 16 (2 bytes)
station Special register 8 (16 bytes)

 Setting procedure
1. Set a value other than "0" in Pr.414 PLC function operation selection to enable the PLC function.

2. To set the inverter as the master, set "0" in Pr.1124 Station number in inverter-to-inverter link, and to set the
inverter as a slave, select a station number from 1 to 5 and set the number in Pr.1124.

3. Set the total number of inverters used for the inverter-to-inverter link function in Pr.1125 Number of inverters in
inverter-to-inverter link system. For example, set "3" in Pr.1125 when two slave inverters and the master inverter
are used.

4. Use FR Configurator2 to write sequence programs to the master inverter.

NOTE
• Use different station numbers for different devices. (If different devices have the same station number, the communication
cannot be performed properly.)
• Set consecutive numbers for the station numbers. (Do not skip any numbers like 1, 2, then 4.)
• When Pr.1124 is set to a value equal to or greater than the value set in Pr.1125, normal communication is not available.
• Use the Inverter-to-inverter linkup (LNK) signal to check that the master-slave communication is established. (For details of
the LNK signal, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
• To detect the interruption of the inverter-to-inverter link communication and activate the protective function, set Pr.997 Fault
initiation in advance, and create and execute a sequence program to activate the protective function by the input of the signal
loss detection signal from the external sensor.
• For the details of the PLC function, refer to the PLC Function Programming Manual and the Instruction Manual of FR
Configurator2. For the details of FR Configurator2, refer to the Instruction Manual of FR Configurator2.

 System configuration
The following shows the system configuration for using the inverter-to-inverter link function. The master inverter can
communicate with the slave inverters through one or two hubs (refer to the description of Pr.1124 for the master/slave setting).

222 2. Ethernet Communication

2.15 Inverter-to-inverter link function
(Communication using the inverter-to-inverter function is not available for the inverters directly connected to the router.)

Personal computer
1
Router (FR Configurator2)

2
Hub Hub

3
100 Mbps

4
Inverter Inverter Inverter Inverter Inverter Inverter
(master) (slave 1) (slave 2) (slave 3) (slave 4) (slave 5)

 Device map 5
The following shows the I/O devices and special registers used for the inverter-to-inverter link function. (For the details of the
other I/O devices and special registers, refer to the PLC Function Programming Manual.)

 I/O device map (master)

6
Device No. Name Device No. Name
X40 to X4F Inverter-to-inverter link input (from slave 1 to master)
X50 to X5F Inverter-to-inverter link input (from slave 2 to master)
Y40 to Y4F Inverter-to-inverter link output (from master to slave 1)
Y50 to Y5F Inverter-to-inverter link output (from master to slave 2)
7
X60 to X6F Inverter-to-inverter link input (from slave 3 to master) Y60 to Y6F Inverter-to-inverter link output (from master to slave 3)
X70 to X7F Inverter-to-inverter link input (from slave 4 to master) Y70 to Y7F Inverter-to-inverter link output (from master to slave 4)
X80 to X8F Inverter-to-inverter link input (from slave 5 to master) Y80 to Y8F Inverter-to-inverter link output (from master to slave 5) 8
 I/O device map (slave)
Device No. Name
X40 to X4F Inverter-to-inverter link input (from master to slave)
Device No. Name
Y40 to Y4F Inverter-to-inverter link output (from slave to master)
9
 Special register (common)
Device No. Name Description
10
The station number in the inverter-to-inverter link is stored.
b15 b8 b7 b0
Reserved (H00) Station No.
• H00: Master
SD1460 Station number in inverter-to-inverter link • H01: Slave 1
• H02: Slave 2
• H03: Slave 3
• H04: Slave 4
• H05: Slave 5
• HFF: Function disabled
The communication status of the slaves (0: Link not established, 1:
Link established) in the inverter-to-inverter link is stored.
(In the slave inverter, only its own communication status is indicated.)
b15 b5 b4 b0
Communication status of inverter-to-inverter
SD1461
link • Bit 0: Slave 1
• Bit 1: Slave 2
• Bit 2: Slave 3
• Bit 3: Slave 4
• Bit 4: Slave 5

 Special register (master)

Device No. Name Description
SD1470 to SD1477 Inverter-to-inverter link receive data 1 to 8 (slave 1) Data 1 to 8 received from slave 1
SD1478 to SD1485 Inverter-to-inverter link send data 1 to 8 (slave 1) Data 1 to 8 sent to slave 1
SD1486 to SD1493 Inverter-to-inverter link receive data 1 to 8 (slave 2) Data 2 to 8 received from slave 1
SD1494 to SD1501 Inverter-to-inverter link send data 1 to 8 (slave 2) Data 2 to 8 sent to slave 1
SD1502 to SD1509 Inverter-to-inverter link receive data 1 to 8 (slave 3) Data 3 to 8 received from slave 1

2. Ethernet Communication
2.15 Inverter-to-inverter link function
223
 Device No. Name Description
SD1510 to SD1517 Inverter-to-inverter link send data 1 to 8 (slave 3) Data 3 to 8 sent to slave 1
SD1518 to SD1525 Inverter-to-inverter link receive data 1 to 8 (slave 4) Data 4 to 8 received from slave 1
SD1526 to SD1533 Inverter-to-inverter link send data 1 to 8 (slave 4) Data 4 to 8 sent to slave 1
SD1534 to SD1541 Inverter-to-inverter link receive data 1 to 8 (slave 5) Data 5 to 8 received from slave 1
SD1542 to SD1549 Inverter-to-inverter link send data 1 to 8 (slave 5) Data 5 to 8 sent to slave 1

 Special register (slave)

Device No. Name Description
SD1470 to SD1477 Inverter-to-inverter link receive data 1 to 8 (master) Data 1 to 8 received from master
SD1478 to SD1485 Inverter-to-inverter link send data 1 to 8 (master) Data 1 to 8 sent to master
SD1486 to SD1549 For manufacturer setting. Do not set.

 Troubleshooting
Condition Possible cause Countermeasure
The same station number is assigned to multiple
Set Pr.1124 correctly.
inverters.
Set Pr.1124 so that the station numbers are
The station numbers are not consecutive.
consecutive.
The specified number of inverters in the system is
not correct. (Pr.1124 is set to a value equal to or Set Pr.1125 correctly.
Communication is not
greater than the value set in Pr.1125.)
established.
Use full-duplex connection. (When Pr.1426 Link
speed and duplex mode selection = "0 (initial
The connection is half-duplex.
value)", check that the hub and the Ethernet cable
are compatible with full-duplex connection.)
The inverter is not reset after Pr.1124 and Pr.1125
Reset the inverter.
are set.
A command sent by the master is Set a value other than "0" in Pr.414 to enable the
The PLC function is disabled.
not applied to a slave. PLC function.

224 2. Ethernet Communication

2.15 Inverter-to-inverter link function
2.16 Ethernet communication parameters 1

The following table shows parameters used in common for Ethernet communication protocols. Set the parameters as required.
Initial
2
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
442 Default gateway address
0
N620*1*4 1 3
443 Default gateway address
0
N621*1*4 2
0 to 255 Enter the default gateway address.
444
N622*1*4
Default gateway address
3
0 4
445 Default gateway address
0
N623*1*4 4
1399 Inverter identification
1
0 Inverter identification disabled 5
N649*4 enable/disable selection 1 Inverter identification enabled
1427 Ethernet function
5001
N630*1*4 selection 1 502, 5000 to
1428 Ethernet function
5002, 5006 to 6
45237 5008, 5010 to
N631*1*4 selection 2
5013, 9999 to Set the application, protocol, etc.
1429 Ethernet function
45238 34962*3, 44818*2,
N632*1*4 selection 3 45237, 45238, 7
1430 Ethernet function 47808*2, 61450
9999
N633*1*4 selection 4
0 Signal loss detection disabled
A warning (EHR) is output for a 8
1
signal loss.
A warning (EHR) and the Alarm Set the availability of the signal
2 (LF) signal are output for a signal
1431 Ethernet signal loss
detection function 3 loss.
loss detection and select the
action when Ethernet 9
N643*5 selection communication is interrupted
A warning (EHR) and the Alarm
(LF) signal are output for a signal by physical factors.
loss.
3
A protective function is activated
10
for a signal loss.*6*7
1438
Subnet mask 1 255
N610*1*4
1439
Subnet mask 2 255
N611*1*4
0 to 255 Enter the subnet mask of the network to which the inverter belongs.
1440
Subnet mask 3 255
N612*1*4
1441
Subnet mask 4 0
N613*1*4
1455 When no response is returned for an alive check message (Keep
*4 Keepalive time 60 s 1 to 7200 s Alive ACK) for the time (s) set in Pr.1455 multiplied by 8 elapsed,
N642 the connection will be forced to be closed.
0 Disabled
1 SNMP enabled
1456 Duplicate IP address detection is enabled when link-up events
Network diagnosis 2
9999 occur.
N647*4*8 selection
SNMP enabled
9999 Duplicate IP address detection is enabled when link-up events
occur.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.16 Ethernet communication parameters
225
 Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
0 Signal loss detection disabled
A warning (EHR) is output for a
1
signal loss. The setting of Pr.1431 will be
A warning (EHR) and the Alarm applied to the operation when
2 (LF) signal are output for a signal signal loss is detected at
loss PORT1, and the setting of
Extended setting for A warning (EHR) and the Alarm Pr.1457 will be applied when
1457 Ethernet signal loss
9999 (LF) signal are output for a signal signal loss is detected at
N648*4*5 detection function loss. PORT2.
3
selection
A protective function is activated
for a signal loss.*6*7
When a signal loss is detected for both PORT1 and PORT2, the
8888
Pr.1431 setting is applied.
When a signal loss is detected for either PORT1 or PORT2, the
9999
Pr.1431 setting is applied.
1386 Ethernet relay operation Select the relay operation for packets addressed to the other
0 0, 9999
N652*4 at reset selection stations for resetting the inverter connected in line topology.
*1 The setting is applied after an inverter reset or next power-ON.
*2 The setting is available for the FR-E800-(SC)EPA and FR-E806-SCEPA.
*3 The setting is available for the FR-E800-(SC)EPB and FR-E806-SCEPB.
*4 The setting is not available for the FR-E800-EPC.
*5 For CC-Link IE TSN communication, a protective function (E.EHR) is activated regardless of the Pr.1431 and Pr.1457 settings when a signal loss
is detected during cyclic communication.
*6 The protective function is not activated while the inverter stops.
*7 The operation follows the Pr.502 Stop mode selection at communication error setting. (Refer to page 282.)
*8 When "34962" is set in any of Pr.1427 to Pr.1430, SNMP is disabled regardless of the Pr.1456 setting.

 Default gateway address (Pr.442 to Pr.445)

Set the default gateway address in Pr.442 to Pr.445 to establish a communication with the devices on a different network.
Set the value in the first octet in Pr.442.
Set the value in the second octet in Pr.443.
Set the value in the third octet in Pr.444.
Set the value in the fourth octet in Pr.445.

* * * . * * * . * * * . * * *

NOTE
• The setting is not available for the FR-E800-EPC.

 Ethernet function selection (Pr.1427 to Pr.1430)

Refer to the Instruction Manual of the device connected via Ethernet, and set Pr.1427 to Pr.1430 Ethernet function selection
1 to 4 according to the application and protocol.
Number of connectable
Pr.1427 to Pr.1430 setting*1 Application Protocol
clients
502 MODBUS/TCP TCP/IP 3
5000
UDP No limit
5001 (Pr.1427 initial value)*2
MELSOFT / FA product connection
5002*2 (Connection with a computer (FR TCP/IP 2*3
5006 Configurator2), GOT, or a relay station UDP No limit
(programmable controller))
5007 TCP/IP 2*3
5008 UDP No limit
5010
UDP No limit
5011
SLMP
5012
TCP/IP 2*3
5013
34962*5 PROFINET — No limit
UDP 4
44818*4 EtherNet/IP
TCP/IP 2
45237 (Pr.1428 initial value) iQSS (supported by FR Configurator2) UDP No limit

226 2. Ethernet Communication

2.16 Ethernet communication parameters
 Number of connectable
Pr.1427 to Pr.1430 setting*1 Application Protocol
clients
45238 (Pr.1429 initial value) CC-Link IE TSN — No limit
1
47808*4 BACnet/IP UDP No limit
61450 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic UDP No limit
9999 (Pr.1430 initial value) Unselected 2
*1 If both application and protocol settings are identical in Pr.1427 to Pr.1430, the priority of the setting is defined as follows: Pr.1427> Pr.1428>
Pr.1429> Pr.1430.
(Example) When Pr.1427 = "5001", Pr.1428 = "5006", Pr.1429 = "5010", and Pr.1430 = "5012", "5001", "5010" and "5012" are valid.
*2 To connect the inverter and FR Configurator2 via the MELSOFT / FA product for Ethernet communication, set "5001 (initial value)" or "5002" 3
according to the protocol type (UDP or TCP/IP) in any of Pr.1427 to Pr.1430.
*3 When the inverter is connected with other equipment via a hub, and if the communication between the other equipment and the hub is interrupted
and resumed, the communication between the inverter and the other equipment may not be established depending on the specifications of the
hub. To re-establish communication with the other equipment, reset the inverter to forcefully close the connection. (Setting a shorter time in 4
Pr.1455 Keepalive time is also effective as a preventive measure (refer to page 228).)
*4 The setting is available for the FR-E800-(SC)EPA and FR-E806-SCEPA.
*5 The setting is available for the FR-E800-(SC)EPB and FR-E806-SCEPB.

NOTE
5
• The setting is not available for the FR-E800-EPC.
• For details of communication protocols that cannot be used together, refer to page 7.
6
 Ethernet signal loss detection (Pr.1431, Pr.1457)
Use Pr.1431 and Pr.1457 to set the operation when Ethernet communication is interrupted by physical factors including
disconnection of the Ethernet cable or damages on the Ethernet cable.
7
Applicable port Operation
LF signal
Pr.1431 setting Description Pr.1457 = "0
to 3"
Pr.1457 =
"8888"
Pr.1457 =
"9999"
panel
indication
output 8
0 Detection disabled — Not available
1 Warning output EHR Not available
2 Warning and alarm output PORT1
PORT1 and
PORT2
PORT1 or
PORT2
EHR Available 9
Warning and alarm output EHR Available
3 (initial value)
Protective function activation*1 *2 *2

Operation
LF signal
10
Pr.1457 setting Description Applicable port panel
output
indication
0 Detection disabled — Not available
1 Warning output EHR Not available
2 Warning and alarm output PORT2 EHR Available
Warning and alarm output EHR Available
3
Protective function activation*1 *2 *2

When a signal loss is detected for both

8888 PORT1 and PORT2, the Pr.1431 setting PORT1 and PORT2
is applied.
— —
When a signal loss is detected for either
9999 (initial
PORT1 or PORT2, the Pr.1431 setting PORT1 or PORT2
value)
is applied.
*1 The protective function is not activated while the inverter stops or during an inverter reset.
*2 The operation follows the Pr.502 Stop mode selection at communication error setting. (Refer to page 282.)

• Precautions for connection in line topology

For connection in line topology, set Pr.502 or configure a setting for signal loss detection for each port.

2. Ethernet Communication
2.16 Ethernet communication parameters
227
 Example: Link-down of inverter 2 due to power-OFF or other reason (Pr.1431 = "3 (initial value)", Pr.1457 = "3")

Inverter 1 Inverter 2 Inverter 3

PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2

(3) (1) (1) (2)

(1) Link-down of inverter 2 due to power-OFF or other reason

(2) "E.EHR" is displayed as the connection between PORT1 of inverter 3 and inverter 2 is interrupted.
(3) "E.EHR" is displayed as the connection between PORT2 of inverter 1 and inverter 2 is interrupted.

NOTE
• Setting Pr.1457 is not available for the FR-E800-EPC. The operation is the same as the one performed when Pr.1457 =
"9999".
• For CC-Link IE TSN communication, a protective function (E.EHR) is activated regardless of the Pr.1431 and Pr.1457 settings
when a signal loss is detected during cyclic communication.

 Subnet mask (Pr.1438 to Pr.1441)

The subnet mask of the network to which the inverter belongs can be set in Pr.1438 to Pr.1441.
Set the value in the first octet in Pr.1438.
Set the value in the second octet in Pr.1439.
Set the value in the third octet in Pr.1440.
Set the value in the fourth octet in Pr.1441.

* * * . * * * . * * * . * * *

NOTE
• The setting is not available for the FR-E800-EPC.

 Keepalive time (Pr.1455)

An alive check message (KeepAlive ACK) is sent to a device if the device does not return any response within the time set in
Pr.1455 Keepalive time while a TCP connection is established. When no response is returned after the seventh transmission,
the connection will be forced to be closed.
Inverter Connected device

Normal communication

Time set
in Pr.1455
KeepAlive ACK (first)
No response
Time set
in Pr.1455
KeepAlive ACK (second)
No response
Time set
in Pr.1455
KeepAlive ACK (seventh)
No response

Time set
in Pr.1455

Timeout
Time (connection close)

228 2. Ethernet Communication

2.16 Ethernet communication parameters
 NOTE
• The setting is not available for the FR-E800-EPC. 1

 Network diagnosis selection (Pr.1456)

2
Pr.1456
Description Remarks
setting
0 Disabled
1 SNMP enabled The network diagnosis function using SNMP is enabled. 3
Duplicate IP address detection is enabled when A protective function (DIP) is activated when an IP address overlapping with
2
link-up events occur. that of any other device on the network is detected.
SNMP enabled
9999 Duplicate IP address detection is enabled when 4
link-up events occur.

NOTE
• The setting is not available for the FR-E800-EPC.
5
• When "34962" is set in any of Pr.1427 to Pr.1430, SNMP is disabled regardless of the Pr.1456 setting.

 Ethernet relay operation at reset selection (Pr.1386)

6
Use this parameter to select whether to continue or stop the relay operation for packets addressed to the other stations when
resetting the inverter connected in line topology. Setting this parameter prevents faults of other inverters caused by interruption
7
of the relay operation when the inverter is reset to change settings or clear faults.
Pr.1386 setting Description
0 (initial value)
9999
The packet relay operation is continued when the inverter is reset.
The packet relay operation is stopped when the inverter is reset.
8
Example: Resetting inverter 2 (Pr.1431 and Pr.1457 = "3")

Inverter 1 Inverter 2 Inverter 3

9

10

PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2

Pr.1386 = "0" (2) (1) (2)

Pr.1386 = "9999" (3) (1) (3)

(1) Reset inverter 2.

(2) Relay operation is continued between inverter 2 and inverter 1 / inverter 3.
(3) "E.EHR" is displayed as the connection between inverter 2 and inverter 1 / inverter 3 is interrupted.

NOTE
• The setting is not available for the FR-E800-EPC.
• When the setting in Pr.1426 Link speed and duplex mode selection or Pr.1434 to Pr.1437 (IP address) is changed, the
packet relay operation is stopped even when Pr.1386 = "0".

2. Ethernet Communication
2.16 Ethernet communication parameters
229
 MEMO

230 2. Ethernet Communication

2.16 Ethernet communication parameters
 CHAPTER 3
CHAPTER 3 RS-485 Communication

3.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................................................232

3.2 Wiring....................................................................................................................................................................232
3.3 Wiring of PU connector.........................................................................................................................................234
3.4 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication) .................................................................................236
3.5 MODBUS RTU......................................................................................................................................................249
3.6 BACnet MS/TP .....................................................................................................................................................262

231
 3 RS-485 Communication

3.1 Outline
RS-485 communication is available for the standard model or the standard model with the FR-E8TR or the FR-E8TE7 installed.
Use the following parameters to perform required settings for RS-485 communication between the inverter and a personal
computer.
• Use the PU connector on the inverter or the FR-E8TE7 and the RS-485 terminals on the FR-E8TR as communication
interface.
• The Mitsubishi inverter protocol, MODBUS-RTU protocol, or BACnet MS/TP protocol is used. Parameter setting,
monitoring, etc. can be performed through communication.
• To make communication between the personal computer and inverter, setting of the communication specifications must
be made to the inverter in advance. Data communication cannot be made if the initial settings are not made or if there is
any setting error.
• Position control using point tables is not available for RS-485 communication.
• For details on the FR-E8TR and the FR-E8TE7, refer to the Instruction Manual of each option.

3.2 Wiring

3.2.1 Wiring procedure

1. Prepare the equipment required for wiring according to the connection method.

2. Turn OFF the power of the programmable controller and the inverters.

3. Perform wiring between communication devices.

4. Connect a terminating resistor.

3.2.2 Connected device

 Computer-inverter connection cable
Refer to the following for the connection cable (USB to RS-485 converter) between the computer and an inverter.
Commercially available products (as of October 2020)
Product name Model Manufacturer
Interface embedded cable
DINV-U4 Diatrend Corp.
dedicated for inverter*1

*1 The conversion cable cannot connect multiple inverters. (The computer and inverter are connected in a 1:1 pair.) This is a USB-to-RS485
converter-embedded conversion cable. No additional cable or connector is required. For the product details, contact the manufacturer.

 Connection cable
Use Ethernet cables compliant with the following standards.
Ethernet cable Connector Standard
The cables compliant with the following standards:
Category 5e or higher straight cable (double
RJ-45 connector • IEEE 802.3 (1000BASE-T)
shielded/STP)
• ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B (Category 5e)

 Distributor
Use a distributor to connect a terminating resistor to the inverter.

232 3. RS-485 Communication

3.1 Outline
Commercially available products (as of October 2020)
Product name Model Manufacturer 1
BMJ-8-28N (Pins No. 2 and No. 8 are not
connected internally.) HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
(A plug with a terminating resistor is not used.)
RS-485 distributor DMDH-3PN (Pins No. 2 and No. 8 are not 2
connected internally.)
Diatrend Corp.
DMDH-10PN (Pins No. 2 and No. 8 are not
connected internally.)

 Terminating resistor 3
Prepare a 100 Ω 1/2 W terminating resistor such as the following.

4
Precision
Brown

Brown
Black

5
1 0 1 =100Ω
(10¹)
6
• Connect the terminating resistor between pin No. 3 (RDA) and pin No. 6 (RDB).
• Connect the terminating resistor to only the inverter remotest from the programmable controller.
7

10

3. RS-485 Communication
3.2 Wiring
233
 3.3 Wiring of PU connector
Using the PU connector as a computer network port enables communication operation from a personal computer, etc.
When the PU connector is connected with a personal, FA, or other computer by a communication cable, a user program can
run and monitor the inverter or read and write to parameters.

 PU connector pin-outs
Inverter
(Receptacle side)
Front view

8 to 1

Pin number Name Description

1 SG Earth (ground) (connected to terminal 5)
2 — Operation panel power supply
3 RDA Inverter receive+
4 SDB Inverter send-
5 SDA Inverter send+
6 RDB Inverter receive-
7 SG Earth (ground) (connected to terminal 5)
8 — Operation panel power supply

NOTE
• Pins No. 2 and 8 provide power to the operation panel or parameter unit. Do not use these pins for RS-485 communication.
• Do not connect the PU connector to the computer's LAN board, FAX modem socket, or telephone modular connector. The
product could be damaged due to differences in electrical specifications.

 Wiring method
• Connecting one inverter (four-wire type)
Programmable controller
Distributor
Built-in RS-485 Communication
port cable
RDA 5 5 Terminating
RDB 4 4 resistor
SDA 3 3
SDB 6 6
SG 1 1
5 4 3 6 1

Inverter

PU connector S S R R S
D D D D G
A B A B

234 3. RS-485 Communication

3.3 Wiring of PU connector
 • Connecting multiple inverters (four-wire type)

1
Programmable controller
Distributor Distributor Distributor
Built-in RS-485 Communication
port cable
RDA 5 5 5 5 5 5 Terminating
RDB
SDA
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
resistor
2
SDB 6 6 6 6 6 6
SG 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 4 3 6 1 5 4 3 6 1 5 4 3 6 1
3
Inverter Inverter Inverter

PU connector S S R R S PU connector S S R R S PU connector S S R R S

D D D D G
A B A B
D D D D G
A B A B
D D D D G
A B A B 4
• Connecting one inverter (two-wire type)
Programmable controller
Distributor 5
Built-in RS-485 Communication
port cable
RDA 5 5 Terminating
RDB
SDA
4
3
4
3
resistor 6
SDB 6 6
SG 1 1

7
5 4 3 6 1

Inverter

PU connector S S R R S
D D D D G
A B A B 8
• Connecting multiple inverters (two-wire type)
Programmable controller
Distributor Distributor Distributor 9
Built-in RS-485 Communication
port cable
RDA 5 5 5 5 5 5 Terminating
RDB 4 4 4 4 4 4 resistor 10
SDA 3 3 3 3 3 3
SDB 6 6 6 6 6 6
SG 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 4 3 6 1 5 4 3 6 1 5 4 3 6 1

Inverter Inverter Inverter

PU connector S S R R S PU connector S S R R S PU connector S S R R S

D D D D G D D D D G D D D D G
A B A B A B A B A B A B

3. RS-485 Communication
3.3 Wiring of PU connector
235
 3.4 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link
communication)
Parameter setting and monitoring, etc. are possible by using the Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication) via
the PU connector on the inverter.
To use the Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication), set "0 (initial value)" in Pr.549 Protocol selection.
Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
0 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link)
549
Protocol selection 0 1 MODBUS RTU protocol
N000
2 BACnet MS/TP protocol
Specify the inverter station number.
117 PU communication
N020 station number
0 0 to 31*1 Enter the inverter station numbers when two or more inverters are
connected to one personal computer.
48, 96, 192, Select the communication speed.
118 PU communication
192 384, 576, The setting value × 100 equals the communication speed.
N021 speed
768, 1152 For example, enter 192 to set the communication speed of 19200 bps.
PU communication 0 Data length 8 bits
N022 0
data length 1 Data length 7 bits
PU communication 0 Stop bit length 1 bit
N023 1
stop bit length 1 Stop bit length 2 bits
0 Stop bit length 1 bit
PU communication Data length 8 bits
1 Stop bit length 2 bits
119 stop bit length / data 1
10 Stop bit length 1 bit
length Data length 7 bits
11 Stop bit length 2 bits
0 Parity check disabled.
120 PU communication
2 1 Parity check (odd parity) enabled.
N024 parity check
2 Parity check (even parity) enabled.
Set the permissible number of retries for unsuccessful data reception.
0 to 10 If the number of consecutive errors exceeds the permissible value, the
121 PU communication inverter output is shut off.
1
N025 retry count
The inverter output will not be shut off even when a communication
9999
error occurs.
RS-485 communication is enabled. However, the inverter output is
0 shut off if the operation mode is changed to the one for the selected
command interface.
122 PU communication Set the interval of the communication check (signal loss detection)
0
N026 check time interval 0.1 to 999.8 time
s If a no-communication state persists for longer than the permissible
time, the inverter output will be shut off.
9999 No communication check (signal loss detection)
0 to 150 ms Set the delay between data transmission to the inverter and response.
123 PU communication
9999 The time delay is not set in this parameter but in communication data.
N027 waiting time setting 9999
Delay time: Number set in the data × 10 ms
0 Without CR/LF
124 PU communication CR/
1 1 With CR
N028 LF selection
2 With CR/LF
*1 When a value outside the setting range is set, the inverter operates at the initial value.

NOTE
• Always reset the inverter after making the initial settings of the parameters. After changing the communication-related
parameters, communication cannot be made until the inverter is reset.

 Communication specifications
• The communication specifications are shown in the following table.
Item Description Related parameter
Communication protocol Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication) Pr.549

236 3. RS-485 Communication

3.4 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication)
 Item Description Related parameter
Conforming standard
Number of connectable units
EIA-485 (RS-485)
1: N (maximum 32 units), the setting range of station number is 0 to 31.
—
Pr.117
1
Communication speed Selected among 4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/76800/115200 bps. Pr.118
Control procedure Asynchronous method —
Communication method Half-duplex system — 2
Character system ASCII (7 bits or 8 bits can be selected.) Pr.119
Start bit 1 bit —
Communication
specifications
Stop bit length
Parity check
1 bit or 2 bits can be selected.
Check (at even or odd numbers) or no check can be selected.
Pr.119
Pr.120
3
Error check Sum code check —
Terminator CR/LF (whether or not to use it can be selected) Pr.124
Time delay setting Availability of the setting is selectable. Pr.123 4
 Communication procedure
• Data communication between the computer and inverter is made in the following procedure.
(a) Request data is sent from the computer to the inverter. (The inverter will not send data unless requested.)
5
(b) Communication waiting time
(c) The inverter sends reply data to the computer in response to the computer request.
(d) Inverter data processing time
6
(e) An answer from the computer in response to reply data (c) of the inverter is transmitted. (Even if (e) is not sent, subsequent
communication is made properly.)
When data is read 7
Computer
↓ (Data flow)
∗2
Inverter a d e
Inverter b c
Time 8
∗1
↓ (Data flow)
When data is written
Computer

*1 If a data error is detected and a retry must be made, perform retry operation with the user program. The inverter output is shut off if the number 9
of consecutive retries exceeds the parameter setting.
*2 On receipt of a data error occurrence, the inverter returns reply data (c) to the computer again. The inverter output is shut off if the number of
consecutive data errors reaches or exceeds the parameter setting.
10
 Communication operation presence/absence and data format types
• Data communication between the computer and inverter is made in ASCII code (hexadecimal code).
• Communication operation presence/absence and data format types are as follows.
Operation Running Multi Parameter Inverter Parameter
Symbol Operation Monitor
command frequency command write reset read
Communication request is sent to the
a inverter in accordance with the user A, A1 A (A2)*1 *3
A (A2)*2 A B B
program in the computer.
b Inverter data processing time With With With With Without With With
No error*4 E, E1,
*3*6
(Request C C C C*5 E (E2)*2
Reply data from the E2, E3*1
accepted)
c inverter (Data a is
checked for an error.) With error
(Request D D D D D*5 D D
rejected)
d Computer processing delay time 10 ms or more
No error*4 Without Without
Reply from computer in (No inverter Without Without Without Without Without
(C) (C)
response to reply data c processing)
e
(Data c is checked for With error
error.) (Inverter outputs Without Without Without Without Without F F
c again.)
*1 When Pr.53 = "4" and the data code HFF = 1, the data format is A2 or E2. (Refer to page 243.)
*2 The data writing format is A2 and the data reading format is E2 for Pr.37. (Refer to page 243.)
*3 Refer to page 247 for multi command data formats.
*4 In the communication request data from the computer to the inverter, the time of 10 ms or more is also required after an acknowledgment (ACK)
signal showing "No data error detected" is sent. (Refer to page 241.)

3. RS-485 Communication
3.4 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication)
237
 *5 Reply from the inverter to the inverter reset request can be selected. (Refer to page 243.)
*6 At mode error and data range error, data on page 247 contains an error code. Except for those errors, the error is returned with data format D.

• Data writing format

a. Communication request data from the computer to the inverter
Number of characters
Format
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Inverter station
A ENQ*1 Instruction code *3 Data Sum check *4
number*2
Inverter station
A1 ENQ*1 Instruction code *3 Data Sum check *4
number*2
Inverter station
A2 ENQ*1 Instruction code *3 Data Sum check *4
number*2
c. Reply data from the inverter to the computer (No data error detected)
Number of characters
Format
1 2 3 4
Inverter station
C ACK*1 *4
number*2

c. Reply data from the inverter to the computer (Data error detected)
Number of characters
Format
1 2 3 4 5
D *1 *2 Error code *4
NAK Inverter station number

*1 Indicates a control code.

*2 The inverter station number is specified in hexadecimal in the range of H00 to H1F (stations No. 0 to 31).
*3 Set the delay time. When Pr.123 PU communication waiting time setting is set to other than "9999", create the communication request data
without "delay time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)
*4 CR+LF code: When a computer transmits data to the inverter, some computers automatically provide either one or both of the codes CR (carriage
return) and LF (line feed) at the end of a data group. In this case, the same setting is required for data sent from the inverter to the computer. Use
Pr.124 PU communication CR/LF selection for the CR+LF code setting.

• Data reading format

a. Communication request data from the computer to the inverter
Number of characters
Format
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
*1
Inverter station *3 *4
B ENQ Instruction code Sum check
number*2

c. Reply data from the inverter to the computer (No data error detected)
Number of characters
Format
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Inverter station
E STX*1 Read data ETX*1 Sum check *4
number*2
Inverter station
E1 STX*1 Read data ETX*1 Sum check *4
number*2
Inverter station
E2 STX*1 Read data ETX*1 Sum check *4
number*2

Number of characters
Format
1 2 3 4 to 23 24 25 26 27
Inverter station
E3 STX*1 Read data (Inverter model information) ETX*1 Sum check *4
number*2

238 3. RS-485 Communication

3.4 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication)
 c. Reply data from the inverter to the computer (Data error detected)

Format
Number of characters 1
1 2 3 4 5
Inverter station Error
D NAK*1 *4
number*2 code
2
e. Transmission data from the computer to the inverter when reading data
Number of characters
Format
1 2 3 4 3
C (No data error Inverter station
ACK*1 *4
detected) number*2
Inverter station
F (Data error
detected) NAK*1
number*2
*4
4
*1 Indicates a control code.
*2 The inverter station number is specified in hexadecimal in the range of H00 to H1F (stations No. 0 to 31).
*3 Set the delay time. When Pr.123 PU communication waiting time setting is set to other than "9999", create the communication request data 5
without "delay time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)
*4 CR+LF code: When a computer transmits data to the inverter, some computers automatically provide either one or both of the codes CR (carriage
return) and LF (line feed) at the end of a data group. In this case, the same setting is required for data sent from the inverter to the computer. Use
Pr.124 PU communication CR/LF selection for the CR+LF code setting. 6
 Data definitions
• Control code
Signal name ASCII code Description
7
STX H02 Start Of Text (Start of data)
ETX H03 End Of Text (End of data)
ENQ H05 Enquiry (Communication request) 8
ACK H06 Acknowledge (No data error detected)
LF H0A Line Feed
CR
NAK
H0D
H15
Carriage Return
Negative Acknowledge (Data error detected)
9
• Inverter station number
Specify the station number of the inverter which communicates with the computer.
• Instruction code
10
Specify the processing request, for example, operation or monitoring, given by the computer to the inverter. Therefore, the
operation or monitoring an item is enabled by specifying the corresponding instruction code. (Refer to page 243.)
• Data
Indicates the data such as frequency and parameters transferred to and from the inverter. The definitions and ranges of
set data are determined in accordance with the instruction codes. (Refer to page 243.)
• Time delay
Specify the delay time (time period between the time when the inverter receives data from the computer and the time when
the inverter starts transmission of reply data). Set the delay time in accordance with the response time of the computer in
the range of 0 to 150 ms in 10 ms increments. (For example, "1" for 10 ms or "2" for 20 ms.)
When Pr.123 PU communication waiting time setting is set to other than "9999", create the communication request data
without "delay time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)

Computer Inverter data processing time

= Waiting time*1 + data check time*2
Inverter

Inverter

Computer

*1 When Pr.123 = "9999", the waiting time is the data setting value × 10 ms. When Pr.123 ≠ "9999", the waiting time is the value set in Pr.123.
*2 Approximately 5 to 50 ms. It varies depending on the instruction code.

NOTE
• The data check time varies depending on the instruction code. (Refer to page 241.)

3. RS-485 Communication
3.4 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication)
239
 • Sum check code
The sum check code is a 2-digit ASCII (hexadecimal) representing the lower 1 byte (8 bits) of the sum derived from the
checked ASCII data.
(Example 1) Sum

*Waiting
Instruction
ENQ Station code Data check

time
Computer Inverter code
number
0 1 E 1 1 0 7 A D F 4 Binary code
ASCII Code H05 H30 H31 H45 H31 H31 H30 H37 H41 H44 H46 H34

H30+H31+H45+H31+H31+H30+H37+H41+H44
= H1F4
Sum
* When Pr.123 PU communication waiting time setting "9999", create the communication
request data without "waiting time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)

(Example 2) Sum
Data read
STX Station ETX
check
Inverter Computer number code
0 1 1 7 7 0 3 0 Binary code
ASCII Code H02 H30 H31 H31 H37 H37 H30 H03 H33 H30

H30+H31+H31+H37+H37+H30

= H130
Sum

• Error code
If any error is found in the data received by the inverter, its error definition is sent back to the computer together with the
NAK code.
Error code Error item Error description Inverter operation
The number of errors consecutively detected in
H0 Computer NAK error communication request data from the computer is greater
than the permissible number of retries.
H1 Parity error The parity check result does not match the specified parity.
The sum check code in the computer does not match that of The inverter output is shut off
H2 Sum check error
the data received by the inverter. (E.PUE) if error occurs
The data received by the inverter has a grammatical mistake. continuously more than the
Or, data receive is not completed within the predetermined permissible number of retries.
H3 Protocol error
time. The CR or LF code specification is not the same as the The LF signal is output.
setting of the parameter.
H4 Framing error The stop bit length differs from the initial setting.
New data has been sent by the computer before the inverter
H5 Overrun error
completes receiving the preceding data.
H6 — — —
The inverter does not accept the
The character received is invalid (other than 0 to 9, A to F,
H7 Character error received data. However, the
control code).
inverter output is not shut off.
H8 — — —
H9 — — —
Parameter write was attempted when the inverter does not
perform computer link communication, when the operation
HA Mode error
commands are not given through communication, or during The inverter does not accept the
inverter operation. received data. However, the
HB Instruction code error The specified instruction code does not exist. inverter output is not shut off.
Invalid data has been specified for parameter writing,
HC Data range error
frequency setting, etc.
HD — — —
HE — — —
HF Normal (no error) — —

240 3. RS-485 Communication

3.4 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication)
 Response time
Data sending time (refer to the following formula) 1
Inverter data processing time Waiting time Data check time
Computer (setting 10 ms) (depends on the
instruction code*3)
Inverter
Inverter
Time
10 ms or more necessary
2
Computer Data sending time (refer to the following formula)

[Formula for data transmission time]

1
Number of data characters *1
Communication specifications
(Total number of bits) *2 data transmission time (s)
3
Communication
speed (bps)

*1 Refer to page 237.

*2 Communication specifications 4
Name Number of bits
1 bit
Stop bit length
2 bits 5
7 bits
Data length
8 bits
With 1 bit
Parity check
Without 0 6
In addition to the above, 1 start bit is necessary.
Minimum number of total bits: 9 bits
Maximum number of total bits: 12 bits 7
*3 Data check time

Item Check time

Operation command, inverter status monitor, reading the 8
< 20 ms
monitor item, reading/writing the set frequency (RAM)
Reading/writing the set frequency (EEPROM) < 40 ms
Reading/writing parameters (RAM)
Reading/writing parameters (EEPROM)
< Approximately 20 ms
< Approximately 50 ms
9
 Retry count setting (Pr.121)
• Set the permissible number of retries at data receive error occurrence. (Refer to page 240 for data receive error for retry.) 10
• When the data receive errors occur consecutively and the number of retries exceeds the permissible number setting, a
communication fault (E.PUE) occurs and the inverter output is shut off.
• When a data transmission error occurs while "9999" is set, the inverter does not shut off its output but outputs the Alarm
(LF) signal. To use the LF signal, set "98" (positive logic) or "198" (negative logic) in any of Pr.190 to Pr.197 (Output
terminal function selection) to assign the function to an output terminal.

Example: Pr.121 = "1" (initial value)

Fault (E.PUE)
ENQ

ENQ

Computer Inverter Illegal Illegal

ACK

NAK

NAK

Inverter Computer

Reception error Reception error

ALM ON

Example: Pr.121 = "9999"

ENQ

ENQ

ENQ

Computer Inverter Illegal Illegal Normal

ACK

NAK

NAK

ACK

Inverter Computer

Reception error Reception error

LF OFF ON ON

ALM OFF

3. RS-485 Communication
3.4 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication)
241
 NOTE
• The operation at a communication error occurrence depends on the setting of Pr.502 Stop mode selection at
communication error. (Refer to page 282.)

 Signal loss detection (Pr.122)

• If signal loss is detected between the inverter and computer, the communication error "E.PUE" will occur and the inverter
output will be shut off.
• When a signal loss is detected, the LF signal is output.
• When the setting is "9999", communication check (signal loss detection) is not made.
• The monitor items and parameter settings can be read via RS-485 communication when "0" is set, but a communication
error (E.PUE) occurs instantly when the operation mode is switched to the one for the selected command interface
(Network operation mode in the initial setting).
• Setting any value from 0.1 s to 999.8 s will enable signal loss detection. To detect signal loss, data must be sent from the
computer within the communication check time interval (for further information on control codes, refer to page 239). The
inverter makes a communication check (clearing of communication check counter) regardless of the station number setting
of the data sent from the master.
• Communication check is started at the initial communication in the operation mode for the selected command interface
(Network operation mode in the initial setting).
Example: Pr.122 = "0.1 to 999.8s"

Operation Mode External NET

ENQ

Computer Inverter
Inverter Computer

Fault (E.PUE)
Check start
Pr.122
Communication
check counter
Time

ALM OFF ON

 Programming instructions
• When data from the computer has any error, the inverter does not accept that data. Hence, in the user program, always
insert a retry program for data error.
• All data communication, for example, run command or monitoring, are started when the computer gives a communication
request. The inverter does not return any data without the computer's request. Hence, design the program so that the
computer gives a data read request for monitoring, etc. as required.

CAUTION
• Always set the communication check time interval before starting operation to prevent hazardous conditions.
• Data communication is not started automatically but is made only once when the computer provides a communication
request. If communication is disabled during operation due to signal cable breakage etc., the inverter cannot be stopped.
When the communication check time interval has elapsed, the inverter output will be shut off (E.PUE). Turn the RES
signal of the inverter ON or shut off the power supply to coast the motor to a stop.
• If communication is broken due to signal cable breakage, computer fault etc., the inverter does not detect such a fault.
This should be fully noted.

242 3. RS-485 Communication

3.4 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication)
 Setting items and set data
• After completion of parameter settings, set the instruction codes and data, then start communication from the computer to 1
allow various types of operation control and monitoring.
Number of data
Read/ Instruction
Item
write code
Data description digits
(format)*1
2
H0000: Network operation
H0001: External operation, External operation (JOG operation)
Read H7B 4 digits (B and E/D)
H0002: PU operation, External/PU combined operation, PUJOG
operation
3
Operation mode
H0000: Network operation
Write HFB H0001: External operation 4 digits (A and C/D)
H0002: PU operation 4
Output
frequency /
H0000 to HFFFF: Output frequency in 0.01 Hz increments (The display
rotations per 4 digits (B and E (E2)
Read H6F can be changed to the rotations per minute (machine speed) using Pr.37
minute
(machine
and Pr.53. Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
/ D) 5
speed)
Output current Read H70 H0000 to HFFFF: Output current (hexadecimal) in 0.01 A increments 4 digits (B and E/D)
Output voltage Read H71 H0000 to HFFFF: Output voltage (hexadecimal) in 0.1 V increments 4 digits (B and E/D) 6
Special H0000 to HFFFF: Data of the monitor item selected with the instruction 4 digits (B and E (E2)
Read H72
monitor code HF3. / D)
Special Read H73 2 digits (B and E1/D)
monitor
Write HF3
Monitor selection data (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual
(Function) for details on selection No.) 2 digits (A1 and C/D)
7
selection No.
H0000 to HFFFF: Two fault records per code. (For details on fault record
read data, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Maintenance).)
b15 b8 b7 b0 8
H74 Second latest fault Latest fault
Monitor

H75 Fourth latest fault Third latest fault

9
H76 Sixth latest fault Fifth latest fault

H77 Eighth latest fault Seventh latest fault

H78 Tenth latest fault Ninth latest fault

10
Fault record Read H74 to H78 4 digits (B and E/D)
For instruction code H74,
read data H30A0
b15 b8 b7 b0
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

Second latest fault Latest fault

(H30) (HA0)

Second latest fault ...... THT

Latest fault ...... OPT

Operation
command Write HF9 4 digits (A and C/D)
(extended)
Control input commands such as the Forward rotation command (STF)
Operation
Write HFA signal and the Reverse rotation command (STR) signal can be set. (For 2 digits (A1 and C/D)
command
the details, refer to page 246.)
Operation
command Write HFE 4 digits (A and C/D)
(extended 2)
Inverter status
Read H79 4 digits (B and E/D)
monitor (extended)
Inverter status The states of the output signals such as the Forward rotation output,
Read H7A 2 digits (B and E1/D)
monitor Reverse rotation output, and Inverter running (RUN) signals can be
Inverter status monitored. (For the details, refer to page 246.)
monitor (extended Read H7E 4 digits (B and E/D)
2)

3. RS-485 Communication
3.4 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication)
243
 Number of data
Read/ Instruction
Item Data description digits
write code
(format)*1
Set frequency Read the set frequency or rotations per minute (machine speed) from the
H6D
(RAM) RAM or EEPROM.
4 digits (B and E (E2)
Read H0000 to HFFFF: Set frequency in 0.01 Hz increments (The display can
Set frequency / D)
H6E be changed to the rotations per minute (machine speed) using Pr.37 and
(EEPROM)
Pr.53. Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
Set frequency Write the set frequency or rotations per minute (machine speed) into the
HED
(RAM) RAM or EEPROM.
H0000 to HE678 (0 to 590.00 Hz): Frequency in 0.01 Hz increments.
(The display can be changed to the rotations per minute (machine speed) 4 digits (A (A2) and
Write
Set frequency using Pr.37 and Pr.53. Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual C/D)
HEE (Function).)
(RAM, EEPROM)
To change the set frequency consecutively, write data to the RAM of the
inverter. (Instruction code: HED)
H9696: Inverter reset
As the inverter is reset at the start of communication by the computer, the 4 digits (A and C/D)
inverter cannot send reply data back to the computer.
Inverter reset Write HFD H9966: Inverter reset
After the computer correctly starts communication and send data to the
4 digits (A and D)
inverter, the inverter returns the ACK signal to the computer before being
reset.
Fault history clear Write HF4 H9696: Fault history is cleared. 4 digits (A and C/D)
All parameters return to initial values.
Whether to clear communication parameters or not can be selected
according to the data.
• Parameter clear
H9696: Parameters including communication parameters are cleared.
H5A5A: Parameters other than communication parameters are
cleared.*3
• All parameter clear
H9966: Parameters including communication parameters are cleared.
Parameter clear /
Write HFC H55AA: Parameters other than communication parameters are 4 digits (A and C/D)
All parameter clear
cleared.*3
For the details of whether or not to clear parameters, refer to the FR-E800
Instruction Manual (Function).
When a clear is performed with H9696 or H9966, communication related
parameter settings also return to the initial values. When resuming the
operation, set the parameters again. Performing a clear will clear the
instruction code HEC, HF3, and HFF settings.
Only H9966 and H55AA (All parameter clear) are valid when a password
is set (refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function)).
Read H00 to H6B Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function) for the instruction 4 digits (B and E/D)
Parameter codes, and write and/or read parameter values as required. When setting
Write H80 to HEB 4 digits (A and C/D)
Pr.100 and later, set the link parameter extended setting.
Read H7F Parameter settings are changed according to the instruction code 2 digits (B and E1/D)
Link parameter settings.
extended setting Write HFF For details of the settings, refer to the instruction code list in the FR-E800 2 digits (A1 and C/D)
Instruction Manual (Function).
Second parameter Read H6C When setting the calibration parameters*4 2 digits (B and E1/D)
changing H00: Frequency*5
(instruction code Write HEC H01: Parameter-set analog value 2 digits (A1 and C/D)
HFF = 1, 9) H02: Analog value input from terminal
Read/ Available for writing 2 commands, and monitoring 2 items for reading data.
Multi command
write
HF0
(Refer to page 247 for details.) 10 digits (*2/D)
The inverter model can be read in ASCII code.
"H20" (blank code) is set for blank area. 20 digits (B and E3/
Model Read H7C
Example) FR-E820-1: D)
Product profile

H46, H52, H2D, H45, H38, H32, H30, H2D, H31, H20, H20 ... H20
The capacity in the inverter model can be read in ASCII code.
Data is read in increments of 0.1 kW, and rounds down to 0.01 kW
Capacity Read H7D increments. 6 digits (B and E2/D)
"H20" (blank code) is set for blank area.
Example) 0.75K: " 7" (H20, H20, H20, H20, H20, H37)
*1 Refer to page 237 for data formats (A, A1, A2, B, C, D, E, E1, E2, E3, F).
*2 Refer to page 247 for multi command data formats.
*3 Turning OFF the power supply while clearing parameters with H5A5A or H55AA returns the communication parameter settings to the initial
settings.

244 3. RS-485 Communication

3.4 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication)
 *4 Refer to the following calibration parameter list for details on the calibration parameters.
*5 The gain frequency can be also written using Pr.125 (instruction code: H99) or Pr.126 (instruction code: H9A).

NOTE
1
• Set 65520 (HFFF0) as a parameter value "8888" and 65535 (HFFFF) as "9999".
• For the instruction codes HFF, HEC, and HF3, their values once written are held, but cleared to zero when an inverter reset
or all clear is performed. 2
• When a 32-bit parameter setting or monitor item is read and the value to be read exceeds HFFFF, HFFFF is returned.

Example) When reading the C3 (Pr.902) and C6 (Pr.904) settings from the inverter of station No. 0. 3
Computer send data Inverter send data Description
a ENQ 00 FF 0 01 7D ACK 00 "H01" is set in the extended link parameter.
b ENQ 00 EC 0 01 79 ACK 00 "H01" is set in the second parameter changing. 4
c ENQ 00 5E 0 0A STX 00 0000 ETX 20 C3 (Pr.902) is read. 0% is read.
d ENQ 00 60 0 F6 STX 00 0000 ETX 20 C6 (Pr.904) is read. 0% is read.

To read/write C3 (Pr.902) or C6 (Pr.904) after inverter reset or parameter clear, execute from (a) again. 5
 List of calibration parameters
Pr. Name
Instruction code 6
Read Write Extended
C2 (902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency 5E DE 1
C3 (902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 5E DE 1
125 (903) Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 5F DF 1
7
C4 (903) Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 5F DF 1
C5 (904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency 60 E0 1
C6 (904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 60 E0 1 8
126 (905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 61 E1 1
C7 (905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 61 E1 1
C12 (917)*1 Terminal 1 bias frequency (speed) 11 91 9
C13 (917)*1 Terminal 1 bias (speed) 11 91 9
9
C14 (918)*1 Terminal 1 gain frequency (speed) 12 92 9
*1 Terminal 1 gain (speed) 12 92 9
C15 (918)
C16 (919)*1 Terminal 1 bias command (torque) 13 93 9
10
C17 (919)*1 Terminal 1 bias (torque) 13 93 9
C18 (920)*1 Terminal 1 gain command (torque) 14 94 9
C19 (920)*1 Terminal 1 gain (torque) 14 94 9
C38 (932) Terminal 4 bias command (torque) 20 A0 9
C39 (932) Terminal 4 bias (torque) 20 A0 9
C40 (933) Terminal 4 gain command (torque) 21 A1 9
C41 (933) Terminal 4 gain (torque) 21 A1 9
C42 (934) PID display bias coefficient 22 A2 9
C43 (934) PID display bias analog value 22 A2 9
C44 (935) PID display gain coefficient 23 A3 9
C45 (935) PID display gain analog value 23 A3 9

*1 Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.

3. RS-485 Communication
3.4 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication)
245
  Operation command
Instruction Bit
Item Description Example
code length
b0: Terminal 4 input selection
b1: Forward rotation command
b2: Reverse rotation command [Example 1] H02 Forward rotation
b3: RL (Low-speed operation b7 b0
command)*1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
Operation b4: RM (Middle-speed operation
HFA 8 bits
command
command)*1 [Example 2] H00 Stop
b5: RH (High-speed operation b7 b0
command)*1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b6: Second function selection
b7: MRS (Output stop)*1
b0: Terminal 4 input selection
b1: Forward rotation command
b2: Reverse rotation command
b3: RL (Low-speed operation
command)*1 [Example 1] H0002 Forward rotation
b4: RM (Middle-speed operation b15 b0
command)*1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
Operation b5: RH (High-speed operation
command HF9 16 bits [Example 2] H0804 Low-speed reverse operation
(extended) command)*1
(When Pr.184 RES terminal function selection is set to "0")
b6: Second function selection
b7: MRS (Output stop)*1 b15 b0
b8: JOG operation selection 2 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
b9: —
b10: —
b11: RES (Inverter reset)*1*2
b12 to b15: –
b0: NET X1 (—)*1
b1: NET X2 (—)*1 [Example] H0001 Low-speed operation
Operation *1 (When Pr.185 NET X1 terminal function selection is set to "0")
command HFE 16 bits b2: NET X3 (—)
(extended 2) b3: NET X4 (—)*1 b15 b0

b4: NET X5 (—)*1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

b5 to b15: –
*1 The signal within parentheses ( ) is the initial status. The function changes depending on the setting of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection). For details, refer to the description of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) in the FR-E800 Instruction Manual
(Function).
*2 Resetting cannot be controlled over a network, so in the initial status bit 11 is invalid. To use bit 11, change the signal by Pr.184 RES terminal
function selection. (A reset can be executed by the instruction code HFD.)
For details of Pr.184, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).

 Inverter status monitor

Instruction Bit
Item Description Example
code length
b0: RUN (Inverter running)*1
b1: Forward running [Example 1] H03 During forward
rotation
b2: Reverse running b7 b0
Inverter b3: Up to frequency 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
status H7A 8 bits b4: Overload alarm
[Example 2] H80 Stop at fault
monitor b5: — occurrence
b6: FU (Output frequency b7 b0
detection)*1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b7: ABC (Fault)*1

246 3. RS-485 Communication

3.4 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication)
 Instruction Bit
Item Description Example
code length
b0: RUN (Inverter running)*1
1
b1: Forward running
b2: Reverse running
b3: Up to frequency
b4: Overload alarm
[Example 1] H0003
b15
During forward rotation
b0
2
Inverter b5: — 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
status b6: FU (Output frequency
H79 16 bits
monitor detection)*1
(extended)
b7: ABC (Fault)*1
[Example 2] H8080
b15
Stop at fault occurrence
b0 3
b8: ABC2 (–)*1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
*2
b9: Safety monitor output 2
b10 to b14: –
b15: Fault occurrence
4
b0: NET Y1 (—)*1 [Example] H0001 Stop at fault occurrence
Inverter
b1: NET Y2 (—)*1
status
H7E 16 bits b2: NET Y3 (—)*1
(When "99 (positive logic)" or "199 (negative logic)" is set in
Pr.193 NET Y1 terminal function selection) 5
monitor
b15 b0
(extended 2) b3: NET Y4 (—)*1
b4 to b15: – 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

*1 The signal within parentheses ( ) is the initial status. The function changes depending on the setting of Pr.190 to Pr.197 (Output terminal 6
function selection). For details, refer to the description of Pr.190 to Pr.197 (Output terminal function selection) in the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).
*2 Fixed to 0 when the FR-E8TR or the FR-E8TE7 is installed.

 Multi command (HF0)

7
• Sending data format from computer to inverter
Number of characters 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Inverter Time Send Receive
Instruction code CR/
ENQ station delay data data Data 1*4 Data 2*4 Sum check
number
(HF0) *1 type*2 type*3
LF*7 9
• Reply data format from inverter to computer (No data error detected)
Number of characters
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
10
Inverter Send Receive Error Error
CR/
STX station data data code code Data 1*5 Data 2*5 ETX Sum check
LF*7
number type*2 type*3 1*6 2*6
*1 Set the delay time. When Pr.123 PU communication waiting time setting is set to other than "9999", create the communication request data
without "delay time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)
*2 Specify the data type of sending data (from computer to inverter). To use the data type 4, specify "4" for both the send data type and the receive
data type.
*3 Specify the data type of reply data (from inverter to computer). To use the data type 4, specify "4" for both the send data type and the receive
data type.
*4 Combination of data 1 and data 2 for sending

Data type Data 1 Data 2 Remarks

Operation command
0 Set frequency (RAM)
(extended) Operation command (extended) is the same as instruction code HF9.
Operation command Set frequency (RAM, (Refer to page 246.)
1
(extended) EEPROM)
Set the special monitor selection No. in the monitor codes 1 and 2
4 Monitor code 1 Monitor code 2
(set "00" in the upper 2 digits).
Operation command Operation command
5
(extended) (extended 2) Operation command (extended) is the same as instruction code HF9.
Operation command (Refer to page 246.)
6 Set frequency (RAM)
(extended 2) Operation command (extended 2) is the same as instruction code
Operation command Set frequency (RAM, HFE. (Refer to page 246.)
7
(extended 2) EEPROM)

3. RS-485 Communication
3.4 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication)
247
 *5 Combination of data 1 and data 2 for reply

Data type Data 1 Data 2 Remarks

Output frequency /
Inverter status monitor The inverter status monitor (extended) data is the same as the data
0 rotations per minute
(extended) of instruction code H79. (Refer to page 246.)
(machine speed)
The monitor item specified in instruction code HF3 is returned for the
Inverter status monitor special monitor. (Refer to page 246.)
1 Special monitor
(extended)
Monitor items specified by the send data type 4 are returned for the
monitor 1 and monitor 2.
4 Monitor 1 Monitor 2 When the send data type is other than "4", the current monitor value
is returned for the monitor 1 and the output frequency monitor value
is returned for the monitor 2.
Inverter status monitor Inverter status monitor The inverter status monitor (extended) data is the same as the data
5
(extended) (extended 2) of instruction code H79. (Refer to page 246.)
Output frequency / The inverter status monitor (extended 2) data is the same as the data
Inverter status monitor
6 rotations per minute of instruction code H7E. (Refer to page 246.)
(extended 2)
(machine speed) The monitor item specified in instruction code HF3 is returned for the
Inverter status monitor special monitor. (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual
7 Special monitor (Function).)
(extended 2)

*6 The error code for sending data 1 is set in error code 1, and the error code for sending data 2 is set in error code 2. The mode error (HA), instruction
code error (HB), data range error (HC) or no error (HF) is returned. (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Maintenance) for the details of the
error codes.)
*7 CR+LF code: When a computer transmits data to the inverter, some computers automatically provide either one or both of the codes CR (carriage
return) and LF (line feed) at the end of a data group. In this case, the same setting is required for data sent from the inverter to the computer. Use
Pr.124 PU communication CR/LF selection for the CR+LF code setting.

248 3. RS-485 Communication

3.4 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication)
3.5 MODBUS RTU 1

Operation or parameter setting via communication is possible using the MODBUS RTU communication protocol through the
PU connector on the inverter. 2
To use MODBUS RTU, set "1" in Pr.549 Protocol selection.
Setting
Pr. Name Initial value
range
Description 3
0 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link)
549
N000
Protocol selection 0 1*1 MODBUS RTU protocol
2 BACnet MS/TP protocol 4
0 Broadcast communication
117 PU communication Specify the inverter station number.
0
N020 station number 1 to 247 Enter the inverter station numbers when two or more inverters are
connected to one personal computer. 5
48, 96, 192, Select the communication speed.
118 PU communication
N021 speed
192 384*1, 576, The setting value × 100 equals the communication speed.
768, 1152 For example, enter 96 to set the communication speed of 9600 bps.
PU communication 0 Stop bit length 1 bit 6
N023 1 Valid when Pr.N024 (Pr.120) = "0"
stop bit length 1 Stop bit length 2 bits
0 Stop bit length 1 bit
PU communication
119 stop bit length / data 1
1 Stop bit length 2 bits
Valid when Pr.120 = "0" 7
10 Stop bit length 1 bit
length
11 Stop bit length 2 bits
Parity check disabled.
0 Stop bit length selectable between 1 bit and 2 bits (depending on the 8
setting of Pr.119).
120 PU communication
2 Parity check (odd parity) enabled.
N024 parity check 1
Stop bit length: 1 bit.

2
Parity check (even parity) enabled. 9
Stop bit length: 1 bit.
RS-485 communication is enabled. However, the inverter output is
0 shut off if the operation mode is changed to the one for the selected
command interface. 10
122 PU communication Set the interval of the communication check (signal loss detection)
0
N026 check time interval 0.1 to 999.8 time
s If a no-communication state persists for longer than the permissible
time, the inverter output will be shut off.
9999 No communication check (signal loss detection)
343 Communication error Displays the communication error count during MODBUS RTU
0 (0 to 999)
N080 count communication. Read-only.
*1 When Pr.549 = "1 (MODBUS RTU)" and Pr.118 = "384 (38400 bps)", the parameter unit is not available. To use the parameter unit, set a value
other than "384" in Pr.118 and perform an inverter reset.

NOTE
• If MODBUS RTU communication is performed from the client to the address 0 (station number 0), the data is broadcasted,
and the inverter does not send any reply to the client. To obtain replies from the inverter, set Pr.117 PU communication
station number ≠ "0 (initial value)".
• Some functions are disabled in broadcast communication. (Refer to page 251.)
• If a communication option is installed with Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection = "9999 (initial value)",
commands (operation commands) transmitted through the PU connector become invalid. (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).)
• Always reset the inverter after making the initial settings of the parameters. After changing the communication-related
parameters, communication cannot be made until the inverter is reset.

 Communication specifications
• The communication specifications are shown in the following table.
Item Description Related parameter
Communication protocol MODBUS RTU protocol Pr.549

3. RS-485 Communication
3.5 MODBUS RTU
249
 Item Description Related parameter
Conforming standard EIA-485 (RS-485) —
Number of connectable units 1: N (maximum 32 units), setting is 0 to 247 stations Pr.117
Communication speed Selected among 4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/76800/115200 bps. Pr.118
Control procedure Asynchronous method —
Communication method Half-duplex system —
Character system Binary (fixed at 8 bits) —
Start bit 1 bit —
Stop bit length Select from the following three types:
Communication No parity check, stop bit length 1 bit / 2 bits (depends on the setting of Pr.119) Pr.119
specifications Parity check Odd parity check, stop bit length 1 bit Pr.120
Even parity check, stop bit length 1 bit
Error check CRC code check —
Terminator Not available —
Time delay setting Not available —

 Outline
• The MODBUS communication protocol was developed by Modicon for programmable controllers.
• The MODBUS protocol uses exclusive message frames to perform serial communication between a client and servers.
These exclusive message frames are provided with a feature called "functions" that allows data to be read or written. These
functions can be used to read or write parameters from the inverter, write input commands to the inverter or check the
inverter's operating status, for example. This product classifies the data of each inverter into holding register area (register
address 40001 to 49999). The client can communicate with inverters (servers) by accessing pre-assigned holding register
addresses.

NOTE
• There are two serial transmission modes, the ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) mode and the RTU
(Remote Terminal Unit) mode. However, this product supports only the RTU mode, which transfers 1 byte data (8 bits) as it
is. Also, only communication protocol is defined by the MODBUS protocol. Physical layers are not stipulated.

 Message format
Inverter response time
Query communication (Refer to the following table for the
data check time)
Query Message
Programmable controller
(client)
Inverter (server) Response Message
Data absence time
(3.5 bytes or more)
Broadcast communication

Query Message
Programmable controller
(client)
Inverter (server) No Response

• Data check time

Item Check time
Monitoring, operation command, frequency setting (RAM) < 20 ms
Frequency setting (EEPROM) < 50 ms
< Approximately 50
Reading/writing parameters
ms
Parameter clear / All parameter clear Less than 5 s
Reset command No reply

• Query
A message is sent to the server (the inverter) having the address specified by the client.
• Normal Response
After the query from the client is received, the server executes the request function, and returns the corresponding normal
response to the client.

250 3. RS-485 Communication

3.5 MODBUS RTU
 • Error Response
When an invalid function code, address or data is received by the server, the error response is returned to the client.
This response is appended with an error code that indicates the reason why the request from the client could not be
1
executed.
This response cannot be returned for errors, detected by the hardware, frame error and CRC check error.
• Broadcast
2
The client can broadcast messages to all servers by specifying address 0. All servers that receive a message from the
client execute the requested function. With this type of communication, servers do not return a response to the client.
3
NOTE
• During broadcast communication, functions are executed regarded of the set inverter station number (Pr.117).

4
 Message frame (protocol)
• Communication method
Basically, the client sends a query message (inquiry), and servers return a response message (response). At normal 5
communication, the device address and function code are copied as they are, and at erroneous communication (illegal
function code or data code), bit 7 (= H80) of the function code is turned ON, and the error code is set at data bytes.
Query message from client 6
Device Address Device Address
Function Code Function Code
7
Eight-Bit Eight-Bit
Data Bytes Data Bytes

Error Check Error Check

Response message from server
8
Message frames comprise the four message fields shown in the figures above.
A server recognizes message data as one message when a 3.5 character long no-data time (T1: start/end) is added before 9
and after the data.
• Details of protocol
The following table explains the four message fields.
10
Start Address Function Data CRC check End
L H
T1 8 bits 8 bits n × 8 bits T1
8 bits 8 bits

Message field Description

"0 to 247" can be set in the single-byte (8-bit) length field. Set "0" when sending broadcast messages
(instructions to all addresses), and "1 to 247" to send messages to individual servers.
Address field
The response from the server also contains the address set by the client. The value set in Pr.117 PU
communication station number is the server address.
"1 to 255" can be set as the function code in the single-byte (8-bit) length filed. The client sets the function to
be sent to the server as the request, and the server performs the requested operation. Refer to the function
code list for details of the supported function codes. An error response is generated when a function code other
Function field
than those in the function code list is set.
The normal response from the server contains the function code set by the client. The error response contains
H80 and the function code.
The format changes according the function code. (Refer to page 252.) The data, for example, includes the byte
Data field
count, number of bytes, and accessing content of holding registers.
Errors in the received message frame are detected. Errors are detected in the CRC check, and the 2 bytes
length data is appended to the message. When the CRC is appended to the message, the lower bytes of the
CRC are appended first, followed by the upper bytes.
CRC check field
The CRC value is calculated by the sender that appends the CRC to the message. The receiver recalculates
the CRC while the message is being received, and compares the calculation result against the actual value
that was received in the error check field. If the two values do not match, the result is treated as an error.

3. RS-485 Communication
3.5 MODBUS RTU
251
  Function code list
Message
Read/ Broadcast format
Function name Code Outline
write communication reference
page
The data of the holding registers is read.
The various data of the inverter can be read from MODBUS
registers.
Read holding System environmental variable (Refer to page 257.)
Read H03 Not available page 252
registers Monitor code (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
Fault history (Refer to page 259.)
Model information monitor (Refer to page 259.)
Inverter parameters (Refer to page 258.)
Data is written to a holding register.
Data can be written to MODBUS registers to output instructions to
Write single register Write H06 the inverter or set parameters. Available page 253
System environmental variable (Refer to page 257.)
Inverter parameters (Refer to page 258.)
Functions are diagnosed. (Communication check only)
A communication check can be made since the query message is
Diagnostics Read H08 sent and the query message is returned as it is as the return Not available page 253
message (subfunction code H00 function).
Subfunction code H00 (Return query data).
Data is written to multiple consecutive holding registers.
Data can be written to consecutive multiple MODBUS registers to
Write multiple
Write H10 output instructions to the inverter or set parameters. Available page 254
registers
System environmental variable (Refer to page 257.)
Inverter parameters (Refer to page 258.)
The number of registers that were successfully accessed by the
previous communication is read.
Queries by function codes H03, H06, and H10 are supported.
Read holding
Read H46 The number and start address of holding registers successfully Not available page 255
register access log
accessed by the previous communication are returned.
"0" is returned for both the number and start address for queries
other than function codes H03, H06, and H10.

 Read holding registers (reading data of holding registers) (H03 or 03)

• Query message
a. Server address b. Function code c. Starting address d. Quantity of registers CRC check
H03 H L H L L H
(8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
• Normal response (Response message)
a. Server address b. Function code e. Byte count f. Register value CRC check
H03 H L ... L H
(8 bits) (8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (n × 16 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
• Query message setting
Message Description
Set the address to send messages to. Broadcast communication is not possible. (Invalid when "0"
a Server address
is set.)
b Function code Set H03.
Set the holding register address from which to start reading the data.
Starting address = start register address (decimal) - 40001
c Starting address
For example, when starting register address 0001 is set, the data of holding register address 40002
is read.
d Quantity of registers Set the number of holding registers for reading data. Data can be read from up to 125 registers.

• Content of normal response

Message Description
The setting range is H02 to HFA (2 to 250).
e Byte count
Twice the number of reads specified by (d) is set.
The amount of data specified by (d) is set. Read data is output Hi bytes first followed by Lo bytes,
f Register value and is arranged as follows: data of start address, data of start address+1, data of start address+2,
and so forth.

252 3. RS-485 Communication

3.5 MODBUS RTU
 Example) Read the register values of 41004 (Pr.4) to 41006 (Pr.6) from server address 17 (H11).
Query message
1
Server address Function code Starting address Quantity of registers CRC check
H11 H03 H03 HEB H00 H03 H77 H2B
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
Normal response (Response message)
2
Server address Function code Byte count Register value CRC check
H11
(8 bits)
H03
(8 bits)
H06
(8 bits)
H17
(8 bits)
H70
(8 bits)
H0B
(8 bits)
HB8
(8 bits)
H03
(8 bits)
HE8
(8 bits)
H2C
(8 bits)
HE6
(8 bits)
3
Read value
Register 41004 (Pr.4): H1770 (60.00 Hz)
Register 41005 (Pr.5): H0BB8 (30.00 Hz)
4
Register 41006 (Pr.6): H03E8 (10.00 Hz)

 Write single register (writing data to holding registers) (H06 or 06) 5

• The content of the system environmental variables and inverter parameters (refer to page 257) assigned to the holding
register area can be written.
• Query message 6
b. Function
a. Server address c. Register address d. Register value CRC check
code

(8 bits)
H06
(8 bits)
H
(8 bits)
L
(8 bits)
H
(8 bits)
L
(8 bits)
L
(8 bits)
H
(8 bits)
7
• Normal response (Response message)

a. Server address
b. Function
code
c. Register address d. Register value CRC check 8
H06 H L H L L H
(8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
• Query message setting 9
Message Description
a Server address Set the address to send messages to. Setting "0" enables broadcast communication.
b Function code Set H06. 10
Set the holding register address to write data to.
c Register address Register address = holding register address (decimal) - 40001
For example, when register address 0001 is set, data is written to holding register address 40002.
d Register value Set the data to write to the holding register. Write data is fixed at 2 bytes.
• Content of normal response
The contents in the normal response (a to d, including the CRC check) are the same as those in the query messages.
In the case of broadcast communication, no response is returned.

 Example) Write 60 Hz (H1770) to 40014 (set frequency RAM) of server address 5 (H05).
Query message
Server address Function code Register address Register value CRC check
H05 H06 H00 H0D H17 H70 H17 H99
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
Normal response (Response message)
The same data as those in the query message

NOTE
• With broadcast communication, no response is generated even if a query is executed, so when the next query is made, it must
be made after waiting for the inverter data processing time after the previous query is executed.

 Diagnostics (diagnosis of functions) (H08 or 08)

• A communication check can be made since the query message is sent and the query message is returned as it is as the
return message (subfunction code H00 function). Subfunction code H00 (Return query data)

3. RS-485 Communication
3.5 MODBUS RTU
253
 • Query message
b. Function
a. Server address c. Sub-function d. Data CRC check
code
H08 H00 H00 H L L H
(8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
• Normal response (Response message)
b. Function
a. Server address c. Sub-function d. Data CRC check
code
H08 H00 H00 H L L H
(8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
• Query message setting
Message Description
Set the address to send messages to. Broadcast communication is not possible. (Invalid when "0"
a Server address
is set.)
b Function code Set H08.
c Sub-function Set H0000.
d Data Any 2-byte long data can be set. The setting range is H0000 to HFFFF.
• Content of normal response
The contents in the normal response (a to d, including the CRC check) are the same as those in the query messages.

NOTE
• With broadcast communication, no response is generated even if a query is executed, so when the next query is made, it must
be made after waiting for the inverter data processing time after the previous query is executed.

 Write multiple registers (writing data to multiple holding registers) (H10

or 16)
• Data can be written to multiple holding registers.
• Query message
a.
b. Function c. Starting d. Quantity of
Server e. Byte count f. Register value CRC check
code address registers
address
H10 H L H L H L ... L H
(8 bits) (8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (n × 2 × 8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
• Normal response (Response message)
b. Function
a. Server address c. Starting address d. Quantity of registers CRC check
code
H10 H L H L L H
(8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
• Query message setting
Message Description
a Server address Set the address to send messages to. Setting "0" enables broadcast communication.
b Function code Set H10.
Set the holding register address from which to start writing the data.
c Starting address Starting address = start register address (decimal) - 40001
For example, when starting address 0001 is set, data is written to holding register 40002.
d Quantity of registers Set the number of holding registers for writing data. Data can be written to up to 125 registers.
e Byte count The setting range is H02 to HFA (2 to 250). Set twice the value specified by d.
Set the amount of data specified by d. Write data is output Hi bytes first followed by Lo bytes, and
f Register value is arranged as follows: data of start address, data of start address+1, data of start address+2, and
so forth.
• Content of normal response
The contents in the normal response (a to d, including the CRC check) are the same as those in the query messages.

254 3. RS-485 Communication

3.5 MODBUS RTU
 Example) Write 0.5 s (H05) to 41007 (Pr.7) and 1 s (H0A) to 41008 (Pr.8) of server address 25
(H19).
Query message
1
Server Function Quantity of
Starting address Byte count Register value CRC check
address code registers
H19 H10 H03 HEE H00 H02 H04 H00 H05 H00 H0A H86 H3D
2
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
Normal response (Response message)
Server address Function code Starting address Quantity of registers CRC check
3
H19 H10 H03 HEE H00 H02 H22 H61
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

 Read holding register access log (H46 or 70) 4

• Queries by function codes H03, H06, and H10 are supported. The number and start address of holding registers
successfully accessed by the previous communication are returned. "0" is returned for both the number and start address
for queries other than the function codes above.
5
• Query message

a. Server address
b. Function
code
CRC check 6
H46 L H
(8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

• Normal response (Response message)

7
b. Function
a. Server address c. Starting address d. No. of points CRC check
code

(8 bits)
H46 H L H L L H 8
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

• Query message setting

Message Description
9
Set the address to send messages to. Broadcast communication is not possible. (Invalid when "0"
a Server address
is set.)
b Function code Set H46. 10
• Content of normal response
Message Description
The start address of the holding register that was successfully accessed is returned.
Starting address = start register address (decimal) - 40001
c Starting address
For example, when starting address 0001 is returned, the holding register address that was
successfully accessed is 40002.
d No. of points The number of holding registers that were successfully accessed is returned.

 Example) Read the successful register start address and number of successful accesses from
server address 25 (H19).
Query message
Function
Server address CRC check
code
H19 H46 H8B HD2
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

Normal response (Response message)

Function
Server address Starting address No. of points CRC check
code
H19 H10 H03 HEE H00 H02 H22 H61
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

The number of holding registers that were successfully accessed was returned as two with the start address 41007 (Pr.7).

3. RS-485 Communication
3.5 MODBUS RTU
255
  Error response
• An error response is returned if the query message received from the client contains an illegal function, address or data.
No response is returned for parity, CRC, overrun, framing, and busy errors.

NOTE
• No response is also returned in the case of broadcast communication.

• Error response (Response message)

b. Function
a. Server address c. Exception code CRC check
code
H80 + Function L H
(8 bits) (8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

Message Description
a Server address Set the address received from the client.
b Function code The function code requested by the client and H80 is set.
c Exception code The codes in the following table are set.

• Error code list

Code Error item Error description
01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION The query message from the client has a function code that cannot be handled by the server.
The query message from the client has a register address that cannot be handled by the
02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS*1 server. (No parameter, parameter cannot be read, parameter cannot be written)
The query message from the client has data that cannot be handled by the server. (Out of
03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE
parameter write range, a mode is specified, or other error)

*1 An error response is not returned in the following cases.

(a) Function code H03 (reading data of holding registers)
When the quantity of registers is specified as one or more and there are one or more holding registers from which data can be read.
(b) Function code H10 (writing data to multiple holding registers)
When the quantity of registers is specified as one or more and there are one or more holding registers to which data can be written.
In other words, when function code H03 or H10 is used and multiple holding registers are accessed, an error response is not returned even if a
nonexistent holding register or holding register that cannot be read or written from/to is accessed.

NOTE
• An error response is returned if none of the accessed holding registers exist. When an accessed holding register does not
exist, the read value is 0 and the written data is invalid.

• Error detection of message data

The following errors are detected in message data from the client. The inverter output is not shut off even if an error is
detected.

Error check items

Error item Error description Inverter operation
The data received by the inverter is different from the
Parity error
specified parity (Pr.120 setting).
The data received by the inverter is different from the stop
Framing error
bit length (Pr.119/Pr.120) setting.
The next data has been sent by the client before the
Overrun error
inverter completes receiving the preceding data. When this error occurs, Pr.343 is
The data length of the message frame is checked, and an incremented by one.
error is generated if the received data length is less than When this error occurs, the LF signal is
4 bytes. output.
Message frame error
When a receive buffer overflow occurs, an error is
generated if a received message frame is addressed to
the own station or broadcasted.
An error is generated if the data in the message frame
CRC check error
does not match the calculation result.

256 3. RS-485 Communication

3.5 MODBUS RTU
 NOTE
• The LF signal can be assigned to an output terminal by setting any of Pr.190 to Pr.197 (Output terminal function selection). 1
Changing the terminal assignment may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

 MODBUS register 2
• The following shows the MODBUS registers for system environment variables (read/write), monitor codes (read),
parameters (read/write), fault history data (read/write), and model information monitor items (read).
• System environment variables 3
Register Definition Read/write Remarks
40002 Inverter reset Write Any value
40003 Parameter clear Write Set H965A. 4
40004 All parameter clear Write Set H99AA.
40006 Parameter clear*1 Write Set H5A96.
40007 All parameter clear *1 Write Set HAA99. 5
40008 Inverter status / control input command Read/write Refer to the following.
(extended)*2
40009
40010
Inverter status / control input command*2 Read/write
Read/write
Refer to the following.
Refer to the following.
6
Operation mode / inverter setting*3
40014 Set frequency (RAM value) Read/write (The display can be changed to the rotations per
40015 Set frequency (EEPROM value) Write minute (machine speed) using Pr.37 and Pr.53. Refer
to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).) 7
*1 Settings in the communication parameters are not cleared.
*2 The data is written as a control input command for writing.

*3
The data is read as the inverter status for reading.
The data is written as an operation mode setting for writing.
8
The data is read as the operation mode status for reading.

• Inverter status / control input command, and inverter status / control input command (extended) 9
Definition Definition
Bit Bit
Control input command Inverter status Control input command Inverter status
0 Stop command RUN (Inverter running)*2 0 NET X1 (—)*1 NET Y1 (0)*2 10
1 Forward rotation command Forward running 1 NET X2 (—)*1 NET Y2 (0)*2
2 Reverse rotation command Reverse running 2 NET X3 (—)*1 NET Y3 (0)*2
RH (High-speed operation
3 Up to frequency 3 NET X4 (—)*1 NET Y4 (0)*2
command)*1
RM (Middle-speed operation
4 Overload alarm 4 NET X5 (—)*1 0
command)*1
RL (Low-speed operation
5 0 5 — 0
command)*1
FU (Output frequency
6 JOG operation selection 2 6 — 0
detection)*2
7 Second function selection ABC (Fault)*2 7 — 0
8 Terminal 4 input selection ABC2 (0)*2 8 — 0
9 — *3 9 — 0
Safety monitor output 2
10 MRS (Output stop)*1 0 10 — 0
11 — 0 11 — 0
12 RES (Inverter reset)*1 0 12 — 0
13 — 0 13 — 0
14 — 0 14 — 0
15 — Fault occurrence 15 — 0

*1 The signal within parentheses ( ) is the initial status. The function changes depending on the setting of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection).
For details, refer to the description of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) in the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
The signals assigned to the input terminals may be valid or invalid in the NET operation mode. (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual
(Function).)

3. RS-485 Communication
3.5 MODBUS RTU
257
 *2 The signal within parentheses ( ) is the initial status. The function changes depending on the setting of Pr.190 to Pr.197 (Output terminal
function selection).
For details, refer to the description of Pr.190 to Pr.197 (Output terminal function selection) in the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*3 Fixed to 0 when the FR-E8TR or the FR-E8TE7 is installed.

• Operation mode / inverter setting

Mode Read value Write value
EXT H0000 H0010*1
PU H0001 H0011*1
EXT
H0002 —
JOG
PU
H0003 —
JOG
NET H0004 H0014
PU + EXT H0005 —

*1 Writing is available depending on the Pr.79 and Pr.340 settings. For details, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
Restrictions in each operation mode conform with the computer link specification.

• Monitor code
For details of the register numbers and the monitor items, refer to the description of Pr.52 in the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).
• Parameters
Pr. Register Name Read/write Remarks
For details on parameter names,
41000 to refer to the parameter list in the FR-
0 to 999 Read/write The parameter number + 41000 is the register number.
41999 E800 Instruction Manual
(Function).
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
C2 (902) 41902 Read/write
frequency
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
42092 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C3 (902)
(analog value)
C3 (902)
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias Analog value (%) of the voltage (current) applied to terminal
43902 Read
(terminal analog value) 2
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
125 (903) 41903 Read/write
frequency
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
42093 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C4 (903)
(analog value)
C4 (903)
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain Analog value (%) of the voltage (current) applied to terminal
43903 Read
(terminal analog value) 2
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
C5 (904) 41904 Read/write
frequency
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
42094 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C6 (904)
(analog value)
C6 (904)
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to terminal
43904 Read
(terminal analog value) 4
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
126 (905) 41905 Read/write
frequency
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
42095 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C7 (905)
(analog value)
C7 (905)
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to terminal
43905 Read
(terminal analog value) 4
C12 (917) 41917 Terminal 1 bias frequency (speed) Read/write Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.
Terminal 1 bias (speed) (analog Analog value (%) set in C13 (917) (Available only when the
42107 Read/write
value) FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C13 (917)
Terminal 1 bias (speed) (terminal Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to terminal 1
43917 Read
analog value) (Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C14 (918) 41918 Terminal 1 gain frequency (speed) Read/write Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.
Terminal 1 gain (speed) (analog Analog value (%) set in C15 (918) (Available only when the
42108 Read/write
value) FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C15 (918)
Terminal 1 gain (speed) (terminal Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to terminal 1
43918 Read
analog value) (Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C16 (919) 41919 Terminal 1 bias command (torque) Read/write Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.

258 3. RS-485 Communication

3.5 MODBUS RTU
 Pr. Register Name Read/write Remarks

42109
Terminal 1 bias (torque) (analog
value)
Read/write
Analog value (%) set in C17 (919) (Available only when the
FR-E8AXY is installed.)
1
C17 (919)
Terminal 1 bias (torque) (terminal Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to terminal 1
43919 Read
analog value) (Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C18 (920) 41920 Terminal 1 gain command (torque) Read/write
Terminal 1 gain (torque) (analog
Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.
Analog value (%) set in C19 (920) (Available only when the
2
42110 Read/write
value) FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C19 (920)
Terminal 1 gain (torque) (terminal Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to terminal 1
43920 Read
analog value) (Available only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.) 3
C38 (932) 41932 Terminal 4 bias command (torque) Read/write
Terminal 4 bias (torque) (analog
42122 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C39 (932)
value)
C39 (932)
43932
Terminal 4 bias (torque) (terminal
Read
Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to terminal 4
analog value) 4
C40 (933) 41933 Terminal 4 gain command (torque) Read/write
Terminal 4 gain (torque) (analog
42123
value)
Read/write Analog value (%) set in C41 (933) 5
C41 (933)
Terminal 4 gain (torque) (terminal Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to terminal
43933 Read
analog value) 4
C42 (934) 41934
42124
PID display bias coefficient
PID display bias analog value
Read/write
Read/write Analog value (%) set in C43 (934)
6
C43 (934) PID display bias analog value Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to terminal
43934 Read
(terminal analog value) 4
C44 (935) 41935 PID display gain coefficient Read/write 7
42125 PID display gain analog value Read/write Analog value (%) set in C45 (935)
C45 (935) PID display gain analog value Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to terminal
43935 Read
(terminal analog value) 4
For details on parameter names, 8
1000 to 45000 to refer to the parameter list in the FR-
Read/write The parameter number + 44000 is the register number.
1999 45999 E800 Instruction Manual
(Function).
• Fault history 9
Register Definition Read/write Remarks
40501 Fault record 1 Read/write
40502 Fault record 2 Read 10
40503 Fault record 3 Read
40504 Fault record 4 Read Being 2 bytes in length, the data is stored as H00○○.
Refer to the lowest 1 byte for the error code. (For details on error codes,
40505 Fault record 5 Read
refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Maintenance).)
40506 Fault record 6 Read The fault history is batch-cleared by writing to register 40501.
40507 Fault record 7 Read Set any value as data.
40508 Fault record 8 Read
40509 Fault record 9 Read
40510 Fault record 10 Read

• Product profile
Register Definition Read/write Remarks
44001 Model (1st and 2nd characters) Read
44002 Model (3rd and 4th characters) Read
44003 Model (5th and 6th characters) Read
44004 Model (7th and 8th characters) Read The inverter model can be read in ASCII code.
44005 Model (9th and 10th characters) Read "H20" (blank code) is set for blank area.
44006 Model (11th and 12th characters) Read Example) FR-E820-1:
44007 Model (13th and 14th characters) Read H46, H52, H2D, H45, H38, H32, H30, H2D, H31, H20 ... H20
44008 Model (15th and 16th characters) Read
44009 Model (17th and 18th characters) Read
44010 Model (19th and 20th characters) Read
44011 Capacity (1st and 2nd characters) Read The capacity in the inverter model can be read in ASCII code.
Data is read in increments of 0.1 kW, and rounds down to 0.01 kW
44012 Capacity (3rd and 4th characters) Read
increments.
"H20" (blank code) is set for blank area.
44013 Capacity (5th and 6th characters) Read
Example) 0.75K: " 7" (H20, H20, H20, H20, H20, H37)

3. RS-485 Communication
3.5 MODBUS RTU
259
 NOTE
• When a 32-bit parameter setting or monitor item is read and the value to be read exceeds HFFFF, HFFFF is returned.
• The display can be changed from the frequency to rotations per minute (machine speed) using Pr.53. When the machine
speed is displayed, the value is incremented by one.

 Pr.343 Communication error count

• The communication error occurrence count can be checked.
Parameter Setting range Minimum setting range Initial value
343 (0 to 999) (Read-only) 1 0

NOTE
• The communication error count is temporarily stored in the RAM memory. The value is not stored in the EEPROM, and so is
cleared to 0 when power is reset and the inverter is reset.

 Alarm (LF) signal output (communication error warning)

• During a communication error, the Alarm (LF) signal is output by open collector output. Assign the terminal to be used using
any of Pr.190 to Pr.197 (Output terminal function selection).

Client Alarm data Alarm data Normal data Alarm data Normal data
Server Reply data Reply data
Not increased
Communication
error count 0 1 2
(Pr.343)

Signal LF OFF ON OFF ON OFF

Turns off when normal data is received

Communication error count is increased in Alarm data : Data resulting in

synchronization with leading edge of LF signal communication error.

NOTE
• The LF signal can be assigned to an output terminal by setting Pr.190 to Pr.197. Changing the terminal assignment may affect
other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

 Signal loss detection (Pr.122)

• If a signal loss (communication stop) is detected between the inverter and computer as a result of a signal loss detection,
a communication error (E.PUE) occurs and the inverter output will be shut off.
• When a signal loss is detected, the LF signal is output.
• When the setting is "9999", communication check (signal loss detection) is not made.
• The monitor items and parameter settings can be read via RS-485 communication when "0" is set, but a communication
error (E.PUE) occurs instantly when the operation mode is switched to the one for the selected command interface
(Network operation mode in the initial setting).
• Setting any value from 0.1 second to 999.8 seconds will enable signal loss detection. To make a signal loss detection, it
is necessary to send data from the computer within the communication check time interval. (The inverter makes a
communication check (clearing of communication check counter) regardless of the station number setting of the data sent
from the client.)

260 3. RS-485 Communication

3.5 MODBUS RTU
• Communication check is started at the initial communication in the operation mode for the selected command interface
(Network operation mode in the initial setting).
1
Example: Pr.122 = "0.1 to 999.8s"

Operation Mode External NET

ENQ
Computer Inverter
Inverter Computer

Fault (E.PUE)
3
Check start
Pr.122
Communication
check counter
Time 4
ALM OFF ON

NOTE
5
• The operation at a communication error occurrence depends on the setting of Pr.502 Stop mode selection at
communication error. (Refer to page 282.)
6

10

3. RS-485 Communication
3.5 MODBUS RTU
261
 3.6 BACnet MS/TP
Operation or parameter setting via communication is possible using the BACnet MS/TP protocol through the PU connector on
the inverter.
To use BACnet MS/TP, set "2" in Pr.549 Protocol selection.
Initial value*1
Pr. Name Setting range Description
Gr.1 Gr.2
0, 5 to 14, 17 to 20, 22 to 81: BACnet reception status
33, 35, 38, 40 to 42, 44, 82: BACnet token pass counter (Displays the count of
52 Operation panel main 45, 50 to 57, 61, 62, 64, received token)
0
M100 monitor selection
65, 67, 68, 81 to 84, 85*2, 83: BACnet valid APDU counter (Displays the count of
valid APDU detection)
86*3, 91, 97, 100
84: BACnet communication error counter (Displays the
774 Operation panel monitor count of communication error)
M101 selection 1 1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17 to 20, 22 85: Terminal FM output level (Same display as Analog
775 Operation panel monitor to 33, 35, 38, 40 to 42, 44, Output 0)
M102 selection 2 9999 45, 50 to 57, 61, 62, 64, 86: Terminal AM output level (Same display as Analog
65, 67, 68, 81 to 84, 85*2, Output 1)
The count of the setting values "82" and "83" returns to
776 Operation panel monitor 86*3, 91, 97, 100, 9999
M103 selection 3 "0" if the count exceeds "9999". The upper limit of the
count of the setting value "84" is "9999".
117 PU communication
N020 station number
0 0 to 127*4 Set the inverter station number (node).

Select the communication speed.

96, 192, 384, 576, 768, The setting value × 100 equals the communication
118
PU communication speed 192 speed.
N021 1152*4*5 For example, enter 96 to set the communication speed
of 9600 bps.
RS-485 communication is enabled. However, the
inverter output is shut off if the operation mode is
0
changed to the one for the selected command
interface.
122 PU communication check
0 Set the interval of the communication check (signal
N026 time interval
loss detection) time
0.1 to 999.8 s
If a no-communication state persists for longer than the
permissible time, the inverter output will be shut off.
9999 No communication check (signal loss detection)
390 % setting reference
60 Hz 50 Hz 1 to 590 Hz Set a reference frequency of the set frequency.
N054 frequency
0 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link)
549 1 MODBUS RTU protocol
Protocol selection 0
N000
2*6 BACnet MS/TP protocol
Auto baud rate (bit 7)
726 Auto Baudrate/Max 0: inactive, 1: active
255 0 to 255
N050 Master Max Master (bit 0 to bit 6) setting range: 0 to 127
Maximum address for master node
727 Set the maximum number of frames that the inverter
Max Info Frames 1 1 to 255
N051 can transmit while it owns the token.
Device identifier
728 Device instance number 0 to 419 When the figure obtained by combining the Pr.728 and
0
N052 (Upper 3 digits) (0 to 418) Pr.729 settings is not within "0 to 4194302", the setting
is out of range.
When Pr.728 = "419", the setting range of Pr.729 is "0
729 Device instance number 0 to 9999 to 4302".
0
N053 (Lower 4 digits) (0 to 4302) When Pr.729 = "4303" or more, the setting range of
Pr.728 is "0 to 418".

*1 Gr.1 and Gr.2 are the parameter initial value groups. (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
*2 The setting is available only for the FR-E800-1.
*3 The setting is available only for the FR-E800-4 and FR-E800-5.
*4 When a value outside the setting range is set, the inverter operates at the initial value.
*5 When the Auto baudrate is used, the communication speed is changed to the detected communication speed.
*6 When Pr.549 = "2 (BACnet MS/TP)", the parameter unit is not available.

262 3. RS-485 Communication

3.6 BACnet MS/TP
 NOTE
• Always reset the inverter after making the initial settings of the parameters. After changing the communication-related 1
parameters, communication cannot be made until the inverter is reset.

 Communication specifications 2
• The specifications conform to the BACnet standard of physical medium EIA-485.
Item Description
Physical medium EIA-485 (RS-485)
3
Connection port PU connector
Data transfer method NRZ encoding
Baud rate 9600 bps, 19200 bps, 38400 bps, 57600 bps, 76800 bps, 115200 bps 4
Start bit Fixed to 1 bit
Data length Fixed to 8 bits
Parity bit Fixed to none
Stop bit Fixed to 1 bit 5
Network topology Bus topology
Token passing (token bus)
Communication method
Master-slave (This product is used as the master only.) 6
Communication protocol MS/TP (master-slave/token passing LAN)
Maximum connection 255 (up to 32 for one segment, addition with a repeater available)
Node number 0 to 127
Master 0 to 127 (range available for the master) 7
Supported property of BACnet standard object type Refer to page 265.
Supported BIBBs (Annex K) Refer to page 274.
BACnet standardized device profile (Annex L) Refer to page 274. 8
Segmentation Not supported
Device address binding Not supported

NOTE 9
• This product is classified as a BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC).
• This product is designed for multiple master network, therefore 2-wire type connection is supported.
• This product is a node with local bias resistors. Therefore at least one node must be a node with network bias resistors in the
network configuration. Prepare a node with network bias resistors.
10

 BACnet reception status monitor (Pr.52)

• Set Pr.52 = "81" to monitor the BACnet communication status on the operation panel.
Monitor LF signal
Status Description
value output
0 Idle Never had BACnet communication OFF
Automatic baud rate recognition.
Automatic baud rate
1 (Communication error during automatic baud rate recognition is not OFF
recognition
counted.)
2 Not joined the network Waiting for a token to own node OFF
10 Received a token to own node OFF
11 Data to own node Received a supported request to own node (including broadcasting) OFF
12 Received an unsupported request to own node (including broadcasting) OFF
20 Data to other node Received a token to other nodes OFF
30 Node separated Separated from token passing after joined in it. OFF
90 Detected a communication error. ON
Fault data Protocol error
91 ON
(LPDU, NPDU, APDU are not following the format regulations.)

 Signal loss detection (Pr.122)

• If signal loss is detected between the inverter and computer, the communication error "E.PUE" will occur and the inverter
output will be shut off.
• When a signal loss is detected, the LF signal is output.
• When the setting is "9999", communication check (signal loss detection) is not made.

3. RS-485 Communication
3.6 BACnet MS/TP
263
 • The monitor items and parameter settings can be read via RS-485 communication when "0" is set, but a communication
error (E.PUE) occurs instantly when the operation mode is switched to the one for the selected command interface
(Network operation mode in the initial setting).
• Setting any value from 0.1 second to 999.8 seconds will enable signal loss detection. To make a signal loss detection, it
is necessary to send data from the computer within the communication check time interval. (The inverter makes a
communication check (clearing of communication check counter) regardless of the station number setting of the data sent
from the master).
• Communication check is started at the initial communication in the operation mode for the selected command interface
(Network operation mode in the initial setting).
Example: Pr.122 = "0.1 to 999.8s"

Operation Mode External NET

ENQ
Computer Inverter
Inverter Computer

Fault (E.PUE)
Check start
Pr.122
Communication
check counter
Time

ALM OFF ON

NOTE
• The operation at a communication error occurrence depends on the setting of Pr.502 Stop mode selection at
communication error. (Refer to page 282.)

 % setting reference frequency (Pr.390)

• Set a reference frequency of the set frequency. The setting value of Pr.390 % setting reference frequency is 100%
reference. The reference to the frequency command is converted to the set frequency in the following formula.
Set frequency = % setting reference frequency × Speed scale (Refer to page 268.)

Pr.390 % setting reference frequency

Set frequency written to the inverter

0.00 Hz
0% 100.00%

Set frequency (Speed scale)

NOTE
• The % setting reference frequency cannot be set at less than the minimum frequency resolution of the inverter.
• The set frequency is written to RAM.
• The set frequency is applied at the writing of Speed scale. (The set frequency is not applied at the setting of Pr.390.)

 Automatic baud rate recognition (Pr.726 Auto Baudrate/Max Master)

• Automatic changing of baud rate is available with Pr.726 setting. When Pr.726 = "128 to 255", turn the power ON from
OFF or reset the inverter to start automatic baud rate recognition.
Pr.726 setting Operation
Automatic baud rate recognition is disabled.
0 to 127
(The Pr.118 setting is used as the baud rate.)
The inverter monitors the data on the communication bus, and automatically switches the baud rate.
128 to 255
The recognized baud rate is written to Pr.118.

264 3. RS-485 Communication

3.6 BACnet MS/TP
 NOTE
• After the baud rate recognition, the recognized baud rate is written in EEPROM as the Pr.118 setting regardless of the Pr.342 1
Communication EEPROM write selection setting.
• The BACnet status monitor displays "1" during automatic baud rate recognition.
• The communication error monitor count is not performed during automatic baud rate recognition.
• During automatic baud rate recognition, the inverter does not transmit data, but only accepts data.
2
• The baud rate switching operation cannot be finished if the inverter is not connected to the communication bus. (BACnet
protocol will not be established.)
• The baud rate switching operation cannot be finished if the inverter is continuously receiving abnormal data during automatic 3
baud rate switching. (BACnet protocol will not be established.)

 Supported property of BACnet standard object type 4

R: Read only, W: Read/Write (Commandable values not supported), C: Read/Write (Commandable values supported)
Object support condition
Property Analog Analog Analog Binary Binary Binary Network 5
Device
Input Output Value Input Output Value Port
APDU Length R
APDU Timeout
Application Software Version
R
R
6
Changes Pending R
Database Revision R
Device Address Binding R 7
Event State R R R R R
Firmware Revision R
Link Speed
MAC Address
R
R
8
Max APDU Length Accepted R
Max Info Frames W W
Max Master W W 9
Model Name R
Network Number W
Network Number Quality
Network Type
R
R
10
Number of APDU Retries R
Object Identifier R R R R R R R
Object List R
Object Name R R R R R R R
Object Type R R R R R R R
Out Of Service R R R R R R
Polarity R R
Present Value R C*1 R C C*1
Priority Array R*2 R R*2
Protocol Level R
Protocol Object Types Supported R
Protocol Revision R
Protocol Services Supported R
Protocol Version R
Reliability R
Relinquish Default R*2 R R*2
Segmentation Supported R
Status Flags R R R R R R
System Status R
Unit R R
Vendor Identifier R
Vendor Name R
Property List R R R R R R R R
Current Command Priority R R
*1 This property is commandable for some instances of this object. Otherwise it is read/write.

3. RS-485 Communication
3.6 BACnet MS/TP
265
 *2 This property is supported only for instances of this object where the Present Value property is commandable.

 Details of the supported properties

• The details of the supported properties are as follows.
Property Details
Shows the maximum number of octets.
APDU Length
Fixed to 50 octets for the FR-E800.
Shows the send retry interval (ms) when there is no reception confirmation response to the APDU
APDU Timeout
request.
Application Software Version Shows the inverter firmware version.
If the property value whose change is to be reflected at a reset is changed, TRUE (1) is returned.
Changes Pending
FALSE (0) is returned after the status is initialized by a reset.
Database Revision Always 0.
Device Address Binding No data.
Shows the event state of the related object.
Event State
Fixed to NORMAL (0) for the FR-E800.
Firmware Revision Shows the firmware level.
Shows the communication speed in the unit of bit/s.
Link Speed
The Pr.118 setting value × 100 equals the communication speed.
Shows the MAC address of the network port.
MAC Address The Pr.117 setting value is used for the MAC address.
For example, the MAC address is 7F when Pr.117 = "127".
Max APDU Length Accepted Shows the maximum APDU length.
Shows the maximum number of frames that the inverter can transmit while it owns the token. When
Max Info Frames
a value is written, it is reflected to the Pr.727 setting.
Shows the maximum address for master node. When a value is written, it is reflected to the Pr.726
Max Master
setting.
Model Name Shows the model of the BACnet device.
Shows the network number.
Network Number Fixed to 0 for the FR-E800. If a value other than "0" is written, an error code
VALUE_OUT_OF_RANGE (37) will be returned.
Shows the quality of the network port number.
Network Number Quality
Fixed to UNKNOWN (0) for the FR-E800.
Shows the communication method of the network.
Network Type
Fixed to MSTP (2) for the FR-E800.
Number of APDU Retries Shows the maximum number of APDU send retries.
Object Identifier Shows the unique numeric code to identify the object.
Object List Shows the object identifier list.
Object Name Shows the object name.
Analog input: ANALOG_INPUT (0)
Analog output: ANALOG_OUTPUT (1)
Analog value: ANALOG_VALUE (2)
Binary input: BINARY_INPUT (3)
Object Type
Binary output: BINARY_OUTPUT (4)
Binary value: BINARY_VALUE (5)
Device: DEVICE (8)
Network port: NETWORK_PORT (56)
If the Present Value property is not changed or if the change is not applied, TRUE (1) is returned.
Out Of Service
FALSE (0) is returned in other cases.
REVERSE (1) is returned when the binary output is negative logic. Fixed to NORMAL (0) for the
Polarity
binary input.
Present Value Shows the present value of each object identifier.
Values to be written to the objects supporting the commandable values are stored. Values are
Priority Array
initialized at the power-ON or inverter reset.
Shows the protocol level.
Protocol Level
Fixed to BACNET_APPLICATION (2) for the FR-E800.
Protocol Object Types Supported The bit is 1 for the supported objects or 0 for the other objects.
Protocol Revision Shows the revision of the compliant BACnet standard.
Protocol Services Supported The bit is 1 for the supported services or 0 for the other services.
Protocol Version Shows the version of the compliant BACnet standard.
Shows the reliability of the network port.
Reliability
Fixed to no-fault-detected (0) for the FR-E800.
Relinquish Default Shows the default value to be applied when no data is stored in the Priority Array property.
Shows whether to support segmentation of messages at sending/receiving.
Segmentation Supported
Fixed to NO_SEGMENTATION (3) for the FR-E800.

266 3. RS-485 Communication

3.6 BACnet MS/TP
 Property Details
Status Flags
System Status
Always 0.
Shows the current physical and logical status of the device.
1
Unit Uses engineering units as the measurement unit.
Vendor Identifier Shows 16-bit vendor identification code assigned by ASHRAE.
Vendor Name Mitsubishi Electric Corporation 2
Property List Shows the property identifier list.
Current Command Priority Shows the currently active priority.

 Supported BACnet object 3

• ANALOG INPUT
Present value
Object identifier Object name
access type*1
Description Unit
4
Represents actual input voltage (or input current) of
terminal 2.
(The range varies depending on the Pr.73 and Pr.267
1 Terminal 2 R settings.
percent
(98)
5
0 to 10 V (0% to 100%),
0 to 5 V (0% to 100%),
0 to 20 mA (0% to 100%))
Represents actual input current (or input voltage) of 6
terminal 4.
(The range varies depending on the Pr.73 and Pr.267
percent
2 Terminal 4 R settings.
(98)
2 to 10 V (0% to 100%),
1 to 5 V (0% to 100%),
7
4 to 20 mA (0% to 100%))
*1 R: Read only, W: Read/Write (Commandable values not supported), C: Read/Write (Commandable values supported)
8
• ANALOG OUTPUT
Present value
Object identifier Object name
access type*1
Description Unit
9
Controls actual output current level of terminal FM.
Control is available when Pr.54 FM terminal function percent
0*2 Terminal FM C
(98)
selection = "85"*4.
(Setting range: 0% to 200%) 10
Controls actual output voltage level of terminal AM.
Control is available when Pr.158 AM terminal function percent
1*3 Terminal AM C
(98)
selection = "86"*4.
(Setting range: -200% to 200%)
*1 R: Read only, W: Read/Write (Commandable values not supported), C: Read/Write (Commandable values supported)
Values written to the objects that support the commandable values are stored in the Priority Array, even when "Write Access Denied" is returned
due to inconsistency of the writing requirements such as the operating mode, on condition that the values are written within the setting range.
*2 The setting is available only for the FR-E800-1.
*3 The setting is available only for the FR-E800-4 and FR-E800-5.
*4 Available regardless of the operation mode, operation command source, and speed command source.

• ANALOG VALUE
Present value
Object identifier Object name Description Unit
access type*1
Output hertz
1 R Represents the output frequency value.
frequency*2 (27)
amperes
2 Output current R Represents the output current value.
(3)
volts
3 Output voltage R Represents the output voltage value.
(5)
revolution-
6 Running speed*2 R Represents the running speed value. per-minute
(104)
Converter output volts
8 R Represents the converter output voltage value.
voltage (5)
kilowatts
14 Output power R Represents the output power value.
(48)

3. RS-485 Communication
3.6 BACnet MS/TP
267
 Present value
Object identifier Object name Description Unit
access type*1
percent
17 Load meter R Represents the load meter value.
(98)
Cumulative hours
20 R Represents the cumulative energization time value.
energization time (71)
Actual operation hours
23 R Represents the actual operation time value.
time (71)
kilowatt-
Cumulative
25 R Represents the cumulative power value. hours
power
(19)
no-units
52 PID set point R Represents the PID set point.
(95)
Represents the PID deviation.
no-units
54 PID deviation R (Minus display is available with reference to 0%, in 0.1%
(95)
increment.)
PID measured no-units
67 R Represents the PID measurement 2.
value2 (95)
no-units
200 Alarm history 1 R Represents the latest fault record (fault record 1).
(95)
no-units
201 Alarm history 2 R Represents the second latest fault (fault record 2).
(95)
no-units
202 Alarm history 3 R Represents the third latest fault (fault record 3).
(95)
no-units
203 Alarm history 4 R Represents the fourth latest fault (fault record 4).
(95)
Controls the ratio of the frequency command. (Setting range: 0.00 percent
300 Speed scale*3 C
to 100.00) (Refer to page 264.) (98)
Set the PID action set point.
• This object is the set point during dancer control if Pr.128 = "40 to
43" and Pr.609 = "4". (Setting range: 0.00 to 100.00)*5
• This object is the set point during PID operation if Pr.128 = "60 or
PID set point 61". (Setting range: 0.00 to 100.00)*4 no-units
310 C
CMD*3 • This object is the set point during PID operation if Pr.128 = "1000 (95)
or 1001" and Pr.609 = "4". (Setting range: 0.00 to 100.00)*4*5
• This object is the set point during PID operation if Pr.128 = "2000
or 2001" (not applied to the frequency) and Pr.609 = "4". (Setting
range: 0.00 to 100.00)*4*5
Set the PID measured value.
• This object is the measured value during dancer control if Pr.128
= "40 to 43" and Pr.610 = "4". (Setting range: 0.00 to 100.00)
• This object is the measured value during PID operation if Pr.128
= "60 or 61". (Setting range: 0.00 to 100.00)*4
PID measured no-units
311 C • This object is the measured value during PID operation if Pr.128
value CMD*3 = "1000 or 1001" and Pr.610 = "4". (Setting range: 0.00 to (95)

100.00)*4
• This object is the measured value during PID operation if Pr.128
= "2000 or 2001" (not applied to the frequency) and Pr.610 = "4".
(Setting range: 0.00 to 100.00)*4
Set the PID deviation. (0.01 increments)
• This object is the deviation during PID operation if Pr.128 = "50 or
51". (Setting range: -100.00 to 100.00)
PID deviation • This object is the deviation during PID operation if Pr.128 = "1010 percent
312 C
CMD*3 or 1011" and Pr.609 = "4". (Setting range: -100.00 to 100.00) (98)
• This object is the deviation during PID operation if Pr.128 = "2010
or 2011" (not applied to the frequency) and Pr.609 = "4". (Setting
range: -100.00 to 100.00)
Mailbox no-units
398 W
parameter Access to the properties which are not defined as objects are (95)
available. (Refer to page 270.) no-units
399 Mailbox value W
(95)
seconds
10007 Acceleration time W Set Pr.7 Acceleration time.
(73)
seconds
10008 Deceleration time W Set Pr.8 Deceleration time.
(73)

268 3. RS-485 Communication

3.6 BACnet MS/TP
 *1 R: Read only, W: Read/Write (Commandable values not supported), C: Read/Write (Commandable values supported)
Values written to the objects that support the commandable values are stored in the Priority Array, even when "Write Access Denied" is returned
due to inconsistency of the writing requirements such as the operating mode, on condition that the values are written within the setting range. 1
*2 The Pr.37 and Pr.53 settings are invalid.
*3 If communication speed command source is other than NET, the setting value can be written, but not to be applied.
*4 When both C42 and C44 ≠ "9999", the setting range is from the smaller coefficient to the larger coefficient of C42 and C44. Depending on the

*5
setting, the writing value and the reading value may not be the same at the minimum digit.
When Pr.133 ≠ "9999", the Pr.133 setting is valid.
2
• BINARY INPUT
Present value Description
3
Object identifier Object name
access type*1 (0: inactive, 1: active)
0 Terminal STF R Represents actual input of terminal STF.
1 Terminal STR R Represents actual input of terminal STR. 4
4 Terminal RL R Represents actual input of terminal RL.
5 Terminal RM R Represents actual input of terminal RM.
6 Terminal RH R Represents actual input of terminal RH.
8 Terminal MRS R Represents actual input of terminal MRS. 5
10 Terminal RES R Represents actual input of terminal RES.
100 Terminal RUN R Represents actual output of terminal RUN.
104 Terminal FU R Represents actual output of terminal FU. 6
105 Terminal ABC R Represents actual output of terminals A, B, and C.
107*2 Terminal SO R Represents actual output of terminal SO.
*1
*2
R: Read only, W: Read/Write (Commandable values not supported), C: Read/Write (Commandable values supported)
No function is assigned when the FR-E8TR or the FR-E8TE7 is installed.
7
• BINARY OUTPUT
Present value Description
8
Object identifier Object name
access type*1 (0: inactive, 1: active)
Represents actual output of terminal RUN.
0 Terminal RUN CMD C Control is available when Pr.190 RUN terminal function selection = "82 9
or 182"*2.
Controls actual output of terminal FU.
4 Terminal FU CMD C Control is available when Pr.191 FU terminal function selection = "82 or
182"*2. 10
Controls actual output of terminals A, B, and C.
5 Terminal ABC CMD C Control is available when Pr.192 ABC terminal function selection = "82
or 182"*2.
*1 R: Read only, W: Read/Write (Commandable values not supported), C: Read/Write (Commandable values supported)
Values written to the objects that support the commandable values are stored in the Priority Array, even when "Write Access Denied" is returned
due to inconsistency of the writing requirements such as the operating mode, on condition that the values are written within the setting range.
*2 Available regardless of the operation mode, operation command source, and speed command source.

3. RS-485 Communication
3.6 BACnet MS/TP
269
 • BINARY VALUE
Present value
Object identifier Object name Description
access type*1
0 Inverter running R Represents the Inverter running (RUN) signal status.
Inverter operation
11 R Represents the Inverter operation ready (RY) signal status.
ready
98 Alarm output R Represents the Alarm (LF) signal status.
99 Fault output R Represents the Fault (ALM) signal status.
Inverter running
200 R Represents inverter reverse running status.
reverse
Controls the function assigned to terminal RL.
Control input
302 C Setting 1 in this object turns ON the signal assigned to Pr.180 RL terminal
instruction RL
function selection.
Controls the function assigned to terminal RM.
Control input
303 C Setting 1 in this object turns ON the signal assigned to Pr.181 RM terminal
instruction RM
function selection.
Controls the function assigned to terminal RH.
Control input
304 C Setting 1 in this object turns ON the signal assigned to Pr.182 RH terminal
instruction RH
function selection.
Controls the function assigned to terminal MRS.
Control input
306 C Setting 1 in this object turns ON the signal assigned to Pr.183 MRS
instruction MRS
terminal function selection.

Control input Controls the function assigned to terminal RES.

308 C Setting 1 in this object turns ON the signal assigned to Pr.184 RES terminal
instruction RES*2 function selection.
Controls the start/stop command. The start command is written after the

400 Run/Stop C Speed scale is applied. *3

1: Start
0: Stop
Controls the forward/reverse rotation.*3
401 Forward/Reverse C 1: Reverse rotation
0: Forward rotation
Clears fault output status.
402 Fault reset C
(Release of an inverter fault without inverter reset is available.)
*1 R: Read only, W: Read/Write (Commandable values not supported), C: Read/Write (Commandable values supported)
Values written to the objects that support the commandable values are stored in the Priority Array, even when "Write Access Denied" is returned
due to inconsistency of the writing requirements such as the operating mode, on condition that the values are written within the setting range.
*2 The RES signal cannot be controlled over a network. Therefore, the control input instruction RES is invalid in the initial status. To use the control
input instruction RES, change the signal with Pr.184 RES terminal function selection. (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
(Reset is available with ReinitializeDevice.)
*3 If communication operation command source is other than NET, the setting value can be written, but not to be applied.

• DEVICE
Object identifier Object name Description
0 to 4194302 Reads the device status or changes the setting.
Model information # device instance number
4194303*1 Device instance number: Pr.728 × 10000 + Pr.729

*1 Available only for Read Property Service.

• NETWORK PORT
Object identifier Object name Description
0 BACnetMSTP on EIA-485 Reads the status of the PU connector or changes the setting.
4194303*1 Access is attempted as the object identifier of the port which receives the request.
*1 Available only for Read Property Service.

 Mailbox parameter / Mailbox value (BACnet registers)

• Access to the properties which are not defined as objects are available by using "Mailbox parameter" and "Mailbox value".
• To read a property, write the register of the intended property to "Mailbox parameter", and then read "Mailbox value". To
write a property, write the register of the intended property to "Mailbox parameter", and then write a value to "Mailbox
value".

270 3. RS-485 Communication

3.6 BACnet MS/TP
 • System environment variables
Register Definition Read/write Remarks 1
The data is written as an operation mode setting for writing.
40010 Operation mode / inverter setting Read/write
The data is read as the operation mode status for reading.

[Operation mode / inverter setting] 2

Mode Read value Write value
EXT H0000 H0010*1
PU H0001 H0011*1 3
EXT
H0002 —
JOG
PU
JOG
H0003 — 4
NET H0004 H0014
PU + EXT H0005 —

*1 Writing is available depending on the Pr.79 and Pr.340 settings. For details, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function). 5
Restrictions in each operation mode conform with the computer link specification.

• Monitor code
6
For details of the register numbers and the monitor items, refer to the description of Pr.52 in the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).
• Parameter
7
Pr. Register Name Read/write Remarks
For details on parameter names,
refer to the parameter list in the FR- The parameter number + 41000 is the
0 to 999 41000 to 41999
E800 Instruction Manual
Read/write
register number. 8
(Function).
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
C2 (902) 41902 Read/write
frequency
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 9
42092 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C3 (902)
(analog value)
C3 (902)
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias Analog value (%) of the voltage (current)
43902 Read
(terminal analog value) applied to terminal 2
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
10
125 (903) 41903 Read/write
frequency
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
42093 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C4 (903)
(analog value)
C4 (903)
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain Analog value (%) of the voltage (current)
43903 Read
(terminal analog value) applied to terminal 2
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
C5 (904) 41904 Read/write
frequency
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
42094 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C6 (904)
(analog value)
C6 (904)
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias Analog value (%) of the current (voltage)
43904 Read
(terminal analog value) applied to terminal 4
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
126 (905) 41905 Read/write
frequency
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
42095 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C7 (905)
(analog value)
C7 (905)
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain Analog value (%) of the current (voltage)
43905 Read
(terminal analog value) applied to terminal 4
Available only when the FR-E8AXY is
C12 (917) 41917 Terminal 1 bias frequency (speed) Read/write
installed.
Terminal 1 bias (speed) (analog Analog value (%) set in C13 (917) (Available
42107 Read/write
value) only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C13 (917) Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to
Terminal 1 bias (speed) (terminal
43917 Read terminal 1 (Available only when the FR-
analog value)
E8AXY is installed.)
Available only when the FR-E8AXY is
C14 (918) 41918 Terminal 1 gain frequency (speed) Read/write
installed.

3. RS-485 Communication
3.6 BACnet MS/TP
271
 Pr. Register Name Read/write Remarks
Terminal 1 gain (speed) (analog Analog value (%) set in C15 (918) (Available
42108 Read/write
value) only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C15 (918) Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to
Terminal 1 gain (speed) (terminal
43918 Read terminal 1 (Available only when the FR-
analog value)
E8AXY is installed.)
Available only when the FR-E8AXY is
C16 (919) 41919 Terminal 1 bias command (torque) Read/write
installed.
Terminal 1 bias (torque) (analog Analog value (%) set in C17 (919) (Available
42109 Read/write
value) only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C17 (919) Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to
Terminal 1 bias (torque) (terminal
43919 Read terminal 1 (Available only when the FR-
analog value)
E8AXY is installed.)
Available only when the FR-E8AXY is
C18 (920) 41920 Terminal 1 gain command (torque) Read/write
installed.
Terminal 1 gain (torque) (analog Analog value (%) set in C19 (920) (Available
42110 Read/write
value) only when the FR-E8AXY is installed.)
C19 (920) Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to
Terminal 1 gain (torque) (terminal
43920 Read terminal 1 (Available only when the FR-
analog value)
E8AXY is installed.)
C38 (932) 41932 Terminal 4 bias command (torque) Read/write
Terminal 4 bias (torque) (analog
42122 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C39 (932)
value)
C39 (932)
Terminal 4 bias (torque) (terminal Analog value (%) of the current (voltage)
43932 Read
analog value) applied to terminal 4
C40 (933) 41933 Terminal 4 gain command (torque) Read/write
Terminal 4 gain (torque) (analog
42123 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C41 (933)
value)
C41 (933)
Terminal 4 gain (torque) (terminal Analog value (%) of the current (voltage)
43933 Read
analog value) applied to terminal 4
C42 (934) 41934 PID display bias coefficient Read/write
42124 PID display bias analog value Read/write Analog value (%) set in C43 (934)
C43 (934) PID display bias analog value Analog value (%) of the current (voltage)
43934 Read
(terminal analog value) applied to terminal 4
C44 (935) 41935 PID display gain coefficient Read/write
42125 PID display gain analog value Read/write Analog value (%) set in C45 (935)
C45 (935) PID display gain analog value Analog value (%) of the current (voltage)
43935 Read
(terminal analog value) applied to terminal 4
For details on parameter names,
refer to the parameter list in the FR- The parameter number + 44000 is the
1000 to 1999 45000 to 45999 Read/write
E800 Instruction Manual register number.
(Function).
• Fault history
Register Definition Read/write Remarks
40501 Fault record 1 Read/write
40502 Fault record 2 Read
40503 Fault record 3 Read Being 2 bytes in length, the data is stored as H00○○.
40504 Fault record 4 Read Refer to the lowest 1 byte for the error code. (For details on
40505 Fault record 5 Read error codes, refer to the list of fault displays in the FR-E800
Instruction Manual (Maintenance).)
40506 Fault record 6 Read
The fault history is batch-cleared by writing to register
40507 Fault record 7 Read 40501.
40508 Fault record 8 Read Set any value as data.
40509 Fault record 9 Read
40510 Fault record 10 Read

272 3. RS-485 Communication

3.6 BACnet MS/TP
• Product profile
Register Definition Read/write Remarks 1
44001 Model (1st and 2nd characters) Read
44002 Model (3rd and 4th characters) Read
44003 Model (5th and 6th characters) Read
44004 Model (7th and 8th characters) Read The model name can be read in ASCII code.
2
44005 Model (9th and 10th characters) Read "H20" (blank code) is set for blank area.
44006 Model (11th and 12th characters) Read Example) FR-E840-1 (FM type):
44007 Model (13th and 14th characters) Read H46, H52, H2D, H45, H38, H34, H30, H2D, H31, H20 ... H20
3
44008 Model (15th and 16th characters) Read
44009 Model (17th and 18th characters) Read
44010 Model (19th and 20th characters) Read
44011 Capacity (1st and 2nd characters) Read The inverter rated capacity can be read in ASCII code. 4
44012 Capacity (3rd and 4th characters) Read Data read is displayed in increments of 0.1 kW (rounded
down to one decimal place).
44013 Capacity (5th and 6th characters) Read "H20" (blank code) is set for blank area.
Example) 0.75K: " 7" (H20, H20, H20, H20, H20, H37) 5
NOTE
• When a 32-bit parameter setting or monitor item is read and the value to be read exceeds HFFFF, HFFFF is returned. 6

10

3. RS-485 Communication
3.6 BACnet MS/TP
273
  ANNEX A - PROTOCOL IMPLEMENTATION CONFORMANCE
STATEMENT (NORMATIVE)
(This annex is part of this Standard and is required for its use.)

BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement

Date: 1st Sep 2021
Vendor Name: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
Product Name: Inverter
Product Model Number: (FR-E800 series)
Application Software Version: 8650F
Firmware Revision: 1.00
BACnet Protocol Revision: 19

Product Description:

BACnet Standardized Device Profile (Annex L):

BACnet Cross-Domain Advanced Operator Workstation (B-XAWS)
BACnet Advanced Operator Workstation (B-AWS)
BACnet Operator Workstation (B-OWS)
BACnet Operator Display (B-OD)
BACnet Advanced Life Safety Workstation (B-ALSWS)
BACnet Life Safety Workstation (B-LSWS)
BACnet Life Safety Annunciator Panel (B-LSAP)
BACnet Advanced Access Control Workstation (B-AACWS)
BACnet Access Control Workstation (B-ACWS)
BACnet Access Control Security Display (B-ACSD)
BACnet Building Controller (B-BC)
BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC)
BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC)
BACnet Smart Sensor (B-SS)
BACnet Smart Actuator (B-SA)
BACnet Advanced Life Safety Controller (B-ALSC)
BACnet Life Safety Controller (B-LSC)
BACnet Advanced Access Control Controller (B-AACC)
BACnet Access Control Controller (B-ACC)
BACnet Router (B-RTR)
BACnet Gateway (B-GW)
BACnet Broadcast Management Device (B-BBMD)
BACnet Access Control Door Controller (B-ACDC)
BACnet Access Control Credential Reader (B-ACCR)
BACnet General (B-GENERAL)

274 3. RS-485 Communication

3.6 BACnet MS/TP
List all BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks Supported (Annex K):
DS-RP-B, DS-WP-B, DM-DDB-B, DM-DOB-B, DM-DCC-B , DM-RD-B 1
Segmentation Capability:

Able to transmit segmented messages Window Size

2
Able to receive segmented messages Window Size

3
Standard Object Types Supported:
An object type is supported if it may be present in the device. For each standard Object Type supported provide the following
data: 4
1. Whether objects of this type are dynamically creatable using the CreateObject service

2. Whether objects of this type are dynamically deletable using the DeleteObject service 5
3. List of the optional properties supported

4. List of all properties that are writable where not otherwise required by this standard
6
5. List of all properties that are conditionally writable where not otherwise required by this standard

6. List of proprietary properties and for each its property identifier, datatype, and meaning
7
7. List of any property range restrictions

Dynamic object creation and deletion is not supported. 8

To check the object types supported by the standard model, refer to page 267.

Data Link Layer Options: 9

ARCNET (ATA 878.1), 2.5 Mb. (Clause 8)
ARCNET (ATA 878.1), EIA-485 (Clause 8), baud rate(s)
BACnet IP, (Annex J)
10
BACnet IP, (Annex J), BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD)
BACnet IP, (Annex J), Network Address Translation (NAT Traversal)
BACnet IPv6, (Annex U)
BACnet IPv6, (Annex U), BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD)
BACnet/ZigBee (Annex O)
ISO 8802-3, Ethernet (Clause 7)
MS/TP master (Clause 9), baud rate(s): 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 76800, 115200
MS/TP slave (Clause 9), baud rate(s):
Point-To-Point, EIA 232 (Clause 10), baud rate(s):
Point-To-Point, modem, (Clause 10), baud rate(s):
Other:

Device Address Binding:

Is static device binding supported? (This is currently necessary for two-way communication with MS/TP slaves and certain
other devices.) Yes No

Networking Options:
Router, Clause 6 - List all routing configurations, e.g., ARCNET-Ethernet, Ethernet-MS/TP, etc.
Annex H, BACnet Tunneling Router over IP

3. RS-485 Communication
3.6 BACnet MS/TP
275
 Character Sets Supported:
Indicating support for multiple character sets does not imply that they can all be supported simultaneously.
ISO 10646 (UTF-8) IBMTM/MicrosoftTM DBCS ISO 8859-1
ISO 10646 (UCS-2) ISO 10646 (UCS-4) JIS X 0208

Gateway Options:
If this product is a communication gateway, describe the types of non-BACnet equipment/networks(s) that the gateway
supports:

If this product is a communication gateway which presents a network of virtual BACnet devices, a separate PICS shall be
provided that describes the functionality of the virtual BACnet devices. That PICS shall describe a superset of the functionality
of all types of virtual BACnet devices that can be presented by the gateway.

Network Security Options:

Non-secure Device - is capable of operating without BACnet Network Security
Secure Device - is capable of using BACnet Network Security (NS-SD BIBB)
Multiple Application-Specific Keys
Supports encryption (NS-ED BIBB)
Key Server (NS-KS BIBB)

276 3. RS-485 Communication

3.6 BACnet MS/TP
 CHAPTER 4
CHAPTER 4 Other Communication
Options

4.1 USB device communication..................................................................................................................................278

4.2 Automatic connection with GOT ...........................................................................................................................280

277
 4 Other Communication Options

4.1 USB device communication

A personal computer and an inverter can be connected with a USB cable. Setup of the inverter can be easily performed with
FR Configurator2.
The inverter can be connected easily to a personal computer by a USB cable.

Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
547 USB communication
0 0 to 31 Specify the inverter station number.
N040*1 station number
USB communication is possible, however the inverter output is shut
0
off (E.USB) when the mode changes to the PU operation mode.
548 USB communication Set the communication check time interval.
9999
N041*1 check time interval 0.1 to 999.8 s If a no-communication state persists for longer than the permissible
time, the inverter output is shut off (E.USB).
9999 No communication check
*1 The changed value is applied after the next power-ON or inverter reset.

 USB communication specifications

Interface Conforms to USB 1.1 (USB 2.0 full speed)
Transmission speed 12 Mbps
Wiring length Maximum 5 m
Connector USB mini B connector (receptacle)
Power supply Self-powered*1
Recommended USB cable MR-J3USBCBL3M (cable length 3 m)

*1 USB bus power connection is available. The maximum SCCR is 500 mA. A PU connector cannot be used during USB bus power connection.

• Standard model, Ethernet model, and safety communication model

USB cable USB connector

• IP67 model
Remove the small resin cap, then connect a USB cable. The protective structure is IP00 when the cap is removed. When
the USB cable is removed, always install the cap. (Tightening torque: 1 N·m)

USB cable USB connector

278 4. Other Communication Options

4.1 USB device communication
• At the initial setting (Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selection = "9999"), communication with FR
Configurator2 can be made in the PU operation mode simply by connecting a USB cable. To fix the command source to
the USB connector in the PU operation mode, set "3" in Pr.551.
1
• Parameter setting and monitoring can be performed by using FR Configurator2. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual
of FR Configurator2.
2
NOTE
• Operation is not guaranteed when multiple inverters are connected using a USB hub.

10

4. Other Communication Options

4.1 USB device communication
279
 4.2 Automatic connection with GOT
When the automatic connection is enabled in the GOT2000 series, the inverter can communicate with the GOT2000 series
with only setting the station number and connecting the GOT. This eliminates the need for setting each communication
parameter separately.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

Specify the inverter station number.
117 PU communication
N020 station number
0 0 to 31*1 The inverter station number setting is required when multiple inverters are
connected to one GOT (PU connector communication).
*1 Setting range when Pr.549 Protocol selection = "0" (Mitsubishi inverter protocol). The setting range is "0 to 247" when Pr.549 = "1" (MODBUS
RTU), and "0 to 127" when Pr.549 = "2" (BACnet MS/TP). When a value outside the setting range is set, the inverter operates at the initial value.

 Automatic connection system configuration

Four-wire multidrop

GOT2000
Terminating resistor

 GOT2000 series automatic recognition

• Set the station number (Pr.117) of the inverter before the automatic recognition is performed.
• When the GOT2000 series is connected, the parameters required for the GOT connection are automatically changed by
setting the automatic recognition on the GOT2000 series side.
• Connect all the stations of inverters with GOT before the automatic recognition is performed. The inverter newly added
after automatic recognition will not be recognized automatically. (When an inverter is added, perform the initial setting in
Pr.999 Automatic parameter setting or set the automatic recognition on the GOT side again.)
Automatic change
Automatic change item Setting value after change
parameter
Communication speed Pr.118
Data length / stop bit Pr.119
Depending on the setting of the connected
Parity Pr.120
device on the GOT side.
Time delay setting Pr.123
CR/LF selection Pr.124
Number of communication
Pr.121 9999 (fixed)
retries
Communication check time
Pr.122 9999 (fixed)
interval
Protocol selection Pr.549 0 (fixed to Mitsubishi inverter protocol)

NOTE
• If the automatic recognition cannot be performed, initial setting in Pr.999 is required.
• For connection to a device other than the GOT2000 series, initial setting in Pr.999 is required.
• For details, refer to the GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Product).

280 4. Other Communication Options

4.2 Automatic connection with GOT
 CHAPTER 5
CHAPTER 5 Common Settings

281
 5 Common Settings
Set the action when the inverter is performing operation via communication.
Set the action at fault occurrence or at reading/writing of parameters.

Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
Parameter values written by communication are written to the EEPROM and
RAM.
0
Communication When the index of inverter parameter is read via Ethernet communication
342
EEPROM write 0 (acyclic communication), the EEPROM value is read.
N001
selection Parameter values written by communication are written to the RAM.
1 When the index of inverter parameter is read via Ethernet communication
(acyclic communication), the RAM value is read.
349 Communication reset 0 Enables the error reset function in any operation mode.
0
N010*1 selection 1 Error reset is enabled in the Network operation mode.

500 Set the time from when the communication line error occurs until the inverter
Communication error
0 0 to 999.8 s starts the operation for the communication error (when a communication
N011*2 execution waiting time
option is used).

501 Communication error

Displays the communication error occurrence count (when a communication
occurrence count 0 0
N012*2 display
option is used).

502 Stop mode selection at

0 0 to 2, 6 Select the operation at a communication error occurrence.
N013 communication error
Operation frequency 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency for the operation when a communication error occurs.
779
during communication 9999
N014 9999 Operation continues at the same frequency before the communication error.
error
*1 For the standard model, the setting is available only when a communication option is installed.
*2 The setting is available only when a communication option is installed. For the IP67 model, the setting is not available as plug-in options are not
available.

 Communication EEPROM write selection (Pr.342)

• When parameter write is performed via the inverter PU connector, Ethernet connector, USB communication, or a
communication option, the parameters storage device can be changed to "RAM only" from "EEPROM and RAM". Use this
function if parameter settings are changed frequently.
• When changing the parameter values frequently, set "1" in Pr.342 Communication EEPROM write selection to write
them to the RAM only. The life of the EEPROM will be shorter if parameter write is performed frequently with the setting
unchanged from "0 (initial value)" (EEPROM write).
• When the index of inverter parameter is read via Ethernet communication (acyclic communication) while Pr.342 = "0 (initial
value)", the EEPROM value is read. When Pr.342 = "1", the RAM value is read.

NOTE
• Turning OFF the inverter's power supply clears the modified parameter settings when Pr.342 = "1 (write only to RAM)".
Therefore, the parameter settings last stored to EEPROM applies at next power-ON.
• The parameter setting written in the RAM cannot be checked on the operation panel. (The values displayed on the operation
panel are the ones stored in the EEPROM.)

 Operation selection at a communication error (Pr.502, Pr.779)

• For communication via the PU connector, Ethernet connector, or a communication option, operation at a communication
error can be selected. The operation is active under the Network operation mode.
• Select the stop operation at the retry count excess (Pr.121, enabled only when the Mitsubishi inverter protocol is selected)
or at a signal loss detection (Pr.122) during the RS-485 communication.
• The operation at a communication error can be selected with Pr.502 when Pr.1431 Ethernet signal loss detection
function selection = "3" or Pr.1432 Ethernet communication check time interval ≠ "9999" during Ethernet
communication.

282 5. Common Settings

 At fault occurrence At fault removal
Fault type
Pr.502
setting Operation Display
Fault (ALM)
Operation Display
Fault (ALM) 1
signal signal
"E.PUE",
0 (initial "E.PUE",
Output shutoff "E.EHR", ON Output stop status
value)
"E.OP1" continues.
"E.EHR",
"E.OP1"
ON 2
PU disconnection, 1 "E.PUE", ON after stop
Ethernet Output to
"E.EHR",
communication decelerate and
2 "E.OP1" after OFF Restart*1 Normal OFF
fault,
communication
stop the motor.
stop 3
Operation
option fault
continues at the
6 frequency set in "CF" warning OFF Normal Normal OFF

Pr.779.*2*3 4
0 Output shutoff "E. 1" ON
Output to Output stop status
"E. 1" ON
Option fault (when
1, 2 decelerate and
stop the motor.
"E. 1" after stop ON after stop continues.
5
a communication
Operation Operation
option is used)
continues at the continues at the
6 "CF" warning OFF "CF" warning OFF
frequency set in
Pr.779.*2*3
frequency set in
Pr.779.
6
*1 When the communication error is removed during deceleration, the motor re-accelerates. During position control, the motor does not re-accelerate
even when the communication error is removed during deceleration.
*2 When the frequency command interface is switched to the one other than NET during operation, the frequency command given from an external
device can be made valid.
7
During position control, the operation is continued to the target position. When the communication operation command source is changed to the
External mode and the LX signal is not input via an external input terminal, the inverter output is shut off.
*3 During torque control, the Pr.779 setting becomes invalid when Pr.807 Speed limit selection = "1". In this case, operation continues at the
frequency set in Pr.808 Speed limit or Pr.809 Reverse-side speed limit.
8
• When a communication error is detected during communication through the PU connector or a communication option, the
Alarm (LF) signal is output to an output terminal of the inverter. (When an option fault occurs, the LF signal is output only 9
when "6" is set in Pr.502.)
• When a communication error is detected during communication via the Ethernet connector while Pr.1431 Ethernet signal
loss detection function selection = "2 or 3", the Alarm (LF) signal is output to an output terminal of the inverter. 10
NOTE
• To use the LF signal, set "98" (positive logic) or "198" (negative logic) in any of Pr.190 to Pr.197 (Output terminal function
selection) to assign the function to an output terminal.

5. Common Settings
283
 • The following charts show operations when a communication line error occurs.
Pr.502 = "0" (initial value) Pr.502 = "1"
Fault occurrence Fault removal Fault occurrence Fault removal

Communication OFF ON OFF Communication OFF ON OFF

fault fault
Output Motor coasting Output Decelerates
frequency frequency to stop

Fault display Fault display Time

Time
(E.PUE/E.EHR/ (E.PUE/E.EHR/
E.OP1) Display E.OP1) Display
Fault output Fault output
(ALM) OFF ON (ALM) OFF ON

Alarm output Alarm output

(LF) OFF ON OFF (LF) OFF ON OFF

Pr.502 = "2" Pr.502 = "6"

Fault occurrence Fault removal Fault occurrence Fault removal
Communication OFF ON OFF
Communication OFF ON OFF
fault
fault
Frequency
NET EXT NET
Decelerates command source
Output Pr.779 = “9999” Operation according to the
to stop
frequency start command or speed
Output command in the
frequency External operation mode
Pr.779
Pr.779 ≠“9999”
Fault display
Time (Runs at the frequency setting of Pr.779)
(E.PUE/E.EHR/
E.OP1) Display Time
Fault output Warning display
OFF (CF) Display
(ALM)
Fault output
Alarm output (ALM) OFF
(LF) OFF ON OFF
Alarm output
(LF) OFF ON OFF

NOTE
• When the Pr.1431 setting is changed to a value other than "3" and the Pr.1457 setting is changed to a value other than "9999"
after the operation defined by the Pr.502 setting starts during Ethernet communication, the operation will be changed
according to the settings of Pr.1431 and Pr.1457.
• When the switchover mode (Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "6") is set, the operation can be switched between NET and
External during operation using the External/NET operation switchover (X66) signal. (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual
(Function).)

284 5. Common Settings

 • The following charts show operations when a communication option fault occurs.
Pr.502 = "0 (initial value)"
Fault occurrence Fault removal
Pr.502 = "1 or 2"
Fault occurrence Fault removal
1
Fault OFF ON OFF Fault OFF ON OFF

Motor coasting 2
Output frequency

Output frequency
Decelerates to stop

3
Time Fault display Time
Fault display
(E.1)
Fault output
Display (E.1)
Fault output
Display 4
(ALM) OFF ON (ALM) OFF ON
Alarm output Alarm output

5
(LF) OFF (LF) OFF

Pr.502 = "6" Fault occurrence Fault removal

6
Fault OFF ON OFF
Pr.779 = “9999”
Output frequency

Pr.779
7
Pr.779 ≠“9999”
(Runs at the frequency setting of Pr.779)
Warning
display
Time 8
(CF) Display
Fault output
OFF
9
(ALM)
Alarm output
(LF) OFF ON

NOTE
• When a communication option is used, the protective function [E.OP1 (fault data: HA1)] is activated at error occurrences on
10
the communication line. The protective function [E.1 (fault data: HF1)] is activated at error occurrences in the communication
circuit inside the option.
• Fault output indicates the Fault (ALM) signal and an alarm bit output.
• When the fault output is set enabled, fault records are stored in the fault history. (A fault record is written to the fault history at
a fault output.)
• When the fault output is not enabled, a fault record is overwritten to the fault history temporarily but not stored.
• After the fault is removed, the fault indication goes back to normal indication on the monitor, and the fault history goes back to
the previous status.
• When Pr.502 = "1 or 2", the normal deceleration time setting (settings like Pr.8, Pr.44, and Pr.45) is applied as the deceleration
time. The Pr.464 or Pr.1223 deceleration time setting, whichever is smaller, is applied for position control.
• If a communication line error occurs, then the error is removed during deceleration while Pr.502 = "2", the motor re-accelerates
from that point. (During position control, the motor does not re-accelerate even when the communication error is removed
during deceleration.) The operation command and the speed command before the fault occurred will be applied for restarting.
The normal acceleration time setting (such as Pr.7/Pr.44 setting) is applied for restart. (Acceleration does not restart when a
communication option fault occurs.)
• The Pr.502 and Pr.779 settings are valid when communication is performed via the PU connector, Ethernet connector, or a
communication option.
• These parameters are valid under the Network operation mode. When performing communication through the PU connector,
set Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selection ≠ "2".
• Pr.502 is valid for the device that has the command source under the Network operation mode. When an error occurs for
communication through the PU connector or the Ethernet connector while Pr.550 = "9999 (initial value)" and a communication
option is installed, Pr.502 becomes invalid.
• If the communication error setting is disabled with Pr.121 = "9999" or Pr.122 = "9999" while Pr.502 = "6", the inverter does not
operate with the frequency set in Pr.779 when a communication error occurs.

5. Common Settings
285
 CAUTION
• When Pr.502 = "6" and a communication line error (PU disconnection, Ethernet communication fault, communication
option fault) occurs, or a communication option fault occurs, the operation continues. When setting "6" in Pr.502, provide
a safety stop countermeasure other than via communication. For example, input a signal through an external terminal
(RES, MRS, or X92) or press the PU stop on the operation panel.

 Waiting time setting from the communication line error occurrence to the
communication error activation (Pr.500)
• When a communication option is used, use Pr.500 Communication error execution waiting time to set the time from
when the communication line error occurs until the inverter starts the operation for the communication error. For the IP67
model, the function is invalid as plug-in options are not available.
• When a communication line error occurs and lasts longer than the time set in Pr.500, it is recognized as a communication
error. If the communication returns to normal within the time, it is not recognized as a communication error, and the
operation continues.
Normal Error Normal Error
Communication line status

Communication error Recognition

(E.OP1)
Pr.500 Pr.500
setting time setting time
ON
Alarm signal (LF)
• Operation from the error occurrence until the Pr.500 setting time elapses
Pr.502
Fault type Operation Display Fault (ALM) signal
setting
PU disconnection, 0
Ethernet 1 Operation
communication fault,
2 Normal*1 OFF*1
communication option continues.*1
fault 6
0 Output shutoff "E. 1" ON
Output to decelerate
Option fault (when a 1, 2 "E. 1" after stop ON after stop
and stop the motor
communication option
Operation continues
is used)
6 at the frequency set in "CF" warning OFF
Pr.779.*2*3

*1 When the communication returns to normal within the time period set in Pr.500, the protective function (E.OP1) is not activated.
*2 When the frequency command interface is switched to the one other than NET during operation, the frequency command given from an external
device can be made valid.
During position control, the operation is continued to the target position. When the communication operation command source is changed to the
External mode and the LX signal is not input via an external input terminal, the inverter output is shut off.
*3 During torque control, the Pr.779 setting becomes invalid when Pr.807 Speed limit selection = "1". In this case, operation continues at the
frequency set in Pr.808 Speed limit or Pr.809 Reverse-side speed limit.

 Displaying and clearing the communication error count (Pr.501)

• When a communication option is used, the cumulative count of communication error occurrences can be displayed. Write
"0" to clear this cumulative count. For the IP67 model, the function is invalid as plug-in options are not available.
• When a communication line error occurs, the setting of Pr.501 Communication error occurrence count display
increases by one.
• The cumulative count of communication error occurrences is counted from 0 to 65535. When the count exceeds 65535,
the displayed value is cleared and the counting starts over from 0 again.

Count timing depending on Normal Error Normal Error

communication line status
Incremented by 1 Incremented by 1

286 5. Common Settings

 NOTE
• Communication error count is temporarily stored in the RAM memory. The error count is stored in EEPROM only once per 1
hour. If power reset or inverter reset is performed, Pr.501 setting will be the one that is last stored to EEPROM depending on
the reset timing.

2
 Error reset operation selection at inverter fault (Pr.349)
• An error reset command from a communication option can be invalidated in the External operation mode or the PU
operation mode. 3
Pr.349 setting Description
0 (initial value) Error reset is enabled independently of operation mode.
1 Error reset is enabled in the Network operation mode. 4
 Operation mode switching and communication startup mode (Pr.79,
Pr.340) 5
• Check the following before switching the operation mode.
The inverter is at a stop.
Both the STF and STR signals are off. 6
The Pr.79 Operation mode selection setting is correct. (Check the setting on the operation panel of the inverter.) (Refer
to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
• The operation mode at power ON and at restoration from instantaneous power failure can be selected. Set a value other 7
than "0" in Pr.340 Communication startup mode selection to select the Network operation mode. (Refer to the FR-E800
Instruction Manual (Function).)
• After the inverter starts up in the Network operation mode, parameter write can be commanded via the network. 8
NOTE
• The changed value in Pr.340 is applied after the next power-ON or inverter reset.
• The Pr.340 setting can be changed on the operation panel in any operation mode. 9
• When setting a value other than "0" in Pr.340, make sure that the communication settings of the inverter are correct.

10

5. Common Settings
287
 MEMO

288 5. Common Settings

 CHAPTER 6
CHAPTER 6 Appendix

6.1 How to check specification changes.....................................................................................................................290

289
 6 Appendix
Appendix provides the reference information for use of this product.
Refer to the information as required.

6.1 How to check specification changes

Check the SERIAL number indicated on the inverter rating plate or packaging. For how to read the SERIAL number, refer to
page 9.
The inverter firmware can be updated by using Firmware Update Tool of FR Configurator2. The functions added due to
specification changes are available.
For details on firmware update, refer to the FR Configurator2 Instruction Manual.

6.1.1 Details of specification changes

 Number of connectable units on the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Number of connectable units SERIAL
Master: 1
□□ 204 ○○○○○○ or earlier
Remote: up to 16 stations (16 stations × 1 group)
Master: 1
□□ 205 ○○○○○○ or later
Remote: up to 64 stations (16 stations × 4 groups)

 Functions available for the inverters manufactured in May 2020 or later

• Firmware version: 1 or later
Item Details
Mitsubishi Electric geared motor GM-[]
Plug-in option FR-A8ND E kit, FR-A8NP E-kit
Stand-alone option Parameter unit (FR-PU07), LCD operation panel (FR-LU08)
Added parameters Pr.1499, P.E107 (Pr.75)
• Setting value "13" added for Pr.52, Pr.54, Pr.158, Pr.774 to Pr.776, Pr.992, Pr.1027 to
Pr.1034
Changed parameter setting range • Setting values "1800 and 1803" added for Pr.71 and Pr.450 (for 200/400 V class only)
• Setting values "10000 to 10003, and 10014 to 10017" added for Pr.75 (for the safety
communication model only)

290 6. Appendix
6.1 How to check specification changes
 Functions available for the inverters manufactured in August 2020 or
later
1
• Firmware version: 2 or later
Item Details 2
The SF-V5RU 1.5 to 5.5 kW motors can be driven by the FR-E820-0110(2.2K) to 0330(7.5K)
Mitsubishi Electric Vector control
inverters.
dedicated motor (SF-V5RU (1500 r/min
The SF-V5RUH 1.5 to 5.5 kW motors can be driven by the FR-E840-0060(2.2K) to 0170(7.5K)
series))
inverters. 3
Mitsubishi Electric high-performance
SF-PR-SC
energy-saving motor with encoder
Mitsubishi Electric inverter-driven geared
motor for encoder feedback control
GM-DZ, GM-DP
4
Plug-in option FR-A8AP E kit
Access to the parameters, monitor data, and terminals is available.
Inverter Configuration Object (64h)
EtherNet/IP communication specifications • Inverter Parameters (12288 to 16383) 5
• Monitor Data (16384 to 20479)
• Inverter Control Parameters (20480 to 24575)
Access to the parameters, monitor data, and terminals is available.
PROFINET communication specifications
• Inverter Parameters (12288 to 16383) 6
• Monitor Data (16384 to 20479)
• Inverter Control Parameters (20480 to 24575)
Pr.284, Pr.359, Pr.367, Pr.368, Pr.369, Pr.376, Pr.422, Pr.552, Pr.600 to Pr.604, Pr.607,
Added parameters Pr.608, Pr.690, Pr.692 to Pr.696, Pr.802, Pr.823, Pr.828, Pr.833, Pr.840 to Pr.848, Pr.854, 7
Pr.873, Pr.877 to Pr.881, P.A107 (Pr.285)
• Setting value "8888" added for Pr.11
• Setting values "19 and 35" added for Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, Pr.992, and Pr.1027 to Pr.1034
• Setting values "30 and 33" added for Pr.71 and Pr.450 8
• Setting values "13, 23, 42, 43, and 74" added for Pr.178 to Pr.189
Changed parameter setting range • Setting values "30 to 33, and 130 to 133" added for Pr.190 to Pr.196, and Pr.313 to Pr.319
• Setting values "30 to 33" added for Pr.320 to Pr.322
•
•
Setting values "0 to 2, and 9" added for Pr.800
Setting value "2" added for Pr.850
9
• Setting value "6" added for Pr.858
• Signal loss detection (E.ECT)
Added faults
• Brake sequence fault (E.MB1 to E.MB3)
10

6. Appendix
6.1 How to check specification changes
291
  Functions available for the inverters manufactured in January 2021 or
later
• Firmware version: 3 or later
Item Details Related manuals
Position control (Vector control) is supported for induction motors.
• Pr.420, Pr.421, Pr.423, Pr.425 to Pr.427, Pr.430, Pr.446, Pr.464 to Pr.478, Pr.510,
Pr.511, Pr.538, Pr.698, Pr.1222, Pr.1223, Pr.1225 to Pr.1227, Pr.1229 to Pr.1231,
Pr.1233 to Pr.1235, Pr.1237 to Pr.1239, Pr.1241 to Pr.1243, Pr.1245 to Pr.1247,
Pr.1249, Pr.1282, Pr.1283, Pr.1285, Pr.1286, Pr.1289, Pr.1290, Pr.1292 to Pr.1297
Position control is available.
• Setting values "3 to 5" added for Pr.800
Signals for position control can be assigned to I/O terminals.
• Setting values "76, and 87 to 89" added for Pr.178 to Pr.189 Connection/
• Setting values "24, 36, 38, 56, 60 to 63, 84, 124, 136, 138, 156, 160 to 163, and 184" Function/
Position control (Vector control)
added for Pr.190 to Pr.196 and Pr.313 to Pr.319 Communication/
• Setting values "24, 36, 38, 56, 60 to 63, and 84" added for Pr.320 to Pr.322 Maintenance
Monitoring during position control is available (multifunction monitor).
• Setting values "26 to 31, and 65" added for Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, and Pr.992
• Setting value "65" added for Pr.54 and Pr.158
• Setting values "65, 222 to 227, and 229" added for Pr.1027 to Pr.1034
The following warnings are added: LP (Stroke limit warning), HP1 (Home position
return setting error), and HP2 (Home position return uncompleted)
The following faults are added: E.OD (Excessive position fault) and E.OA (acceleration
error).
CC-Link IE TSN communication User defined cyclic communication is supported. Function/
specifications • Setting values "38 and 138" of Pr.544 are available for remote registers. Communication
User defined cyclic communication is supported.
EtherNet/IP communication
• "Configurable" is added for the connections of Class 1 communication (I/O Message Communication
specifications
communication) (Instances 100 and 150).
PROFINET communication User defined cyclic communication is supported.
Communication
specifications • Telegram 102 is added for Process Data (Cyclic Data Exchange).
MODBUS/TCP communication CiA402 drive profile (24642 to 24644, 24646, 24648, 24649, and 26623) is added for
Communication
specifications MODBUS registers.
Motor overheat protection by the motor's built-in PTC thermistor is supported.
• Pr.561 and Pr.1016 are added. Connection/
PTC thermistor • Setting value "64" of Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, Pr.992, Pr.1027 to Pr.1034 is available Function/
(multifunction monitor). Maintenance
• E.PTC (PTC thermistor operation) is added.
Inverter parameters and the data used in the PLC function of inverter can be backed
Communication/
Backup/restore function up and restored.
Maintenance
• RD (Backup in progress) and WR (Restoration in progress) indications are added.
Increased magnetic excitation Added functions
Function
deceleration • Pr.660 to Pr.662 are added.
Optimum excitation control The control can be enabled under Advanced magnetic flux vector control. Function
PLC Function
PLC function The structured text (ST) language is supported, and jump commands are supported. Programming
Manual
Connection/
200 V class: 11K to 22K are added. Function/
Capacity
400 V class: 11K to 22K are added. Communication/
Maintenance
Pr.375 added
Function/
Parameters User Defined Cyclic Communication Input/Output Mapping parameters (Pr.1318 to
Communication
Pr.1343) added

292 6. Appendix
6.1 How to check specification changes
 Functions available for the inverters manufactured in May 2021 or later
• Firmware version: 5 or later
1
Item Details Related manuals
Applied motor setting
• Setting values "540 and 1140" (200 V class) added for Pr.71 and Pr.450 2
Connection/
PM motor (MM-GKR 0.4kW and Parameter initial setting
Function/
0.75kW, and EM-A 5.5kW and • Setting values "3024, 3044, 3124, and 3144" (200 V class) added for Pr.998
Communication/
7.5kW) Position control (Vector control) is supported for PM motors (MM-GKR and EM-A).
Control mode setting
Maintenance 3
• Setting values "13 and 14" added for Pr.451 and Pr.800
Added parameters
• Pr.350 to Pr.358, Pr.361 to Pr.366, Pr.393, Pr.396 to Pr.399
Setting values
4
• Setting value "22" added for Pr.52
• Setting value "22" added for Pr.178 to Pr.189 Function/
Orientation control Communication/
• Setting values "27, 28, 127, and 128" added for Pr.190 to Pr.196
• Setting values "27, 28, 127, and 128" added for Pr.313 to Pr.319 Maintenance 5
• Setting values "27 and 28" added for Pr.320 to Pr.322
• Setting value "22" added for Pr.774 to Pr.776
• Setting value "22" added for Pr.992
• Setting value "22" added for Pr.1027 to Pr.1034 6
The FR-E800-EPC models are added. Connection/
EtherCAT communication Function/
specifications Added parameters Communication/
• Pr.1305
Maintenance 7
Added parameters
• Pr.136, Pr.139, Pr.514, Pr.515, Pr.523, Pr.524, and Pr.1013
Setting values
• Setting value "68" added for Pr.52 8
• Setting value "84" added for Pr.178 to Pr.189
Connection/
Emergency drive (except for the • Setting values "18, 19, 65, 66, 165, and 166" added for Pr.190 to Pr.196
Function/
E800-SCE inverters) • Setting values "18, 19, 65, 66, 165, and 166" added for Pr.313 to Pr.319
• Setting values "18, 19, 65, and 66" added for Pr.320 to Pr.322
Maintenance
9
• Setting value "68" added for Pr.774 to Pr.776
• Setting value "68" added for Pr.992
• Setting value "68" added for Pr.1027 to Pr.1034
ED (Emergency drive) warning added 10
Simple positioning using CiA402 drive profile
Added parameters
• Pr.1220 added
Setting values
• Setting values added for Pr.1320 to Pr.1329
[E800-(SC)EPA][E800-(SC)EPB] "24672, 24689, 24698, 24703, 24705, 24707,
24708, 24719, 24721, and 24728 to 24730"
[E800-EPC] "12288 to 13787, 20488, 20489, 24642, 24646, 24648 to 24650, 24672,
24677 to 24680, 24689, 24698, 24702, 24703, 24705, 24707 to 24709, 24719,
24721, 24728 to 24730, 24831, and 9999"
Ethernet communication • Setting values added for Pr.1330 to Pr.1343
[E800-(SC)EPA][E800-(SC)EPB] "20992, 24639, 24643, 24644, 24673 to 24676, Communication
specifications
24692, 24695, 24820, 24826, 24828, and 25858"
[E800-EPC] "12288 to 13787, 16384 to 16483, 20488, 20489, 20981 to 20990,
20992, 24639, 24643, 24644, 24673 to 24676, 24692, 24695, 24820, 24826, 24828,
25858, and 9999"
User defined cyclic communication specifications
Added parameters
• Pr.1389 to Pr.1398
Ethernet relay operation at reset selection
Added parameter
• Pr.1386
Parameters added for the second functions
Parameters Function
• Pr.1298 and Pr.1299

6. Appendix
6.1 How to check specification changes
293
  Functions available for the inverters manufactured in September 2021 or
later
• Firmware version: 6 or later
Item Details Related manuals
Added parameters
• Pr.726 and Pr.727
Setting values
• Setting values "81, 82, and 84 to 86" added for Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, and Pr.1027
BACnet MS/TP communication to Pr.1034 Function/
specifications • Setting values "81 to 86" added for Pr.992 Communication
• Setting value "85" added for Pr.54
• Setting value "86" added for Pr.158
• Setting values "82 and 182" added for Pr.190 and Pr.191
• Setting value "2" added for Pr.549

 Functions available for the inverters manufactured in December 2021 or

later
• Firmware version: 7 or later
Item Details Related manuals
Added parameters
• Pr.635, Pr.636, and Pr.638
Setting values
Cumulative pulse monitoring Function
• Setting values "71 and 72" added for Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, Pr.992, and Pr.1027
to Pr.1034
• Setting value "52" added for Pr.178 to Pr.189
Plug-in option FR-E8DS E kit is available.
Function/
Setting values
24 V external power supply Maintenance/
• Setting values "68 and 168" added for Pr.190 to Pr.196, and Pr.313 to Pr.319
operation FR-E8DS E Kit
• Setting value "68" added for Pr.320 to Pr.322
Instruction Manual
Operation panel indication "EV" (24 V external power supply operation) is added.
Added parameters
Internal storage device status • Pr.890 Function/
indication Maintenance
E.PE6 (Internal storage device fault) fault added
Connection/
MM-GKR motor capacity 0.1 kW and 0.2 kW are added.
Function
Environmental impact diagnosis
Cor (Corrosion warning) warning added Maintenance
function

 Functions available for the inverters manufactured in May 2022 or later

• Firmware version: 9 or later
Item Details Related manuals
200 V class: 0.75 kW to 3.7 kW are added. Connection/
EM-A motor capacity
400 V class: 3.7 kW and 5.5 kW are added. Function
Added parameters
Anti-sway control Function
• Pr.1072 to Pr.1079
CC-Link IE TSN communication Added parameters Function/
specifications • Pr.1210 Communication
EtherNet/IP communication Instance 21216 (Speed scale (numerator)) and instance 21217 (Speed scale
Communication
specifications (denominator)) are added for Inverter Configuration Object (64h)

 Functions available for the inverters manufactured in October 2022 or

later
• Firmware version: 11 or later
Item Details Related manuals
Connection/
Function/
Inverter capacity 100 V class: 0.1K to 0.75K are added.
Communication/
Maintenance

294 6. Appendix
6.1 How to check specification changes
 Functions available for the inverters manufactured in November 2022 or
later
1
• Firmware version: 11 or later
Item Details Related manuals 2
200 V class: 0.1 kW to 0.4 kW are added. Connection/
EM-A motor capacity
400 V class: 2.2 kW is added. Function
Added parameters
Position accuracy • Pr.979 to Pr.981
Function
3
compensation gain tuning Setting values
• Setting value "301" added for Pr.96
Setting values
Anti-sway control function
• Setting value "54" added for Pr.178 to Pr.189
Function
4
BACnet/IP and BACnet MS/TP
Network Port Object is added. Communication
communication specifications
PROFINET communication
specifications
E.SAF can be reset by bit 7 of Control word 1 (STW1). Communication 5
 Functions available for the inverters manufactured in July 2023 or later
• Firmware version: 12 or later
6
Item Details Related manuals
200 V class: 0.2 kW and 0.4 kW are added.
SF-PR motor capacity Function
400 V class: 0.2 kW and 0.4 kW are added.
Connection/
7
EM-A motor capacity 400 V class: 0.4 kW to 1.5 kW, and 7.5 kW are added.
Function
Added parameters

Position control function

• Pr.1095 to Pr.1097
Setting values
Function 8
• Setting values "21 and 22" added for Pr.538
Added link registers
SLMP communication
specifications
• W5807 and W5808 (inverter status)
• W5900 to W5969 (fault history)
Communication
9
FR-E8AXY E Kit
Plug-in option FR-E8AXY E kit
Instruction Manual
FR-E8TR
Instruction Manual
10
Control terminal option FR-E8TR and FR-E8TE7
FR-E8TE7
Instruction Manual

 Functions available for the inverters manufactured in October 2023 or

later
• Firmware version: 12 or later
Item Details Related manuals
400 V class: 0.75 kW to 3.7 kW
Added parameters
Connection/
• Pr.508
Function/
IP67 model BACnet/IP communication specifications
Communication/
• Binary input: object identifiers 100, 104, and 106 added. Maintenance
• Binary output: object identifiers 0, 4, and 6 added.
E.IAH (Abnormal internal temperature) fault added
Parameters Pr.197 added Function

 Functions available for firmware version 13 or later

Item Details Related manuals
Selection between resetting or
Setting values
not resetting during power Function
• Setting values "100 to 102" added for Pr.30
supply to main circuit

6. Appendix
6.1 How to check specification changes
295
 MEMO

296 6. Appendix
6.1 How to check specification changes
Warranty
When using this product, make sure to understand the warranty described below.

1. Warranty period and coverage

We will repair any failure or defect (hereinafter referred to as "failure") in our FA equipment (hereinafter referred to as the "Product")
arisen during warranty period at no charge due to causes for which we are responsible through the distributor from which you
purchased the Product or our service provider. However, we will charge the actual cost of dispatching our engineer for an on-site repair
work on request by customer in Japan or overseas countries. We are not responsible for any on-site readjustment and/or trial run that
may be required after a defective unit are repaired or replaced.
[Term]
The term of warranty for Product is twelve months after your purchase or delivery of the Product to a place designated by you or
eighteen months from the date of manufacture whichever comes first ("Warranty Period"). Warranty period for repaired Product cannot
exceed beyond the original warranty period before any repair work.
[Limitations]
(1) You are requested to conduct an initial failure diagnosis by yourself, as a general rule. It can also be carried out by us or our
service company upon your request and the actual cost will be charged.
However, it will not be charged if we are responsible for the cause of the failure.
(2) This limited warranty applies only when the condition, method, environment, etc. of use are in compliance with the terms and
conditions and instructions that are set forth in the instruction manual and user manual for the Product and the caution label affixed
to the Product.
(3) Even during the term of warranty, the repair cost will be charged on you in the following cases;
• a failure caused by your improper storing or handling, carelessness or negligence, etc., and a failure caused by your hardware or
software problem
• a failure caused by any alteration, etc. to the Product made on your side without our approval
• a failure which may be regarded as avoidable, if your equipment in which the Product is incorporated is equipped with a safety
device required by applicable laws and has any function or structure considered to be indispensable according to a common
sense in the industry
• a failure which may be regarded as avoidable if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual, etc. are duly maintained
and replaced
• any replacement of consumable parts (condenser, cooling fan, etc.)
• a failure caused by external factors such as inevitable accidents, including without limitation fire and abnormal fluctuation of
voltage, and acts of God, including without limitation earthquake, lightning and natural disasters
• a failure caused by using the emergency drive function
• a failure generated by an unforeseeable cause with a scientific technology that was not available at the time of the shipment of
the Product from our company
• any other failures which we are not responsible for or which you acknowledge we are not responsible for
2. Term of warranty after the stop of production
(1) We may accept the repair at charge for another seven (7) years after the production of the product is discontinued. The
announcement of the stop of production for each model can be seen in our Sales and Service, etc.
(2) Please note that the Product (including its spare parts) cannot be ordered after its stop of production.
3. Service in overseas
Our regional FA Center in overseas countries will accept the repair work of the Product; however, the terms and conditions of the
repair work may differ depending on each FA Center. Please ask your local FA center for details.
4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability
Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi Electric shall not be liable for compensation to:
(1) Damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi Electric.
(2) Loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi Electric products.
(3) Special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and compensation for
damages to products other than Mitsubishi Electric products.
(4) Replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.
5. Change of Product specifications
Specifications listed in our catalogs, manuals or technical documents may be changed without notice.
6. Application and use of the Product
(1) For the use of our product, its applications should be those that may not result in a serious damage even if any failure or
malfunction occurs in product, and a backup or fail-safe function should operate on an external system to product when any failure
or malfunction occurs.
(2) Our product is designed and manufactured as a general purpose product for use at general industries.
Therefore, applications substantially influential on the public interest for such as atomic power plants and other power plants of
electric power companies, and also which require a special quality assurance system, including applications for railway companies
and government or public offices are not recommended, and we assume no responsibility for any failure caused by these
applications when used.
In addition, applications which may be substantially influential to human lives or properties for such as airlines, medical treatments,
railway service, incineration and fuel systems, man-operated material handling equipment, entertainment machines, safety
machines, etc. are not recommended, and we assume no responsibility for any failure caused by these applications when used.
We will review the acceptability of the abovementioned applications, if you agree not to require a specific quality for a specific
application. Please contact us for consultation.

297
 Revisions
*The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
*
Revision date Manual number Revision
Dec. 2019 IB(NA)-0600871ENG-A First edition
Apr. 2020 IB(NA)-0600871ENG-B Added
• FR-E820S-0008(0.1K) to 0110(2.2K)(E/SCE)
• FR-E800-SCE (safety communication model)
Jun. 2020 IB(NA)-0600871ENG-C Added
• How to check specification changes
Jun. 2020 IB(NA)-0600871ENG-D Added
• Vector control
• Parameter unit (FR-PU07)
• EtherNet/IP: Inverter Configuration Object (64h)
• PROFINET: Inverter parameters, monitor data, and inverter control parameters
Nov. 2020 IB(NA)-0600871ENG-E Added
• FR-E820-0470(11K) to 0900(22K)(E)(SCE), FR-E840-0230(11K) to 0440(22K)(E)(SCE)
• Position control (Vector control)
• User defined cyclic communication (Pr.1318, Pr.1319, Pr.1320 to Pr.1343)
• MODBUS/TCP: CiA402 drive profile (speed control)
• Backup/restore
Apr. 2021 IB(NA)-0600871ENG-F Added
• FR-E800-EPC (EtherCAT)
• CC-Link IE TSN, MODBUS/TCP, EtherNet/IP, and PROFINET: CiA402 drive profile (torque control
and position control)
• User defined cyclic communication (Pr.1389 to Pr.1398)
Jul. 2021 IB(NA)-0600871ENG-G Added
• BACnet MS/TP
Mar. 2022 IB(NA)-0600871ENG-H Added
• CC-Link IE TSN communication specifications (Pr.1210)
• EtherNet/IP instance 21216 (Speed scale (numerator)) and instance 21217 (Speed scale
(denominator))
Aug. 2022 IB(NA)-0600871ENG-J Added
• FR-E810W-0008(0.1K) to 0050(0.75K)(E)(SCE)
Sep. 2022 IB(NA)-0600871ENG-K Added
• Network port for BACnet/IP and BACnet MS/TP
May 2023 IB(NA)-0600871ENG-L Added
• PROFINET GSDML file
• Link registers for SLMP
• FR-E8AXY, FR-E8TR, and FR-E8TE7
Jul. 2023 IB(NA)-0600871ENG-M Added
• Pr.197
• FR-E806 (IP67 model)

298 IB-0600871ENG-M
 INVERTER
INVERTER
FR-E800

FR-E800
Instruction Manual (Communication)
Compact, high functionality inverters

Instruction Manual (Communication)

FR-E800 Instruction
Model
Manual (Communication)

Model code 1A2-P93

HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN

IB(NA)-0600871ENG-M(2307)MEE Printed in Japan Specifications subject to change without notice.

M